Sie sind auf Seite 1von 764

SERVICE HANDBOOK

MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL SYSTEMS

e-STUDIO350/450 e-STUDIO352/452 e-STUDIO353/453

Model: DP-3520/3540/4520/4540 Publish Date: November 2003 File No. SHE030005Q0 R03092141302-TTEC Ver17_2007-11

Trademarks
The official name of Windows 95 is Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System. The official name of Windows 98 is Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System. The official name of Windows Me is Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System. The official name of Windows 2000 is Microsoft Windows 2000 Operating System. The official name of Windows XP is Microsoft Windows XP Operating System. Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Vista and the brand names and product names of other Microsoft products are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. Apple, AppleTalk, Macintosh, and Mac are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. NOVELL, NetWare, and NDS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. Molykote is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation. Other company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks of their respective companies.

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved Under the copyright laws, this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without prior written permission of TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION. No patent liability is assumed, however, with respect to the use of the information contained herein.

07/06

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING THE INSTALLATION AND SERVICE FOR e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453


The installation and service should be done by a qualified service technician.
1) Transportation / Installation - When transporting/installing the equipment, employ two persons and be sure to use the positions as indicated below. The equipment is quite heavy and weighs approximately 83kg (182.98 lb.): e-STUDIO350/450 / 86kg (189.59 lb.): e-STUDIO352/353/452/453 therefore pay fullattention when handling it.

Be sure not to hold the movable parts or units (e.g. the control panel, ADU or RADF) when transporting the equipment. Be sure to use a dedicated outlet with AC 110V/13.2A, 115V or 127V / 12A, 220-240V or 240V / 8A for its power source. The equipment must be grounded for safety. Never ground it to a gas pipe or a water pipe. Select a suitable place for installation. Avoid excessive heat, high humidity, dust, vibration and direct sunlight. Also provide proper ventilation as the equipment emits a slight amount of ozone. To insure adequate working space for the copying operation, keep a minimum clearance of 80 cm (32) on the left, 80 cm (32) on the right and 10 cm (4) in the rear. The socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible. Be sure to fix and plug in the power cable securely after the installation so that no one trips over it.

07/11

2) Service of Machines - Basically, be sure to turn the main switch off and unplug the power cord during service. - Be sure not to touch high-temperature sections such as the exposure lamp, the fuser unit, the damp heater and their periphery. - Be sure not to touch high-voltage sections such as the chargers, developer, IH control circuit, high-voltage transformer, exposure lamp control inverter, inverter for the LCD backlight and power supply unit. Especially, the board of these components should not be touched since the electric charge may remain in the capacitors, etc. on them even after the power is turned OFF. - Be sure not to touch rotating/operating sections such as gears, belts, pulleys, fan, etc. - Be careful when removing the covers since there might be the parts with very sharp edges underneath. - When servicing the machines with the power turned ON, be sure not to touch live sections and rotating/operating sections. Avoid exposure to laser radiation. - Use suitable measuring instruments and tools. - Avoid exposure to laser radiation during servicing. Avoid direct exposure to the beam.Do not insert tools, parts, etc. that are reflective into the path of the laser beam.Remove all watches, rings, bracelets, etc. that are reflective. - Unplug the power cable and clean the area around the prongs of the plug once a year or more. A fire may occur when dust lies on this area. - Be very careful to treat the touch panel gently and never hit it. Breaking the surface could cause malfunctions. 3) Main Service Parts for Safety - The breaker, door switch, fuse, thermostat, thermofuse, thermistor, batteries, IC-RAMs including lithium batteries, etc. are particularly important for safety. Be sure to handle/install them properly. If these parts are shorted circuit and/or made their functions out, they may burn down, for instance, and may result in fatal accidents. Do not allow a short circuit to occur. Do not use the parts not recommended by Toshiba TEC Corporation. 4) Cautionary Labels - During servicing, be sure to check the rating plate and the cautionary labels such as Unplug the power cord during service, Hot area, Laser warning label etc. to see if there is any dirt on their surface and whether they are properly stuck to the equipment. 5) Disposition of Consumable Parts, Packing Materials, Used batteries and IC-RAMs - Regarding the recovery and disposal of the equipment, supplies, consumable parts, packing materials, used batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries, follow the relevant local regulations or rules. 6) When parts are disassembled, reassembly is basically the reverse of disassembly unless otherwise noted in this manual or other related documents. Be careful not to reassemble small parts such as screws, washers, pins, E-rings, star washers, harnesses in the wrong places. 7) Basically, the machine should not be operated with any parts removed or disassembled. 8) Precautions Against Static Electricity - The PC board must be stored in an anti-electrostatic bag and handled carefully using a wristband, because the ICs on it may become damaged due to static electricity. Caution: Before using the wristband, pull out the power cord plug of the equipment and make sure that there are no uninsulated charged objects in the vicinity.

07/06

Caution: Dispose of used batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries according to this manual. Attention: Se dbarrasser de batteries et IC-RAMs uss y compris les batteries en lithium selon ce manuel. Vorsicht: Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien und IC-RAMs (inklusive der Lithium-Batterie) nach diesem Handbuch.

06/09

CONTENTS
e-STUDIO350/450

1. SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES .................................. 1-1


1.1 Specifications....................................................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 Accessories ......................................................................................................................... 1-4 1.3 Options ................................................................................................................................ 1-5 1.3.1 e-STUDIO350/450.................................................................................................... 1-5 1.3.2 e-STUDIO352/452.................................................................................................... 1-6 1.4 Supplies ............................................................................................................................... 1-8 1.5 System List .......................................................................................................................... 1-9 1.5.1 e-STUDIO350/450.................................................................................................... 1-9 1.5.2 e-STUDIO352/353/452/453.................................................................................... 1-10

2. ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE ........................................................ 2-1


2.1 Error Code List..................................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.1 Jam........................................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.2 Service call ............................................................................................................... 2-7 2.1.3 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function.............................................................. 2-13 2.1.4 Printer function error............................................................................................... 2-22 2.2 Self-diagnosis Modes ........................................................................................................ 2-25 2.2.1 Input check (Test mode 03) (e-STUDIO350/450)................................................... 2-27 2.2.2 Input check (Test mode 03) (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)..................................... 2-34 2.2.3 Output check (test mode 03) .................................................................................. 2-42 2.2.4 Test print mode (test mode 04) .............................................................................. 2-45 2.2.5 Adjustment mode (05) (e-STUDIO350/450) ........................................................... 2-46 2.2.6 Adjustment mode (05) (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453) ............................................. 2-64 2.2.7 Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO350/450).................................................................. 2-82 2.2.8 Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453).................................................. 2-144 2.2.9 Pixel counter......................................................................................................... 2-243 2.2.10 Classification List of Adjustment Mode (05) / Setting Mode (08) (e-STUDIO350/450) ............................................................................................. 2-251 2.2.11 Classification List of Adjustment Mode (05) / Setting Mode (08) (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453) ............................................................................... 2-258

3. ADJUSTMENT .............................................................................................................. 3-1


3.1 Adjustment of Auto-Toner Sensor ....................................................................................... 3-1 3.2 Image Dimensional Adjustment ........................................................................................... 3-3 3.2.1 General description .................................................................................................. 3-3 3.2.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller ................................................................. 3-5 3.2.3 Printer related adjustment ........................................................................................ 3-7 3.2.4 Scanner related adjustment ................................................................................... 3-12 3.3 Image Quality Adjustment (Copying Function) .................................................................. 3-21 3.3.1 Density adjustment ................................................................................................. 3-21 3.3.2 Gamma slope adjustment ...................................................................................... 3-22 3.3.3 Sharpness adjustment............................................................................................ 3-22 3.3.4 Setting range correction ......................................................................................... 3-23 3.3.5 Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak) ................................... 3-23 3.3.6 Adjustment of smudged/faint text ........................................................................... 3-24 3.3.7 Gamma balance adjustment < e-STUDIO 352/353/452/453 > .............................. 3-24 3.4 Image Quality Adjustment (Printing Function) ................................................................... 3-25 3.4.1 Adjustment of smudged/faint text ........................................................................... 3-25 3.4.2 Adjustment of image density .................................................................................. 3-25 3.5 Image Quality Adjustment (Scanning Function) ................................................................ 3-26 3.5.1 Density adjustment ................................................................................................. 3-26 3.5.2 Sharpness adjustment............................................................................................ 3-27
2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO350/450 CONTENTS

1 05/12

3.6

3.7

3.8 3.9 3.10

3.11

3.12

3.13

3.14

3.15 3.16

3.5.3 Setting range correction ......................................................................................... 3-28 3.5.4 Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak) ................................... 3-28 Adjustment of High-Voltage Transformer .......................................................................... 3-29 3.6.1 Adjustment ............................................................................................................. 3-29 3.6.2 Precautions ............................................................................................................ 3-38 Adjustment of the Scanner Section ................................................................................... 3-40 3.7.1 Carriages ................................................................................................................ 3-40 3.7.2 Lens unit ................................................................................................................. 3-45 Adjustment of the Paper Feeding System ......................................................................... 3-48 3.8.1 Sheet sideways deviation caused by paper feeding .............................................. 3-48 Adjustment of Developer Unit ............................................................................................ 3-49 3.9.1 Doctor-to-sleeve gap .............................................................................................. 3-49 Adjustment of the RADF (MR-3015).................................................................................. 3-52 3.10.1 Adjustment of RADF position ................................................................................. 3-52 3.10.2 Adjustment of RADF height .................................................................................... 3-57 3.10.3 Adjustment of skew ................................................................................................ 3-59 3.10.4 Automatic adjustment of sensors and initialization of EEPROM ............................ 3-60 3.10.5 Adjustment of aligning ............................................................................................ 3-61 3.10.6 Adjustment of aligning at reversing ........................................................................ 3-62 3.10.7 Adjustment of reverse solenoid .............................................................................. 3-63 3.10.8 Adjustment of RADF opening/closing switch.......................................................... 3-65 3.10.9 Adjustment of RADF opening/closing sensor ......................................................... 3-66 3.10.10Adjustment of tray volume ..................................................................................... 3-67 Adjustment of the RADF (MR-3018).................................................................................. 3-68 3.11.1 Adjustment of RADF Position ................................................................................. 3-68 3.11.2 Adjustment of RADF Height ................................................................................... 3-73 3.11.3 Adjustment of Skew................................................................................................ 3-75 3.11.4 Adjustment of the Leading Edge Position .............................................................. 3-78 3.11.5 Adjustment of Horizontal Position .......................................................................... 3-79 3.11.6 Adjustment of Copy Ratio....................................................................................... 3-81 3.11.7 Adjustment of RADF Opening/Closing Sensor....................................................... 3-82 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1022)................................................................................ 3-83 3.12.1 Adjusting the jogging plate width ............................................................................ 3-83 3.12.2 Adjusting the angle of the jogging plate ................................................................. 3-85 3.12.3 Adjusting the overlap of the sensor flag ................................................................. 3-86 3.12.4 Adjusting the tension of the stack processing motor belt ....................................... 3-87 3.12.5 Releasing the stack tray guide lever fixing plate .................................................... 3-89 3.12.6 Adjustment of the upper tray angle ........................................................................ 3-90 3.12.7 DIP switch functions ............................................................................................... 3-92 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1023/1024)....................................................................... 3-93 3.13.1 Adjusting the alignment position (Finisher unit)...................................................... 3-93 3.13.2 Adjusting the staple position (Finisher unit)............................................................ 3-94 3.13.3 Adjusting the folding position (Saddle stitcher unit)................................................ 3-96 3.13.4 Fine adjustment of binding/folding position (Saddle stitcher unit) .......................... 3-98 3.13.5 Sensor output adjustment (Puncher unit) ............................................................... 3-99 3.13.6 Registering the number of punch holes (Puncher unit) ........................................ 3-100 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1101).............................................................................. 3-101 3.14.1 Adjusting the Alignment Position .......................................................................... 3-101 3.14.2 Adjusting the Stapling Position ............................................................................. 3-103 3.14.3 B4-size recycled paper mode settings ................................................................. 3-105 3.14.4 Stopping Position Adjustment (MJ-6101:Puncher unit) ........................................ 3-107 Key Copy Counter (MU-8, MU-10) .................................................................................. 3-109 Adjustment of Dogleg ...................................................................................................... 3-111

4. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)............................................................................ 4-1


4.1 PM Support Mode................................................................................................................ 4-1
e-STUDIO350/450 CONTENTS 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 06/01

4.2

4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9

4.1.1 General description .................................................................................................. 4-1 4.1.2 Operational flow and operational screen .................................................................. 4-1 4.1.3 Work flow of parts replacement ................................................................................ 4-6 General Descriptions for PM Procedure (Maintenance Performed Every 120,000 Output Pages (e-STUDIO350/352/353) and 150,000 Output Pages (e-STUDIO450/452/453)) .................................................................................................... 4-7 Operational Items in Overhauling ........................................................................................ 4-8 Cleaning the Units which Have Processed 60,000 Output Pages (e-STUDIO350/352/353) and 75,000 Output Pages (e-STUDIO450/452/453)............................................................ 4-9 Preventive Maintenance Checklist..................................................................................... 4-10 PM KIT............................................................................................................................... 4-29 Jig List ............................................................................................................................... 4-30 Grease List ........................................................................................................................ 4-31 Precautions for Storing and Handling Supplies ................................................................. 4-32 4.9.1 Precautions for storing TOSHIBA supplies ............................................................ 4-32 4.9.2 Checking and cleaning of photoconductive drum................................................... 4-33 4.9.3 Checking and cleaning of drum cleaning blade...................................................... 4-34 4.9.4 Checking and cleaning of fuser roller and pressure roller ...................................... 4-34 4.9.5 Checking and replacing the cleaning roller ............................................................ 4-35

5. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................................................. 5-1


5.1 Diagnosis and Prescription for Each Error Code ................................................................. 5-1 5.1.1 Paper transport jam .................................................................................................. 5-1 5.1.2 Paper misfeeding ................................................................................................... 5-14 5.1.3 Cover open jam ...................................................................................................... 5-21 5.1.4 Transport jam (RADF) ............................................................................................ 5-26 5.1.5 Finisher jam ............................................................................................................ 5-32 5.1.6 Drive system related service call ............................................................................ 5-56 5.1.7 Paper feeding system related service call .............................................................. 5-57 5.1.8 Scanning system related service call ..................................................................... 5-63 5.1.9 Fuser unit related service call................................................................................. 5-65 5.1.10 Communication related service call........................................................................ 5-69 5.1.11 RADF related service call (MR-3015)..................................................................... 5-70 5.1.12 RADF related service call (MR-3018)..................................................................... 5-71 5.1.13 Laser optical unit related service call (MR-3018) ................................................... 5-71 5.1.14 Finisher related service call .................................................................................... 5-72 5.1.15 Service call for others ............................................................................................. 5-91 5.1.16 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function.............................................................. 5-94 5.1.17 Image control related service call ......................................................................... 5-108 5.2 Troubleshooting for the Image......................................................................................... 5-109 5.3 Replacement of PC Boards and HDD ............................................................................. 5-131 5.3.1 Replacing HDD..................................................................................................... 5-131 5.3.2 Replacing SYS board ........................................................................................... 5-134 5.3.3 Caution when Data overwrite kit (GP-1050/1060) is installed ............................. 5-136 5.3.4 HDD information display....................................................................................... 5-136 5.3.5 Replacing or clearing NVRAM.............................................................................. 5-139

6. FIRMWARE UPDATING ............................................................................................... 6-1


6.1 Firmware Updating with Download Jig (e-STUDIO350/450) ............................................... 6-3 6.1.1 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB) ............................................................................. 6-5 6.1.2 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16 MB) .......................................................................... 6-11 6.1.3 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) .............................. 6-20 6.1.4 K-PWA-DLM-320.................................................................................................... 6-22 6.2 Firmware Updating with Download Jig (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453) ............................... 6-34 6.2.1 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB) ........................................................................... 6-36 6.2.2 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) ............................... 6-50
2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO350/450 CONTENTS

3 07/06

6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6

6.2.3 K-PWA-DLM-320.................................................................................................... 6-52 Firmware Updating with FSMS (Field Service Manager) (e-STUDIO350/450) ................ 6-66 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device (e-STUDIO350/450).................................. 6-79 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453).................... 6-91 Appendix.......................................................................................................................... 6-115 6.6.1 e-STUDIO350/450................................................................................................ 6-115 6.6.2 e-STUDIO352/353/452/453.................................................................................. 6-116

7. POWER SUPPLY UNIT ................................................................................................ 7-1


7.1 Output Channel ................................................................................................................... 7-1 7.2 Fuse..................................................................................................................................... 7-3 7.3 Configuration of Power Supply Unit..................................................................................... 7-4

8.

REMOTE SERVICE...................................................................................................... 8-1


8.1 Auto Supply Order ............................................................................................................... 8-1 8.1.1 Outline ...................................................................................................................... 8-1 8.1.2 Setting Item .............................................................................................................. 8-2 8.1.3 Setting procedure ..................................................................................................... 8-4 8.1.4 Order Sheet Format ............................................................................................... 8-11 8.2 Service Notification ............................................................................................................ 8-13 8.2.1 Outline .................................................................................................................... 8-13 8.2.2 Setting (e-STUDIO350/450) ................................................................................... 8-13 8.2.3 Items to be notified (e-STUDIO350/450) ................................................................ 8-18 8.2.4 Setting (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453) ..................................................................... 8-23 8.2.5 Items to be notified (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453) .................................................. 8-29

9. DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453) .......... 9-1 10. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ........................................................... 10-1
10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 AC Wire Harness ............................................................................................................... 10-1 DC Wire Harness (e-STUDIO350/450)...................................................................... Appendix Connector Table (e-STUDIO350/450) ....................................................................... Appendix DC Wire Harness (e-STUDIO352/452)...................................................................... Appendix Connector Table (e-STUDIO352/452) ....................................................................... Appendix

e-STUDIO350/450 CONTENTS

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4 05/11

1.
1.1

SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES


Specifications
1

Values in [ ] are for e-STUDIO450/452/453 in case that the specification is different between e-STUDIO350/ 352/353 and e-STUDIO450/452/453.

Copy process Type Original table Accepted originals

Indirect electrophotographic process (dry) Desktop type (console type: when paper feed pedestal (PFP) and large capacity feeder (LCF) are installed) Fixed type (the left rear corner used as guide to place originals) Sheet, book and 3-dimensional object. The reversing automatic document feeder (RADF) only accepts paper which are not pasted or stapled. Carbon paper are not acceptable either. Maximum size: A3/LD
Single - sided originals Double - sided originals 50 to 105 g/m2 (13 lb. Bond to 28 lb. Bond) 50 to 127 (13 lb. Bond to 34 lb. Bond) g/m2

MR-3015 MR-3018

35 to 157 g/m2 50 to 157 g/m2 (9.3 lb. Bond to 58 lb. Cover) (13 lb. Bond to 58 lb. Cover)

Copy speed (Copies/min.)

e-STUDIO350/352/353
Paper size A4, LT, B5 A4-R, B5-R, A5-R, LT-R, ST-R B4, LG A3, LD Paper supply Bypass feed Size not Size specified specified 35 18 25 18 21 18 18 18

Drawer 35 25 21 18

PFP 35 25 21 18

LCF 35 -

e-STUDIO450/452/453
Paper size A4, LT, B5 A4-R, B5-R, A5-R, LT-R, ST-R B4, LG A3, LD Paper supply Bypass feed Size not Size specified specified 40 21 28 21 24 21 21 21

Drawer 45 28 24 21

PFP 45 28 24 21

LCF 45 -

* * *

means Not acceptable. The copy speed in the above table are available when originals are manually placed for single side, multiple copying. When the RADF is used, the copy speed of 35[45] sheets per minute is only available under the following conditions: Original/Mode: Single side original/A4/LT size. APS/automatic density are not selected. Number of sheets: 35[45] or more. Paper feeding: LCF Reproduction ratio: 100%
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1-1 07/11

System copy speed


Copy mode Single-sided originals Single-sided copies Single-sided originals Double-sided copies Double-sided originals Double-sided copies Double-sided originals Single-sided copies 1 set 3 sets 5 sets 1 set 3 sets 5 sets 1 set 3 sets 5 sets 1 set 3 sets 5 sets Sec. e-STUDIO350/352/353 20.85 57.95 91.20 27.42 62.18 97.55 55.47 126.21 196.93 48.22 117.44 184.96 e-STUDIO450/452/453 17.49 46.68 73.50 25.71 57.41 89.03 54.68 118.07 181.36 48.20 102.18 155.06

* * *

The system copy speed, including scanning time, is available when 10 sheets of A4/LT size original are set on RADF and one of the copy modes in the left table is selected. The period of time from pressing [START] to the paper exit completely out of the equipment based on the actually measured value. Upper drawer is selected and copying is at the non-sort mode. Automatic copy density, APS/AMS are turned off. Finisher is not installed. Copy paper
Drawer Size ADU A3 to A5-R LD to ST-R g/m2 PFP LCF A4, LT Bypass copy A3 to A5-R, LD to ST-R (Non-standard or userspecified sizes can be set.) 64 to 209 g/m2, 17 to 55 lb.(Continuous feeding) 50 to 209 g/m2, 13 to 55 lb. (Single paper feeding) Tracing paper, labels, OHP film (thickness: 80m or thicker) Remarks

Weight

64 to 105 17 to 28 lb.

Special paper

These special paper recommended by Toshiba Tec

First copy time ...................... e-STUDIO350/352/353: Approx. 3.9sec. or less e-STUDIO450/452/453: Approx. 3.9sec. or less (A4/LT, upper drawer, 100%, original placed manually) Warming-up time .................. Approx. 20 seconds (temperature: 20C) Multiple copying.................... Up to 999 copies; Key in set numbers Reproduction ratio ................ Actual ratio: 1000.5% Zooming: 25 to 400% in increments of 1% (25 to 200% when using RADF) Resolution/Gradation............ Scanning: 600 dpi x 600 dpi Printing: Equivalent to 2400 dpi x 600 dpi Gradation: 256 steps Eliminated portion................. Leading edges: 3.02.0 mm, Side/trailing edges: 2.02.0 mm (copy) Leading / trailing edges: 5.02.0 mm, Side edges: 5.02.0 mm (print)
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1-2 07/11

Paper feeding ....................... Automatic feeding: Standard drawers2 drawers (stack height 60.5 mm, equivalent to 550 sheets; 64 to 80 g/m2 (17 to 22 lb.)) PFPOption (One drawer or two: stack height 60.5 mm, equivalent to 550 sheets; 64 to 80 g/m2 (17 to 22 lb.)) LCFOption (Stack height 137.5 mm x 2: equivalent to 2500 sheets; 64 to 80 g/m2 (17 to 22 lb.)) Bypass feeding: (Stack height 11 mm: equivalent to 100 sheets; 64 to 80 g/m (17 to 22 lb.)) Capacity of originals in the reversing automatic document feeder (Option) .................................................. A3 to A5-R, LD to ST-R: 100 sheets / 80 g/m2 (Stack height 16 mm or less) Automatic duplexing unit ...... Stackless, Switchback type Toner supply ......................... Automatic toner density detection/supply Toner cartridge replacing method Density control...................... Automatic density mode and manual density mode selectable in 11 steps Weight .................................. 83 kg, 183 lb. (e-STUDIO350/450) 86 kg, 189.59 lb. (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453) Power requirements ............. AC 110 V (10%) / 13.2 A, 115 V (10%) or 127 V (10%) / 12 A 220-240 V (10%) or 240 V (10%) / 8 A Power consumption.............. 1.5 kW or less (100 V series), 17 kW or less (200 V series) The electric power is supplied to the RADF, Finisher, PFP and LCF through the equipment. Total counter......................... Electronical counter Dimensions of the equipment See the figure below W660 x D718 x H739 mm (e-STUDIO350/450) W660 x D758 x H739 mm (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453) When the tilt angle of the control panel is 45 degrees.
D

45

Fig. 1-1

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

1-3 07/11

1.2

Accessories
1 set 4 pcs. (except for MJD) 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. (for NAD) 1 set (for NAD and MJD) 1 pc. (for MJD) 1 pc. (for MJD) 1 pc. 1 pc. (except for NAD and MJD) 1 pc. (except for NAD and MJD) 1 pc. 1 pcs 4 pcs. 4 pcs. 1 pc. (for CND)

Unpacking/Setup instruction Operators manual Operator's manual pocket Power cable Warranty sheet Setup report PM sticker Drum (installed inside of the equipment) Toner bag Toner cartridge Developer material Operation panel stopper Blind seal Rubber plug CD-ROM Platen cover

Machine version NAD: North America MJD: Europe AUD: Australia ASD: Central and South America / Hong Kong / Asia TWD: Taiwan SAD Saudi Arabia JPD: Japan CND: China ASU: Asia KRD: Korea

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1-4 05/11

1.3
1.3.1

Options
e-STUDIO350/450
KA-3511PC/PC-C MR-3015 MY-1021/-C KD-1011/-C KD-1012 A4/LT/A4-C MJ-1022/-C MJ-1023/-C MJ-1024/-C MJ-6004 N/E/F/S *1 STAPLE-1600 (for MJ-1022) STAPLE-2000 (for MJ-1023/1024) STAPLE-600 (for MJ-1024) KN-3520/-C MJ-5004/-C MJ-5005/-C MU-8, MU-10 KK-3511 MF-3520 U/E GD-1150 NA/AU/EU/TW/C/AS GD-1160 NA/EU/TW/C GN-1010 GO-1030 GP-1030 GM-1010 GM-2010 GM-3010 MH-1700 GP-1050 S: Sweden

Platen cover Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) Drawer module Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP) Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) Finisher (Hanging type) Finisher (Console type) Finisher (Console saddle stitcher type) Hole punch unit Staple cartridge

Bridge kit Job Separator Offset Tray Key Copy Counter Work Tray Damp Heater Fax Board 2nd Line for Fax Board Wireless LAN Adapter PCI slot Scrambler board Printer Kit Printer/Scanner Kit Scanner upgrade Kit Desk Data overwrite kit * 1) N: North America E: Europe

F: France

Notes: 1. The bridge unit (KN-3520) is necessary for installation of the finisher (MJ-1022, MJ-1023 or MJ-1024). 2. The finisher (MJ-1023 or MJ-1024) is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit (MJ-6004N/E/F/S). 3. The PCI slot (GO-1030) is necessary for installation of the scrambler board (GP-1030).

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

1-5 05/11

1.3.2

e-STUDIO352/452
KA-3511PC MR-3018 MY-1021/-C KD-1011/-C KD-1012 LT/A4/A4-C MJ-1022/-C MJ-1101 MJ-1023/-C MJ-1024/-C MJ-6101 N/E/F/S MJ-6004 N/E/F/S STAPLE-1600 (for MJ-1022) STAPLE-2400 (for MJ-1101) STAPLE-2000 (for MJ-1023/1024) STAPLE-600 (for saddle stitcher of MJ-1024) KN-3520/-C MJ-5004/-C MJ-5005/-C KK-3511 MF-3520 U/E GD-1200 NA/EU/AU/AS/C/TW/KR GD-1160 NA/EU-N/C/TW GM-1060/1061 GM-2060/2061 GM-4060 GM-1120 GM-2120 GM-4120 GC-1230 GP-1040 GN-1041 GN-2010 GN-3010 GP-1060 GO-1060 MH-1700 GQ-1020

Platen cover Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) Drawer module Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP) Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) Finisher (Hanging type) : e-STUDIO352 only Finisher (Console type) Finisher (Console type) Finisher (Console saddle stitcher type) Hole punch unit (for MJ-1101) Hole punch unit (for MJ-1023/1024) Staple cartridge

Bridge kit Job Separator Offset Tray Work Tray Damp Heater Fax Board 2nd Line for Fax Board Printer Kit Printer/Scanner Kit Scanner Kit Printer ELK Printer/Scanner ELK Scanner ELK Memory Scrambler board Wireless LAN module Bluetooth module Antenna Data overwrite kit PCI slot Desk Harness kit for coin controller

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1-6 07/11

Notes: 1. The bridge kit (KN-3520) is necessary for installation of the finisher (MJ-1022, MJ-1023/1024 or MJ-1101). 2. The finisher (MJ-1023/1024) is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit (MJ-6004N/E/ F/S). The finisher (MJ-1101) is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit (MJ-6101N/E/ F/S). 3. The PCI slot (GO-1060) is necessary for the installation of the scrambler board (GP-1040). 4. The antenna (GN-3010) is necessary to enable the wireless LAN module (GN-1041) and Bluetooth module (GN-2010). 5. When the wireless LAN module (GN-1041) and the Bluetooth module (GN-2010) are installed, only 1 antenna (GN-3010) can be connected to each. 6. The Printer kit (GM-1060) or Printer/Scanner kit (GM-2060) does not have a function for printing an XPS file. 7. To enable an XPS file to be printed by the Printer kit (GM-1061) or Printer/Scanner kit (GM2061), the Memory (GC-1230) is required to be installed. 8. To enable an XPS file to be printed by the Printer ELK (GM-1120) or Printer/Scanner ELK (GM-2120), the Memory (GC-1230) is required to be installed.

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

1-7 07/11

1.4

Supplies
OD-3500 PS-TB3520 /E/N *2 PS-ZT3520 /T/D/C/E *3 (e-STUDIO350/352/450/452) PS-ZT3520C *3, PS-ZT4520 /E *3 (e-STUDIO353/453) D-3500

Drum Toner bag Toner cartridge Developer

* *

2) N: Asia 3) T: Taiwan

E: Europe D: Asia

NONE: North America C: China E: Europe

NONE: North America

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1-8 07/11

1.5

1.5.1

Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) MR-3015 Platen Cover KA-3511

Finisher (Hanging type) MJ-1022 Work Tray KK-3511

System List

e-STUDIO350/450

Staple Cartridge STAPLE-1600 Key Copy Counter MU-8, MU-10

Bridge Kit KN-3520 Hole Punch Unit MJ-6004 N/E/F/S Job Separator MJ-5004

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Staple Cartridge STAPLE-2000 Damp Heater MF-3520 U/E Data overwrite kit GP-1050 Printer Kit GM-1010 Printer/ Scanner Kit GM-2010 Wireless LAN Adapter GN-1010 Scanner Upgrade Kit GM-3010 2nd Line for FAX Board GD-1160 NA/EU/TW/C

1-9
Offset Tray MJ-5005 Scrambler Board GP-1030 FAX Board GD-1150 NA/AU/EU/ TW/C/AS PCI Slot GO-1030 Drawer Module MY-1021

Fig. 1-2

05/11

Finisher (Console type) MJ-1023

Finisher (Console saddle stitcher type) MJ-1024

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

Staple Cartridge STAPLE-600

Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP) KD-1011

Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) KD-1012 A4/LT

Desk MH-1700

1.5.2

Finisher (Hanging type) MJ-1022 Platen Cover KA-3511

Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) MR-3018

Staple Cartridge STAPLE-1600

Staple Cartridge STAPLE-2000

Work Tray KK-3511

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

Finisher (Console type) MJ-1023 Hole Punch Unit MJ-6004 N/E/F/S Bridge Kit KN-3520

Wireless LAN Module GN-1041 Bluetooth Module GN-2010 Antenna GN-3010 Printer Kit.ELK GM-1060/1061 GM-1120

e-STUDIO352/353/452/453

Job Separator MJ-5004

Fig. 1-3

1 - 10
Offset Tray MJ-5005 Damp Heater MF-3520 U/E Scrambler Board GP-1040 FAX Board GD-1200 NA/EU/AU/AS/ C/TW/KR 2nd Line for FAX Board GD-1160 NA/EU-N/TW/C Hole Punch Unit MJ-6101 N/E/F/S Drawer Module MY-1021

07/11

Finisher (Console saddle stitcher type) MJ-1024

PCI Slot GO-1060

Staple Cartridge STAPLE-600

Printer/ Scanner Kit.ELK GM-2060/2061 GM-2120 Scanner Kit.ELK GM-4060 GM-4120 Data Overwrite Kit GP-1060 Memory GC-1230

Staple Cartridge STAPLE-2400

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Finisher (Console type) MJ-1101

Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP) KD-1011

Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) KD-1012 A4/LT

Desk MH-1700

2.
2.1

ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE


Error Code List

One of the following error codes is displayed at the upper right of the screen while pressing the [CLEAR] button and the digital key [8] simultaneously when the CLEAR PAPER or CALLSERVICE symbol is blinking.

2.1.1

Jam
Classification Paper exit jam Contents Jam not reaching the exit sensor: The paper which has passed through the fuser unit does not reach the exit sensor. Stop jam at the exit sensor: The trailing edge of the paper does not pass the exit sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor. Power-ON jam: The paper is remaining on the paper transport path when power is turned ON. Incorrect paper size setting for upper drawer: The size of paper in the 1st drawer differs from size setting of the equipment. Incorrect paper size setting for lower drawer: The size of paper in the 2nd drawer differs from size setting of the equipment. Incorrect paper size setting for PFP upper drawer: The size of paper in the 3rd drawer differs from size setting of the equipment. Incorrect paper size setting for PFP lower drawer: The size of paper in the 4th drawer differs from size setting of the equipment. Incorrect paper size setting for bypass tray: The size of paper in the bypass tray differs from size setting of the equipment. HDD abnormality causes jam: Image data to be printed cannot be prepared. ADU misfeeding (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper which has passed through ADU does not reach the registration sensor during duplex printing. Bypass misfeeding (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper fed from the bypass tray does not reach the registration sensor. Upper drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from the upper drawer does not reach the upper drawer feed sensor. Lower drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from the lower drawer does not reach the lower drawer feed sensor. PFP upper drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from the PFP upper drawer does not reach the PFP upper drawer feed sensor. Troubleshooting P. 5-1

Error code E010

E020

P. 5-1

E030 E061

Other paper jam

P. 5-2 P. 5-2

E062

P. 5-2

E063

P. 5-2

E064

P. 5-2

E065

P. 5-2

E090 E110 Paper misfeeding

P. 5-3 P. 5-14

E120

P. 5-15

E130

P. 5-16

E140

P. 5-17

E150

P. 5-18

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2-1 06/06

Error code E160

Classification Paper misfeeding

Contents PFP lower drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the PFP lower drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from the PFP lower drawer does not reach the PFP lower drawer feed sensor. LCF misfeeding (Paper not reaching the LCF feed sensor): The paper fed from the LCF does not reach the LCF feed sensor. Upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has passed the upper drawer feed sensor. Lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has passed the upper drawer feed sensor. Lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the upper drawer feed sensor after it has passed the lower drawer feed sensor. PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has passed the upper drawer feed sensor. PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the upper drawer feed sensor after it has passed the lower drawer feed sensor. PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the lower drawer feed sensor after it has passed the PFP upper drawer feed sensor. PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has passed the upper drawer feed sensor. PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the upper drawer feed sensor after it has passed the PFP lower drawer feed sensor. PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the lower drawer feed sensor after it has passed the PFP upper drawer feed sensor. PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the PFP upper drawer feed sensor after it has passed the PFP lower drawer feed sensor. LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has passed the upper drawer feed sensor. LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the upper drawer feed sensor after it has passed the lower drawer feed sensor.

Troubleshooting P. 5-19

E190

P. 5-20

E200

Paper transport jam

P. 5-3

E210

P. 5-3

E220

P. 5-4

E300

P. 5-3

E310

P. 5-4

E320

P. 5-5

E330

P. 5-3

E340

P. 5-4

E350

P. 5-5

E360

P. 5-6

E3C0

P. 5-3

E3D0

P. 5-4

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-2

Error code E3E0

Classification Paper transport jam

Contents LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the lower drawer feed sensor after it has passed the LCF feed sensor. Jam access cover open jam: The jam access cover has opened during printing. Front cover open jam: The front cover has opened during printing. PFP side cover open jam: The PFP side cover has opened during printing. The ADU has opened during printing. Side cover open jam: The side cover has opened during printing. LCF side cover open jam: The LCF side cover has opened during printing. Bridge unit open jam: The bridge unit has opened during printing. Job separator cover open jam: The job separator cover has opened during printing. Offset tray cover open jam: The offset tray cover has opened during printing. Stop jam in the ADU: The paper does not reach the ADU exit sensor after it has passed the ADU entrance sensor. Jam not reaching the ADU entrance sensor: The paper does not reach the ADU entrance sensor after it is switchbacked in the exit section. Paper remaining jam on the transport path: The paper is remaining on the transport path when printing is finished (caused by a multiple paper feeding). Jam not reaching the original length sensor: The original fed from the original feeding tray does not reach the original length sensor. Jam not reaching the registration sensor: The original fed from the original feeding tray does not reach the registration sensor. Stop jam at the original length sensor: The trailing edge of the original does not pass the original length sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor. Feed signal reception jam: The feed signal is received even no original exists on the original feeding tray. Jam not reaching the read sensor: The original does not reach the read sensor after it has passed the registration sensor (when scanning obverse side) or the reverse sensor (when scanning reverse side). Jam not reaching the exit sensor (during scanning): The original which passed the read sensor does not reach the exit sensor when it is transported from the scanning section to exit section. Jam not reaching the reverse sensor (during scanning): The original which passed the read sensor does not reach the reverse sensor when it is transported from the scanning section to reverse section.

Troubleshooting P. 5-5

E400 E410 E420 E430 E440 E450 E480 E490 E491 E510

Cover open jam

P. 5-21 P. 5-21 P. 5-22 P. 5-22 P. 5-23 P. 5-23 P. 5-24 P. 5-24 P. 5-25 P. 5-7

Paper transport jam (ADU section)

E520

P. 5-8

E550

Other paper jam

P. 5-9

E711

RADF jam

P. 5-26

E712

P. 5-26

E713

P. 5-26

E714

P. 5-26

E721

P. 5-27

E722

P. 5-27

E723

P. 5-27

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2-3

Error code E724

Classification RADF jam

Contents Stop jam at the registration sensor: The trailing edge of the original does not pass the registration sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor. Stop jam at the read sensor: The trailing edge of the original does not pass the read sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor. Transport/exit signal reception jam: RADF receives the transport/exit reception signal from the equipment when no original is at the exposure waiting position. Stop jam at the exit sensor: The trailing edge of the original does not pass the exit sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor. Stop jam at the reverse sensor: The trailing edge of the original does not pass the reversal sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor. Jam not reaching the reverse sensor (during reverse feeding): The leading edge of the original does not reach the reverse sensor when original is fed from the reverse section. Jam not reaching the exit sensor (during reverse feeding): The original does not reach the exit sensor after it has passed the reverse sensor when the original is exited from the reverse section. Jam access cover open: The jam access cover has opened during RADF operation. RADF open jam: RADF has opened during RADF operation. Jam at the bridge unit transport sensor-1: The paper does not reach the bridge unit transport sensor-1 after it has passed the exit sensor. Stop jam at the bridge unit transport sensor-1: The trailing edge of the paper does not pass the bridge unit transport sensor-1 after its leading edge has reached the sensor. Jam at the bridge unit transport sensor-2: The trailing edge of the paper does not reach the bridge unit transport sensor-2 after its leading edge has reached the bridge unit transport sensor-1. Stop jam at the bridge unit transport sensor-2: The trailing edge of the paper does not reach the bridge unit transport sensor-2 after its leading edge has reached the bridge unit transport sensor-2. Jam not reaching the job separator transport switch: The paper has passed through the exit sensor does not reach the job separator transport switch. Stop jam at the job separator transport switch: The trailing edge of the paper does not pass the job separator transport switch. Jam not reaching the offset tray transport switch: The paper has passed through the exit sensor does not reach the offset tray transport switch. Stop jam at the offset tray transport switch: The trailing edge of the paper does not pass the offset tray transport switch.

Troubleshooting P. 5-28

E725

P. 5-28

E726

P. 5-28

E731

P. 5-29

E741

P. 5-29

E742

P. 5-30

E743

P. 5-30

E860 E870 E910 Finisher jam (Bridge unit)

P. 5-30 P. 5-31 P. 5-32

E920

P. 5-32

E930

P. 5-32

E940

P. 5-32

E950

Job separator jam

P. 5-10

E951

P. 5-10

E960

Offset tray jam

P. 5-10

E961

P. 5-10

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-4 06/01

Error code E9F0

Classification Finisher jam (Puncher unit) Finisher jam (Finisher unit)

Contents Punching jam: Punching is not performed properly. [MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)] [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)] Paper transport delay jam: The paper which has passed the bridge unit does not reach the inlet sensor. [MJ-1022/1023/1024/1101] Paper transport stop jam: (1) The paper does not pass through the inlet sensor. [MJ-1022/1023/1024] (2) The paper has passed through the inlet sensor but does not reach or pass the feed path sensor or processing tray sensor. [MJ-1023/1024] (3) The paper which has passed through the inlet sensor does not reach the transport sensor. [MJ1101] Paper size error jam: Paper does not reach the sensor because the paper is shorter than spec. [MJ1101] Power-ON jam: (1) Paper exists at the inlet sensor when power is turned ON. [MJ-1022/1023/1024] (2) Paper exists at the feed path sensor or processing tray sensor when power is turned ON. [MJ-1023/1024] Transport path paper remaining jam: The paper which has passed through the inlet sensor does not reach the transport sensor. [MJ-1101] Exit paper remaining jam: The paper is remaining on the finishing tray when the power is turned ON. [MJ-1101] Door open jam: (1) The finisher has been released from the equipment during printing. [MJ-1022] (2) The upper/front cover of the finisher unit or the upper/front door of the puncher unit has opened during printing. [MJ-1023/1024] (3) The front cover or stationary tray cover is opened during paper transport. [MJ-1101] Stapling jam: Stapling is not performed properly.[MJ-1022/1023/1024/1101] Early arrival jam: The inlet sensor detects the paper earlier than a specified timing. [MJ-1022/1023/ 1024/1101] Stack delivery jam: It cannot deliver the stack of paper on the intermediary process tray to the stack tray. [MJ-1022] Stack exit belt home position error: The stack exit belt is not at the home position. [MJ-1101] Stapling jam: Stapling is not performed properly. [MJ-1024] Door open jam: The delivery cover or the inlet cover has opened during printing [MJ-1024]. Power-ON jam: Paper exists at No.1 paper sensor, No. 2 paper sensor, No.3 paper sensor, vertical path paper sensor or delivery sensor when power is turned ON. [MJ-1024]

Troubleshooting P. 5-50

EA10

P. 5-33

EA20

P. 5-35

EA21

P. 5-36

EA30

P. 5-37

EA31

P. 5-38

EA32

P. 5-38

EA40

P. 5-39

EA50 EA60

P. 5-42 P. 5-44

EA70

P. 5-45

EA80 EA90 EAA0

Finisher jam (Saddle stitcher unit)

P. 5-47 P. 5-47 P. 5-48

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2-5 06/01

Error code EAB0

Classification Finisher jam (Saddle stitcher unit)

Contents Transport stop jam: The paper which passed through the inlet sensor does not reach or pass No.1 paper sensor, No. 2 paper sensor, No.3 paper sensor or delivery sensor. [MJ-1024] Transport delay jam: The paper which has reached the inlet sensor does not pass through the inlet sensor. [MJ-1024] Print end command time-out jam: The printing has not finished normally because of the communication error between the SYS board and LGC board at the end of printing. Receiving time time-out jam: The printing has been interrupted because of the communication error between the equipment and finisher when the paper is transported from the equipment to the finisher. Stack return jam: It cannot load the paper which passed through the delivery roller on the intermediary process tray. [MJ-1022] Ready time time-out jam: The equipment judges that the paper transport to the finisher is disabled because of the communication error between the equipment and finisher at the start of printing. Paper remaining on the transport path: The multiple feeding of preceding paper caused the misfeeding of upcoming paper. Paper remaining on the transport path: The multiple feeding of preceding paper caused the misfeeding of upcoming paper (redetection after no jam is detected at [EB50]). Skew adjustment motor (M1) home position detection abnormality: The Skew adjustment motor is not at the home position. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)] Sideways adjustment motor (M2) home position detection error: The Sideways adjustment motor is not at the home position. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)] Shutter home position error: The shutter is not at the home position. [MJ-1101] Front alignment plate home position error: The front alignment plate is not at the home position. [MJ1101] Rear alignment plate home position error: The rear alignment plate is not at the home position. [MJ1101] Paddle home position error: The paddle is not at the home position. [MJ-1101] Buffer tray home position error: The buffer tray is not at the home position. [MJ-1101]

Troubleshooting P. 5-48

EAC0

P. 5-49

EAD0

Other paper jam

P. 5-51

EAE0

Finisher jam

P. 5-51

EAF0

Finisher jam (Finisher unit) Finisher jam

P. 5-46

EB30

P. 5-51

EB50

Paper transport jam

P. 5-11

EB60

P. 5-13

ED10

Finisher (Puncher unit)

P. 5-52

ED11

P. 5-52

ED12 ED13

Finisher

P. 5-53 P. 5-53

ED14

P. 5-54

ED15 ED16

P. 5-54 P. 5-55

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-6 07/11

2.1.2

Service call
Classification Drive system related service call Paper feeding system related service call Contents Main motor abnormality: The main motor is not rotating normally. PFP motor abnormality: The PFP motor is not rotating normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the PFP) Upper drawer tray abnormality: The upper drawer tray motor is not rotating or the upper drawer tray is not moving normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the upper drawer) Lower drawer tray abnormality: The lower drawer tray motor is not rotating or the lower drawer tray is not moving normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the lower drawer) PFP upper drawer tray abnormality: The PFP upper drawer tray motor is not rotating or the PFP upper drawer tray is not moving normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the PFP upper drawer) PFP lower drawer tray abnormality: The PFP lower drawer tray motor is not rotating or the PFP lower drawer tray is not moving normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the PFP lower drawer) LCF tray motor abnormality: The LCF tray motor is not rotating or the LCF tray is not moving normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the LCF) LCF end fence motor abnormality: The LCF end fence motor is not rotating or the LCF end fence is not moving normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the LCF) LCF transport motor abnormality: The LCF transport motor is not rotating normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the LCF) Peak detection error: Lighting of the exposure lamp (white reference) is not detected when power is turned ON. Carriage home position sensor not turning OFF within a specified period of time: The carriage does not shift from its home position in a specified period of time. Carriage home position sensor not turning ON within a specified period of time: The carriage does not reach to its home position in a specified period of time. Thermistor or heater abnormality at power-ON: Abnormality of service call the thermistor is detected when power is turned ON or the temperature of the fuser roller does not rise in a specified period of time after power is turned ON. Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment: The temperature of the fuser roller has exceeded the range of control (in this case, the main switch turns OFF automatically) or does not even reach the range. Troubleshooting P. 5-56 P. 5-57

Error code C010 C040

2
P. 5-58

C130

C140

P. 5-58

C150

P. 5-59

C160

P. 5-59

C180

P. 5-60

C1A0

P. 5-61

C1B0

P. 5-62

C260

Scanning system related service call

P. 5-63

C270

P. 5-64

C280

P. 5-64

C410

Fuser unit related service call

P. 5-65

C440

P. 5-66

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2-7

Error code C450 C470

Classification Fuser unit related service call

Contents

Troubleshooting P. 5-66 P. 5-67

C480 C490

C550 (C780) C570 C580 C730 C740 C810 C820

C830

C940 C970 CA10 CA20 CB00 CB01 CB10 CB11

CB12

Thermistor abnormality during printing: Abnormality of the thermistor is detected during printing. IH initialization or IH power voltage abnormality: The AC input is not applied to the IH control circuit normally, or the input voltage is too high/low. Overheating of IGBT: The temperature of the IGBT rises abnormally. IH control circuit or IH coil abnormality: Abnormality is detected in IH control circuit or IH coil is broken/ shorted. Optional communicaRADF I/F error: Communication error has occurred tion related service call between the RADF and the scanner. Communication error between Engine-CPU and IPC board Communication error between IPC board and finisher RADF related EEPROM initialization error: EEPROM is not initialservice call ized normally when performing the code 05-356. Reverse sensor adjustment error Fan motor abnormality: The fan motor is not rotating normally. Read sensor adjustment error: The read sensor cannot be adjusted normally when performing the code 05-356. Original length sensor adjustment error: The original length sensor cannot be adjusted normally when performing the code 05-356. Circuit related service Engine-CPU abnormality call Process related serHigh-voltage transformer abnormality: Leakage of vice call the main charger is detected. Laser optical unit Polygonal motor abnormality: The polygonal motor related service call is not rotating normally. H-Sync detection error: H-Sync detection PC board cannot detect laser beams. Finisher related Finisher not connected: The finisher is not conservice call nected. Finisher communication error: Communication error has occurred between the equipment and finisher. Entrance motor abnormality: The entrance motor is not rotating normally. [MJ-1101] Buffer tray guide motor abnormality: The buffer tray guide motor is not rotating or the buffer tray guide is not moving normally. [MJ-1101] Buffer roller drive motor abnormality: The buffer roller drive motor is not rotating or the buffer roller is not moving normally. [MJ-1101]

P. 5-68 P. 5-68

P. 5-69 P. 5-69 P. 5-69 P. 5-70 P. 5-70 P. 5-70 P. 5-70

P. 5-70

P. 5-91 P. 5-91 P. 5-71 P. 5-71 P. 5-72 P. 5-72

P. 5-72

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-8 06/06

Error code CB20 CB30

Classification Finisher related service call

Contents Delivery motor abnormality: Delivery motor or delivery roller is not rotating normally. [MJ-1022] Tray 1/Tray 2 shift motor abnormality: Tray 1/Tray 2 shift motor is not rotating or delivery tray is not moving normally. [MJ-1023/1024] Movable tray shift motor abnormality: The movable tray shift motor is not rotating or the movable tray is not moving normally. [MJ-1101] Movable tray paper-full detection error: The actuator of the movable tray paper-full detection sensor does not move smoothly. [MJ-1101] Rear aligning plate motor abnormality: Rear aligning plate motor is not rotating or aligning plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1023/1024] Front alignment motor abnormality: The front alignment motor is not rotating or the front alignment plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1101] Staple motor abnormality: Staple motor is not rotating or stapler is not moving normally. [MJ-1022/ 1023/1024] Stapler home position error: The stapler home position sensor does not work. [MJ-1101] Stapler shift home position error: The stapler is not at the home position. [MJ-1101] Stapler unit shift motor abnormality: The stapler unit shift motor is not rotating or the stapler is not moving normally. [MJ-1023/1024/1101] Backup RAM data abnormality: (1) Abnormality of checksum value on finisher controller board is detected when the power is turned on. [MJ-1023/1024] (2) Abnormality of checksum value on punch driver board is detected when the power is turned on. [MJ1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)] RAM abnormality: Abnormality of checksum value on finisher controller PC board is detected when the power is turned on. [MJ-1101] Flash ROM abnormality: Abnormality of checksum value on finisher controller PC board is detected when the power is turned on. [MJ-1101] Paper pushing plate motor abnormality: Paper pushing plate motor is not rotating or paper pushing plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1024] Stitch motor (front) abnormality: Stitch motor (front) is not rotating or rotary cam is not moving normally. [MJ-1024] Stitch motor (rear) abnormality: Stitch motor (rear) is not rotating or rotary cam is not moving normally. [MJ-1024] Alignment motor abnormality: Alignment motor is not rotating or aligning plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1024] Guide motor abnormality: Guide motor is not rotating or guide is not moving normally. [MJ-1024] Paper folding motor abnormality: Paper folding motor or paper folding roller is not rotating normally. [MJ-1024]

Troubleshooting P. 5-72 P. 5-73

2
P. 5-74

CB31

CB40

P. 5-74

CB50

P. 5-75

CB51 CB60

P. 5-75 P. 5-76

CB80

P. 5-76

CB81

P. 5-77

CB90

P. 5-77

CBA0

P. 5-77

CBB0

P. 5-77

CBC0

P. 5-77

CBD0 CBE0

P. 5-78 P. 5-78

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2-9 06/01

Error code CBF0

Classification Finisher related service call

Contents Paper positioning plate motor abnormality: Paper positioning plate motor is not rotating or paper positioning plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1024] Sensor connector abnormality: Connector of guide home position sensor, paper pushing plate home position sensor or paper pushing plate top position sensor is disconnected. [MJ- 1024] Micro switch abnormality: With all covers closed, inlet door switch, delivery door switch or front cover switch is open. [MJ-1024] Communication error between finisher and saddle stitcher: Communication error between finisher controller board and saddle stitcher controller board [MJ-1023/1024] Stack processing motor abnormality: The stack processing motor is not rotating or the stack delivery belt is not moving normally. [MJ-1022] Stack transport motor abnormality: The stack transport motor is not rotating or the stack transport belt is not moving normally. [MJ-1101] Transport motor abnormality: The transport motor is not rotating or the stack transport roller -1 and -2 is not rotating normally. [MJ-1101] Swing motor abnormality: Swing motor is not rotating or swing unit is not moving normally. [MJ-1023/ 1024] Paper holder cam home position abnormality: The paper holder cam is not at the home position. [MJ1101] Horizontal registration motor abnormality: Horizontal registration motor is not rotating or puncher is not shifting normally. [MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ6004 is installed)] Sideways adjustment motor (M2) abnormality: Sideways adjustment motor is not rotating or puncher is not shifting normally. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed) Skew adjustment motor (M1) abnormality: Skew adjustment motor is not rotating or puncher is not shifting normally. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)] Punch motor abnormality: Punch motor is not rotating or puncher is not shifting normally. [MJ-1023/ 1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)] Punch motor (M3) home position detection error: Punch motor is not rotating or puncher is not shifting normally. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)] Punch ROM checksum error: Abnormality of checksum value on Hole punch controller PC board is detected when the power is turned on. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)] Punch RAM read/write error: Abnormality of checksum value on Hole punch controller PC board is detected when the power is turned on. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)]

Troubleshooting P. 5-78

CC00

P. 5-79

CC10

P. 5-79

CC20

P. 5-79

CC30

P. 5-80

CC31

P. 5-81

CC40

P. 5-81

CC41

P. 5-82

CC50

P. 5-82

CC51

P. 5-82

CC52

P. 5-83

CC60

P. 5-83

CC61

P. 5-84

CC71

P. 5-84

CC72

P. 5-84

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 10 06/01

Error code CC80

Classification Finisher related service call

Contents Front alignment motor abnormality: Front alignment motor is not rotating or front aligning plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1022] Rear alignment motor abnormality: The rear alignment motor is not rotating or the rear alignment plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1101] Upper stack tray lift motor abnormality: The upper stack tray lift motor is not rotating or the upper stack tray is not moving normally. [MJ-1022] Lower stack tray lift motor abnormality: The lower stack tray lift motor is not rotating or the lower stack tray is not moving normally. [MJ-1022] Rear jogging motor abnormality: The rear jogging motor is not rotating or the rear jogging plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1022] Stack ejection motor abnormality: Stack ejection motor or stack ejection roller is not rotating normally. [MJ-1023/1024] Paper trailing edge assist motor abnormality: Paper trailing edge assist motor is not rotating or paper trailing edge assist is not moving normally. [MJ1023/1024] Gear changing motor abnormality: Gear changing motor is not rotating normally. [MJ-1023/1024] Paddle motor abnormality: The paddle motor is not rotating or the paddle is not rotating normally. [MJ1101] Initialization error of the offset tray: The home position of the separator cannot be detected when the power is turned ON. Communication error between finisher unit and puncher unit: Communication error between finisher controller PC board and punch controller PC board [MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)] [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)] Temperature/humidity sensor abnormality: The output value of this sensor is out of a specified range. Undefined error code processing: If the engine of the equipment judges that a code (command) other than the defined error codes is sent from the finisher, it regards this as a CF10 error. [MJ-1022/1023/1024] Communication module SRAM writing failure. [MJ-1101] Communication error between System-CPU and Engine-CPU SRAM abnormality on the SYS board NVRAM abnormality on the SYS board SRAM and NVRAM abnormality on the SYS board HDD format error: HDD cannot be initialized normally. HDD unmounted: Connection of HDD cannot be detected. HDD start error: HDD cannot become Ready state. HDD transfer time-out: Reading/writing cannot be performed in the specified period of time.

Troubleshooting P. 5-85

CC90

P. 5-86

CCA0

P. 5-87

CCB0

P. 5-87

CCD0

P. 5-88

CCE0

P. 5-88

CCF0 CDE0

P. 5-88 P. 5-89

CDF0

Offset tray related service call Finisher related service call

P. 5-91

CE00

P. 5-89

CE50 CF10

Image control related service call Finisher related service call

P. 5-108 P. 5-90

F070 F090 F091 F092 F100 F101 F102 F103

Communication related service call Other service call

P. 5-69 P. 5-91 P. 5-92 P. 5-92 P. 5-92 P. 5-92 P. 5-92 P. 5-92

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 11 07/06

Error code F104 F105 F106 F107 F108 F110 F111 F120 F130 F200

Classification Other service call

Communication related service call Other service call

Contents HDD data error: Abnormality is detected in the data of HDD. HDD other error Point and Print partition damage /SHR partition damage /SHA partition damage Communication error between System-CPU and Scanner-CPU Scanner response abnormality Database abnormality: Database is not operating normally. Invalid MAC address Data overwrite Kit (GP-1050/1060) is taken off

Troubleshooting P. 5-92 P. 5-92 P. 5-93 P. 5-93 P. 5-93 P. 5-69 P. 5-69 P. 5-93 P. 5-93 P. 5-93

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 12 05/11

2.1.3

Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function

1) Internet FAX related error (When GM-1010/3010, GM-2010, GM-1060/4060, GM-2060, GM-1061/4060, GM-2061, GM-1120/ 4120, or GM-2120 is installed)
Error code 1C10 1C11 1C12 1C13 1C14 1C15 1C20 1C21 1C22 1C30 1C31 1C32 1C33 1C40 1C60 1C61 1C62 1C63 1C64 1C65 1C66 1C67 1C68 1C69 1C6A 1C6B 1C6C 1C6D 1C70 1C71 1C72 1C80 1C81 1C82 1CC0 1CC1 Classification System access abnormality Insufficient memory Message reception error Message transmission error Invalid parameter Exceeding file capacity System management module access abnormality Job control module access abnormality Job control module access abnormality Directory creation failure File creation failure File deletion failure File access failure Image conversion abnormality HDD full failure during processing Address Book reading failure Memory acquiring failure Terminal IP address unset Terminal mail address unset SMTP address unset Server time time-out error NIC time time-out error NIC access error SMTP server connection error HOST NAME error Terminal mail address error Destination mail address error System error SMTP client OFF SMTP authentication error POP before SMTP error Internet FAX transmission failure when processing E-mail job received Onramp Gateway transmission failure Internet FAX transmission failure when processing FAX job received Job canceling Power failure Troubleshooting P. 5-94 P. 5-94 P. 5-94 P. 5-94 P. 5-94 P. 5-94 P. 5-94 P. 5-94 P. 5-94 P. 5-95 P. 5-95 P. 5-94 P. 5-95 P. 5-95 P. 5-95 P. 5-95 P. 5-95 P. 5-95 P. 5-95 P. 5-95 P. 5-95 P. 5-95 P. 5-95 P. 5-96 P. 5-96 P. 5-96 P. 5-96 P. 5-95 P. 5-96 P. 5-96 P. 5-96 P. 5-96 P. 5-96 P. 5-96 P. 5-96

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 13 07/11

2) RFC related error (When GM-1010/3010, GM-2010, GM-1060/4060, GM-2060, GM-1061/4060, GM-2061, GM-1120/ 4120, or GM-2120 is installed)
Error code 2500 Message displayed in the TopAccess screen Syntax error, command unrecognized Contents HOST NAME error (RFC: 500) Destination mail address error (RFC: 500) Terminal mail address error (RFC: 500) HOST NAME error (RFC: 501) Destination mail address error (RFC: 501) Terminal mail address error (RFC: 501) Destination mail address error (RFC: 503) HOST NAME error (RFC: 504) Destination mail address error (RFC: 550) Destination mail address error (RFC: 551) Terminal/Destination mail address error (RFC: 552) Destination mail address error (RFC: 553) Troubleshooting P. 5-97

2501

Syntax error in parameters or arguments

P. 5-97

2503 2504 2550 2551 2552

Bad sequence of commands Command parameter not implemented Mailbox unavailable User not local Insufficient system storage

P. 5-97 P. 5-97 P. 5-97 P. 5-97 P. 5-97

2553

Mailbox name not allowed

P. 5-97

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 14 07/11

3) Electronic Filing related error


Error code 2B10 2B11 2B20 2B21 2B30 2B31 Message displayed in the TopAccess screen There was no applicable job. Contents Troubleshooting P. 5-98 P. 5-98 P. 5-98 P. 5-98 P. 5-98 P. 5-98

2B32

2B50 2B51 2B60 2B70

2B71 2B80 2B90 2BA0 2BA1

2BB0 2BB1 2BC0 2BC1 2BD0 2BE0 2BF0 2BF1 2BF2

No applicable job error in job control module Job status failed. JOB status abnormality Failed to access file. File library function error Message size exceeded limit or max- Exceeding file capacity imum size Insufficient disk space. Insufficient disk space in /SHR partition Failed to access Electronic Filing. Status of specified Electronic Filing or folder is undefined or being created/deleted Failed to print Electronic Filing docu- Electronic Filing printing failure: ment. Specified document can not be printed because of clients access (being edited, etc.). Failed to process image. Image library error Failed to process print image. List library error The folder was renamed. A folder of A folder with the same name exists in the same name already existed. the box. The document was renamed. A doc- A document with the same name ument of the same name already exists in the box or folder. existed. Document(s) expire(s) in a few days Documents expiring in a few days exist Hard Disk space for Electronic Filing Hard disk space in /SHR partition is nearly full. nearly full (90%). Insufficient Memory. Insufficient memory capacity Invalid Box password specified. Invalid Box password Incorrect paper size A Paper size not supported in the Electronic Filing function is being selected. Job canceled Job canceling Power failure occurred Power failure System fatal error. Fatal failure occurred Failed to acquire resource. System management module resource acquiring failure Power failure occurred during e-FilPower failure occurred during restoring restoring. ing of Electronic Filing Failed to get machine parameter. Machine parameter reading failure Maximum number of page range is Exceeding maximum number of reached. pages Maximum number of document Exceeding maximum number of docrange is reached. uments Maximum number of folder range is Exceeding maximum number of foldreached. ers

P. 5-98

P. 5-98 P. 5-98 -

P. 5-98 P. 5-99 P. 5-99

P. 5-99 P. 5-98 P. 5-98 P. 5-99 P. 5-99 P. 5-99 P. 5-99 P. 5-99

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 15 07/11

4) E-mail related error (When GM-1010/3010, GM-2010, GM-1060/4060, GM-2060, GM-1061/4060, GM-2061, GM-1120/ 4120, or GM-2120 is installed)
Error code 2C10 2C11 2C12 2C13 2C14 2C15 2C20 2C21 2C22 2C30 2C31 2C32 2C33 2C40 2C43 2C44 2C60 2C61 2C62 2C63 2C64 2C65 2C66 2C67 2C68 2C69 2C6A 2C6B 2C6C 2C6D 2C70 2C71 2C72 2C80 2C81 2CC0 2CC1 Message displayed in the TopAccess screen Illegal Job status Not enough memory Illegal Job status Illegal Job status Contents System access abnormality Insufficient memory Message reception error Message transmission error Troubleshooting P. 5-100 P. 5-100 P. 5-100 P. 5-100 P. 5-100 P. 5-100 P. 5-100 P. 5-100 P. 5-100 P. 5-100 P. 5-100 P. 5-100 P. 5-100 P. 5-100 P. 5-101 P. 5-101 P. 5-101 P. 5-101 P. 5-100 P. 5-101 P. 5-101 P. 5-101 P. 5-101 P. 5-101 P. 5-101 P. 5-101 P. 5-101 P. 5-102 P. 5-102 P. 5-101 P. 5-102 P. 5-102 P. 5-102 P. 5-102 P. 5-102 P. 5-102

Invalid parameter specified Invalid parameter Message size exceeded limit or max- Exceeding file capacity imum size Illegal Job status System management module access abnormality Illegal Job status Job control module access abnormality Illegal Job status Job control module access abnormality Failed to create directory Directory creation failure Failed to create file File creation failure Failed to delete file File deletion failure Failed to create file File access failure Failed to convert image file format Encryption error. Failed to create file. Creating the image file was not permitted. Failed to process your Job. Insufficient disk space. Failed to read AddressBook Not enough memory Invalid Domain Address Invalid Domain Address Failed to connect to SMTP server Failed to connect to SMTP server Failed to send E-Mail message Failed to send E-Mail message Failed to connect to SMTP server Failed to send E-Mail message Invalid address specified in From: field Invalid address specified in To: field Image conversion abnormality Encryption error Encryption PDF enforced mode error HDD full failure during processing Address Book reading failure Memory acquiring failure Terminal IP address unset Terminal mail address unset SMTP address unset Server time time-out error NIC time time-out error NIC access error SMTP server connection error HOST NAME error (No RFC error) Terminal mail address error Destination mail address error (No RFC error) System error SMTP client OFF SMTP authentication error POP before SMTP error

NIC system error SMTP service is not available Failed SMTP Authentication POP Before SMTP Authentication Failed Failed to process received E-mail job E-mail transmission failure when processing E-mail job received Failed to process received Fax job Process failure of FAX job received Job canceled Job canceling Power failure occurred Power failure

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 16 07/11

5) File sharing related error (When GM-1010/3010, GM-2010, GM-1060/4060, GM-2060, GM-1061/4060, GM-2061, GM-1120/ 4120, or GM-2120 is installed)
Error code 2D10 2D11 2D12 2D13 2D14 2D15 2D20 2D21 2D22 2D30 2D31 2D32 2D33 2D40 2D43 2D44 2D60 2D61 2D62 2D63 2D64 2D65 2D66 2D67 2D68 2DA0 2DA1 2DA2 2DA3 2DA4 2DA5 2DA6 2DA7 2DA8 2DC0 2DC1 Message displayed in the TopAccess screen Illegal Job status Not enough memory Illegal Job status Illegal Job status Invalid parameter specified There are too many documents in the folder. Failed in creating new document. Illegal Job status Illegal Job status Illegal Job status Failed to create directory Failed to create file Failed to delete file Failed to create file Failed to convert image file format Encryption error. Failed to create file. Creating the image file was not permitted. Failed to copy file Invalid parameter specified Failed to connect to network destination. Check destination path Specified network path is invalid. Check destination path Logon to file server failed. Check username and password There are too many documents in the folder. Failed in creating new document. Failed to process your Job. Insufficient disk space. FTP service is not available File Sharing service is not available Expired scan documents deleted from share folder. Expired Sent Fax documents deleted from shared folder. Expired Received Fax documents deleted from shared folder. Scanned documents in shared folder deleted upon users request. Sent Fax Documents in shared folder deleted upon users request. Received Fax Documents in shared folder deleted upon users request. Failed to delete file. Failed to acquire resource. The HDD is running out of capacity for the shared folder. Job canceled Power failure occurred Contents System access abnormality Insufficient memory Message reception error Message transmission error Invalid parameter Exceeding document number System management module access abnormality Job control module access abnormality Job control module access abnormality Directory creation failure File creation failure File deletion failure File access failure Image conversion abnormality Encryption error Encryption PDF enforced mode error File library access abnormality Invalid parameter File server connection error Invalid network path Login failure Exceeding documents in folder: Creating new document is failed. HDD full failure during processing FTP service not available File sharing service not available Periodical deletion of scanned documents completed properly. Periodical deletion of transmitted FAX documents completed properly. Periodical deletion of received FAX documents completed properly. Manual deletion of scanned documents completed properly. Manual deletion of transmitted FAX documents completed properly. Manual deletion of received FAX documents completed properly. File deletion failure Resource acquiring failure Hard disk space in /SHA partition is nearly full (90%). Job canceling Power failure Troubleshooting P. 5-103 P. 5-103 P. 5-103 P. 5-103 P. 5-103 P. 5-103 P. 5-103 P. 5-103 P. 5-103 P. 5-103 P. 5-103 P. 5-103 P. 5-103 P. 5-104 P. 5-104 P. 5-104 P. 5-103 P. 5-103 P. 5-104 P. 5-104 P. 5-104 P. 5-104 P. 5-104 P. 5-104 P. 5-104 P. 5-103 P. 5-103 P. 5-104

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 17 07/11

6) E-mail reception related error (When GM-1010/3010, GM-2010, GM-1060/4060, GM-2060, GM-1061/4060, GM-2061, GM-1120/ 4120, or GM-2120 is installed)
Error code 3A10 3A11 Message displayed in the TopAccess screen MIME Error has been detected in the received mail. MIME Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. MIME Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Whole partial mails were not reached by time-out. Partial Mail Error has been detected in the received mail. HDD Full Error has been occurred in this mail. HDD Full Error has been occurred in this mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. HDD Full Error has been occurred in this mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. HDD Full Warning has been occurred in this mail. HDD Full Warning has been occurred in this mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. HDD Full Warning has been occurred in this mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Receiving partial mail was aborted since the partial mail setting has been changed to Disable. Partial mail was received during the partial mail setting is disabled. Partial mail was received during the partial mail setting is disabled. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Partial mail was received during the partial mail setting is disabled. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Contents E-mail MIME error Troubleshooting P. 5-105 P. 5-105

3A12

P. 5-105

3A20 3A21

E-mail analysis error

P. 5-105 P. 5-105

3A22

P. 5-105

3A30 3A40 3A50 3A51

Partial mail time-out error Partial mail related error Insufficient HDD capacity error

P. 5-105 P. 5-105 P. 5-105 P. 5-105

3A52

P. 5-105

3A60 3A61

Warning of insufficient HDD capacity

P. 5-105 P. 5-105

3A62

P. 5-105

3A70

Warning of partial mail interruption

P. 5-105

3A80 3A81

Partial mail reception setting OFF

P. 5-105 P. 5-105

3A82

P. 5-105

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 18 07/11

Error code 3B10 3B11

3B12

3B20 3B21

3B22

3B30 3B31

3B32

3B40 3B41

3B42

3C10 3C11

3C12

3C13 3C20 3C21

3C22

Message displayed in the TopAccess screen Format Error has been detected in the received mail. Format Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Format Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Content-Type Error has been detected in the received mail. Content-Type Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Content-Type Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Charset Error has been detected in the received mail. Charset Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Charset Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Decode Error has been detected in the received mail. Decode Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Decode Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Tiff Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. Tiff Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Tiff Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Tiff Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. Tiff Compression Error has been detected in the received mail. Tiff Compression Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Tiff Compression Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator.

Contents E-mail format error

Troubleshooting P. 5-105 P. 5-105

P. 5-105

2
Content-Type error P. 5-105 P. 5-105

P. 5-105

Charset error

P. 5-105 P. 5-105

P. 5-105

E-mail decode error

P. 5-105 P. 5-105

P. 5-105

TIFF analysis error

P. 5-106 P. 5-106

P. 5-106

P. 5-106 TIFF compression error P. 5-106 P. 5-106

P. 5-106

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 19

Error code 3C30 3C31

3C32

3C40 3C41

3C42

3C50 3C51

3C52

3C60 3C61

3C62

3C70 3D10

3D20

3D30 3E10 3E20 3E30 3E40

Message displayed in the TopAccess screen Tiff Resolution Error has been detected in the received mail. Tiff Resolution Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Tiff Resolution Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Tiff Paper Size Error has been detected in the received mail. Tiff Paper Size Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Tiff Paper Size Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Offramp Destination Error has been detected in the received mail. Offramp Destination Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Offramp Destination Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Offramp Security Error has been detected in the received mail. Offramp Security Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Offramp Security Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Power Failure has been occurred in E-mail receiving. SMTP Destination Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail was deleted. Offramp Destination limitation Error has been detected in the received mail. Fax Board Error has been occurred in the received mail. POP3 Connection Error has been occurred in the received mail. POP3 Connection Timeout Error has been occurred in the received mail. POP3 Login Error has been occurred in the received mail. POP3 Login Error occurred in received mail.

Contents TIFF resolution error

Troubleshooting P. 5-106 P. 5-106

P. 5-106

TIFF paper size error

P. 5-106 P. 5-106

P. 5-106

Offramp destination error

P. 5-106 P. 5-106

P. 5-106

Offramp security error

P. 5-106 P. 5-106

P. 5-106

Power failure error Destination address error

P. 5-106 P. 5-106

Offramp destination limitation error

P. 5-106

FAX board error POP3 server connection error POP3 server connection time-out error POP3 login error POP3 login method error

P. 5-106 P. 5-107 P. 5-107 P. 5-107 P. 5-107

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 20 05/11

Error code 3F00 3F10 3F20 3F30 3F40

Message displayed in the TopAccess screen File I/O Error has been occurred in this mail. The mail could not be received until File I/O is recovered.

Contents File I/O error

Troubleshooting P. 5-107 P. 5-107 P. 5-107 P. 5-107 P. 5-107

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 21

2.1.4

Printer function error

Following codes are displayed at the end of the user name on the print job log screen (When GM-1010/3010, GM-2010, GM-1060/4060, GM-2060, GM-1061/4060, GM-2061, GM-1120/ 4120, or GM-2120 is installed)
Error code 4030 Contents No Printer Kit / Printer Kit function disabled: The Printer Kit (GM-1010) or the Printer/Scanner Kit (GM-2010) is not installed. Or network printing of an XPS file is performed without the Expansion Memory (GC-1230), or network printing is performed after the termination of a trial period. HDD full during print: Large quantity image data by private print or invalid network print are saved in HDD. Private-print-only error: Jobs other than Private print jobs cannot be performed. Printing data storing limitation error: Printing with its data being stored to the HDD temporarily (Proof print, Private print, Scheduled print, etc.) cannot be performed. e-Filing storing limitation error: Printing with its data being stored to the HDD (print and e-Filing, print to e-Filing, etc.) cannot be performed. Local file storing limitation error: Network FAX or Internet FAX cannot be sent when "Local" is selected for the destination of the file to save. User authentication error: The user who intended to print a document is not registered as a user. Print job cancellation: Print job (copy, list print, network print) is deleted from the print job screen. Print job power failure: The power of the equipment is turned OFF during print job (copy, list print, network print). Limit over error: The numbers of output pages have exceeded those specified with both of the department code and the user code at the same time. Limit over error: The number of output pages has exceeded the one specified with the user code. Limit over error: The number of output pages has exceeded the one specified with the department code. Troubleshooting P. 5-107

4031 4032 4033

P. 5-107 P. 5-107 P. 5-107

4034 4035 4036 A221 A222 A290 A291 A292

P. 5-107 P. 5-107 P. 5-107 P. 5-108 P. 5-108 P. 5-108 P. 5-108 P. 5-108

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 22 07/11

<<Error history: e-STUDIO350/450>> In the setting mode (08-253), the latest twenty groups of error data will be displayed. Display example 03 07 26 17 57 32 064 064 23621000000 EA10 Error code YY MM DD HH MM SS MMM NNN ABCDEFHIJLO 4 digits 12 digits (Year is indicated 3 digits 3 digits 11 digits with its last two digits.)
A Paper source 0: Not selected 1: Bypass feed 2: LCF 3: PFP upper drawer 4: Unused 5: PFP lower drawer6: Unused 7: Upper drawer 8: Lower drawer Paper size code 0: A5/ST 1: A5-R 2: ST-R 3: LT 4: A4 5: B5-R 6: LT-R 7: A4-R 8: OTHER/UNIV 9: B5A: FOLIO/COMP B: LG C: B4 D: LD E: A3 F: 13"LG G: Unused H: A6-R I: Post card J: 8.5SQK: Unused L: Unused M: 8K N: 16K-R O: 16K Z: Not selected Sort mode/staple mode 0: Non-sort/Non-staple 1: Group 2: Sort 7: Front staple8: Double staple 9: Rear staple A: Saddle stitch ADF mode 0: Unused 1: AUTO FEED (SADF) 2: STACK FEED APS/AMS mode 0: Not selected 1: APS 2: AMS Duplex mode 0: Not selected 1: Book 2: Double-sided/Single-sided 4: Double-sided/Duplex copying 8: Single-sided/Duplex copying Unused Image shift 0: Unused 1: Book 2: Left 4: Right Editing 0: Unused 1: Masking 2: Trimming 3: Mirror image 4: Negative/Positive Reversal Edge erase/Dual-page 0: Unused 1: Edge erase 2: Dual-page 3: Edge erase & Dual-page Unused Function 0: Unused 1: Copying 2: FAX/Internet FAX transmission 3: FAX/Internet FAX/E-mail reception printing 4: Unused 5: Printing/List print 6: Scan/E-mail transmission Primary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal) (Mx256)+(Mx16)+M Secondary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal) (Nx256)+(Nx16)+N Mode 2: Black

C D E F

G H I J K L

MMM NNN O

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 23 06/06

<<Error history: e-STUDIO352/353/452/453>> In the setting mode (08-253), the latest twenty groups of error data will be displayed. Display example 99999999 03 07 26 17 57 32 064 064 23621000000 EA10 Error code Total counter YY MM DD HH MM SS MMM NNN ABCDEFHIJLO 4 digits 8 digits 12 digits (Year is indicated 3 digits 3 digits 11 digits with its last two digits.)
A Paper source 0: Not selected 1: Bypass feed 2: LCF 3: Upper drawer 4: Lower drawer 5: PFP upper drawer 6: PFP lower drawer 7: Unused 8: Unused Paper size code 0: A5/ST 1: A5-R 2: ST-R 3: LT 4: A4 5: B5-R 6: LT-R 7: A4-R 8: OTHER/UNIV 9: B5A: FOLIO/COMP B: LG C: B4 D: LD E: A3 F: 13"LG G: Unused H: A6-R I: Post card J: 8.5SQK: Unused L: Unused M: 8K N: 16K-R O: 16K Z: Not selected Sort mode/staple mode 0: Non-sort/Non-staple 1: Group 2: Sort 7: Front staple8: Double staple 9: Rear staple A: Saddle stitch ADF mode 0: Unused 1: AUTO FEED (SADF) 2: STACK FEED APS/AMS mode 0: Not selected 1: APS 2: AMS Duplex mode 0: Not selected 1: Book 2: Double-sided/Single-sided 4: Double-sided/Duplex copying 8: Single-sided/Duplex copying Unused Image shift 0: Unused 1: Book 2: Left 4: Right Editing 0: Unused 1: Masking 2: Trimming 3: Mirror image 4: Negative/Positive Reversal Edge erase/Dual-page 0: Unused 1: Edge erase 2: Dual-page 3: Edge erase & Dual-page Unused Function 0: Unused 1: Copying 2: FAX/Internet FAX transmission 3: FAX/Internet FAX/E-mail reception printing 4: Unused 5: Printing/List print 6: Scan/E-mail transmission Primary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal) (Mx256)+(Mx16)+M Secondary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal) (Nx256)+(Nx16)+N Mode 2: Black

C D E F

G H I J K L

MMM NNN O

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 24 07/11

2.2

Self-diagnosis Modes
For start [0]+[1]+ [POWER] [0]+[3]+ [POWER] [0]+[4]+ [POWER] [0]+[5]+ [POWER] [0]+[8]+ [POWER] [9]+[START]+ [POWER] [6]+[START]+ [POWER] [8]+[9]+ [POWER] Contents All LEDs on the control panel are lit, and all the LCD pixels blink. Checks the status of input/output signals. Outputs the test patterns. Adjusts various items. Sets various items. Prints out the data lists of the codes 05 and 08, PM support mode and pixel counter. Clears each counter. Performs updating of the system firmware. For exit [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON Display 100% C A4 TEST MODE 100% P A4 TEST PRINT 100% A A4 TEST MODE 100% D TEST MODE 100% UA A4 LIST PRINT 100% K TEST MODE -

Mode Control panel check mode Test mode Test print mode Adjustment mode Setting mode List print mode PM support mode Firmware update mode

Notes: 1. To enter the desired mode, turn ON the power while two digital keys designated to each mode (e.g. [0] and [5]) are pressed simultaneously. 2. When the optional FAX unit is installed, Faxes received automatically during the self-diagnosis mode may not be printed out. Be sure to disconnect the modular code from the line connectors (LINE1, LINE2) of the equipment before starting the self-diagnosis mode. Also, be sure to finish the self-diagnosis mode by turning the power OFF and back ON before connecting the modular code. <Operation procedure> Control panel check mode (01):
[0][1] [POWER] LED lit/ LCD blinking [START] [START] (Button check) [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

Notes: 1. A mode can be canceled by [POWER] OFF/ON when the LED is lit and the LCD is blinking. 2. Button Check Buttons with LED (Press to turn OFF the LED.) Buttons without LED (Press to display the message on the control panel.) Button on touch panel (Press to display the screen on the control panel at power-ON.) Test mode (03): Refer to P. 2-27 "2.2.1 Input check (Test mode 03) (e-STUDIO350/450)"/ P. 2-34 "2.2.2 Input check (Test mode 03) (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)" and P. 2-42 "2.2.3 Output check (test mode 03)". Test print mode (04): Refer to P. 2-45 "2.2.4 Test print mode (test mode 04)"

Adjustment mode (05): Refer to P. 2-46 "2.2.5 Adjustment mode (05) (e-STUDIO350/450)"/ P. 2-64 "2.2.6 Adjustment mode (05) (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)"

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 25 07/11

Setting mode (08): Refer to P. 2-82 "2.2.7 Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO350/450)" P. 2-144 "2.2.8 Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)" List print mode (9S): The procedure varies depending on the code.
[START] [Digital keys] (Code) Key in the first 101: Adjustment mode (05) code to be printed 102: Setting mode (08) [START] [Digital keys] Key in the last code to be printed [START] List starts to be printed [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

[9][START] [POWER]

(Code) 103: PM support mode 104: Stored information of pixel counter (toner cartridge reference) 105: Stored information of pixel counter (service technician reference) 106: Error history

PM support mode (6S):


(Code) 1: Auto-toner adjustment 2: PM Support Screen [START] (Operation started) [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

[6][START] [POWER]

Firmware update mode (89): Refer to 6.FIRMWARE UPDATING


[POWER] ON Normal [0][1] Control panel check mode [0][3] [0][4] Test print mode [0][5] Adjustment mode [0][8] Setting mode [9][START] List print mode [6][START] PM support mode [8][9]

Warming up

Test mode

Firmware update mode

Ready

[POWER] OFF *1 To user

State transition diagram of self-diagnosis modes


Fig. 2-1

*1 Turn OFF the power after using the self-diagnosis modes, and leave the equipment to the user.

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 26 07/11

2.2.1

Input check (Test mode 03) (e-STUDIO350/450)

The status of each input signal can be checked by pressing the [FAX] button, and the digital keys in the test mode (03). <Operation procedure>
[0][3] [POWER] [START] [FAX]

2
[Digital keys] [CLEAR] (LCD ON) [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

Note: Initialization is performed before the equipment enters the test mode.
[0][5] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] Automatic ( adjustment ) ([FAX]) (Test copy) [POWER]OFF/ON (Exit)

*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]

Fig. 2-2 Example of display during input check

Items to be checked and the condition of the equipment when the buttons [A] to [H] are highlighted are listed in the following pages.

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 27 05/12

[FAX] button: OFF ([FAX] LED: OFF)


Digital key Button Items to check Contents Highlighted Normal disdisplay play e.g. A B C D E F G H A B C [2] D E F G H LCF connection Bypass unit connection Bypass paper sensor ADU connection ADU opening/closing switch ADU exit sensor ADU entrance sensor PFP upper drawer detection switch PFP upper drawer paper stock sensor PFP upper drawer feed sensor PFP connection PFP side cover opening/closing switch PFP upper drawer empty sensor PFP upper drawer tray-up sensor Not connected Not connected No paper Not connected ADU opened Paper present Paper present Drawer not installed Paper almost empty Paper present Not connected Cover opened No paper Tray at upper limit position Tray at bottom position Correct stacking Drawer not installed Paper almost empty Drawer not installed Paper almost empty Paper present Abnormal rotation No paper Tray at upper limit position e.g. Connected Connected Paper present Connected ADU closed No paper No paper Drawer present Paper present No paper Connected Cover closed Paper present Other than upper limit position Other than bottom position Incorrect stacking Drawer present Paper present Drawer present Paper present No paper Normal rotation Paper present Other than upper limit position

[1]

LCF tray bottom sensor

B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H

LCF standby side paper mis-stacking sensor LCF drawer detection switch LCF feed side paper stock sensor PFP lower drawer detection sensor PFP lower drawer paper stock sensor PFP lower drawer feed sensor PFP motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at output mode (03)) PFP lower drawer empty sensor PFP lower drawer tray-up sensor

[3]

[4]

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 28 05/12

Digital key

Button

Items to check

Contents Highlighted Normal disdisplay play e.g. e.g. Other than home position Other than stop position Paper present Cover opened Normal rotation Other than upper limit position Paper present No paper No paper Toner bag not full Paper present Other than upper limit position No paper Paper present Other than upper limit position -

A B C D E F

LCF end fence home position sensor LCF end fence stop position sensor LCF standby side empty sensor LCF side cover opening/closing switch LCF motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at output mode (03)) LCF tray-up sensor

[5]

Fence home position Fence stop position No paper Cover closed Abnormal rotation Tray at upper limit position No paper Paper present Paper present Toner bag full No paper Tray at upper limit position

[6]

G H A B C D E F G H

LCF feed sensor LCF feed side empty sensor Upper drawer feed sensor Toner bag full detection sensor-1 Upper drawer empty sensor Upper drawer tray-up sensor

[7]

A B C D E F G H

Lower drawer feed sensor Lower drawer empty sensor Lower drawer tray-up sensor

Paper present No paper Tray at upper limit position

A B C D E F [8] G H

Bypass feed paper width sensor-3 Bypass feed paper width sensor-2 Bypass feed paper width sensor-1 Bypass feed paper width sensor-0 Job Separetor upper stack sensor (When Job Separetor is installed) Offset Tray home position sensor (When Offset Tray is installed) Bridge unit transport cover opening/closing sensor (When bridge unit is installed) Job Separetor cover switch (When Job Separetor is installed) Offset Tray cover switch (When Offset Tray is installed)

Refer to table 1 Refer to table 1 Refer to table 1 Refer to table 1 Paper full Paper not full Separetor at home position Cover opened Cover opened Cover opened

Other than home position Cover closed Cover closed Cover closed

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 29 05/11

Digital key

Button

Items to check

Contents Highlighted Normal disdisplay play e.g. e.g. Drawer present Paper present Drawer present Paper present -

A B C D [9] E F G H A B C D [0] E F G H

Upper drawer detection switch Upper drawer paper stock sensor Lower drawer detection switch Lower drawer paper stock sensor -

Drawer not installed Paper almost empty Drawer not installed Paper almost empty -

Table 1. Relation between the status of the bypass paper width sensor and paper size (width).
3 0 1 1 1 0 1 Bypass paper width sensor 2 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 Paper-width size A3/LD A4-R/LT-R A5-R/ST-R Card size B4-R/LG B5-R

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 30 05/11

[FAX] button: ON ([FAX] LED: ON)


Digital key Button Items to check Contents Highlighted Normal disdisplay play e.g. A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G 24 V power supply IPC board connection Polygonal motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at Output Mode (03)) Toner cartridge switch Registration sensor Exit sensor Auto-toner sensor connection Front cover opening/closing switch Destination detection Side cover opening/closing switch Main motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at Output Mode (03)) Key copy counter connection Toner bag full detection sensor-2 Fuser unit connection Bridge unit transport sensor-2 (When bridge unit is installed) Bridge unit paper full detection sensor (When bridge unit is installed) Job Separator lower stack sensor (When Job Separator is installed) Offset Tray stack sensor (When Offset Tray is installed) Bridge unit transport sensor-1 (When bridge unit is installed) Job Separator feed sensor (When Job Separator is installed) Offset Tray feed sensor (When Offset Tray is installed) Bypass feed sensor High-voltage power supply abnormality (shutdown) detection Power ON Not connected Abnormal rotation OFF Paper present Paper present Not connected Cover opened Other than SAD Cover opened Abnormal rotation Not connected Toner bag full Fuser unit installed No paper Paper not full Paper full Paper full No paper Paper present Paper present No paper Normal e.g. Power OFF Connected Normal rotation ON No paper No paper Connected Cover closed SAD Cover closed Normal rotation Connected Toner bag not full Fuser unit not installed Paper present Paper full Paper not full Paper not full Paper present No paper No paper Paper present Abnormal

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

A B C D E F G H

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 31 05/11

Digital key

Button

Items to check

Contents Highlighted Normal disdisplay play e.g. e.g. Not connected Platen cove closed Other than home position Original present Original present Original present Original present Original present No original No original Cover closed RADF closed No original No original No original No original No original No original No original No original

[5]

A B C D E F G H A B C D E

RADF connection Platen sensor Carriage home position sensor APS sensor (APS-R) APS sensor (APS-C) APS sensor (APS-3) APS sensor (APS-2) APS sensor (APS-1) RADF tray sensor RADF empty sensor RADF jam access cover switch RADF opening/closing sensor RADF exit sensor RADF reverse sensor RADF read sensor RADF registration sensor RADF original length sensor RADF original width sensor-1 RADF original width sensor-2 RADF original width sensor-3

RADF connected Platen cove opened Carriage at home position No original No original No original No original No original Original present Original present Cover opened RADF opened Original present Original present Original present Original present Original present Original present Original present Original present

[6] F G H A B C D E F G H A B C D E [8] F G H

[7]

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 32 05/11

Digital key

Button

Items to check

Contents Highlighted Normal disdisplay play e.g. e.g.

A B C [9] D E F G H A B C [0] D E F G H

Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection1 Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection2 Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection3 Dongle (for Printer/Scanner kit (GM-2010)) Dongle (for Printer kit (GM-1010)) Dongle (for Scanner upgrade kit (GM-3010)) Dongles for other equipments/Other USB devices -

Refer to table 2 Refer to table 2 Refer to table 2 Connectable Connectable Connectable Connectable Not connectable Not connectable Not connectable Not connectable -

Table 2. Connecting status of additional options at inner area of the equipment


Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection-1 Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection-2 Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection-3 Bridge unit Normal display Job Separator Highlighting display Offset Tray Highlighting display

Highlighting display

Highlighting display

Normal display

Normal display

Normal display

Normal display

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 33 05/11

2.2.2

Input check (Test mode 03) (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)

The status of each input signal can be checked by pressing the [FAX] button, and the digital keys in the test mode (03). <Operation procedure>
[0][3] [POWER] [START] [FAX] [Digital keys] [CLEAR] (LCD ON) [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

Note: Initialization is performed before the equipment enters the test mode.
[0][5] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] Automatic ( adjustment ) ([FAX]) (Test copy) [POWER]OFF/ON (Exit)

*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]

Fig. 2-3 Example of display during input check

Items to be checked and the condition of the equipment when the buttons [A] to [H] are highlighted are listed in the following pages.

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 34 07/11

[FAX] button: OFF/ [COPY] button: OFF ([FAX] LED: OFF/ [COPY] LED: OFF)
Digital key Button Items to check Contents Highlighted Normal disdisplay play e.g. A B C D E F G H A B C [2] D E F G H LCF connection Bypass unit connection Bypass paper sensor ADU connection ADU opening/closing switch ADU exit sensor ADU entrance sensor PFP upper drawer detection switch PFP upper drawer paper stock sensor PFP upper drawer feed sensor PFP connection PFP side cover opening/closing switch PFP upper drawer empty sensor PFP upper drawer tray-up sensor Not connected Not connected No paper Not connected ADU opened Paper present Paper present Drawer not installed Paper almost empty Paper present Not connected Cover opened No paper Tray at upper limit position Tray at bottom position Correct stacking Drawer not installed Paper almost empty Drawer not installed Paper almost empty Paper present Abnormal rotation No paper Tray at upper limit position e.g. Connected Connected Paper present Connected ADU closed No paper No paper Drawer present Paper present No paper Connected Cover closed Paper present Other than upper limit position Other than bottom position Incorrect stacking Drawer present Paper present Drawer present Paper present No paper Normal rotation Paper present Other than upper limit position

[1]

LCF tray bottom sensor

B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H

LCF standby side paper mis-stacking sensor LCF drawer detection switch LCF feed side paper stock sensor PFP lower drawer detection sensor PFP lower drawer paper stock sensor PFP lower drawer feed sensor PFP motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at output mode (03)) PFP lower drawer empty sensor PFP lower drawer tray-up sensor

[3]

[4]

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 35 05/11

Digital key

Button

Items to check

Contents Highlighted Normal disdisplay play e.g. e.g. Other than home position Other than stop position Paper present Cover opened Normal rotation Other than upper limit position Paper present No paper No paper Toner bag not full Paper present Other than upper limit position No paper Paper present Other than upper limit position -

A B C D E F

LCF end fence home position sensor LCF end fence stop position sensor LCF standby side empty sensor LCF side cover opening/closing switch LCF motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at output mode (03)) LCF tray-up sensor

[5]

Fence home position Fence stop position No paper Cover closed Abnormal rotation Tray at upper limit position No paper Paper present Paper present Toner bag full No paper Tray at upper limit position

[6]

G H A B C D E F G H

LCF feed sensor LCF feed side empty sensor Upper drawer feed sensor Toner bag full detection sensor-1 Upper drawer empty sensor Upper drawer tray-up sensor

[7]

A B C D E F G H

Lower drawer feed sensor Lower drawer empty sensor Lower drawer tray-up sensor

Paper present No paper Tray at upper limit position

A B C D E F [8] G H

Bypass feed paper width sensor-3 Bypass feed paper width sensor-2 Bypass feed paper width sensor-1 Bypass feed paper width sensor-0 Job Separetor upper stack sensor (When Job Separetor is installed) Offset Tray home position sensor (When Offset Tray is installed) Bridge unit transport cover opening/closing sensor (When bridge unit is installed) Job Separetor cover switch (When Job Separetor is installed) Offset Tray cover switch (When Offset Tray is installed)

Refer to table 1 Refer to table 1 Refer to table 1 Refer to table 1 Paper full Paper not full Separetor at home position Cover opened Cover opened Cover opened

Other than home position Cover closed Cover closed Cover closed

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 36 05/11

Digital key

Button

Items to check

Contents Highlighted Normal disdisplay play e.g. e.g. Drawer present Paper present Drawer present Paper present -

A B C D [9] E F G H A B C D [0] E F G H

Upper drawer detection switch Upper drawer paper stock sensor Lower drawer detection switch Lower drawer paper stock sensor -

Drawer not installed Paper almost empty Drawer not installed Paper almost empty -

Table 1. Relation between the status of the bypass paper width sensor and paper size (width).
3 0 1 1 1 0 1 Bypass paper width sensor 2 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 Paper-width size A3/LD A4-R/LT-R A5-R/ST-R Card size B4-R/LG B5-R

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 37 05/11

[FAX] button: ON/ [COPY] button: OFF ([FAX] LED: ON/ [COPY] LED: OFF)
Digital key Button Items to check Contents Highlighted Normal disdisplay play e.g. A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G 24 V power supply IPC board connection Polygonal motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at Output Mode (03)) Toner cartridge switch Registration sensor Exit sensor Auto-toner sensor connection Front cover opening/closing switch Destination detection Side cover opening/closing switch Main motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at Output Mode (03)) Key copy counter connection Toner bag full detection sensor-2 Fuser unit connection Bridge unit transport sensor-2 (When bridge unit is installed) Bridge unit paper full detection sensor (When bridge unit is installed) Job Separator lower stack sensor (When Job Separator is installed) Offset Tray stack sensor (When Offset Tray is installed) Bridge unit transport sensor-1 (When bridge unit is installed) Job Separator feed sensor (When Job Separator is installed) Offset Tray feed sensor (When Offset Tray is installed) Bypass feed sensor High-voltage power supply abnormality (shutdown) detection Power ON Not connected Abnormal rotation OFF Paper present Paper present Not connected Cover opened Other than SAD Cover opened Abnormal rotation Not connected Toner bag full Fuser unit installed No paper Paper not full Paper full Paper full No paper Paper present Paper present No paper Normal e.g. Power OFF Connected Normal rotation ON No paper No paper Connected Cover closed SAD Cover closed Normal rotation Connected Toner bag not full Fuser unit not installed Paper present Paper full Paper not full Paper not full Paper present No paper No paper Paper present Abnormal

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

A B C D E F G H

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 38 05/11

Digital key

Button

Items to check

Contents Highlighted Normal disdisplay play e.g. e.g. Not connected Platen cove closed Other than home position Original present Original present Original present Original present Original present No original No original Cover closed RADF closed No original No original No original No original No original No original No original -

[5]

A B C D E F G H A B C D E

RADF connection Platen sensor Carriage home position sensor APS sensor (APS-R) APS sensor (APS-C) APS sensor (APS-3) APS sensor (APS-2) APS sensor (APS-1) RADF tray sensor RADF empty sensor RADF jam access cover switch RADF opening/closing sensor RADF exit sensor RADF reverse sensor RADF read sensor RADF registration sensor RADF original length sensor RADF original width sensor-1 RADF original width sensor-2 -

RADF connected Platen cove opened Carriage at home position No original No original No original No original No original Original present Original present Cover opened RADF opened Original present Original present Original present Original present Original present Original present Original present -

[6] F G H A B C D E F G H A B C D E [8] F G H

[7]

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 39 05/11

Digital key

Button

Items to check

Contents Highlighted Normal disdisplay play e.g. e.g.

A B C [9] D E F G H A B C D E F G H

[0]

Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection- Refer to table 2 1 Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection- Refer to table 2 2 Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection- Refer to table 2 3 -

Table 2. Connecting status of additional options at inner area of the equipment


Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection-1 Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection-2 Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection-3 Bridge unit Normal display Job Separator Highlighting display Offset Tray Highlighting display

Highlighting display

Highlighting display

Normal display

Normal display

Normal display

Normal display

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 40 05/11

[FAX] button: OFF/ [COPY] button: ON ([FAX] LED: OFF/ [COPY] LED: ON)
Digital key Button Items to check Contents Highlighted Normal disdisplay play e.g. A B C [0] D E F G H Dongle (for Printer/Scanner kit (GM-2060)) Connected Dongle (for Printer kit (GM-1060)) Connected Dongle (for Scanner kit (GM-4060)) Connected Dongles for other equipments/Other USB devices Connected Judgement for acceptable USB storage device (*1) Connectable Connectable Connectable Connectable Acceptable e.g. Not connectable Not connectable Not connectable Not connectable Not acceptable -

*1 Be sure to install the USB storage device to the equipment and check if the device can be used with this code. Be sure to turn OFF the write protection (the function to prevent data from erasure by the accidental recording or deleting) of the USB storage device before performing the check, otherwise this code cannot be used. It may take some time (2 sec. to 10 sec.) before this check is completed depending on the USB storage device.

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 41 05/11

2.2.3

Output check (test mode 03)

Status of the output signals can be checked by entering the following codes in the test mode 03.

<Operation procedure> Procedure 1


[0][3] [POWER] (Code) [START] Operation ON Stop code [START] Operation OFF [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

Procedure 2
[0][3] [POWER] (Code) [START] Operation One direction [CLEAR] Test mode standby [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

Procedure 3
[0][3] [POWER] (Code) [START] Operation ON [START] Operation OFF [CLEAR] Test mode standby [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

Procedure 4
[0][3] [POWER] (Code) [START] [POWER] OFF

Code 101 102 103 108 109 110 118 120 121 122 177 201 202 203 204 205 206

Function Code Main motor ON (operational without 151 developer unit) Toner motor ON (normal rotation) 152 Polygonal motor ON (600 dpi) 153 Registration clutch ON 158 PFP motor ON 159 ADU motor ON 160 Laser ON 168 Exit motor ON (normal rotation) 170 Exit motor ON (reverse rotation) 171 LCF motor ON 172 Offset Tray motor ON (reciprocating movement) Upper drawer feed clutch ON/OFF Lower drawer feed clutch ON/OFF Transport clutch (high speed) ON/OFF Bypass feed clutch ON/OFF Transport clutch (low speed) ON/OFF LCF pickup solenoid ON/OFF

Function Code No.101 function OFF Code No.102 function OFF Code No.103 function OFF Code No.108 function OFF Code No.109 function OFF Code No.110 function OFF Code No.118 function OFF Code No.120 function OFF Code No.121 function OFF Code No.122 function OFF

Procedure 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 3 3 3 3 3

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 42 05/12

Code 207 208 209 210 217 218 222 225 226 228 232 234 235 236 237 238 241 242 243 248 249 252 253 255 256 261 264 265 267 268 269 271 278 280 281 282 283 284 285 289 290 LCF end fence reciprocating movement LCF end fence motor ON/OFF LCF feed clutch ON/OFF LCF transport clutch ON/OFF Sub-separation fan ON/OFF Key copy counter count up ADU clutch ON/OFF PFP transport clutch ON/OFF PFP upper drawer feed clutch ON/OFF PFP lower drawer feed clutch ON/OFF Bridge unit gate solenoid ON/OFF Bypass pickup solenoid ON/OFF Discharge LED ON/OFF Exhaust fan ON/OFF (low speed) Exhaust fan ON/OFF (high speed)

Function

Procedure 2 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

IH board cooling fan ON/OFF (high speed) IH board cooling fan ON/OFF (low speed) Upper drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up) Lower drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up) Developer bias [+DC] ON/OFF Developer bias [-DC] ON/OFF Main charger ON/OFF Separation bias ON/OFF Transfer guide bias ON/OFF Transfer transformer ON/OFF Scan motor ON (Automatically stops at limit position; speed can be changed with the [ZOOM] button SLG board cooling fan 1 ON/OFF SLG board cooling fan 2 ON/OFF Scanner exposure lamp ON/OFF Laser unit cooling fan ON/OFF (high speed) Laser unit cooling fan ON/OFF (low speed) LCF tray-up motor (up/down) PFP upper drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up) PFP lower drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up) RADF feed motor ON/OFF (normal rotation) RADF feed motor ON/OFF (reverse rotation) RADF read motor ON/OFF (normal rotation) RADF reverse motor ON/OFF (normal rotation) RADF reverse motor ON/OFF (reverse rotation) Developer unit cooling fan-1 ON/OFF (high speed) Developer unit cooling fan-1 ON/OFF (low speed)

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 43 05/11

Code 294 295 297 410 411 412 413 432 461 462 463 464 RADF reverse solenoid ON/OFF Power OFF mode (for 200 V series) RADF fan motor ON/OFF

Function

Procedure 3 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Power supply cooling fan ON/OFF (low speed) Power supply cooling fan ON/OFF (high speed) Middle fan ON/OFF (high speed) Middle fan ON/OFF (low speed) Developer drive clutch ON/OFF Fuser unit cooling fan ON/OFF (low speed) Fuser unit cooling fan ON/OFF (high speed) Developer unit cooling fan-2 ON/OFF (low speed) Developer unit cooling fan-2 ON/OFF (high speed)

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 44

2.2.4

Test print mode (test mode 04)

The embedded test pattern can be printed out by keying in the following codes in the test print mode (04).

<Operation procedure>
[0][4] [POWER] (Code) [START] Operation Continuous Test Printing [CLEAR] [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

Notes: 1. When an error occurs, it is indicated on the panel, but the recovery operation is not performed. Turn OFF the power and then back ON to clear the error. 2. During test printing, the [CLEAR] button is disabled when Wait adding toner is displayed.

Code 111 113 142

Types of test pattern Primary scanning direction 33 gradation steps Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation steps Grid pattern Error diffusion Error diffusion

Remarks

Pattern width: 2 dots, Pitch: 10 mm

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 45 05/12

2.2.5

Adjustment mode (05) (e-STUDIO350/450)

Items in the adjustment mode list in the following pages can be corrected or changed in the adjustment mode (05). Turn ON the power with pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously in order to enter this mode.

Procedure 1
[0][5] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [CANCEL] [Digital key] *[FUNCTION CLEAR] (Key in a value) [ENTER] ([FAX]) or (Test copy) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM) [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

[CLEAR] (Corrects value)

* Procedure 2
[0][5] [POWER]

Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).

(Code)

[START]

Value displayed

[ENTER] ([FAX]) or (Test copy) [INTERRUPT] (Value unchangeable)

[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

Procedure 3
[0][5] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [CANCEL] [UP] or [DOWN] (Adjust a value) [ENTER] ([FAX]) or (Test copy) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM) [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

[CLEAR] (Corrects value)

Procedure 4
[CANCEL] [START]
[0][5] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [Digital key] (Sub code) [START] [Digital key] *[FUNCTION CLEAR] (Key in a value) [ENTER] or ([FAX] ) [INTERRUPT] (Test copy) [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

[CLEAR] (Corrects value)

(Stores value) in RAM

[CLEAR] (Corrects value)

* Procedure 6
[0][5] [POWER]

Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).

[Digital key] (Code)

[START]

Automatic ( adjustment )

([FAX]) (Test copy)

[POWER]OFF/ON (Exit)

*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]

When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, error message is displayed.

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 46 05/12

Procedure 7
[CANCEL] [0][5] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] Automatic ( adjustment )

[ENTER] Stores value in RAM

([FAX]) (Test copy)

*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]

[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

* Procedure 10
[0][5] [POWER]

When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, error message is displayed.

[Digital key] (Code)

[START]

[Digital key] (Sub code)

[START]

Value displayed

[START]

[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

[SET] or [INTERRUPT] (Value unchangeable)

Procedure 17
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR] [0][5] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] Automatic adjustment [ENTER] [UP] or or [DOWN] [INTERRUPT] (Adjust a value) Stores value in RAM [UP] or [DOWN] (Adjust a value) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] Stores value in RAM ([FAX]) (Test copy) [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

Manual adjustment

[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]

When the "storing" is not performed within 2 minutes after pressing the [START] button at the manual adjustment, the "automatic adjustment" starts automatically.

Note: The fuser roller temperature control at the adjustment mode is different from that at the normal state. Therefore, the problem of fusing efficiency may be occurred in the test copy at the adjustment mode. In that case, turn ON the power normally, leave the equipment for approx. 3 minutes after it has become ready state and then start up the adjustment mode again.

Test print pattern in Adjustment Mode (05) Operation: One test print is printed out when the [FAX] button is pressed after the code is keyed in at Standby Screen.
Code 1 3 Grid pattern Grid pattern (Duplex printing) Types of test pattern Refer to Refer to Remarks P. 3-7 "3.2.3 Printer related adjustment" P. 3-7 "3.2.3 Printer related adjustment"

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 47 04/05

Notes: 1. The digit after the hyphen in Code of the following table is a sub code. 2. In RAM, the NVRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated. M stands for the LGC board and SYS stands for the SYS board.
Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default ProFunc- <AcceptItems RAM Contents cedur tion able e value> 17 Automatic adjustment of ALL As the value increases, auto-toner sensor (Fuserthe sensor output heater ON) increases correspondingly. The value starts changing approx. 2 minutes after this adjustment was started and is automatically set in the range of 2.35 to 2.45V. * Selection is disable when developer unit is not installed. (P. 3-1) Correction of auto-toner ALL 128 M Corrects the control 3 sensor (Fuser heater ON) <0-255> value of the auto-toner sensor setup in 05-200. * Selection is disable when developer unit is not installed. 3 Developer bias DC outputALL 189 M As the value increases, adjustment <0-255> the transformer output increases correspondMain charger grid bias outALL 154 M 3 ingly. Remove the put adjustment <0-255> developer unit and Transfer transformer DC ALL 115 M 3 install the adjustment output adjustment/Center <0-255> jig to make adjustvalue ment. However, the Separation transformer AC ALL 166 M 3 adjustment jig is not output adjustment/Center <0-255> necessary to adjust the value developer bias DC.(P. Laser power adjustment ALL 121 <0-255> M 3-29) When the value increases, the laser output increases correspondingly. When the value increases by 1, the image shifts by approx. 0.137mm toward the trailing edge of the paper. When the value increases by 1, the image shifts by approx. 0.0846mm toward the front side of the paper. Moves carriages to the adjusting position. (P. 3-12) 3

Code 200

Classification Developer

201

Developer

205 210 221

Developer Charger Transfer

231

Separation

286

Laser

305

Scanner

Image location adjustment of secondary scanning direction (scanner section)

ALL

128 <92-164>

SYS

306

Scanner

Image location adjustment of primary scanning direction (scanner section)

ALL

145 <0-255>

SYS

308

Scanner

Distortion mode

ALL

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 48 05/12

Code 340

Classification Scanner

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Reproduction ratio adjustALL 128 SYS ment of secondary scan<0-255> ning direction (scanner section)

Contents When the value increases by 1, the reproduction ratio in the secondary scanning direction (vertical to paper feeding direction) increases by approx. 0.223%. When the value increases by 1, the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.5mm. Performs the adjustment and initialization when the RADF board or RADF sensor is replaced. When the value increases by 1, the reproduction ratio of the secondary scanning direction when using the RADF increases by approx. 0.1%. When the value increases by 1, the image of original fed from the RADF shifts toward the rear side of paper by approx. 0.0846mm. When the value increases by 1, the carriage position when using the RADF shifts by approx. 0.1 mm toward the original feeding side. When the value increases by 1, the copied image of original fed from the RADF shifts toward the trailing edge of paper by approx. 0.1mm.

Procedur e 1

354

RADF

355

356

RADF

for singlesidedoriginal for doublesidedoriginal Automatic adjustment of RADF sensor and EEPROM initialization Adjustment of RADF paper alignment

ALL

10 <0-20> 10 <0-20> -

SYS

ALL

SYS

ALL

SYS

357

RADF

Fine adjustment of RADF transport speed

ALL

50 <0-100>

SYS

358

RADF

RADF sideways deviation adjustment

ALL

128 <0-255>

SYS

359

Scanner

Carriage position adjustment during scanning from RADF

ALL

128 <0-255>

SYS

365

RADF

366

RADF leading edge position adjustment

for single sided original for double sided original

ALL

50 <0-100> 50 <0-100>

SYS

ALL

SYS

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 49 05/10

Code 367

Classification RADF

368

Laser

401 405

Laser

410 411 421 422

Laser

Drive

424 425 430

Drive

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default ProFunc- <AcceptItems RAM Contents cedur tion able e value> 6 RADF original guide width ALL Stores the current adjustment (Minimum) width of RADF original guide by keying in this code with the guide set at the minimum width. Perform this adjustment when the RADF board or volume is replaced, or when the code (05-356) is performed. 6 RADF original guide width ALL Stores the current adjustment (Maximum) width of RADF original guide by keying in this code with the guide set at the maximum width. Perform this adjustment when the RADF board or volume is replaced, or when the code (05-356) is performed. 1 Fine adjustment of polygoPRT 133 M When the value <0-255> increases by 1, the nal motor rotation speed (adjustment of primary reproduction ratio of PPC 129 M primary scanning direcscanning direction repro<0-255> duction ratio) tion increases by approx. 0.07%. (approx. 0.1mm/step) Adjustment of primary PPC 128 M When the value 1 scanning laser writing start <0-255> increases by 1, the position. writing start position PRT 128 M shifts to the front side <0-255> by approx. 0.0423mm. 1 Adjustment of secondary PPC/ 138 M When the value scanning direction reproPRT <0-255> increases by 1, the duction ratio (fine adjustreproduction ratio of FAX 139 M ment of main motor speed) secondary scanning <0-255> direction increases by approx. 0.04%. Fine adjustment of exit PPC/ 107 M When the value 1 motor speed PRT <0-255> increases by 1, the rotation becomes faster FAX 121 M by approx. 0.05%. <0-255> Top margin adjustment (blank area at the leading edge of the paper) Left margin adjustment (blank area at the left of the paper along the paper feeding direction) PPC 0 <0-255> 0 <0-255> M When the value increases by 1, the blank area becomes wider by approx. 0.0423mm. 1

Image

431

Image

PPC

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 50 05/11

Code 432

Classification Image

433

Image

434-0

Image

434-1

Image

435

Image

436

Image

437

Image

438

Image

440 441 442 443 444 445

Laser

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Right margin adjustment PPC 0 M (blank area at the right of <0-255> the paper along the paper feeding direction) Bottom margin adjustment PPC 0 M (blank area at the trailing <0-255> edge of the paper) M Bottom margin adjustment PPC/ EUR: 48 (blank area at the trailing PRT UC:24 edge of the paper)/ JPN: 24 Reverse side at duplexing Others: 48 <0-255> Right margin adjustment PPC/ 12 M PRT <0-255> (blank area at the right of the paper along the paper feeding direction)/Reverse side at duplexing PRT 24 M Top margin adjustment <0-255> (blank area at the leading edge of the paper) Left margin adjustment PRT 0 M (blank area at the left of the <0-255> paper along the paper feeding direction) Right margin adjustment PRT 0 M (blank area at the right of <0-255> the paper along the paper feeding direction) Bottom margin adjustment PRT 0 M (blank area at the trailing <0-255> edge of the paper) ALL 7 M Adjustment of Upper drawer <0-15> secondary scanning Lower ALL 24 M laser writing drawer <0-40> start position Bypass ALL 8 M feeding <0-15> LCF ALL 8 M <0-15> PFP ALL 8 M <0-15> Duplex ALL 8 M feeding <0-15>

Contents When the value increases by 1, the blank area becomes wider by approx. 0.0423 mm.

Procedur e 1

When the value increases by 1, the image shifts toward the leading edge of the paper by approx. 0.2mm.

1 1 1 1 1 1

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 51

Code 448-0 448-1 448-2

Classification Paper feeding

449-0 449-1 449-2

Paper feeding

450-0 450-1 450-2 452-0 452-1 452-2 455-0 455-1 455-2

Paper feeding

Paper feeding

Paper feeding

457

Paper feeding

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> ALL 10 M Paper aligning Long size <0-63> amount adjustment at Middle ALL 10 M the registrasize <0-63> tion section Short ALL 8 M (PFP upper size 1 <0-63> drawer / Plain paper) ALL 10 M Paper aligning Long amount size <0-63> adjustment at Middle ALL 10 M the registrasize <0-63> tion section Short ALL 8 M (PFP lower size <0-63> drawer / Plain paper) ALL 17 M Paper aligning Long size <0-63> amount adjustment at Middle ALL 17 M the registrasize <0-63> tion section Short ALL 17 M (Upper drawer size <0-63> / Plain paper) ALL 12 M Paper aligning Long size <0-63> amount adjustment at Middle ALL 10 M the registrasize <0-63> tion section Short ALL 10 M (Lower drawer size <0-63> / Plain paper) ALL 20 M Paper aligning Long size <0-63> amount adjustment at Middle ALL 20 M the registrasize <0-63> tion section Short ALL 30 M (Duplex feed- size <0-63> ing / Plain paper) Paper aligning amount ALL 8 M adjustment at the registra<0-63> tion section (LCF / Plain paper)

Contents When the value increases by 1, the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8 mm. <Paper length> Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size: 219 mm or shorter

Procedur e 4 4 4

4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 52

Code 458-0 458-1 458-2

Classification Paper feeding

460-0 460-1 460-2

Paper feeding

461-0 461-1 461-2

Paper feeding

462-0 462-1 462-2 462-3 463-0 463-1 463-2 466-0 466-1 466-4 466-5 466-6 466-7

Paper feeding

Paper feeding

Paper feeding

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM able tion value> ALL 26 M Paper aligning Long size <0-63> amount adjustment at Middle ALL 26 M the registrasize <0-63> tion section Short ALL 25 M (Bypass feed- size <0-63> ing/Plain paper) Paper aligning Long ALL 26 M size <0-63> amount adjustment at Middle ALL 26 M the registrasize <0-63> tion section Short ALL 26 M (Bypass feed- size <0-63> ing/Thick paper 1) ALL 17 M Paper aligning Long size <0-63> amount adjustment at Middle ALL 17 M the registrasize <0-63> tion section Short ALL 17 M (Bypass feed- size <0-63> ing/Thick paper 2) ALL 17 M Paper aligning Long size <0-63> amount adjustment at Middle ALL 17 M the registrasize <0-63> tion section Short ALL 17 M (Bypass feed- size <0-63> ing/Thick Post ALL 14 M paper 3) card <0-63> ALL 26 M Paper aligning Long size <0-63> amount adjustment at Middle ALL 26 M the registrasize <0-63> tion section Short ALL 26 M (Bypass feed- size <0-63> ing/OHP film) ALL 143 M Adjustment of Plain paper <0-255> paper pushing amount / Post card ALL 173 M Bypass feed<0-255> ing Thick ALL 143 M paper 1 <0-255> Thick ALL 143 M paper 2 <0-255> Thick ALL 143 M paper 3 <0-255> OHP film ALL 128 M <0-255>

Contents When the value increases by 1, the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8 mm. <Paper length> Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size: 219 mm or shorter * Postcard is supported only for JPN model.

Procedur e 4 4

2
4

4 4 4

4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 When the value increases by 1, the driving speed of bypass feed roller increases by approx. 0.2 ms when the paper transport is started from the registration section. * Post card is supported only for JPN model. 4 4 4 4 4 4

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 53

Code 467

Classification Paper feeding

468-0 468-1 468-2 469-0

Finisher

Paper feeding

469-1

469-2

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Adjustment of paper pushALL 128 M When the value ing amount/Duplex feed<0-255> increases by 1, the ing (short size) driving speed of ADU transport roller increases by approx. 0.2 ms when the paper transport is started from the registration section. A4-R/LT-R ALL 0 M When the value Fine adjust<-14-14> increases by 1, the ment of bindbinding/folding position ing position/ B4 ALL 0 M shifts toward the right folding posi<-14-14> page by 0.25 mm. tion A3/LD ALL 0 M <-14-14> ALL 20 M When the value Paper aligning Thick Paper 1 <0-63> increases by "1", the amount aligning amount adjustment at Long size increases by approx. the registra0.8 mm. tion section ALL 20 M Thick <Paper length> (Upper <0-63> Paper 1 Long size: drawer) Middle 330 mm or longer size Middle size: Thick ALL 20 M 220 mm to 329 mm Paper 1 <0-63> Short size: Short 219 mm or shorter size Thick Paper 2 Long size Thick Paper 2 Middle size Thick Paper 2 Short size Long size Middle size Short size Long size Middle size Short size ALL 20 <0-63> M

Procedur e 1

4 4 4 4

469-3

469-4

ALL

22 <0-63>

469-5

ALL

19 <0-63>

470-0 470-1 470-2

Paper feeding

471-0 471-1 471-2

Paper feeding

Paper aligning amount adjustment at the registration section (Lower drawer / Thick paper 1) Paper aligning amount adjustment at the registration section (PFP upper drawer / Thick paper 1)

ALL ALL ALL

20 <0-63> 22 <0-63> 19 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 22 <0-63> 19 <0-63>

M M M

4 4 4

ALL ALL ALL

M M M

4 4 4

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 54

Code 472-0 472-1 472-2

Classification Paper feeding

473

Paper feeding

474-0 474-1 474-2

Paper feeding

497-0 497-1 497-2 497-3 497-4 497-5 498-0 498-1

Laser

Laser

501 503 504 505 506 507

Image

Image

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> ALL 20 M Paper aligning Long size <0-63> amount adjustment at Middle ALL 22 M the registrasize <0-63> tion section Short ALL 19 M (PFP lower size <0-63> drawer / Thick paper 1) ALL 8 M Paper aligning amount adjustment at the registra<0-63> tion section (LCF / Thick paper 1) Paper aligning Long ALL 24 M amount size <0-63> adjustment at Middle ALL 24 M the registrasize <0-63> tion section Short ALL 33 M (Duplex feed- size <0-63> ing / Thick paper 1) ALL 128 M Adjustment of Upper drawer <0-255> drawer sideways deviaLower ALL 128 M tion drawer <0-255> PFP upper ALL 128 M drawer <0-255> PFP lower ALL 128 M drawer <0-255> LCF ALL 128 M <0-255> Bypass ALL 128 M feeding <0-255> ALL 148 M Adjustment of Long size <0-255> primary scanning laser ALL 148 M Short writing start <0-255> size(A4/LT position at or smaller) duplex feeding Density Photo PPC 128 SYS adjustment <0-255> Fine adjustText/Photo PPC 128 SYS ment of man<0-255> ual density Text PPC 128 SYS /Center value <0-255> Text/Photo PPC 20 SYS Density <0-255> adjustment Fine adjustPhoto PPC 20 SYS ment of man<0-255> ual density Text PPC 20 SYS /Light step <0-255> value

Contents When the value increases by "1", the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8 mm. <Paper length> Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size: 219 mm or shorter

Procedur e 4 4

2
4

4 4 4

When the value increases by 1, the image shifts toward the front side by 0.0423 mm.

4 4 4 4 4 4

When the value increases by 1, the image shifts toward the front side by 0.0423 mm.

4 4

When the value increases, the image at the center step becomes darker.

1 1 1

When the value increases, the image of the light steps becomes lighter.

1 1 1

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 55 05/11

Code 508

Classification Image

509

510

512 514 515 532 533 534 570

Image

Image

Image

571

572

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Text/Photo PPC EUR: 20 SYS Density UC: 20 adjustment JPN : 30 Fine adjust<0-255> ment of manual density Photo PPC EUR: 24 SYS /Dark step UC: 24 value JPN: 24 <0-255> Text PPC EUR: 20 SYS UC: 20 JPN: 27 <0-255> Photo PPC 128 SYS Density <0-255> adjustment Fine adjustText/Photo PPC 128 SYS ment of auto<0-255> matic density Text PPC 128 SYS <0-255> Range correc- Text/Photo PPC 40 SYS tion / Back<0-255> ground peak Photo PPC 16 SYS adjustment <0-255> Text PPC 64 SYS <0-255> EUR: 12 SYS Range correc- Text/Photo PPC UC: 12 tion on origiJPN: 22 nal manually <11-14, set on the 21-24, original glass 31-34, 41-44> SYS Photo PPC 12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> SYS Text PPC 22 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44>

Contents When the value increases, the image of the dark steps becomes darker.

Procedur e 1

When the value increases, the image becomes darker.

1 1 1

When the value increases, the background becomes more brightened.

1 1 1

Sets whether the values of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not. Ones place is an adjustment for automatic density and tens place is for manual density.Once they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak and text peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text density respectively. Background peak Text peak 1: fixed/fixed 2: varied/fixed 3: fixed/varied 4: varied

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 56 04/10

Code 593 594 595

Classification Image Image Image

620

Image

621

622

653

Image

654 655

Image

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default ProFunc- <AcceptItems RAM Contents cedur tion able e value> 1 Gamma data Text/Photo PPC 0 SYS Ones place: slope adjust<0-99> 0:Equivalent to the set ment value 5 Photo PPC 0 SYS 1 1 to 9: Select the slope <0-99> of Gamma curve Text PPC 0 SYS 1 (The larger the <0-99> value is, the larger the slope becomes.) Tens place: 0: Equivalent to the set value 5 1 to 9: Select the slope of low density (The smaller the value is, the darker the background becomes.) 00: Use default value 1 Sharpness Text/Photo PPC 1 SYS When the value adjustment <0-99> increases, the image becomes sharper. When the value Photo PPC 2 SYS decreases, the image 1 becomes softer. The <0-99> smaller the value is, the less the moire Text PPC EUR: 45 SYS becomes.Ones place: 1 Fixed value (05-620 is UC: 45 1, 05-621 is 2, 05JPN: 45 622 is 5) Tens place: <0-99> Sharpness intensity (0: Use default value, 1-9: Filter intensity) 1 Adjustment of Text/Photo PPC 208 SYS Adjusts the level of the smudged/faint <0-255> smudged/faint text text.With increasing the value, the faint text is suppressed, and with decreasing it, the smudged text is suppressed. Adjustment of PS PRT 5 SYS Adjustment of the 1 smudged/faint <0-9> smudged/faint text PCL PRT 5 SYS text.With decreasing 1 the value, the faint text <0-9> is suppressed, and with increasing it, the smudged text is suppressed.

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 57

Code 672-0 672-1 672-2 672-3 672-4 676-0 676-1 676-2 676-3 676-4 693

Classification Image

Image

Image

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Adjustment of Normal PRT 0 M printer image <0-10> density PRT 4 M <0-10> PRT 5 M <0-10> PRT 6 M <0-10> PRT 10 M <0-10> Toner PRT 0 M saving <0-10> PRT 4 M <0-10> PRT 5 M <0-10> PRT 6 M <0-10> PRT 10 M <0-10> Range correc- Text/Photo PPC EUR: 12 SYS tion on origiUC: 12 nal set on the JPN: 22 RADF <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> Photo PPC 12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> SYS

Contents Adjustment of the image density.With decreasing the value, the text becomes lighter.

Procedur e 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

694

695

Text

PPC

22 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44>

SYS

700

Image

Adjustment of binarized threshold (Text)

Center value

FAX

120 <0-255>

SYS

701

Light step value

FAX

20 <0-255>

SYS

702

Dark step value

FAX

20 <0-255>

SYS

Sets whether the values of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not. Ones place is an adjustment for automatic density and tens place is for manual density. Once they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak and text peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text density respectively. 1: fixed/fixed 2: varied/fixed 3: fixed/varied 4: varied/varied * Background peak/ Text peak When the value increases, the image at the center step becomes lighter. When the value increases, the image of light side becomes lighter. When the value increases, the image of dark side becomes darker.

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 58

Code 710

Classification Image

714 715 Image

719

720

Image

724

725

Image

729

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Density Photo FAX 128 SYS adjustment <0-255> Fine adjustment of man- Text/Photo FAX 128 SYS ual density/ <0-255> Center value Photo FAX 20 SYS Density <0-255> adjustment Fine adjustment of man- Text/Photo FAX 20 SYS ual density/ <0-255> Light step value Photo FAX 20 SYS Density <0-255> adjustment Fine adjustment of man- Text/Photo FAX 20 SYS ual density/ <0-255> Dark step value Photo FAX 128 SYS Density <0-255> adjustment Fine adjustment of auto- Text/Photo FAX 128 SYS matic density <0-255> Range correc- Text/Photo tion on original manually set on the original glass SCN 12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> SYS

Contents When the value increases, the image at the center step becomes darker.

Procedur e 1

1 1

When the value increases, the image of the light steps becomes lighter.

When the value increases, the image of the dark steps becomes darker.

When the value increases, the image becomes darker.

825

Image

826

Text

SCN

12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44>

SYS

827

Photo

SCN

12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44>

SYS

Sets whether the values of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not. Ones place is an adjustment for automatic density and tens place is for manual density. Once they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak and text peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text density respectively. 1: fixed/fixed 2: varied/fixed 3: fixed/varied 4: varied/varied * Background peak/ Text peak

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 59

Code 830

Classification Image

831

832

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> SYS Range correc- Text/Photo SCN 12 tion on origi<11-14, nal set on the 21-24, RADF 31-34, 41-44> Text SCN 12 SYS <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> SYS Photo SCN 12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44>

Contents Sets whether the value of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not. Ones place is an adjustment for automatic density and tens place is for manual density. Once they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak and text peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text density respectively. 1: fixed/fixed 2: varied/fixed 3: fixed/varied 4: varied/varied * Background peak/ Text peak When the value increases, the background becomes more brightened.

Procedur e 1

835 836 837 845 846 847 850 851 852 855 856 857

Image

Range correc- Text/Photo tion / Background peak Text adjustment Photo

SCN SCN SCN SCN SCN SCN SCN SCN SCN SCN SCN SCN

Image

Density adjustment Fine adjustment of manual density/ Center value Density adjustment Fine adjustment of manual density/ Light step value Density adjustment Fine adjustment of manual density/ adjustment/ Dark step value Density adjustment Fine adjustment of automatic density

Text/Photo Text Photo Text/Photo Text Photo Text/Photo Text Photo

Image

48 <0-255> 48 <0-255> 40 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255>

SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS

1 1 1

When the value increases, the image at the center step becomes darker.

1 1 1

When the value increases, the image of the light steps becomes lighter.

1 1 1

Image

When the value increases, the image of the dark steps becomes darker.

1 1 1

860 861 862

Image

Text/Photo Text Photo

SCN SCN SCN

SYS SYS SYS

When the value increases, the image becomes darker.

1 1 1

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 60

Code 865-0

Classification Image

865-1

865-2

866-0

Image

866-1

866-2

867-0

Image

867-1

867-2

913

Image

914

Image

915

Image

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Sharpnessad- Reproduc- SCN 1 SYS justment(Text/ tion ratio <0-99> Photo) 40% or smaller Reproduc- SCN 1 SYS tion ratio <0-99> 41-80% 1 SYS Reproduc- SCN tion ratio <0-99> 81% or larger Sharpnessad- Reproduc- SCN 2 SYS <0-99> justment(Text) tion ratio 40% or smaller 2 SYS Reproduc- SCN <0-99> tion ratio 41-80% Reproduc- SCN 2 SYS tion ratio <0-99> 81% or larger Sharpnessad- Reproduc- SCN 5 SYS justtion ratio <0-99> ment(Photo) 40% or smaller Reproduc- SCN 5 SYS tion ratio <0-99> 41-80% Reproduc- SCN 5 SYS tion ratio <0-99> 81% or larger Custom PPC EUR: 12 SYS Range correcMode 1 UC: 12 tion on origiJPN: 22 nal manually <11-14, set on the 21-24, original glass 31-34, 41-44> SYS Custom PPC 22 Mode 2 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> SYS Custom PPC 12 Mode 3 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44>

Contents When the value increases, the image becomes sharper. When the value decreases, the image becomes softer. The smaller the value is, the less the moire becomes. Ones place: Fixed value (05-865 is 1, 05-866 is 2, 05-867 is 5) Tens place: Sharpness intensity (0: Use default value, 1-9: Filter intensity)

Procedur e 4

Set whether the values of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not. One's place is an adjustment for automatic density and ten's place is for manual density. Once they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak and text peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text density respectively. 1: fixed/fixed 2: varied/fixed 3: fixed/varied 4: varied/varied * Background peak/ Text peak

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 61

Code 916

Classification Image

917

Image

918

Image

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Range correcCustom PPC EUR: 12 SYS tion on origiMode 1 UC: 12 nal set on the JPN: 22 RADF <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> SYS Custom PPC 22 Mode 2 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> Custom PPC 12 SYS Mode 3 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44>

Contents Set whether the values of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not. One's place is an adjustment for automatic density and ten's place is for manual density. Once they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak and text peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text density respectively. 1: fixed/fixed 2: varied/fixed 3: fixed/varied 4: varied/varied * Background peak/ Text peak When the value increases, the background becomes more brightened.

Procedur e 1

919 920 921 922 923

Image Image Image Image Image

Range correction Background peak adjustment

Sharpness adjustment

Custom Mode 1 Custom Mode 2 Custom Mode 3 Custom Mode 1 Custom Mode 2

PPC PPC PPC PPC PPC

924

Image

Custom Mode 3

PPC

40 <0-255> 64 <0-255> 16 <0-255> 1 <0-99> EUR: 45 UC: 45 JPN: 45 <0-99> 2 <0-99>

SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS

1 1 1

SYS

928

Image

Adjustment of smudged/faint text

Custom Mode 1

PPC

208 <0-255>

SYS

When the value increases, the image becomes sharper. When the value decreases, the image becomes softer. The smaller the value is, the less the moire becomes. One's place: Fixed value (05-922 is "1", 05-923 is "5", 05-924 is "2")Ten's place: Sharpness intensity(0: Use default value, 1-9: Filter intensity) Adjustment of the smudged/faint text. With increasing the value, the faint text is suppressed, and with decreasing it, the smudged text is suppressed.

1 1

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 62

Code 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943

Classification Image Image Image Image

Image

Image

Image

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Density Custom PPC 128 SYS adjustment Mode 1 <0-255> Fine adjustCustom PPC 128 SYS ment of "manMode 2 <0-255> ual density"/ Custom PPC 128 SYS Center value Mode 3 <0-255> Custom PPC 20 SYS Density Mode 1 <0-255> adjustment Fine adjustCustom PPC 20 SYS ment of "manMode 2 <0-255> ual density"/ Custom PPC 20 SYS Light step Mode 3 <0-255> value Custom PPC 20 SYS Density Mode 1 <0-255> adjustment Fine adjustCustom PPC 20 SYS ment of "manMode 2 <0-255> ual density"/ Custom PPC 20 SYS Dark step Mode 3 <0-255> value Custom PPC 128 SYS Density Mode 1 <0-255> adjustment Fine adjustCustom PPC 128 SYS ment of "autoMode 2 <0-255> matic density" Custom PPC 128 SYS Mode 3 <0-255> Custom PPC 0 SYS Gamma data Mode 1 <0-99> slope adjustment

Contents When the value increases, the image of the center step becomes darker.

Procedur e 1 1

2
1 1 1 1

When the value increases, the image of the "light" step density becomes lighter.

When the value increases, the image of the "Dark" step density becomes lighter.

1 1 1

When the value increases, the image becomes darker.

1 1 1

944

Custom Mode 2

PPC

0 <0-99>

SYS

945

Custom Mode 3

PPC

0 <0-99>

SYS

976

Maintenance

Equipment number (serial number) entry

ALL

SYS

Ones place: 0: Equivalent to the set value 5 1 to 9: Select the slope of Gammacurve (The larger the value is, the larger the slope becomes.) Tens place: 0: Equivalent to the set value 5 1 to 9: Select the slope of low density (The smaller the value is, the darker the background becomes.) 00: Use default value When this adjustment is performed with this code, the setting code (08-995) is also performed automatically (10 digits)

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 63 04/05

2.2.6

Adjustment mode (05) (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)

Items in the adjustment mode list in the following pages can be corrected or changed in the adjustment mode (05). Turn ON the power with pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously in order to enter this mode.

Procedure 1
[0][5] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [CANCEL] [Digital key] *[FUNCTION CLEAR] (Key in a value) [ENTER] ([FAX]) or (Test copy) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM) [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

[CLEAR] (Corrects value)

* Procedure 2
[0][5] [POWER]

Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).

(Code)

[START]

Value displayed

[ENTER] ([FAX]) or (Test copy) [INTERRUPT] (Value unchangeable)

[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

Procedure 3
[0][5] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [CANCEL] [UP] or [DOWN] (Adjust a value) [ENTER] ([FAX]) or (Test copy) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM) [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

[CLEAR] (Corrects value)

Procedure 4
[CANCEL] [START]
[0][5] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [Digital key] (Sub code) [START] [Digital key] *[FUNCTION CLEAR] (Key in a value) [ENTER] or ([FAX] ) [INTERRUPT] (Test copy) [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

[CLEAR] (Corrects value)

(Stores value) in RAM

[CLEAR] (Corrects value)

* Procedure 6
[0][5] [POWER]

Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).

[Digital key] (Code)

[START]

Automatic ( adjustment )

([FAX]) (Test copy)

[POWER]OFF/ON (Exit)

*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]

When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, error message is displayed.

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 64 07/11

Procedure 7
[CANCEL] [0][5] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] Automatic ( adjustment )

[ENTER] Stores value in RAM

([FAX]) (Test copy)

*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]

[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

* Procedure 10
[0][5] [POWER]

When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, error message is displayed.

[Digital key] (Code)

[START]

[Digital key] (Sub code)

[START]

Value displayed

[START]

[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

[SET] or [INTERRUPT] (Value unchangeable)

Procedure 17
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR] [0][5] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] Automatic adjustment [ENTER] [UP] or or [DOWN] [INTERRUPT] (Adjust a value) Stores value in RAM [UP] or [DOWN] (Adjust a value) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] Stores value in RAM ([FAX]) (Test copy) [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

Manual adjustment

[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]

When the "storing" is not performed within 2 minutes after pressing the [START] button at the manual adjustment, the "automatic adjustment" starts automatically.

Note: The fuser roller temperature control at the adjustment mode is different from that at the normal state. Therefore, the problem of fusing efficiency may be occurred in the test copy at the adjustment mode. In that case, turn ON the power normally, leave the equipment for approx. 3 minutes after it has become ready state and then start up the adjustment mode again.

Test print pattern in Adjustment Mode (05) Operation: One test print is printed out when the [FAX] button is pressed after the code is keyed in at Standby Screen.
Code 1 3 Grid pattern Grid pattern (Duplex printing) Types of test pattern Refer to Refer to Remarks P. 3-7 "3.2.3 Printer related adjustment" P. 3-7 "3.2.3 Printer related adjustment"

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 65 05/12

Notes: 1. The digit after the hyphen in Code of the following table is a sub code. 2. In RAM, the NVRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated. M stands for the LGC board and SYS stands for the SYS board.
Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default ProFunc- <AcceptItems RAM Contents cedur tion able e value> 17 Automatic adjustment of ALL As the value increases, auto-toner sensor (Fuserthe sensor output heater ON) increases correspondingly. The value starts changing approx. 2 minutes after this adjustment was started and is automatically set in the range of 2.35 to 2.45V. * Selection is disable when developer unit is not installed. (P. 3-1) Correction of auto-toner ALL 128 M Corrects the control 3 sensor (Fuser heater ON) <0-255> value of the auto-toner sensor setup in 05-200. * Selection is disable when developer unit is not installed. 3 Developer bias DC outputALL 189 M As the value increases, adjustment <0-255> the transformer output increases correspondMain charger grid bias outALL 154 M 3 ingly. Remove the put adjustment <0-255> developer unit and Transfer transformer DC ALL 115 M 3 install the adjustment output adjustment/Center <0-255> jig to make adjustvalue ment. However, the Separation transformer AC ALL 166 M 3 adjustment jig is not output adjustment/Center <0-255> necessary to adjust the value developer bias DC.(P. Laser power adjustment ALL 121 <0-255> M 3-29) When the value increases, the laser output increases correspondingly. When the value increases by 1, the image shifts by approx. 0.137mm toward the trailing edge of the paper. When the value increases by 1, the image shifts by approx. 0.0846mm toward the front side of the paper. Moves carriages to the adjusting position. (P. 3-12) 3

Code 200

Classification Developer

201

Developer

205 210 221

Developer Charger Transfer

231

Separation

286

Laser

305

Scanner

Image location adjustment of secondary scanning direction (scanner section)

ALL

128 <92-164>

SYS

306

Scanner

Image location adjustment of primary scanning direction (scanner section)

ALL

145 <0-255>

SYS

308

Scanner

Distortion mode

ALL

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 66 07/11

Code 340

Classification Scanner

350

Scanner

351

354

RADF

355

357

RADF

358

RADF

359

Scanner

365

RADF

366

401 405

Laser

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents able tion value> Reproduction ratio adjustALL 128 SYS When the value ment of secondary scan<0-255> increases by 1, the ning direction reproduction ratio in (scanner section) the secondary scanning direction (vertical to paper feeding direction) increases by approx. 0.223%. ALL 128 SYS 0.1369 mm/step Shading posi- Original tion adjustglass <118ment 138> RADF ALL 128 SYS <118138> ALL 10 SYS When the value Adjustment of for single<0-20> increases by 1, the sidedorigiRADF paper aligning amount nal alignment for doubleALL 10 SYS increases by approx. 0.5mm. sidedorigi<0-20> nal Fine adjustment of RADF ALL 50 SYS When the value transport speed <0-100> increases by 1, the reproduction ratio of the secondary scanning direction when using the RADF increases by approx. 0.1%. RADF sideways deviation ALL 128 SYS When the value adjustment <0-255> increases by 1, the image of original fed from the RADF shifts toward the rear side of paper by approx. 0.0846mm. Carriage position adjustALL 128 SYS When the value ment during scanning from <0-255> increases by 1, the RADF carriage position when using the RADF shifts by approx. 0.1 mm toward the original feeding side. RADF leadfor single ALL 50 SYS When the value ing edge posi- sided orig<0-100> increases by 1, the tion inal copied image of origiadjustment ALL 50 SYS nal fed from the RADF for double shifts toward the trailing <0-100> sided origedge of paper by inal approx. 0.1mm. PRT 133 M When the value Fine adjustment of polygo<0-255> increases by 1, the nal motor rotation speed reproduction ratio of (adjustment of primary PPC 129 M primary scanning direcscanning direction repro<0-255> tion increases by duction ratio) approx. 0.07%. (approx. 0.1mm/step)

Procedur e 1

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 67 07/11

Code 410 411 421 422

Classification Laser

Drive

424 425 430

Drive

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents able tion value> Adjustment of primary PPC 128 M When the value scanning laser writing start <0-255> increases by 1, the position. writing start position PRT 128 M shifts to the front side <0-255> by approx. 0.0423mm. Adjustment of secondary PPC/ 138 M When the value scanning direction reproPRT <0-255> increases by 1, the duction ratio (fine adjustreproduction ratio of FAX 139 M ment of main motor speed) secondary scanning <0-255> direction increases by approx. 0.04%. Fine adjustment of exit PPC/ 107 M When the value motor speed PRT <0-255> increases by 1, the rotation becomes faster FAX 121 M by approx. 0.05%. <0-255> Top margin adjustment (blank area at the leading edge of the paper) Left margin adjustment (blank area at the left of the paper along the paper feeding direction) Right margin adjustment (blank area at the right of the paper along the paper feeding direction) Bottom margin adjustment (blank area at the trailing edge of the paper) Bottom margin adjustment (blank area at the trailing edge of the paper)/ Reverse side at duplexing PPC 0 <0-255> 0 <0-255> M When the value increases by 1, the blank area becomes wider by approx. 0.0423mm.

Procedur e 1

Image

431

Image

PPC

432

Image

PPC

0 <0-255>

433

Image

PPC

0 <0-255> EUR: 48 UC:24 JPN: 24 Others: 48 <0-255> 12 <0-255>

When the value increases by 1, the blank area becomes wider by approx. 0.0423 mm.

434-0

Image

PPC/ PRT

434-1

Image

435

Image

436

Image

437

Image

438

Image

Right margin adjustment (blank area at the right of the paper along the paper feeding direction)/Reverse side at duplexing Top margin adjustment (blank area at the leading edge of the paper) Left margin adjustment (blank area at the left of the paper along the paper feeding direction) Right margin adjustment (blank area at the right of the paper along the paper feeding direction) Bottom margin adjustment (blank area at the trailing edge of the paper)

PPC/ PRT

PRT

24 <0-255> 0 <0-255>

PRT

PRT

0 <0-255>

PRT

0 <0-255>

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 68 07/11

Code 440 441 442 443 444 445 448-0 448-1 448-2

Classification Laser

Paper feeding

449-0 449-1 449-2

Paper feeding

450-0 450-1 450-2 452-0 452-1 452-2 455-0 455-1 455-2

Paper feeding

Paper feeding

Paper feeding

457

Paper feeding

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> ALL 7 M When the value Adjustment of Upper drawer <0-15> increases by 1, the secondary image shifts toward the scanning Lower ALL 24 M leading edge of the laser writing drawer <0-40> paper by approx. start position Bypass ALL 8 M 0.2mm. feeding <0-15> LCF ALL 8 M <0-15> PFP ALL 8 M <0-15> Duplex ALL 8 M feeding <0-15> ALL 10 M When the value Paper aligning Long size <0-63> increases by 1, the amount aligning amount adjustment at Middle ALL 10 M increases by approx. the registrasize <0-63> 0.8 mm. tion section Short ALL 8 M <Paper length> (PFP upper size 1 <0-63> Long size: drawer / Plain 330 mm or longer paper) Middle size: ALL 10 M Paper aligning Long 220 mm to 329 mm size <0-63> amount Short size: adjustment at Middle ALL 10 M 219 mm or shorter the registrasize <0-63> tion section Short ALL 8 M (PFP lower size <0-63> drawer / Plain paper) ALL 17 M Paper aligning Long size <0-63> amount adjustment at Middle ALL 17 M the registrasize <0-63> tion section Short ALL 17 M (Upper drawer size <0-63> / Plain paper) ALL 12 M Paper aligning Long size <0-63> amount adjustment at Middle ALL 10 M the registrasize <0-63> tion section Short ALL 10 M (Lower drawer size <0-63> / Plain paper) ALL 20 M Paper aligning Long size <0-63> amount adjustment at Middle ALL 20 M the registrasize <0-63> tion section Short ALL 30 M (Duplex feed- size <0-63> ing / Plain paper) Paper aligning amount ALL 8 M adjustment at the registra<0-63> tion section (LCF / Plain paper)

Procedur e 1 1

2
1 1 1 1 4 4 4

4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 69 07/11

Code 458-0 458-1 458-2

Classification Paper feeding

460-0 460-1 460-2

Paper feeding

461-0 461-1 461-2

Paper feeding

462-0 462-1 462-2 462-3 463-0 463-1 463-2 466-0 466-1 466-4 466-5 466-6 466-7

Paper feeding

Paper feeding

Paper feeding

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents able tion value> ALL 26 M When the value Paper aligning Long size <0-63> increases by 1, the amount aligning amount adjustment at Middle ALL 26 M increases by approx. the registrasize <0-63> 0.8 mm. tion section Short ALL 25 M <Paper length> (Bypass feed- size <0-63> Long size: ing/Plain 330 mm or longer paper) Middle size: Paper aligning Long ALL 26 M 220 mm to 329 mm size <0-63> amount Short size: adjustment at Middle ALL 26 M 219 mm or shorter the registrasize <0-63> * Postcard is suption section Short ALL 26 M ported only for JPN (Bypass feed- size <0-63> model. ing/Thick paper 1) ALL 17 M Paper aligning Long size <0-63> amount adjustment at Middle ALL 17 M the registrasize <0-63> tion section Short ALL 17 M (Bypass feed- size <0-63> ing/Thick paper 2) ALL 17 M Paper aligning Long size <0-63> amount adjustment at Middle ALL 17 M the registrasize <0-63> tion section Short ALL 17 M (Bypass feed- size <0-63> ing/Thick Post ALL 14 M paper 3) card <0-63> ALL 26 M Paper aligning Long size <0-63> amount adjustment at Middle ALL 26 M the registrasize <0-63> tion section Short ALL 26 M (Bypass feed- size <0-63> ing/OHP film) ALL 143 M When the value Adjustment of Plain paper <0-255> increases by 1, the paper pushdriving speed of bypass ing amount / Post card ALL 173 M feed roller increases by Bypass feed<0-255> approx. 0.2 ms when ing Thick ALL 143 M the paper transport is paper 1 <0-255> started from the regisThick ALL 143 M tration section. paper 2 <0-255> * Post card is supThick ALL 143 M ported only for JPN paper 3 <0-255> model. OHP film ALL 128 M <0-255>

Procedur e 4 4 4

4 4 4

4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 70 07/11

Code 467

Classification Paper feeding

468-0 468-1 468-2 469-0

Finisher

Paper feeding

469-1

469-2

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Adjustment of paper pushALL 128 M When the value ing amount/Duplex feed<0-255> increases by 1, the ing (short size) driving speed of ADU transport roller increases by approx. 0.2 ms when the paper transport is started from the registration section. A4-R/LT-R ALL 0 M When the value Fine adjust<-14-14> increases by 1, the ment of bindbinding/folding position ing position/ B4 ALL 0 M shifts toward the right folding posi<-14-14> page by 0.25 mm. tion A3/LD ALL 0 M <-14-14> ALL 20 M When the value Paper aligning Thick Paper 1 <0-63> increases by "1", the amount aligning amount adjustment at Long size increases by approx. the registra0.8 mm. tion section ALL 20 M Thick <Paper length> (Upper <0-63> Paper 1 Long size: drawer) Middle 330 mm or longer size Middle size: Thick ALL 20 M 220 mm to 329 mm Paper 1 <0-63> Short size: Short 219 mm or shorter size Thick Paper 2 Long size Thick Paper 2 Middle size Thick Paper 2 Short size Long size Middle size Short size Long size Middle size Short size ALL 20 <0-63> M

Procedur e 1

4 4 4 4

469-3

469-4

ALL

22 <0-63>

469-5

ALL

19 <0-63>

470-0 470-1 470-2

Paper feeding

471-0 471-1 471-2

Paper feeding

Paper aligning amount adjustment at the registration section (Lower drawer / Thick paper 1) Paper aligning amount adjustment at the registration section (PFP upper drawer / Thick paper 1)

ALL ALL ALL

20 <0-63> 22 <0-63> 19 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 22 <0-63> 19 <0-63>

M M M

4 4 4

ALL ALL ALL

M M M

4 4 4

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 71 07/11

Code 472-0 472-1 472-2

Classification Paper feeding

473

Paper feeding

474-0 474-1 474-2

Paper feeding

497-0 497-1 497-2 497-3 497-4 497-5 498-0 498-1

Laser

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> ALL 20 M When the value Paper aligning Long size <0-63> increases by "1", the amount aligning amount adjustment at Middle ALL 22 M increases by approx. the registrasize <0-63> 0.8 mm. tion section Short ALL 19 M <Paper length> (PFP lower size <0-63> Long size: drawer / Thick 330 mm or longer paper 1) Middle size: ALL 8 M Paper aligning amount 220 mm to 329 mm adjustment at the registra<0-63> Short size: tion section (LCF / Thick 219 mm or shorter paper 1) Paper aligning Long ALL 24 M amount size <0-63> adjustment at Middle ALL 24 M the registrasize <0-63> tion section Short ALL 33 M (Duplex feed- size <0-63> ing / Thick paper 1) ALL 128 M When the value Adjustment of Upper drawer <0-255> increases by 1, the drawer sideimage shifts toward the ways deviaLower ALL 128 M front side by 0.0423 tion drawer <0-255> mm. PFP upper ALL 128 M drawer PFP lower drawer LCF Bypass feeding Long size Short size(A4/LT or smaller) Photo Text/Photo Text Text/Photo Photo Text ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 148 <0-255> 148 <0-255> M M M M M When the value increases by 1, the image shifts toward the front side by 0.0423 mm.

Procedur e 4 4 4

4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Laser

501 503 504 505 506 507

Image

Adjustment of primary scanning laser writing start position at duplex feeding Density adjustment Fine adjustment of manual density /Center value Density adjustment Fine adjustment of manual density /Light step value

PPC PPC PPC PPC PPC PPC

Image

128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255>

SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS

When the value increases, the image at the center step becomes darker.

1 1 1

When the value increases, the image of the light steps becomes lighter.

1 1 1

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 72 07/11

Code 508

Classification Image

509

510

512 514 515 532 533 534 570

Image

Image

Image

571

572

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Text/Photo PPC EUR: 20 SYS When the value Density UC: 20 increases, the image of adjustment JPN : 30 the dark steps Fine adjust<0-255> becomes darker. ment of manual density Photo PPC EUR: 24 SYS /Dark step UC: 24 value JPN: 24 <0-255> Text PPC EUR: 20 SYS UC: 20 JPN: 27 <0-255> Photo PPC 128 SYS When the value Density <0-255> increases, the image adjustment Fine adjustText/Photo PPC 128 SYS becomes darker. ment of auto<0-255> matic density Text PPC 128 SYS <0-255> Range correc- Text/Photo PPC 40 SYS When the value tion / Back<0-255> increases, the background peak Photo PPC 16 SYS ground becomes more adjustment brightened. <0-255> Text PPC 64 SYS <0-255> EUR: 12 SYS Sets whether the valRange correc- Text/Photo PPC ues of the background UC: 12 tion on origipeak and text peak are JPN: 22 nal manually fixed or not. Ones <11-14, set on the place is an adjustment 21-24, original glass for automatic density 31-34, and tens place is for 41-44> SYS manual density.Once Photo PPC 12 they are fixed, the <11-14, range correction is per21-24, formed with standard 31-34, values. The values of 41-44> SYS the background peak Text PPC 22 and text peak affect the <11-14, reproduction of the 21-24, background density 31-34, and text density 41-44> respectively. Background peak Text peak 1: fixed/fixed 2: varied/fixed 3: fixed/varied 4: varied

Procedur e 1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 73 07/11

Code 593 594 595

Classification Image Image Image

596-0 596-1 596-2 597-0 597-1 597-2 598-0 598-1 598-2 599-0 599-1 599-2 620

Image Image Image Image Image Image Image Image Image Image Image Image Image

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default ProFunc- <AcceptItems RAM Contents cedur tion able e value> 1 Gamma data Text/Photo PPC 0 SYS Ones place: slope adjust<0-99> 0:Equivalent to the set ment value 5 Photo PPC 0 SYS 1 1 to 9: Select the slope <0-99> of Gamma curve Text PPC 0 SYS 1 (The larger the <0-99> value is, the larger the slope becomes.) Tens place: 0: Equivalent to the set value 5 1 to 9: Select the slope of low density (The smaller the value is, the darker the background becomes.) 00: Use default value 4 Low PRT 128 SYS When the value Gamma baldensity <0-255> increases, the density ance adjustment Medium PRT 128 SYS in the target area 4 becomes higher. (PS/Photo) density <0-255> High density Low density Medium density High density Low density Medium density High density Low density Medium density High density Text/Photo PRT PRT PRT PRT PRT PRT PRT PRT PRT PRT PPC 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 1 <0-99> SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS When the value increases, the image becomes sharper. When the value decreases, the image becomes softer. The smaller the value is, the less the moire becomes.Ones place: Fixed value (05-620 is 1, 05-621 is 2, 05622 is 5) Tens place: Sharpness intensity (0: Use default value, 1-9: Filter intensity) When the value increases, the density in the target area becomes higher. When the value increases, the density in the target area becomes higher. When the value increases, the density in the target area becomes higher. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1

Gamma balance adjustment (PS/Text)

Gamma balance adjustment (PCL/Photo)

Adjustment of gamma balance (PCL/Detail)

Sharpness adjustment

621

Photo

PPC

2 <0-99>

SYS

622

Text

PPC

EUR: 45 UC: 45 JPN: 45 <0-99>

SYS

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 74 07/11

Code 648

Classification Image

654 655

Image

672-0 672-1 672-2 672-3 672-4 676-0 676-1 676-2 676-3 676-4

Image

Image

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Adjustment of Text/Photo PPC 208 SYS Adjusts the level of the smudged/faint <0-255> smudged/faint text text.With increasing the value, the faint text is suppressed, and with decreasing it, the smudged text is suppressed. PS PRT 5 SYS Adjustment of the Adjustment of smudged/faint <0-9> smudged/faint text PCL PRT 5 SYS text.With decreasing the value, the faint text <0-9> is suppressed, and with increasing it, the smudged text is suppressed. PRT 0 M Adjustment of the Adjustment of Normal <0-10> image density.With printer image decreasing the value, density PRT 4 M the text becomes <0-10> lighter. PRT 5 M <0-10> PRT 6 M <0-10> PRT 10 M <0-10> Toner PRT 0 M saving <0-10> PRT 4 M <0-10> PRT 5 M <0-10> PRT 6 M <0-10> PRT 6 M <0-10>

Procedur e 1

1 1

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 75 07/11

Code 693

Classification Image

694

695

700

Image

701

702

710

Image

714 715 Image

719

720

Image

724

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default ProFunc- <AcceptItems RAM Contents cedur tion able e value> 1 Range correc- Text/Photo PPC EUR: 12 SYS Sets whether the values of the background tion on origiUC: 12 peak and text peak are nal set on the JPN: 22 fixed or not. Ones RADF <11-14, place is an adjustment 21-24, for automatic density 31-34, and tens place is for 41-44> manual density. Once SYS they are fixed, the 1 Photo PPC 12 range correction is per<11-14, formed with standard 21-24, values. 31-34, The values of the back41-44> ground peak and text peak affect the reproduction of the backSYS ground density and text 1 Text PPC 22 density respectively. <11-14, 1: fixed/fixed 21-24, 2: varied/fixed 31-34, 3: fixed/varied 41-44> 4: varied/varied * Background peak/ Text peak Adjustment of Center FAX 120 SYS When the value 1 binarized value <0-255> increases, the image at threshold the center step (Text) becomes lighter. Light step FAX 20 SYS When the value 1 value <0-255> increases, the image of light side becomes lighter. Dark step FAX 20 SYS When the value 1 value <0-255> increases, the image of dark side becomes darker. Density Photo FAX 128 SYS When the value 1 adjustment <0-255> increases, the image at Fine adjustthe center step ment of man- Text/Photo FAX 128 SYS becomes darker. 1 ual density/ <0-255> Center value Photo FAX 20 SYS When the value 1 Density <0-255> increases, the image of adjustment the light steps Fine adjustment of man- Text/Photo FAX 20 SYS becomes lighter. 1 ual density/ <0-255> Light step value Photo FAX 20 SYS When the value 1 Density <0-255> increases, the image of adjustment the dark steps Fine adjustment of man- Text/Photo FAX 20 SYS becomes darker. 1 ual density/ <0-255> Dark step value

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 76 07/11

Code 725

Classification Image

729

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Photo FAX 128 SYS When the value Density <0-255> increases, the image adjustment becomes darker. Fine adjustment of auto- Text/Photo FAX 128 SYS matic density <0-255> Range correc- Text/Photo tion on original manually set on the original glass SCN 12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> SYS Sets whether the values of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not. Ones place is an adjustment for automatic density and tens place is for manual density. Once they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak and text peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text density respectively. 1: fixed/fixed 2: varied/fixed 3: fixed/varied 4: varied/varied * Background peak/ Text peak Sets whether the value of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not. Ones place is an adjustment for automatic density and tens place is for manual density. Once they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak and text peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text density respectively. 1: fixed/fixed 2: varied/fixed 3: fixed/varied 4: varied/varied * Background peak/ Text peak

Procedur e 1

825

Image

826

Text

SCN

12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44>

SYS

827

Photo

SCN

12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44>

SYS

830

Image

Range correc- Text/Photo tion on original set on the RADF Text

SCN

831

SCN

832

Photo

SCN

12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> 12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> 12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44>

SYS

SYS

SYS

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 77 07/11

Code 835 836 837 845 846 847 850 851 852 855 856 857

Classification Image

Image

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Range correc- Text/Photo SCN 48 SYS When the value tion / Back<0-255> increases, the background peak Text SCN 48 SYS ground becomes more adjustment brightened. <0-255> Photo SCN 40 SYS <0-255> Density Text/Photo SCN 128 SYS When the value adjustment <0-255> increases, the image at Fine adjustText SCN 128 SYS the center step becomes darker. ment of man<0-255> ual density/ Photo SCN 128 SYS Center value <0-255> Density adjustment Fine adjustment of manual density/ Light step value Density adjustment Fine adjustment of manual density/ adjustment/ Dark step value Density adjustment Fine adjustment of automatic density Text/Photo Text Photo Text/Photo Text Photo SCN SCN SCN SCN SCN SCN 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS When the value increases, the image of the dark steps becomes darker. When the value increases, the image of the light steps becomes lighter.

Procedur e 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Image

Image

860 861 862

Image

Text/Photo Text Photo

SCN SCN SCN

SYS SYS SYS

When the value increases, the image becomes darker.

1 1 1

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 78 07/11

Code 865-0

Classification Image

865-1

865-2

866-0

Image

866-1

866-2

867-0

Image

867-1

867-2

913

Image

914

Image

915

Image

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default ProFunc- <AcceptItems RAM Contents cedur tion able e value> 4 Sharpnessad- Reproduc- SCN 1 SYS When the value justment(Text/ tion ratio <0-99> increases, the image Photo) 40% or becomes sharper. smaller When the value Reproduc- SCN 1 SYS decreases, the image 4 becomes softer. The tion ratio <0-99> smaller the value is, the 41-80% 1 SYS less the moire 4 Reproduc- SCN becomes. tion ratio <0-99> Ones place: Fixed 81% or value (05-865 is 1, larger 05-866 is 2, 05-867 is Sharpnessad- Reproduc- SCN 2 SYS 5) Tens place: Sharp4 <0-99> justment(Text) tion ratio ness intensity (0: Use 40% or default value, 1-9: Filter smaller intensity) 2 SYS 4 Reproduc- SCN <0-99> tion ratio 41-80% Reproduc- SCN 2 SYS 4 tion ratio <0-99> 81% or larger Sharpnessad- Reproduc- SCN 5 SYS 4 justtion ratio <0-99> ment(Photo) 40% or smaller Reproduc- SCN 5 SYS 4 tion ratio <0-99> 41-80% Reproduc- SCN 5 SYS 4 tion ratio <0-99> 81% or larger 1 Custom PPC EUR: 12 SYS Set whether the values Range correcof the background peak Mode 1 UC: 12 tion on origiand text peak are fixed JPN: 22 nal manually or not. One's place is <11-14, set on the an adjustment for 21-24, original glass automatic density and 31-34, ten's place is for man41-44> SYS ual density. Once they 1 Custom PPC 22 are fixed, the range Mode 2 <11-14, correction is per21-24, formed with standard 31-34, values. 41-44> SYS The values of the back1 Custom PPC 12 ground peak and text Mode 3 <11-14, peak affect the repro21-24, duction of the back31-34, ground density and text 41-44> density respectively. 1: fixed/fixed 2: varied/fixed 3: fixed/varied 4: varied/varied * Background peak/ Text peak

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 79 07/11

Code 916

Classification Image

917

Image

918

Image

919 920 921 922 923

Image Image Image Image Image

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default ProFunc- <AcceptItems RAM Contents cedur tion able e value> 1 Range correcCustom PPC EUR: 12 SYS Set whether the values of the background peak tion on origiMode 1 UC: 12 and text peak are fixed nal set on the JPN: 22 or not. One's place is RADF <11-14, an adjustment for 21-24, automatic density and 31-34, ten's place is for man41-44> SYS ual density. Once they 1 Custom PPC 22 are fixed, the range Mode 2 <11-14, correction is per21-24, formed with standard 31-34, values. 41-44> Custom PPC 12 SYS The values of the back1 ground peak and text Mode 3 <11-14, peak affect the repro21-24, duction of the back31-34, ground density and text 41-44> density respectively. 1: fixed/fixed 2: varied/fixed 3: fixed/varied 4: varied/varied * Background peak/ Text peak Range correcCustom PPC 40 SYS When the value 1 tion BackMode 1 <0-255> increases, the background peak Custom PPC 64 SYS ground becomes more 1 adjustment brightened. Mode 2 <0-255> Custom Mode 3 Custom Mode 1 Custom Mode 2 PPC PPC PPC 16 <0-255> 1 <0-99> EUR: 45 UC: 45 JPN: 45 <0-99> 2 <0-99> SYS SYS SYS When the value increases, the image becomes sharper. When the value decreases, the image becomes softer. The smaller the value is, the less the moire becomes. One's place: Fixed value (05-922 is "1", 05-923 is "5", 05-924 is "2")Ten's place: Sharpness intensity(0: Use default value, 1-9: Filter intensity) Adjustment of the smudged/faint text. With increasing the value, the faint text is suppressed, and with decreasing it, the smudged text is suppressed. 1 1 1

Sharpness adjustment

924

Image

Custom Mode 3

PPC

SYS

928

Image

Adjustment of smudged/faint text

Custom Mode 1

PPC

2 <0-4>

SYS

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 80 07/11

Code 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943

Classification Image Image Image Image

Image

Image

Image

944

945

976

Maintenance

Adjustment mode (05) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Density Custom PPC 128 SYS When the value adjustment Mode 1 <0-255> increases, the image of Fine adjustCustom PPC 128 SYS the center step ment of "manbecomes darker. Mode 2 <0-255> ual density"/ Custom PPC 128 SYS Center value Mode 3 <0-255> Custom PPC 20 SYS When the value Density Mode 1 <0-255> increases, the image of adjustment Fine adjustCustom PPC 20 SYS the "light" step density becomes lighter. ment of "manMode 2 <0-255> ual density"/ Custom PPC 20 SYS Light step Mode 3 <0-255> value Custom PPC 20 SYS When the value Density Mode 1 <0-255> increases, the image of adjustment Fine adjustCustom PPC 20 SYS the "Dark" step density becomes lighter. ment of "manMode 2 <0-255> ual density"/ Custom PPC 20 SYS Dark step Mode 3 <0-255> value Custom PPC 128 SYS When the value Density Mode 1 <0-255> increases, the image adjustment Fine adjustCustom PPC 128 SYS becomes darker. ment of "autoMode 2 <0-255> matic density" Custom PPC 128 SYS Mode 3 <0-255> Custom PPC 0 SYS Ones place: Gamma data Mode 1 <0-99> 0: Equivalent to the set slope adjustvalue 5 ment 1 to 9: Select the slope of Gammacurve (The larger the value is, the Custom PPC 0 SYS larger the slope becomes.) Mode 2 <0-99> Tens place: 0: Equivalent to the set value 5 1 to 9: Select the slope Custom PPC 0 SYS of low density (The smaller the value is, the Mode 3 <0-99> darker the background becomes.) 00: Use default value Equipment number (serial ALL SYS When this adjustment number) entry is performed with this code, the setting code (08-995) is also performed automatically (10 digits)

Procedur e 1 1

2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 81 07/11

2.2.7

Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO350/450)

The items in the setting code list can be set or changed in this setting mode (08).

Procedure 1
[CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [Digital key] *[FUNCTION CLEAR] Sets or changes value [ENTER] [POWER] OFF/ON or (Exit) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM)

[CLEAR] (Corrects value)

* Procedure 2
[0][8] [POWER]

Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).

[Digital key] (Code)

[START]

[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] Adjustment value cannot be changed

[POWER]OFF/ON (Exit)

Procedure 3
[0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [ENTER] or (Automatic setting) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM) [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]

Procedure 4
[CANCEL] [START] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [Digital key] (Sub-code) [START] [ENTER] or [Digital key] [INTERRUPT] * [FUNCTION CLEAR] (Stores value Sets or in RAM) changes value [CLEAR] (Corrects value) [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

[CLEAR] (Corrects value)

Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 82 05/12

Procedure 5
[CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [Digital key] *[HELP] Sets or changes value [ENTER] [POWER] OFF/ON or (Exit) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM)

[CLEAR] (Corrects value)

* Procedure 7

Press [HELP] to enter "-".

[CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [Digital key] (Setting)

[ENTER] or (HDD formatting) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM)

[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

[CLEAR] (Corrects value)

Procedure 9
[CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [ENTER] [POWER] OFF/ON or (Exit) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM) [CLEAR] (Corrects value)

[Select icon]

Procedure 10
[CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [Digital key] (1st setting) [START] [Digital key] (2nd setting) [POWER] [ENTER] or OFF/ON [INTERRUPT] (Exit) (Stores value in RAM) [CLEAR] (Corrects value)

[CLEAR] (Corrects value)

Procedure 11 and 12
[CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [Digital key] or [ENTER] [START] [Software keyboard] *2(Stores value in RAM) *1 [MONITOR/PAUSE] Sets or changes value [CLEAR] (Corrects value)

[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

*1 Press [MONITOR/PAUSE] to enter "-", when entering telephone number. *2 The data are stored in SYS-RAM in procedure 11 and stored in NIC-RAM in procedure 12.

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 83

Procedure 14
[CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [Digital key] (Sub-code) [START] [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] Adjustment value cannot be changed [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

[CLEAR] (Corrects value)

Notes: 1. The digit after the hyphen in Code of the following table is a sub code. 2. e-STUDIO350/450: In "RAM", the NVRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated. "M" stands for the LGC board, "SYS" and "UTY" stands for the SYS board and "NIC" stands for the NIC board.
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Date and time setting ALL <13 digits>

Code 200

Classification General

Contents Year/month/date/day/ hour/minute/second Example: 03 07 0 13 13 27 48 Day - 0 is for Sunday. Proceeds Monday through Saturday from 1 to 6. 0: EUR 1: UC 2: JPN 0: No external counter 1: Coin controller 2: Copy key card (This value is valid only when 2 is set to 08-201.) 3: Key copy counter 0: For factory shipment 1: For line * Field: 0 must be selected Timer to return the equipment to the default settings when the [START] button is not pressed after the function and the mode are set 0: Not cleared 1 to 10: Set number x 15 sec.

Procedur e 5

201

General

Destination selection

ALL

202

User interface

Counter installed externally

ALL

EUR: 0 UC: 1 JPN: 2 <0-2> 0 <0-3>

203

General

Line adjustment mode

ALL

0 <0-1>

204

User interface

Auto-clear timer setting

ALL

3 <0-10>

SYS

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 84 07/05

Code 205

Classification User interface

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> SYS Auto power save mode ALL EUR: 11 timer setting UC: 11 JPN: 6 Others:11 <0, 6-15>

Contents Timer to automatically switch to the Auto power save mode when the equipment has not been used 0: Invalid 6: 3min. 7: 4min. 8: 5min. 9: 7min. 10: 10min. 11: 15min. 12: 20min. 13: 30min. 14: 45min. 15: 60min. Timer to turn OFF the power or to enter the Sleep Mode automatically when the equipment has not been used 0: 3min. 1: 5min. 2: 10min. 3: 15min. 4: 20min. 5: 25min. 6: 30min. 7: 40min. 8: 50min. 9: 60min. 10: 70min.11: 80min. 12: 90min. 13: 100min. 14: 110min. 15: 120min. 16: 150min. 17:180min. 18: 210min. 19:240min. 20: Not used <Default value> e-STUDIO350 JPN: 0 UC, EUR: 9 Others: 9 e-STUDIO450 JPN: 0 UC, EUR: 12 Others: 12 0: Black letter on white background 1: White letter on black background 0: TIFF (Multi) 1: PDF

Procedur e 1

206

User interface

Auto Shut Off Mode timer setting (Auto Shut Off Mode / Sleep Mode)

ALL

Refer to content <0-20>

SYS

207

User interface

Highlighting display on LCD

ALL

0 <0-1>

SYS

209 210

User interface Paper feeding

Default setting of filing format when E-mailing Paper size (A6-R) feeding/width wise direction Tab paper print Tab width setting (Bypass feeding) Tab paper print Tab width setting (Bypass feeding) Default setting of filing format when storing files

ALL PRT

216

Paper feeding Paper feeding User interface

ALL

217 219

ALL SCN

1 <0-1> 148/105 <148432/105297> 130 <100200> 1300 <0-3000> 0 <0-3>

SYS M

1 10

SYS

SYS SYS 0: TIFF (Multi) 1: PDF 2: Not used 3: TIFF (Single)

1 1

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 85 04/09

Code 220

Classification User interface

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Language displayed at ALL EUR: 0 SYS power-ON UC: 0 JPN: 5 <0-6>

Contents 0: Language 1 1: Language 2 2: Language 3 3: Language 4 4: Language 5 5: Language 6 6: Language 7 0: Language 1 1: Language 2 2: Language 3 3: Language 4 4: Language 5 5: Language 6 6: Language 7 Press the button on the LCD to select the size. Press the button on the LCD to select the size. Press the button on the LCD to select the size. Press the button on the LCD to select the size.

Procedur e 1

221

User interface

Language selection in UI data at Web power ON

ALL

EUR: 0 UC: 0 JPN: 5 <0-6>

SYS

224 225

Paper feeding Paper feeding Paper feeding Paper feeding

Paper size for bypass feed Paper size for upper drawer Paper size for lower drawer Paper size for PFP upper drawer

PPC ALL

UNDEF EUR: A4 UC: LT JPN: A4 EUR: A3 UC: LD JPN: A3 EUR: A4-R UC: LT-R JPN: A4-R EUR: A4 UC: LG JPN: B4 420/297 <182432/140297> 297/210 <182432/140297> 210/148 <182432/140297> 364/257 <182432/140297> 257/182 <182432/140297> 279/216 <182432/140297>

SYS M

9 9

226

ALL

227

ALL

228

Paper feeding Paper feeding

Paper size for PFP lower drawer Paper size (A3) feeding/width wise direction Paper size (A4-R) feeding/width wise direction Paper size (A5-R) feeding/width wise direction Paper size (B4) feeding/width wise direction Paper size (B5-R) feeding/width wise direction Paper size (LT-R) feeding/width wise direction

ALL

Press the button on the LCD to select the size.

229

ALL

10

230

Paper feeding

ALL

10

231

Paper feeding

ALL

10

232

Paper feeding

ALL

10

233

Paper feeding

ALL

10

234

Paper feeding

ALL

10

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 86 04/09

Code 235

Classification Paper feeding

236

Paper feeding

237

Paper feeding

238

Paper feeding

239

Paper feeding

240

Paper feeding

241

Paper feeding

242

Paper feeding

243

Paper feeding

244

Paper feeding

245

Paper feeding

247

Paper feeding

248

Paper feeding

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Paper size (LD) ALL 432/279 M feeding/width wise direc<182tion 432/140297> Paper size (LG) ALL 356/216 M feeding/width wise direc<182tion 432/140297> Paper size (ST-R) ALL 216/140 M feeding/width wise direc<182tion 432/140297> Paper size (COMPUTER) ALL 356/257 M feeding/width wise direc<182tion 432/140297> Paper size (FOLIO) ALL 330/210 M feeding/width wise direc<182tion 432/140297> ALL 330/216 M Paper size (13LG) <182feeding/width wise direc432/140tion 297> ALL 216/216 M Paper size (8.5X8.5) <182feeding/width wise direc432/140tion 297> ALL 432/279 SYS Paper size (Non-standard) <148feeding/width wise direc432/105tion 297> ALL 148/100 SYS Memory 1 <148Paper size (bypass feed432/100ing/non-standard type) 297> feeding/width wise direction Paper size (8K) ALL 390/270 M feeding/width wise direc<182tion 432/140297> Paper size (16K-R) ALL 270/195 M feeding/width wise direc<182tion 432/140297> ALL 148/100 SYS Memory 2 <148Paper size (bypass feed432/100ing/non-standard type) 297> feeding/width wise direction Memory 3 ALL 148/100 SYS Paper size (bypass feed<148ing/non-standard type) 432/100feeding/width wise direc297> tion

Contents

Procedur e 10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

Registers the paper size of bypass feed (non-standard type) into [MEMORY 1].

10

10

10

Registers the paper size of bypass feed (non-standard type) into [MEMORY 2]. Registers the paper size of bypass feed (non-standard type) into [MEMORY 3].

10

10

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 87 04/09

Code 249

Classification Paper feeding

250

Maintenance

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> ALL 148/100 SYS Memory 4 <148Paper size (bypass feed432/100ing/non-standard type) 297> feeding/width wise direction Service technician teleALL 0 SYS phone number <32 digits>

Contents Registers the paper size of bypass feed (non-standard type) into [MEMORY 4]. A telephone number can be entered up to 32 digits. Use the [MONITOR/ PAUSE] button to enter a hyphen(-). <Default> e-STUDIO350 UC, EUR: 120000 JPN: 0 e-STUDIO450 UC, EUR: 150000 JPN: 0 Counts up when the registration sensor is ON. Displays the latest 20 errors data Sets whether the data is printed on the different but similar size paper or not when the paper of corresponding size is not available. 0: Valid (The data is printed on A4/A3 when LT/LD is selected or vice versa.) 1: Invalid (The message to use the selected paper size is displayed.) 0: Automatic 1: PFP single-drawer type installed 2: PFP dual-drawer type installed 3: LCF installed 4: Not installed Press the icon on the LCD to select the size. 1: Electrical counter -> Backup counter 2: Backup counter -> Electrical counter (P. 2-241)

Procedur e 10

11

251

Maintenance

Setting value of PM counter

ALL

Refer to content <8 digits>

252

Maintenance Maintenance Paper feeding

Current value of PM counter Display/0 clearing Error history display LTA4/LDA3

ALL

0 <8 digits> 0 <0-1>

253 254

ALL PRT

SYS SYS

2 1

255

Paper feeding

PFP/LCF installation

ALL

0 <0-4>

256

Paper feeding Counter

Paper size setting /LCF

ALL

257

Counter copy

ALL

EUR: A4 UC: LT JPN: A4 <1-2>

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 88 06/01

Code 258

Classification Maintenance

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> FSMS acceptance ALL 1 SYS <0-2>

Contents Sets whether the FSMS connection is accepted or not. 0: Prohibited 1: Accepted (serial connection only) 2: Accepted (both serial and USB connections) 0: No limits 1 to 30: 1 to 30 days When a certain period of time has passed without operation after accessing TopAccess, the data being registered is automatically reset. This period is set at this code. (Unit: Minute) The password can be entered in alphabets and figures (A-Z, a-z and 0-9) within 10 digits. 0: No limits 1 to 999: 1 to 999 days 2 to 30 M bytes 2 to 30 M bytes Sets the file retention level when editing the files in the Electronic Filing (at CutDoc/SaveDoc command execution). 0: Not full retained 1: Fully retained Retains the source file until CutDoc/SaveDoc command is completed. * The file is not deleted even if the HDD has become full during the execution of command when "1" is set. Sets the data retention period when creating a user box. 0: Not deleted 1 to 999: Retention period (Unit: Day)

Procedur e 1

259 260

Network Network

Storage period at trail and private Web data retention period

PRT SCN

14 <0-30> 10 <3 digits>

SYS SYS

1 1

263

User interface

Administrator's password (Maximum 10 digits)

ALL

123456 <10 digits>

11

264 265 266 267

Network Network Network Electronic filing

File retention period Maximum data capacity at E-mailing Maximum data capacity at Internet FAX Full guarantee of documents in Electronic Filing when HDD is full

SCN SCN ALL ALL

30 <0-999> 30 <2-30> 30 <2-30> 0 <0-1>

SYS SYS SYS SYS

1 1 1 1

270

Electronic filing

Default setting of user box retention period

ALL

0 <0-999>

SYS

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 89 05/11

Code 271

Classification General

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Warning display of the ALL 90 SYS HDD capacity to be filled <0-100>

Contents Sets the percentage of the HDD capacity filled which warning is displayed 0 to 100: 0 to 100% Sets the days left the notification of E-mail saving time limit appears 0 to 99: 0 to 99 days Sets the default value for the partial size of Email to be transmitted when creating a template. 0: Not divided 1: 64 2: 128 3: 256 4: 512 5: 1024 6: 2048 (Unit: KB) Sets the default value for the page by page of Internet FAX to be transmitted when creating a template. 0: Not divided 1: 256 2: 512 3: 1024 4: 2048 (Unit: KB) 0: Automatic density 1: Step -5 2: Step -4 3: Step -3 4: Step -2 5: Step -1 6: Step 0 (center) 7: Step +1 8: Step +2 9: Step +3 10: Step +4 11: Step +5 (1 to 11: Manual density) 0: 150 dpi 1: 200 dpi 2: 300 dpi3: 400dpi 4: 600 dpi 0: Text 1: Text/Photo 2: Photo 0: Single 1: Book 2: Tablet 0: 0 degree 1: 90 degrees 2: 180 degrees 3: 270 degrees

Procedur e 1

272

Scanning Notification setting of Email saving time limit

ALL

3 <0-99>

SYS

273

Scanning Default setting of partial size when transmitting Email

ALL

0 <0-6>

SYS

274

FAX

Default setting of page by page when transmitting Internet FAX

ALL

0 <0-4>

SYS

276

User interface

Default setting of density adjustment

SCN

0 <0-11>

SYS

281

User interface

Default setting of resolution

SCN

1 <0-4>

SYS

283

User interface User interface User interface

Default setting of original mode Default setting of scanning mode Default setting of rotation mode

SCN

0 <0-2> 0 <0-2> 0 <0-3>

SYS

284

SCN

SYS

285

SCN

SYS

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 90 05/11

Code 286

Classification User interface

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Default setting of original SCN 0 SYS paper size <0-22>

Contents 0: Automatic 1: A3 2: A4 3: LD 4: LT 5: A4-R 6: A5-R 7: LT-R 8: LG 9: B4 10: B5 11: ST-R 12: COMP 13: B5-R 14: FOLIO 15: 13"LG 16: 8.5"x 8.5" 18: A6-R 19: Size mixed20: 8K 21: 16K 22: 16K-R Sets the search interval of expired files. Deletes if expired file is found. (Unit: Hour) 0: Valid 1: Invalid 0: LD 1: LG 2: LT 3: COMP 4: ST 5: A3 6: A4 7: A5 8: A6 9: B4 10: B5 11: FOLIO 12: 13 "LG 13: 8.5" x 8.5" 0: Plain paper 1: Thick paper 1 2: Thick paper 2 3: Thick paper 3 4: OHP film 0: Portrait 1: Landscape 0: Valid 1: Invalid 0: Inner tray 1: Finisher tray 1 2: Finisher tray 2 3: Not used 4: Job Separator upper tray 5: Job Separator lower tray* The settings 4 and 5 are effective only when the Job Separator (MJ-5004) is installed. Sets the number of form lines from 5 to 128. (A hundredfold of the number of form lines is defined as the setting value.) Sets the font pitch from 0.44 to 99.99. (A hundredfold of the font pitch is defined as the setting value.)

Procedur e 1

288

General

Searching interval of deleting expired files

ALL

12 <1-24>

SYS

290 291

Network Network

Raw printing job (Duplex) Raw printing job (Paper size)

PRT PRT

1 <0-1> EUR: 6 UC: 2 JPN: 6 <0 -13>

SYS SYS

1 1

292

Network

Raw printing job (Paper type)

PRT

0 <0-4>

SYS

293 294 295

Network Network Network

Raw printing job (Paper direction) Raw printing job (Staple) Raw printing job (receiving tray)

PRT PRT PRT

0 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 0 <0-5>

SYS SYS SYS

1 1 1

296

Network

Raw printing job (Number of form lines)

PRT

1200 <50012800>

SYS

297

Network

Raw printing job (PCL font pitch)

PRT

1000 <449999>

SYS

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 91 04/05

Code 298

Classification Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Raw printing job PRT 1200 SYS (PCL font size) <40099975>

Contents Sets the font size from 4 to 999.75. (A hundredfold of the font size is defined as the setting value.) Sets the PCL font number. 0: 999 1: 99 2: 9 Sets whether the original counter is displayed or not. 0: Not displayed 2: Displayed Counts the output pages in the copier function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of largesized paper (08353).

Procedur e 1

299 300 302

Network User interface User interface

Raw printing job (PCL font number) Maximum number of copy volume (MAX9) Original counter display

PRT PPC PPC

0 <0-79> 0 <0-2> EUR: 2 UC: 0 JPN: 0 <0, 2> 0 <8 digits>

SYS SYS SYS

1 1 1

305-0 305-1 305-2 305-3 305-4 305-5 305-6 305-7 305-8 305-9 305-10 305-11 305-12 305-13 305-14 305-15 305-16 306-0 306-1 306-2 306-3 306-4 306-5 306-6 306-7 306-8 306-9 306-10 306-11 306-12 306-13 306-14 306-15 306-16

Counter

Counter

Number of A3 output pages A4 in copier func- A5 tion A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13LG 8.5 x 8.5 16K 8K Others Number of A3 output pages A4 in Printer A5 Function A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13LG 8.5 x 8.5 16K 8K Others

PPC

SYS

PRT

0 <8 digits>

SYS

Counts the output pages in the printer function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of largesized paper (08353).

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 92

Code 307-0 307-1 307-2 307-3 307-4 307-5 307-6 307-7 307-8 307-9 307-10 307-11 307-12 307-13 307-14 307-15 307-16 308-0 308-1 308-2 308-3 308-4 308-5 308-6 308-7 308-8 308-9 308-10 308-11 308-12 308-13 308-14 308-15 308-16

Classification Counter

Counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Number of A3 PRT 0 SYS output pages A4 <8 digits> at List Print A5 Mode A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13LG 8.5 x 8.5 16K 8K Others Number of A3 FAX 0 SYS output pages A4 <8 digits> in FAX Func- A5 tion A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13LG 8.5 x 8.5 16K 8K Others

Contents Counts the output pages at the List Print Mode for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of largesized paper (08353).

Procedur e 4

Counts the output pages in the FAX Function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08352) and the definition setting of largesized paper (08-353).

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 93

Code 312-0 312-1 312-2 312-3 312-4 312-5 312-6 312-7 312-8 312-9 312-10 312-11 312-12 312-13 312-14 312-15 312-16 313-0 313-1 313-2 313-3 313-4 313-5 313-6 313-7 313-8 313-9 313-10 313-11 313-12 313-13 313-14 313-15 313-16

Classification Counter

Counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> A3 PPC 0 SYS Number of <8 digits> scanning A4 pages in A5 Copier FuncA6 tion B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13LG 8.5 x 8.5 16K 8K Others A3 SCN 0 SYS Number of <8 digits> scanning A4 pages in A5 Scanning A6 Function B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13LG 8.5 x 8.5 16K 8K Others

Contents Counts the scanning pages in the Copier Function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of largesized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of largesized paper (08353).

Procedur e 4

Counts the scanning pages in the Scanning Function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of largesized paper (08353).

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 94

Code 314-0 314-1 314-2 314-3 314-4 314-5 314-6 314-7 314-8 314-9 314-10 314-11 314-12 314-13 314-14 314-15 314-16 315-0 315-1 315-2 315-3 315-4 315-5 315-6 315-7 315-8 315-9 315-10 315-11 315-12 315-13 315-14 315-15 315-16

Classification Counter

Counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Number of A3 FAX 0 SYS scanning <8 digits> A4 pages in FAX A5 Function A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13LG 8.5 x 8.5 16K 8K Others Number of A3 FAX 0 SYS transmitted <8 digits> A4 pages in FAX A5 Function A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13LG 8.5 x 8.5 16K 8K Others

Contents Counts the scanning pages in the FAX Function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08352) and the definition setting of largesized paper (08-353).

Procedur e 4

Counts the transmitted pages in the FAX Function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08352) and the definition setting of largesized paper (08-353).

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 95

Code 316-0 316-1 316-2 316-3 316-4 316-5 316-6 316-7 316-8 316-9 316-10 316-11 316-12 316-13 316-14 316-15 316-16 320-0 320-1 320-2

Classification Counter

Counter Counter Counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Number of A3 FAX 0 SYS received <8 digits> A4 pages in FAX A5 Function A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13LG 8.5 x 8.5 16K 8K Others Large PPC 0 SYS Display of <8 digits> number of output pages Small PPC 0 SYS in Copier <8 digits> Function Total PPC 0 SYS <8 digits>

Contents Counts the received pages in the FAX Function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08352) and the definition setting of largesized paper (08-353).

Procedur e 4

321-0 321-1 321-2

Counter Counter Counter

Display of number of output pages in Printer Function

Large Small Total

PRT PRT PRT

0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>

SYS SYS SYS

Counts the number of output pages in the Copier Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. Counts the number of output pages in the Printer Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes.

14 14 14

14 14 14

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 96

Code 322-0 322-1 322-2

Classification Counter Counter Counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Large PRT 0 SYS Display of <8 digits> number of output pages Small PRT 0 SYS at List Print <8 digits> Mode Total PRT 0 SYS <8 digits>

Contents Counts the number of output pages at the List Print Mode Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. Counts the number of output pages in the FAX Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. Counts the number of scanning pages in the Copier Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes.

Procedur e 14 14

2
14

323-0 323-1 323-2

Counter Counter Counter

Display of number of output pages in FAX Function

Large Small Total

FAX FAX FAX

0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>

SYS SYS SYS

14 14 14

327-0 327-1 327-2

Counter Counter Counter

Display of number of scanning pages in Copier Function

Large Small Total

PPC PPC PPC

0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>

SYS SYS SYS

14 14 14

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 97

Code 328-0 328-1 328-2

Classification Counter Counter Counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Large FAX 0 SYS Display of <8 digits> number of scanning Small FAX 0 SYS pages in FAX <8 digits> Function Total FAX 0 SYS <8 digits>

Contents Counts the number of scanning pages in the FAX Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. Counts the number of scanning pages in the Scanning Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. Counts the number of transmitted pages in the FAX Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes.

Procedur e 14 14 14

329-0 329-1 329-2

Counter Counter Counter

Display of number of scanning pages in Scanning Function

Large Small Total

SCN SCN SCN

0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>

SYS SYS SYS

14 14 14

330-0 330-1 330-2

Counter Counter Counter

Display of number of transmitted pages in FAX Function

Large Small Total

FAX FAX FAX

0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>

SYS SYS SYS

14 14 14

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 98

Code 331

Classification User interface

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Default setting of screen ALL 0 SYS <0-3>

Contents Sets the screen to be displayed after the auto-clear time has passed or it has recovered from the energy saving mode or sleep mode. 0: Copier 1: Fax 2: Scan 3: Box Counts the number of received pages in the FAX Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. Displays the total number of pages in the Copier/Printer/Scanning/FAX Functions.

Procedur e 1

332-0 332-1 332-2

Counter Counter Counter

Display of number of received pages in FAX Function

Large Small Total

FAX FAX FAX

0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>

SYS SYS SYS

14 14 14

335-0 335-1 335-2 344 346 347

Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter

Display of total number of pages

Large Small Total

ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

Count setting of tab paper (PM) Count setting of largesized paper (PM) Definition setting of largesized paper (PM) Count setting of thick paper (PM) Count setting of OHP film (PM) Count setting of largesized paper (Fee charging system counter)

0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> JPN: 0 OTHER: 1 <0-2> 0 <0-1> 0 <8 digits>

SYS SYS SYS M M M

14 14 14

348 349 352

Counter Counter Counter

ALL ALL ALL

M M M

353

Counter

356

Counter

Definition setting of largesized paper (Fee charging system counter) Counter for upper drawer feeding

ALL

ALL

Counted as 1 Counted as 2 Counted as 1 Counted as 2 A3/LD A3/LD/B4/LG/ FOLIO/COMP 0: Counted as 1 1: Counted as 2 0: Counted as 1 1: Counted as 2 0: Counted as 1 1: Counted as 2 2: Counted as 1 (Mechanical counter is double counter) 0: A3/LD 1: A3/LD/B4/LG/ FOLIO/COMP/8k Counts the number of sheets fed from upper drawer

0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1:

1 1 1

1 1 1

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 99 04/10

Code 357

Classification Counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Counter for lower drawer ALL 0 M feeding <8 digits> Counter for bypass feeding ALL 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 1 <0-7> M

Contents Counts the number of sheets fed from lower drawer Counts the number of sheets fed from bypass feed Counts the number of sheets fed from LCF Counts the number of sheets fed from PFP upper drawer Counts the number of sheets fed from PFP lower drawer Counts the number of output pages of duplex printing. Counts the number of originals fed from RADF Selects the job to count up for the external counter. 0: Not selected 1: Copier 2: FAX 3: Copier/FAX 4: Printer 5: Copier/Printer 6: Printer/FAX 7: Copier/Printer/FAX The number of error is reset at HDD formatting.

Procedur e 2

358

Counter

359 360

Counter Counter

Counter for LCF feeding Counter for PFP upper drawer feeding Counter for PFP lower drawer feeding Counter for ADU

ALL ALL

M M

2 2

370

Counter

ALL

372

Counter

ALL

374 381

Counter Counter

Counter for RADF Setting for counter installed externally

ALL ALL

SYS M

2 1

390 391 392 393 398

Counter Counter Counter Counter Laser

Number of errors in HDD (Copier) Number of errors in HDD (FAX) Number of errors in HDD (Scanning) Number of errors in HDD (Printer) Number of polygonal motor rotational speed switching

PPC FAX SCN PRT ALL

0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>

SYS SYS SYS SYS M

2 2 2 2

399

Laser

Accumulated time of polygonal motor at normal rotation

ALL

0 <8 digits>

Counts the number of time the polygonal motor has switched its rotational speed between normal rotation and standby rotation Accumulates the time the polygonal motor has rotated at normal rotation.

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 100 04/01

Code 400

Classification Fuser

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Fuser unit error status ALL 0 M counter <0-19>

Contents 0: No error 1: C411(Once) 2: C410(consecutively occurred) 3: 4: 5: C440 6: C450 7: C440 8: C450 9: C440 10: C470 11: C470 12: C480 13: C480 14: C470 15: C480 16: C490 17: C470 18: C480 19: C490 0: OFF 1: 40C 2: 50C 3: 60C 4: 70C 5: 80C 6: 90C 7: 100C 8: 110C 9: 120C 10: 130C 11: 140C 12: 150C 13: 160C 0: 140C 1: 145C 2: 150C 3: 155C 4: 160C 5: 165C 6: 170C 7: 175C 8: 180C 9: 185C 10: 190C 11: 195C 12: 200C 13: 205C 14: 210C 0: 140C 1: 145C 2: 150C 3: 155C 4: 160C 5: 165C 6: 170C 7: 175C 8: 180C 9: 185C 10: 190C 11: 195C 12: 200C 1: 140C 1: 145C 3: 150C 4: 155C 5: 160C 6: 165C 7: 170C 8: 175C 9: 180C 10: 185C 11: 190C 12: 195C 13: 200C 14: 210C 0: 140C 1: 145C 2: 150C 3: 155C 4: 160C 5: 165C 6: 170C 7: 175C 8: 180C 9: 185C 10: 190C 11: 195C 12: 200C 13: 210C 0: Invalid 1: +3bit 2: +6bit 3: +9bit 4: +12bit 5: -3bit 6: -6bit 7: -9bit 8: -12bit

Procedur e 1

409

Fuser

Fuser roller temperature at a energy saver mode (Center thermistor)

ALL

0 <0-13>

410

Fuser

Fuser roller temperature during printing (Center thermistor/Plain paper)

ALL

12 <0-14>

411

Fuser

Fuser roller temperature on standby (Center thermistor)

ALL

12 <0-12>

412

Fuser

Fuser roller temperature during printing (Center thermistor/Thick paper 3)

ALL

12 <0-14>

413

Fuser

Fuser roller temperature during printing (Center thermistor/Thick paper 1)

ALL

12 <0-14>

414

Developer

Toner density correctionsetting

ALL

0 <0-8>

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 101

Code 417

Classification Fuser

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Pre-running time for first ALL 0 M printing (Thick paper 3) <0-15>

Contents 0: Invalid 1: 1 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec. 10: 10 sec. 11: 12 sec. 12: 14 sec. 13: 16 sec. 14: 18 sec. 15: 20 sec. Sets whether or not a black band pattern is formed on the drum between two sheets of paper being transported. 0: Invalid 1 to 20: Black band width (Unit: mm) 0: Invalid 1: 1 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec. 10: 10 sec. 0: 140C 1: 145C 2: 150C 3: 155C 4: 160C 5: 165C 6: 170C 7: 175C 8: 180C 9: 185C 10: 190C 11: 195C 12: 200C 13: 205C 14: 210C 0: 140C 1: 145C 2: 150C 3: 155C 4: 160C 5: 165C 6: 170C 7: 175C 8: 180C 9: 185C 10: 190C 11: 195C 12: 200C 13: 205C 14: 210C 0: Invalid 1: 1 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec. 10: 10 sec. 11: 12 sec. 12: 14 sec. 13: 16 sec. 14: 18 sec. 15: 20 sec.

Procedur e 1

419

Image Processing

Black band pattern between sheets of paper

ALL

0 <0-20>

420

Fuser

Pre-running time at warming-up

ALL

JPN: 3 UC: 4 EUR: 4 <0-10>

437

Fuser

Fuser roller temperature during printing (Center thermistor /Thick paper 2)

ALL

12 <0-14>

438

Fuser

Fuser roller temperature during printing (Center thermistor/OHP film)

ALL

12 <0-14>

439

Fuser

Pre-running time for first printing (Thick paper 2)

ALL

0 <0-15>

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 102

Code 440

Classification Fuser

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Pre-running time for first ALL 0 M printing <0-15> (Plain paper)

Contents 0: Invalid 1: 1 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec. 10: 10 sec. 11: 12 sec. 12: 14 sec. 13: 16 sec. 14: 18 sec. 15: 20 sec. 0: Invalid 1: 1 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec. 10: 10 sec. 11: 12 sec. 12: 14 sec. 13: 16 sec. 14: 18 sec. 15: 20 sec. Corrects the period of the toner motor rotation time during toner supply. 0: 100% 1: 90% 2: 80% Sets whether or not detecting the original length by transporting without scanning in reverse when finding A4-R/FOLIO paper. 0: Invalid- Judges as A4-R without trans porting in reverse with no scanning. 1: Valid- Judges whether it is A4-R or FOLIO size by transporting in reverse with no scanning. * The original is transported in reverse with no scanning when detecting LT-LG size-paper in LT, regardless of this setting. Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the upper drawer. Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the lower drawer.

Procedur e 1

441

Fuser

Pre-running time for first printing (Thick paper 1)

ALL

0 <0-15>

455

Image processing

Toner supply amount correction setting

ALL

0 <0-2>

462

RADF

Setting for switchback operation to copy mixedsized original on RADF

ALL

0<0-1>

SYS

463-0 463-1 464-0 464-1

Paper feeding

Feeding retry number setting (upper drawer) Feeding retry number setting (lower drawer)

Plain paper Others Plain paper Others

ALL ALL ALL ALL

Paper feeding

5 <0-5> 5 <0-5> 5 <0-5> 5 <0-5>

M M M M

4 4 4 4

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 103 05/05

Code 465-0 465-1 466-0 466-1 467-0 467-1 468-0 468-1 469 471

Classification Paper feeding

Paper feeding

Paper feeding

Paper feeding

Fan Paper feeding

472 478

Fan Laser

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Feeding retry Plain ALL 5 M number setpaper <0-5> ting (PFP Others ALL 5 M upper drawer) <0-5> Feeding retry Plain ALL 5 M number setpaper <0-5> ting (PFP Others ALL 5 M lower drawer) <0-5> Feeding retry Plain ALL 5 M number setpaper <0-5> ting (bypass Others ALL 5 M feed) <0-5> Feeding retry Plain ALL 5 M number setpaper <0-5> ting (LCF) Others ALL 5 M <0-5> Speed switching for subALL 0 M separation fan <0-1> ALL 148/100 M Paper size (Post card) <148feeding/width wise direc432/100tion 297> Speed switching for midALL 0 M dle fan <0-1> Judged number of polygoALL 0 M nal motor rotation error <0-1> (Normal rotation)

Contents Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the PFP upper drawer. Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the PFP lower drawer. Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the bypass tray. Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the LCF. 0: High speed 1: Low speed * Post card is supported only for JPN model. 0: High speed 1: Low speed Displays the error [CA10] when the set number of rotation error has been detected. 0: 2 times 1: 12 times 0: Waiting time for polygonal motor rotation overshooting 0.6 sec. 1: Waiting time for polygonal motor rotation overshooting 2.2 sec. 0: A4/LT 1: LCF 2: Upper drawer 3: Lower drawer 4: PFP upper drawer 5: PFP lower drawer

Procedur e 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 10

1 1

479

Laser

Judged number of polygonal motor rotation error (At acceleration/deceleration)

ALL

0 <0-1>

480

Paper feeding

Default setting of paper source

PPC

0 <0-5>

SYS

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 104 05/05

Code 481

Classification Paper feeding

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Automatic change of paper PPC 1 SYS source <0-2>

Contents Sets whether or not changing the drawer automatically to the other drawer with the paper of the same size when paper in the selected drawer has run out. 0: OFF 1: ON (Changes to the drawer with the same paper direction and size: ex. A4 to A4) 2: ON (Changes to the drawer with the same paper size. Paper with the different direction is acceptable as long as the size is the same: ex., A4 to A4R, LT-R to LT. 1 is applied when the staple/holepunch is specified.) 0: ON 1: OFF Sets whether or not switching the polygonal motor from the standby rotation to the normal rotation when the original is set on the RADF or the platen cover is opened. 0: Valid (when using RADF and the original is set manually) 1: Invalid 2: Valid (when using RADF only) Sets whether or not switching the polygonal motor from the normal rotation to the standby rotation at the Auto Clear Mode. 0: Valid 1: Invalid Sets the rotational status of polygonal motor on standby. 0: Rotated (The rotational speed is set at 08-490.)1: Stopped

Procedur e 1

482 483

Paper feeding Laser

Feeding retry setting Pre-running rotation of polygonal motor

ALL ALL

0 <0-1> 0 <0-2>

M SYS

1 1

484

Laser

Polygonal motor rotational status switching at the Auto Clear Mode

ALL

0 <0-1>

SYS

485

Laser

Rotational status of polygonal motor on standby

ALL

0 <0-1>

SYS

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 105

Code 486

Classification Laser

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Timing of auto-clearing of ALL 0 SYS polygonal motor pre-run<0-2> ning rotation

Contents Switches the polygonal motor to the standby rotation when a certain period of time has passed from the prerunning. At this code, the period to switch the status to the standby rotation is set. 0: 15 sec. 1: 30 sec. 2: 45 sec. * This setting is effective when 0 or 2 is set at 08-483. Set the type of polygonal motor. 2: 2 clock type 3: 3 clock type 0: 38090.55rpm 1: 35000rpm 2: 30000rpm 3: 25000rpm 4: 20000rpm 5: 10000rpm 0: Stopped 1: 10000rpm Corrects the transfer charger bias output value of the leading edge area of paper at duplexing. Corrects the transfer charger bias output value of the center area of paper at duplexing. Corrects the transfer charger bias output value of the trailing edge area of paper at duplexing. Sets the image reproduction method at photo mode. 0: Error diffusion 1: Dither 0: Automatic 1: Manual (Center) 0: Not used 1: Custom Mode 1 when Text/Photo is set as a base 2: Custom Mode 2 when Text is set as a base 3: Custom Mode 3 when Photo is set as a base

Procedur e 1

488

Laser

Setting of polygonal motor type

ALL

3 <2-3>

489

Laser

Polygonal motor rotation number on standby

ALL

5 <0-5>

490 491

Laser Transfer

Polygonal motor rotation in the energy saving mode Transfer charger bias correction (L) at duplexing

ALL ALL

0 <0-1> 165 <0-255>

M M

1 1

492

Transfer

Transfer charger bias correction (H) at duplexing

ALL

106 <0-255>

493

Transfer

Transfer charger bias correction (L) at duplexing

ALL

128 <0-255>

502

Image

Error diffusion and dither setting at photo mode

PPC

1 <0-1>

SYS

503 508

User interface Image

Default setting of density adjustment Custom Mode setting

PPC PPC

0 <0-1> 0 <0-3>

SYS SYS

1 1

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 106 04/05

Code 509

Classification Image

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Error diffusion and dither PPC 1 SYS setting at a photo mode <0-1> (Custom Mode)

Contents Switches the image processing method when Custom Mode 3 is set. 0: Error diffusion 1: Dither 0: Invalid 1: 0 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec. 10: 10 sec. 11: 12 sec. 12: 14 sec. 13: 16 sec. 14: 18 sec. 15: 20 sec. 0: Text/Photo 1: Photo 2: Text 3: Custom Mode 0: Auto Shut Off Mode 1: Sleep Mode 0: OFF 1: ON

Procedur e 1

2
1

526

Fuser

Pre-running time for first printing (OHP film)

ALL

6 <0-15>

550

Image

Default setting of Original mode

PPC

0 <0-3>

SYS

601 602

User interface User interface

Setting for the EnergySaving Mode Screen setting for Auto power Save Mode and Auto Shut OFF Mode Setting for automatic duplexing mode

ALL ALL

603

User interface

ALL

0 <0-1> EUR:0 UC:1 JPN:1 <0-1> 0 <0-3>

SYS SYS

1 1

SYS

604

User interface

Default setting for APS/ AMS

ALL

0 <0-2>

SYS

605

User interface User interface

607

Centering printing of primary/secondary direction at AMS Default setting of RADF mode

PPC

1 <0-1> 0 <0-1>

SYS

0: Invalid 1: Single-sided to duplex copying 2: Double-sided to duplex copying 3: User selection 0: APS (Automatic Paper Selection) 1: AMS (Automatic Magnification Selection) 2: Not selected 0: Invalid 1: Valid 0: Continuous feeding (by pressing the [START] button) 1: Single feeding (by setting original on the tray) 0: OFF 1: ON 0: Left page to right page 1: Right page to left page 0: Not summer time 1: Summer time

PPC

SYS

610 611

User interface User interface

Key touch sound of control panel Book type original priority

ALL PPC

1 <0-1> 0 <0-1>

SYS SYS

1 1

612

General

Summer time mode

ALL

0 <0-1>

SYS

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 107

Code 613

Classification User interface

614

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Paper size selection for PPC EUR: SYS [OTHER] button FOLIO UC: COMP JPN: A5-R Local I/F time-out period PRT 6 SYS <1-50>

Contents Press the icon on the LCD to select the size.

Procedur e 9

615

General

Size information of main memory and page memory

ALL

SYS

617

User interface User interface

Print setting without department code Default setting when mixed size originals are set on RADF Time lag before Auto Job Start of bypass feeding

ALL

1 <0-2> 0 <0-1>

SYS

618

PPC

SYS

619

Paper feeding

ALL

4 <0-10>

SYS

620 621 622 623 624 625

User interface User interface User interface User interface User interface User interface

Department management setting (Copier) Department management setting (FAX) Department management setting (Printer) Department management setting (Scanner) Department management setting (List print) Blank copying prevention mode during RADF jamming

PPC FAX PRT SCN PRT PPC

1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 0 <0-1>

SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS

627

User interface

Rotation printing at the nonsorting

ALL

0 <0-1>

SYS

Sets the period of time when the job is judged as completed in local I/ F printing (USB or parallel). 1: 1.0 sec. 2: 1.5 sec. -50: 25.5 sec. (in increments of 0.5 sec.) Displays the sizes of the main memory and page memory. Enables to check if each memory is properly recognized. 0: Printed forcibly 1: Not printed 2: Deleted forcibly 0: Scanned as all in same size 1: Scanned as each original size Sets the time taken to add paper feeding when paper in the bypass tray has run out during the bypass feed copying. 0: Paper is not drawn in unless the [START] button is pressed. 1-10: Setting value x 0.5sec. 0: Invalid 1: Valid 0: Invalid 1: Valid 0: Invalid 1: Valid 0: Invalid 1: Valid 0: Invalid 1: Valid 0: OFF 1: ON (Start printing when the scanning of each page is finished) 0: Not rotating 1: Rotating

1 1 1 1 1 1

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 108

Code 628 629 633

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default ClassifiFunc- <AcceptItems RAM cation tion able value> User Direction priority of original PPC 0 SYS interface image <0-1> User Department management ALL 0 SYS interface setting <0-1> Releasing F200 service ALL 0 SYS Data <0-2> overwrite call kit User interface User interface General Inner receiving tray priority at Non-sort Mode Width setting for image shift copying (linkage of front side and back side) Time differences ALL PPC 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> EUR: 24 UC: 40 JPN: 6 <0-47> SYS SYS

Contents 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 2: 0: 1: 0: 1: Automatic Portrait Invalid Valid Not used Board installed (GP-1050) Service call Normal Inner receiving tray ON OFF

Procedur e 1 1

2
1

634 636

1 1

638

ALL

SYS

640

User interface

Date display format

ALL

641

User interface

Automatic Sorting Mode setting (RADF)

PPC

EUR:1 UC:2 JPN:0 <0-2> 2 <0-4>

SYS

0: +12.0h 1: +11.5h 2: +11.0h 3: +10.5h 4: +10.0h 5: 9.5h 6: +9.0h 7: +8.5h 8: +8.0h 9: +7.5h 10: +7.0h 11: +6.5h 12: +6.0h 13: +5.5h 14: +5.0h 15: +4.5h 16: +4.0h 17: +3.5h 18: +3.0h 19: +2.5h 20: +2.0h 21: +1.5h 22: +1.0h 23: +0.5h 24: 0.0h 25:-0.5h 26: -1.0h 27: -1.5h 28: -2.0h 29: -2.5h 30: -3.0h 31: -3.5h 32: -4.0h 33: -4.5h 34: -5.0h 35: -5.5h 36: -6.0h 37: -6.5h 38: -7.0h 39: -7.5h 40: -8.0h 41: -8.5h 42: -9.0h 43: -9.5h 44: -10.0h 45: -10.5h 46: -11.0h 47: -11.5h 0: YYYY.MM.DD. 1: DD.MM.YYYY 2: MM.DD.YYYY 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: Invalid STAPLE SORT GROUP ROTATE SORT NON-SORT STAPLE SORT GROUP ROTATE SORT

SYS

642

User interface

Default setting of Sorter Mode

PPC

0 <0-4>

SYS

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 109 05/11

Code 645

Classification User interface

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM able tion value> Correction of reproduction PPC 10 SYS ratio in editing copy <0-10>

Contents Sets the reproduction ratio for the X in 1 printing (including magazine sort) to the Reproduction ratio x Correction ratio. 0: 90% 1: 91% 2: 92% 3: 93% 4: 94% 5: 95% 6: 96% 7: 97% 8: 98% 9: 99% 10: 100% Sets the page pasted position for X in 1 to the upper left corner/ center. 0: PPC:Cornering/ PRT:Cornering 1: PPC:Centering/ PRT:Cornering 2: PPC:Cornering/ PRT:Centering 3: PPC:Centering/ PRT:Centering 0: Short edge 1: Long edge Sets whether or not returning the finisher tray to the bin 1 when printing is finished. 0: Not returned 1: Returned 0: Left page to right page 1: Right page to left page 0: Horizontal 1: Vertical Hyphen (with page number) /Dropout (with date, time and page number) 0: OFF/OFF 1: ON/OFF 2: OFF/ON 3: ON/ON Note: Note: Hyphen printing format ON: -1- OFF: 1 0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON 0: Short edge 1: Long edge

Procedur e 1

646

User interface

Image position in editing

PPC

2 <0-3>

SYS

647 648

User interface User interface

Direction priority for date and time stamp printing Returning finisher tray when printing is finished

ALL ALL

0 <0-1> 0 <0-1>

SYS SYS

1 1

649

User interface

Magazine sort setting

PPC

0 <0-1>

SYS

650 651

User interface User interface

2 in 1/4 in 1 page allocating order setting Printing format setting for Time Stamp and Page Number

PPC PPC

0 <0-1> 2 <0-3>

SYS SYS

1 1

652 653 657

User interface User interface User interface

Cascade operation setting Cascade operation setting Direction priority for date and time stamp printing

PPC PRT PPC

0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1>

SYS SYS SYS

1 1 1

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 110 07/11

Code 658

Classification User interface

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Auto Job Start setting for PRT 0 SYS bypass feed printing <0-1>

Contents Sets whether or not feeding a paper automatically into the equipment when it is placed on the bypass tray. 0: OFF (Press the [START] button to start feeding.) 1: ON (Automatic feeding) Sets whether or not feeding a paper automatically into the equipment when it is placed on the bypass tray. 0: OFF (Press the [START] button to start feeding.) 1: ON (Automatic feeding) 0: Invalid1:Valid 0: Invalid1: Valid Clears SMS partition. (Performs when the service call [F106] has occurred.) Initializes all the adjustment modesand the setting modes. Initializes the Electronic Filing. Initializes the shared folder. Initializes system NVRAM area. Display the HDD information 0: Invalid 1: Valid

Procedur e 1

659

User interface

Auto Job start setting for bypass feed printing

PPC

1 <0-1>

SYS

660 661 662

Network Network General

Auto-forwarding setting of received FAX Auto-forwarding setting of received E-mail Clearing of SMS partition

ALL ALL ALL

0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> -

SYS SYS SYS

1 1 3

665

General

M/SYS all clearing

ALL

M/ SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS

666 667 669 670 671

General General General General User interface

/SHA partition clearing /SHA partition clearing System all clearing HDD diagnostic menu display Size indicator

ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

0 <0-1>

3 3 3 2 1

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 111

Code 672

Classification General

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Initialization of department SYS management information

Contents Initializing of the department management information * Key in the code and press the [INITIALIZE] button to perform the initialization. If the area storing the department management information is destroyed for some reason, Enter Department Code is displayed on the control panel even if the department management function is not set on. In this case, initialize the area with this code. This area is normally initialized at the factory. Sets the trial period from 1 to 60 days. This setting is effective only when the default value is "254". Once the default value is set, this value is only used for a reference. Sets whether or not displaying the banner advertising. The setting contents of 08-679 and 08-680 are displayed at the time display section on the right top of the screen. When both are set, each content is displayed alternately. 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed Maximum 27 letters (one-byte character) Maximum 27 letters (one-byte character) 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed * This button enables the entry of Banner advertising display 1 (08-679) and Banner advertising display 2 (08-680) on the control panel. 0: Invalid 1: Valid

Procedur e 3

673

General

Trial period setting

ALL

254 <1-60>

SYS

678

General

Setting of banner advertising display

ALL

0 <0-1>

SYS

679 680 681

General General General

Banner advertising display 1 Banner advertising display 2 Display of [BANNER MESSAGE] button

ALL ALL ALL

0 <0-1>

SYS SYS SYS

11 11 1

682

Use interface

Offsetting between jobs

ALL

1 <0-1>

SYS

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 112

Code 683

Classification General

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Duplex printing setting ALL 1 SYS when coin controller is <0-1> used

Contents When the duplex printing is short paid with a coin controller, reverse side of the original is not printed and is considered as a defect (printing job may be cleared). To solve this problem, the selection of printing method is enabled with this setting. 0: Invalid (Both sides printed) 1: Valid (Only one side printed) Rebuilds all databases. Rebuilds all databases related to the Address Book. Rebuilds all databases related to the logs. 0: Not subjected for APS judgment 1: Subjected for APS judgment 2: Normal formatting 0: Not formatted 1: Not used 2: Normal format Performs the calibration of the pressing position on the touch panel (LCD screen). The calibration is performed by pressing 2 reference positions after this code is started up. Returns the value to the factory shipping default value. Checks the bad sector. Sets when the end of trial period is notified. 0: On the day it ends 1 to 59: n days before 0: Not installed 1: Installed Sets the paper type priority during copying. 1: Plain paper 2: Thick paper 1

Procedur e 1

684 685

General General

Rebuilding all databases Rebuilding all databases related to Address Book Rebuilding all databases related to log Adaptation of paper source priority selection

ALL ALL

SYS SYS

3 3

686 689

General FAX

ALL FAX

0 <0-1>

SYS SYS

3 1

690 691

General General

HDD formatting HDD type display

ALL ALL

<2> <0-2> -

SYS SYS

7 7

692

Maintenance

Performing panel calibration

ALL

SYS

693

General

Initialization of NIC information Performing HDD testing Sets when the end of trial period is notified.

ALL

SYS

694 695

General General

ALL PRT/ SCN

3 <0-59>

SYS SYS

3 1

696

697

Scrambler board Paper feeding

Installation of scrambler board (Option) Paper type priority

ALL

0 <0-1> 1 <1-2>

PPC

SYS

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 113

Code 698

Classification Scrambler board

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Entering the key code for ALL scrambler board

Contents Start up this code and have the user enter the key code. Once the key code has been set, this code cannot be set again on security grounds. This setting is effective only when the scrambler board is installed. 0: Japan 1: Asia 2: Australia 3: Hong Kong 4: U.S.A./Canada 5: Germany 6: U.K. 7: Italy 8: Belgium 9: Netherlands 10: Finland 11: Spain 12: Austria 13: Switzerland 14: Sweden 15: Denmark 16: Norway 17: Portugal 18: France 19: Greece 20: Poland 21: Hungary 22: Czech 23: Turkey 24: South Africa 25: Taiwan 0: Valid (Remote-controlled server) 1: Valid (L2) 2: Invalid Maximum 256 Bytes

Procedur e 5

699

701

Scrambler board FAX

Erasing all data in HDD

ALL

Destination setting for FAX

FAX

EUR: 5 UC: 4 JPN: 0 Other: 1 <0-25>

SYS

702

Maintenance

Remote-controlled service function

ALL

2 <0-2>

SYS

703

Maintenance Maintenance

707

Remote-controlled service HTTP server URL setting Remote-controlled service HTTP initially-registered server URL setting

ALL

SYS

11

ALL

710

Maintenance

Short time interval setting of recovery from Emergency Mode

ALL

https:// device.mf p-support.com: 443/ device/firstregist.ashx 24 <1-48>

SYS

Maximum 256 Bytes

11

SYS

711

Maintenance

Short time interval setting of Emergency Mode

ALL

60 <30-360>

SYS

Sets the time interval to recover from the Emergency Mode to the Normal Mode. (Unit: Hour) Unit: Minute

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 114

Code 715

Classification Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance

716

717

718

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM able tion value> Remote-controlled service ALL 1230 SYS periodical polling timing (Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute) ALL 0 SYS Remote-controlled service <0-1> Writing data of self-diagnostic code Remote-controlled service ALL 3 SYS response waiting time <1-30> (Timeout) Remote-controlled service ALL 0 SYS initial registration <0-2>

Contents 0 (0:00) to 2359 (23:59)

Procedur e 1

0: Prohibited 1: Accepted Unit: Minute

719 720

Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance

721

Remote-controlled service tentative password Status of remote-controlled service initial registration (Display only) Service center call function

ALL ALL

0 <0-1> 2 <0-2>

SYS SYS

0: OFF 1: Start 2: Only certification is scanned Maximum 10 letters 0: Not registered 1: Registered 0: OFF 1: Notifies all service calls 2: Notifies all but paper jams Maximum 256 letters 0: Valid 1: Invalid 000.000.000.000 255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000)

11 2

ALL

SYS

723 726 727

Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance

Service center call HTTP server URL setting HTTP proxy setting HTTP proxy IP address setting

ALL ALL ALL

1 <0-1> -

SYS SYS SYS

11 1 11

728

Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote)

HTTP proxy port number setting HTTP proxy ID setting HTTP proxy password setting HTTP proxy panel display Automatic ordering function of supplies

ALL

729 730 731 732

ALL ALL ALL ALL

0 <065535> 1 <0-1> 3 <0-3>

SYS

SYS SYS SYS SYS

Maximum 30 letters Maximum 30 letters 0: Valid 1: Invalid 0: Ordered by FAX 1: Ordered by E-mail 2: Ordered by HTTP 3: OFF Maximum 32 digits Enter hyphen with the [Monitor/Pause] button Maximum 192 letters List: 256 digits Maximum 50 letters

11 11 1 1

733

734

738

739

Automatic ordering function of supplies FAX number Automatic ordering function of supplies E-mail address Automatic ordering function of supplies User's name Automatic ordering function of supplies User's telephone number

ALL

SYS

11

ALL

SYS

11

ALL

SYS

11

ALL

SYS

Maximum 32 digits Enter hyphen with the [Monitor/Pause] button

11

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 115

Code 740

Classification Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote)

741

742

743

744

745

746

747

748

758

759

760

761

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Automatic ordering funcALL SYS tion of supplies User's E-mail address ALL SYS Automatic ordering function of supplies User's address ALL SYS Automatic ordering function of supplies Service number Automatic ordering funcALL SYS tion of supplies Service technician's name Automatic ordering funcALL SYS tion of supplies Service technician's telephone number Automatic ordering funcALL SYS tion of supplies Service technician's E-mail address Automatic ordering funcALL SYS tion of supplies Supplier's name Automatic ordering funcALL SYS tion of supplies Supplier's address ALL SYS Automatic ordering function of supplies Notes Information about supplies ALL SYS Part number of toner cartridge K Information about supplies ALL 1 SYS Order quantity of toner car<1-99> tridge K ALL 1 SYS Information about supplies <1-99> Condition number of toner cartridge K Information about supplies ALL SYS Part number of toner bag Information about supplies Order quantity of toner bag Information about supplies Condition number of toner bag Automatic ordering supplies Display ALL 1 <1-99> 1 <1-99> 2 <0-2> SYS

Contents Maximum 192 letters List: 256 digits Maximum 100 letters

Procedur e 11

11

Maximum 5 digits

11

Maximum 50 letters

11

Maximum 32 digits Enter hyphen with the [Monitor/Pause] button Maximum 192 letters List: 256 digits

11

11

Maximum 50 letters

11

Maximum 100 letters

11

Maximum 128 letters

11

Maximum 20 digits

11

Maximum 20 digits

11

762

763

ALL

SYS

765

ALL

SYS

0: Valid (FAX/Internet FAX) 1: Valid (FAX/Internet FAX/ HTTP) 2: Invalid

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 116 07/11

Code 767

Classification Maintenance (Remote)

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Service Notification setting ALL 0 SYS <0-2>

Contents Enables to set up to 3 E-mail addresses to be sent. (08-768, 777, 778) 0: Invalid 1: Valid (E-mail) 2: Valid (FAX) Maximum 192 letters

Procedur e 1

2
11

768

769

770

771

772

Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance

Destination E-mail address

ALL

SYS

Total counter information transmission setting Total counter transmission date setting PM counter notification setting Dealer's name

ALL

0 <0-1> 1 <1-31> 0 <0-1> -

SYS

0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 to 31

ALL

SYS

ALL

SYS

0: Invalid 1: Valid Maximum 100 letters Needed at initial registration Maximum 20 letters Needed at initial registration 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed 0: Invalid 1: Valid

ALL

SYS

11

773

Login name

ALL

SYS

11

774

Display setting of [Service Notification] button Sending error contents of equipment Setting total counter transmission interval (Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute) Destination E-mail address 2 Destination E-mail address 3 Notification format selection Remote-controlled service polling day selection Day-1

ALL

0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> -

SYS

775

ALL

SYS

776

ALL

SYS

777

ALL

SYS

Maximum 192 letters

11

778

ALL

SYS

Maximum 192 letters

11

779

ALL

0 <0-1> 0 <0-31>

SYS

0: Text 1: Text + XML data 0: OFF 1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a month 0: OFF 1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a month 0: OFF 1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a month

780

ALL

SYS

781

Maintenance

Remote-controlled service polling day selection Day-2

ALL

0 <0-31>

SYS

782

Maintenance

Remote-controlled service polling day selection Day-3

ALL

0 <0-31>

SYS

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 117

Code 783

Classification Maintenance

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Remote-controlled service ALL 0 SYS polling day selection Day-4 <0-31>

Contents 0: OFF 1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a month 0: Invalid 1: Valid 0: Invalid 1: Valid 0: Invalid 1: Valid 0: Invalid 1: Valid 0: Invalid 1: Valid 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: Invalid Valid Invalid Valid Invalid Valid Invalid Valid Invalid Valid

Procedur e 1

784

Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance General

785

786

787

788

789 790

794 795 796

797 798

Remote-controlled service polling day selection Sunday Remote-controlled service polling day selection Monday Remote-controlled service polling day selection Tuesday Remote-controlled service polling day selection Wednesday Remote-controlled service polling day selection Thursday Remote-controlled service polling day selection Friday Remote-controlled service polling day selection Saturday Information of supplies setting of toner cartridge K Information of supplies setting of toner bag Remote-controlled service lengthened interval polling (End of month) Firmware download Notifying address of trialperiod end

ALL

0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 3 <0-3>

SYS

ALL

SYS

ALL

SYS

ALL

SYS

ALL

SYS

ALL ALL

SYS SYS

1 1

ALL ALL ALL

SYS SYS SYS

1 1 1

ALL PRT/ SCN

SYS SYS

799

General

Forcible end of trial period

PRT/ SCN

SYS

826

Charger

Main charger bias correction (Toner saving mode) Setting of toner density temperature control

PRT

128<0255> 0 <0-1>

840

Image control

ALL

0: Accepted 1: Prohibited Sets where the end of the trial period is to be notified. 0: OFF 1: User 2: Service center 3: User and service center [CANCEL]: Cancel [EXECUTION]: Forcible end When the Forcible end of trial period is performed, 0 is set in the code (08-673) to end up the trial period forcibly. Corrects the value of the main charger bias adjustment (05-210). 0: Controlled 1: Not controlled

1 1

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 118

Code 841

Classification Transfer

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Transfer timing correction ALL 0 M <0-7>

Contents 0: Standard 1: Timing 1 2: Timing 2 3: Timing 3 4: Timing 4 5: Timing 5 6: Timing 6 7: Timing 7 0: 140C 1: 145C 2: 150C 3: 155C 4: 160C 5: 165C 6: 170C 7: 175C 8: 180C 9: 185C 10: 190C 11: 195C 12: 200C 13: 205C 14: 210C 0: Invalid 1: 1 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec. 10: 10 sec. 11: 12 sec. 12: 14 sec. 13: 16 sec. 14: 18 sec. 15: 20 sec. Corrects the value of the developer bias adjustment (05-205). Corrects the value of the developer bias adjustment (05-205). Corrects the value of the developer bias adjustment (05-205). Corrects the value of the developer bias adjustment (05-205). Corrects the value of the developer bias adjustment (05-205). Corrects the value of the main charger bias adjustment (05-210). Corrects the value of the main charger bias adjustment (05-210). Corrects the value of the main charger bias adjustment (05-210). Corrects the value of the main charger bias adjustment (05-210). Corrects the transfer charger bias output value of the leading edge area of paper.

Procedur e 1

855

Fuser

Fuser roller temperature during printing (Center thermistor / Tab paper)

ALL

12 <0-14>

856

Fuser

Pre-running time for first printing (Tab paper)

ALL

10 <0-15>

859

Developer Developer Developer Developer Developer Charger

Developer bias DC correction(Toner saving mode) Developer bias DC correction (Normal) Developer bias DC correction (Text/Photo) Developer bias DC correction (Text) Developer bias DC correction (Photo) Main charger bias correction (Normal) Main charger bias correction (Text/Photo) Main charger bias correction (Text) Main charger bias correction (Photo) Transfer charger bias correction (H)

PRT

128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255>

860

PRT

861

PPC

862

PPC

863

PPC

864

PRT

865

Charger

PPC

866

Charger

PPC

867

Charger

PPC

868

Transfer

ALL

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 119

Code 869

Classification Transfer

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Transfer charger bias corALL 84 M rection (L) <0-255>

Contents Corrects the transfer charger bias output value of the trailing edge area of paper. Corrects the value of the laser power adjustment (05-286). Corrects the value of the laser power adjustment (05-286). Corrects the value of the laser power adjustment (05-286). Corrects the value of the laser power adjustment (05-286). Corrects the value of the laser power adjustment (05-286). JPN: T360SY0JXXX UC: T360SY0UXXX EUR: T360SY0EXXX Others: T360SY0XXXX 360M-XXX 360S-XXX DF-XXXX SDL-XX FIN-XX F562-XXX X.XXX VX.XX/X.XX VXXX.XXX X VXXX.XXX X VXXX.XXX X VXXX.XXX X VXXX.XXX X VXXX.XXX X VXXX.XXX X VXXX.XXX X VXXX.XXX X VXXX.XXX X

Procedur e 1

872

Laser

Laser power correction (Normal) Laser power correction (Text/Photo) Laser power correction (Toner saving mode) Laser power correction (Text) Laser power correction (Photo) System firmware ROM version

PRT

128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> -

873

Laser

PPC

875

Laser

PRT

876

Laser

PPC

877

Laser

PPC

900

Version

ALL

903 905 907 908 915 916 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930

Version Version Version Version Version Version Version Version Version Version Version Version Version Version Version Version Version

931 933

Version Version

Engine ROM version Scanner ROM version RADF ROM version Finisher ROM version FAX board ROM version NIC board ROM version FROM basic section software version FROM internal program UI data fixed section version UI data common section version Version of UI data language 1 in HDD Version of UI data language 2 in HDD Version of UI data language 3 in HDD Version of UI data language 4 in HDD Version of UI data language 5 in HDD Version of UI data language 6 in HDD Version of UI data in FROM displayed at powerON Version of UI data language 7 in HDD Web data whole version

ALL ALL ALL ALL FAX ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

ALL ALL

VXXX.XXX X VXXX.XXX X

2 2

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 120

Code 934 935 936 937 938 939 944

Classification Version Version Version Version Version Version Version

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Web UI data in HDD ALL Version: Language 1 Web UI data in HDD ALL Version: Language 2 Web UI data in HDD ALL Version: Language 3 Web UI data in HDD ALL Version: Language 4 Web UI data in HDD ALL Version: Language 5 Web UI data in HDD ALL Version: Language 6 HD version ALL -

Contents VXXX.XXX X VXXX.XXX X VXXX.XXX X VXXX.XXX X VXXX.XXX X VXXX.XXX X JPN: T360HD0JXXX UC: T360HD0UXXX EUR: T360HD0EXXX Others: T360HD0XXXX 1: Valid 2: Invalid Perform this code when the software in this equipment has been upgraded. Sets the mode to enter when the [Energy Saver] button is pressed for a while.0: Sleep Mode1: Auto Shut Off Mode Sets the number of pages to interrupt the printing automatically. 0-100: 0 to 100 pages Sets the start-up method of the Electronic Filing. 0: Standard 1: Forced start-up (Not recovered) 2: Forced start-up (Recovered) 3: Data update 0: Renewed automatically 1: Enter every time 0: Immediately after the completion of scanning 1: Cleared by Auto Clear 0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON

Procedur e 2 2

2
2 2 2 2 2

945 947

Network General

Two-way setting of RawPort 9100 Initialization after software version upgrade

ALL ALL

1 <1-2> -

UTY -

12 3

948

General

Mode setting by pressing [Energy Saver] button for a while

ALL

0 <0-1>

SYS

949

General

Automatic interruption page setting during black printing Start-up method of Electronic Filing

ALL

0 <0-100>

SYS

950

Electronic filing

ALL

0 <0-3>

SYS

953

User interface User interface

Access code entry for Electronic Filing printing Clearing timing for files and Electronic Filing Agent

ALL

0 <0-1> 1 <0-1>

SYS

954

ALL

SYS

969 970

User interface User interface

Error sound Sound setting when switching to Energy Saving Mode

ALL ALL

1 <0-1> 1 <0-1>

SYS SYS

1 1

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 121

Code 973

Classification Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> PCL line feed code setting PRT 0 SYS <0-3>

Contents Sets the PCL line feed code. 0: Automatic setting 1: CR=CR, LF=LF 2: CR=CR+LF, LF=LF 3: CR=CR, LF=CR+LF Sets whether pause or stop the printing job when it is short paid using a coin controller. 0: Pause the job 1: Stop the job Sets whether or not adding the equipment name to the folder when saving files. 0: Not add 1: Add 0: ISO8859-1 1: ISO8859-2 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: AUTO Upper drawer Lower drawer PFP upper drawer PFP lower drawer LCF

Procedur e 1

975

General

Job handling when printing is short paid with coin controller

ALL

1 <0-1>

SYS

976

Electronic Filing

Equipment name setting to a folder when saving files

ALL

0 <0-1>

SYS

977

Network

978

Network

Switching of extended ASCII code in catFs filesystem Raw printing job (Paper feeding drawer)

ALL

0 <0-1> 0 <0-5>

SYS

PRT

SYS

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 122

Code 979

Classification Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Raw printing job PRT 0 SYS (PCL symbol set) <0-39>

Contents Roman-8 ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 ISO 8859/2 Latin 2 ISO 8859/9 Latin 5 PC-8,Code Page 437 5: PC-8 D/N, Danish/ Norwegian 6: PC-850,Multilingual 7: PC-852, Latin2 8: PC-8 Turkish 9: Windows 3.1 Latin 1 10: Windows 3.1 Latin 2 11: Windows 3.1 Latin 5 12: DeskTop 13: PS Text 14: Ventura International 15: Ventura US 16: Microsoft Publishing 17: Math-8 18: PS Math 19: Ventura Math 20: Pi Font 21: Legal 22: ISO 4: United Kingdom 23: ISO 6:ASCII 24: ISO 11 25: ISO 15: Italian 26: ISO 17 27: ISO 21: German 28: ISO 60: Danish/Norwegian 29: ISO 69: French 30: Windows 3.0 Latin 1 31: MC Text 32: PC Cyrillic 33: ITC Zapf Dingbats 34: ISO 8859/10 Latin 6 35: PC-775 36: PC-1004 37: Symbol 38: Windows Baltic 39: Wingdings 0: Image quality priority mode 1: Function priority mode Sets the copy function to be invalid. 0: Valid 1: Invalid 0: Not switched 1: LG13"LG 2: FOLIO13"LG Performs the initial setting of the scrambler board. 0: 1: 2: 3: 4:

Procedur e 1

985

ElecPrint mode setting of mixed tronic Fil- input source of Electronic ing Filing General Copy function setting

ALL

0 <0-1>

SYS

986

PPC

0 <0-1>

SYS

988

Paper feeding Scrambler board

Setting of paper size switching to 13" LG Scrambler board initial setting

ALL

0 <0-2> -

SYS

989

ALL

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 123 04/10

Code 995

Classification Version

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Equipment number ALL 0 SYS (serial number) display <10 digits>

Contents This code can be also keyed in from the adjustment mode (05976). 10 digits Refer to values of total counter. 1: Cold 2: Warm 3: Not reset 1: Not printed out when the equipment is restarted 2: Printed out when the equipment is restarted 1: 10 MBPS 2: 100 MBPS 3: Automatic Writing only (Current setting is not displayed.) Maximum 31 letters 1: Available 2: Not available 1: Fixed IP address 2: Dynamic IP address 3: Dynamic IP address without AutoIP 4: Dynamic IP address without BOOTP 5: Dynamic IP address without DHCP Maximum 96 letters 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) 1: Available 2: Not available 1: Automatic 2: IEEE802.3 3: Ethernet II 4: IEEE802.3 SNAP 5: IEEE802.2 1: Available 2: Not available 1: Available 2: Not available

Procedur e 11

999 1001 1002

Maintenance Maintenance Network

FSMS total counter Reset of NIC board Selection of NIC board status information

ALL ALL ALL

0 <8 digits> 3 <1-3> 1 <1-2>

SYS NIC NIC

1 12 12

1003

Network

Speed setting of Ethernet

ALL

3 <1-3> -

NIC

12

1004

Network

NIC Web password

ALL

NIC

12

1005 1006

Network Network

Availability of IP Address Mode

ALL ALL

1 <1-2> 2 <1-5>

NIC NIC

12 12

1007 1008

Network Network

Domain name IP address

ALL ALL

NIC NIC

12 12

1009

Network

Subnet mask

ALL

NIC

12

1010

Network

Gateway

ALL

NIC

12

1011 1012

Network Network

Availability of IPX Network frame type

ALL ALL

1 <1-2> 1 <1-5>

NIC NIC

12 12

1013 1014

Network Network

Availability of NCP Burst Availability of AppleTalk

ALL ALL

1 <1-2> 1 <1-2>

NIC NIC

12 12

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 124

Code 1015 1016 1017 1018

Classification Network Network Network Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Zone setting of AppleTalk ALL * NIC Availability of LDAP Availability of DNS IP address to DNS server (Primary) ALL ALL ALL 1 <1-2> 1 <1-2> NIC NIC NIC

Contents Maximum 32 letters *: Wildcard character 1: Available 2: Not available 1: Available 2: Not available 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) 1: Invalid 2: Via DHCP 3: Insecure DDNS 4: Secure DDNS 5: Multi-secure DDNS 1: Available 2: Not available Maximum 15 letters Maximum 128 letters Maximum 128 letters 1: Available 2: Not available 1: Available 2: Not available Maximum 127 letters Maximum 47 letters 1: Available 2: Not available

Procedur e 12 12

2
12 12

1019

Network

IP address to DNS server (Secondary)

ALL

NIC

12

1020

Network

DDNS Desired level

ALL

1 <1-5>

NIC

12

1021 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031

Network Network Network Network Network Network Network Network Network Network

Availability of SLP NetBios name Name of WINS server or IP address (Primary) Name of WINS server or IP address (Secondary) Availability of Bindery Availability of NDS Directory service context Directory service tree Availability of HTTP server Port number to NIC HTTP server Port number to system HTTP server Availability of NIC HTTP client TCP port number to Controller HTTP client IP address to HTTP server (Primary)

ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

1 <1-2> 1 <1-2> 1 <1-2> 1 <1-2> 80 <165535> 8080 <165535> 2 <1-2> 80 <165535> -

NIC UTY UTY UTY NIC NIC NIC NIC NIC NIC

12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12

1032

Network

ALL

SYS

1033 1034

Network Network

ALL ALL

NIC UTY

1: Available 2: Not available

12 12

1035

Network

ALL

NIC

1037 1038 1039

Network Network Network

Availability of SMTP client FQDN or IP address to SMTP server TCP port number of SMTP client

ALL ALL ALL

1 <1-2> 25 <165535>

NIC NIC NIC

000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) 1: Available 2: Not available Maximum 128 Bytes

12

12 12 12

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 125

Code 1040 1041

Classification Network Network

1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048

Network Network Network Network Network Network Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Availability of SMTP server ALL 1 UTY <1-2> TCP port number of SMTP ALL 25 UTY server <165535> E-mail box name to SMTP ALL UTY server Availability of Offramp ALL 2 UTY <1-2> Offramp security ALL 1 UTY <1-2> Printing at Offramp ALL 1 UTY <1-2> Availability of POP3 clients ALL 1 NIC <1-2> FQDN or IP address to ALL NIC POP3 server Types of POP3 server ALL 1 NIC <1-3> Login name to POP3 server Login password to POP3 E-mail reception interval (Unit: Minute) TCP port number of POP3 client Availability of FTP client FQDN or IP address to FTP server TCP port number of FTP client Data port number of FTP client Login name to FTP server Login password to FTP server Availability of FTP server TCP port number of FTP server Login name to FTP client Login password to FTP client MIB function Setting of read Community Setting of read/Write Community ALL ALL ALL ALL 5 <0-4096> 110 <165535> 1 <1-2> 21 <165535> 0 <065535> 1 <1-2> 21 <165535> 1 <1-2> public private NIC NIC NIC NIC

Contents 1: Available 2: Not available

Procedur e 12 12

Maximum 192 letters 1: Available 2: Not available 1: Available 2: Not available 1: Available 2: Not available 1: Available 2: Not available Maximum 128 Bytes 1: Automatic 2: POP3 3: APOP Maximum 96 letters Maximum 96 letters

12 12 12 12 12 12 12

1049 1050 1051 1052

Network Network Network Network

12 12 12 12

1053 1054 1055

Network Network Network

ALL ALL ALL

NIC NIC UTY

1: Available 2: Not available Maximum 128 letters

12 12 12

1056

Network

ALL

UTY

12

1057 1058 1059 1060

Network Network Network Network

ALL ALL ALL ALL

SYS SYS NIC UTY

Maximum 31 letters Maximum 31 letters 1: Available 2: Not available

11 11 12 12

1061 1062 1063 1065 1066

Network Network Network Network Network

ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

SYS SYS NIC NIC NIC

Maximum 31 letters Maximum 31 letters 1: Valid 2: Invalid Maximum 31 letters Maximum 31 letters

11 11 12 12 12

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 126 05/05

Code 1067 1068 1069

Classification Network Network Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Authentication TRAP funcALL 1 NIC tion <1-2> ALERTS TRAP function ALL 1 NIC <1-2> TRAP destination IP ALL UTY address

Contents 1: Valid 2: Invalid 1: Valid 2: Invalid 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) Maximum 31 letters 1: Valid 2: Invalid

Procedur e 12 12

2
12

1070 1073 1074

Network Network Network

Community setting of TRAP (via IP) Availability of Raw/TCP TCP port number of Raw

ALL ALL ALL

public 1 <1-2> 9100 <165535> 1 <1-2> 515 <165535> 1 <1-2> 1 <1-2> 631 <165535> -

NIC NIC NIC

12 12 12

1075 1076

Network Network

Availability of LPD client TCP port number of LPD

ALL ALL

NIC NIC

1: Valid 2: Invalid

12 12

1077 1078 1079 1080

Network Network Network Network

LPD queue name Availability of IPP Availability of IPP port number 80 TCP port number of IPP

ALL ALL ALL ALL

NIC NIC NIC NIC

Maximum 31 letters 1: Valid 2: Invalid 1: Valid 2: Invalid

12 12 12 12

1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087

Network Network Network Network Network Network Network

1088 1089 1090 1091 1092

Network Network Network Network Network

IPP printer name IPP printer location IPP printer information IPP printer information (more) Installer of IPP printer driver IPP printer Make and Model IPP printer information (more) MFGR IPP message from operator Availability of FTP print Printer user name of FTP Printer user password of FTP TCP port number to FTP print server Login name to Novell print server Login password to Novell print server

ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

NIC NIC NIC NIC NIC NIC NIC

Maximum 127 letters Maximum 127 letters Maximum 127 letters Maximum 127 letters Maximum 127 letters Maximum 127 letters Maximum 127 letters

12 12 12 12 12 12 12

ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

1 <1-2> print 21 <165535> -

NIC NIC NIC NIC NIC

Maximum 127 letters 1: Available 2: Not available Maximum 31 letters Maximum 31 letters

12 12 12 12 12

1093 1094

Network Network

ALL ALL

NIC NIC

Maximum 47 letters Maximum 31 letters

12 12

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 127 05/05

Code 1095 1096 1097

Classification Network Network Network

1098 1099

Network Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Name of SearchRoot ALL NIC server Scan rate setting of print ALL 5 NIC queue <1-255> ALL 5 UTY Page number limitation for <1-99> printing text of received Email MDN return mail setting ALL 2 UTY when receiving E-mail <1-2> Trap destination of IPX ALL UTY

Contents Maximum 31 letters Unit: Second

Procedur e 12 12 12

1100

Network

Method of SMTP server authentication

ALL

5 <1-5>

NIC

1101 1102 1103 1104 1105

Network Network Network Network Network

Login name for SMTP server authentication Login password for SMTP server authentication Rendezvous setting Link local host name Service name setting

ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

1 <1-2> MFP_ serial Refer to contents

NIC NIC NIC NIC NIC

1: Valid 2: Invalid Maximum 24 letters (Valid from 0 to 9 and from A to F) 1: Plain 2: Login 3: Cram-MD5 4: Digest MD5 5: Disable Maximum 64 letters Maximum 64 letters 1: Valid 2: Invalid Maximum 127 letters Maximum 63 letters <Default value> e-STUDIO350: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO350 e-STUDIO450: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO450 Maximum 64 letters Maximum 32 letters Maximum 64 letters Maximum 32 letters 1: Valid 2: Invalid Maximum 63 letters 0: Invalid 1: Valid Unit: Second

12 12

12

12 12 12 12 12

1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1114 1117

Network Network Network Network Network Network Network Network

FTP server login name 1 FTP server login password 1 FTP server login name 2 FTP server login password 2 POP Before SMTP setting Host name Sending mail text of InternetFAX SMB time-out period

ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

Tiger Woods Shigeki Maruyam a 2 <1-2> MFP_ serial 1 <0-1> 300 <1-9999>

UTY UTY UTY UTY NIC NIC SYS SYS

12 12 12 12 12 12 1 1

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 128 05/05

Code 1120

Classification Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Backup/Restore of NIC ALL 0 SYS setting information <0-1>

Contents 0: Read (Reads all of the setting information in NIC and create a file NAM1B (no extension) in USB) 1: Write (Writes all of the setting information read from a file NAM1B (no extension) in USB) Maximum 15 letters Sets the Job Build Function. 0: Invalid 1: Valid Sets the maximum number of time a job build has been performed. 5-1000: 5 to 1000 times Selects the default screen when entering the User Function menu by pressing the [USER FUNCTIONS] button. 0: ADDRESS 1: COUNTER 1: LCF 2: Upper drawer 3: Lower drawer 4: PFP upper drawer 5: PFP lower drawer

Procedur e 12

1124 1130

Network User interface

Workgroup name Job Build Function

ALL ALL

workgroup 1 <0-1>

UTY SYS

12 1

1131

User interface

Maximum number of time job build performed

ALL

1000 <5-1000>

SYS

1132

General

Default screen selection of the User Function menu

ALL

1 <0-1>

SYS

1135

Paper feeding

Default setting of drawers (Printer/BOX)

PRT

1 <1-5>

SYS

1136

Network

1137 1138

Network Network

Number of lines simultaneously connectable when using SMB Memory partition size when using Samba LDAP search method setting

ALL

13 <0-16> 12 <8-20> 0 <0-3>

SYS

ALL ALL

SYS SYS

8-20 M bytes Sets the search method when performing a LDAP search. 0: Partial match 1: Prefix match 2: Suffix match 3: Full match 0: Not authenticated 1: Authenticated Selects the restriction of the template function usage setting. 0: No restriction 1: Only available with the administrator privilege.

1 1

1139 1140

Network User interface

LDAP authentication setting Restriction of the template function with the administrator privilege

ALL ALL

0 <0-1> 0 <0-1>

SYS SYS

1 1

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 129 05/11

Code 1145

Classification Maintenance (Remote) Image processing

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Counter notification ALL SYS Remote FAX setting

Contents Maximum 32 digits Enter a hyphen with the [MONITOR/PAUSE] button. Counts up the heater control time accumulated (when power of the equipment is ON) but does not count at the Sleep Mode. When the counter value of the fuser roller is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at the PM support mode. Counts the rotation number of the toner cartridge. Counts up when the registration sensor is ON. When the counter value of the fuser roller is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at the PM support mode. Counts up when the registration sensor is ON. When the counter value of the fuser roller is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode. Counts up when the registration sensor is ON. When the counter value of the fuser roller is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode. Counts up when the registration sensor is ON. When the counter value of the fuser roller is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode. Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the upper drawer. Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the lower drawer.

Procedur e 11

1372

Heater and energizing time accumulating counter Display/0 clearing

ALL

0 <8 digits>

1376

1385

Image processing Image processing

Toner cartridge drive counter Number of output pages Number of output pages (Thick paper 1)

ALL

0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>

ALL

1386

Image processing

Number of output pages (Thick paper 2)

ALL

0 <8 digits>

1387

Image processing

Number of output pages (Thick paper 3)

ALL

0 <8 digits>

1388

Image processing

Number of output pages (OHP film)

ALL

0 <8 digits>

1390

Paper feeding

Feeding retry counter (upper drawer)

ALL

0 <8 digits>

1391

Paper feeding

Feeding retry counter (lower drawer)

ALL

0 <8 digits>

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 130 05/05

Code 1392

Classification Paper feeding

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Feeding retry counter ALL 0 M (PFP upper drawer) <8 digits>

Contents Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the PFP upper drawer. Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the PFP lower drawer. Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the bypass tray. Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the LCF. When the number of feeding retry (08-1390 to 08-1395) exceeds the setting value, the feeding retry will not be performed subsequently. In case 0 is set as a setting value, however, the feeding retry continues regardless of the counter setting value.

Procedur e 1

1393

Paper feeding

Feeding retry counter (PFP lower drawer)

ALL

0 <8 digits>

1394

Paper feeding

Feeding retry counter (bypass feed)

ALL

0 <8 digits>

1395

Paper feeding Paper feeding Paper feeding Paper feeding Paper feeding Paper feeding Paper feeding Counter

Feeding retry counter (LCF) Feeding retry counter upper limit value (upper drawer) Feeding retry counter upper limit value (lower drawer) Feeding retry counter upper limit value (PFP upper drawer) Feeding retry counter upper limit value (PFP lower drawer) Feeding retry counter upper limit value (bypass feed) Feeding retry counter upper limit value (LCF) Counter for period of toner cartridge rotation time Counter for tab paper

ALL

0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>

1396

ALL

1397

ALL

1398

ALL

1399

ALL

1400

ALL

1401 1410

ALL ALL

M M Counts up the period of rotation time of the toner cartridge. Counts up when the registration sensor is ON. When the counter value of the fuser roller is reset, this counter is reset in sync at the PM support mode.

1 1

1412

Counter

ALL

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 131 05/05

Code 1422

Classification Data overwrite kit

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> HDD data overwriting type ALL 3 SYS setting <0-4>

Contents HDD data is cleared by overwriting the type of value set in this code. (This setting is enabled only when the GP-1050 is installed.) 0: "00" overwriting only 1: "FF" overwriting only 2: Random number overwriting only 3: "00" + "FF" + random number overwriting (validation ON) 4: "00" + "FF" + random number overwriting (validation OFF) HDD data is cleared by overwriting the type of value set in this code. (This setting is enabled only when the GP-1050 is installed.) 0: "00" overwriting only 1: "FF" overwriting only 2: Random number overwriting only 3: "00" + "FF" + random number overwriting (validation ON) 4: "00" + "FF" + random number overwriting (validation OFF) HDD data is cleared in the procedure set in 081424. * This setting is enabled only when the GP-1050 is installed. When this code is performed, the equipment cannot be started up. * This setting is enabled only when the GP-1050 is installed. When this code is performed, the equipment cannot be started up. * This setting is enabled only when the GP-1050 is installed.

Procedur e 1

1424

Data overwrite kit

HDD data clearing type setting (forcible clearing)

ALL

3 <0-4>

SYS

1426

Data overwrite kit

Forcible HDD data clearing

ALL

1427

Data overwrite kit

Forcible NVRAM data all clearing

ALL

1428

Data overwrite kit

Forcible SRAM backup data all clearing

ALL

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 132 05/05

Code 1432

Classification Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM able tion value> Mode only for Private Print ALL 0 SYS <0-1> "Disable e-Filing" function ALL 0 <0-1> SYS

Contents 0: Normal mode 1: Mode for Private Print 0: Function OFF (no restriction on data saving or other operations) 1: Function ON (Data saving or other operations are restricted) 0: Function OFF (no restriction on data saving or other operations) 1: Function ON (Data saving or other operations are restricted) 0: Disabled 1: SMTP authentication 2: LDAP authentication 0: Not permitted 1: Permitted

Procedur e 1

1433

Network

1434

Network

"Disabling local file save" function

ALL

0 <0-1>

SYS

1484

Network

Authentication method of "Scan to Email"

ALL

0 <0-2>

SYS

1485

Network

1486

Network

Setting whether use of Internet FAX is permitted or not when it is given an authenticationn Server setting for LDAP user authentication

ALL

0 <0-1>

SYS

ALL

1487

Network

"From" address assignment method when it is given an authentication

ALL

0 <04294967 295> 0 <0-2>

SYS

SYS

0: "User name" + @ + "Domain name" 1: LDAP searching 2: Use the address registered at "From" field of E-mail setting

1488

Network

ID setting of LDAP server for "From" address assignment Setting for "From" address edit at "Scan to Email" E-mail domain name

ALL

1489 1491

Network Network

ALL ALL

0 <04294967 295> 0 <0-1> -

SYS

SYS SYS

0: Not permitted 1: Permitted 96 + 2 (delimiter) character ASCll sequence only

1 11

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 133 05/05

<<Pixel counter related code>>(Chap. 2.2.9)


Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Standard paper size setting ALL EUR: 0 SYS UC: 1 JPN: 0 <0-1> Pixel counter all clearing ALL SYS Procedur e 1

Code 1500

Classification Pixel counter

Contents Selects the standard paper size to convert it into the pixel count (%). 0: A4 1: LT Clears all information related to the pixel counter. Clears all information related to the service technician reference pixel counter. Clears all information related to the toner cartridge reference pixel counter. Selects whether or not to display the pixel counter on the LCD screen. 0: Displayed 1: Not displayed Selects the reference when displaying the pixel counter on the LCD screen. 0: Service technician reference1: Toner cartridge reference Selects the counter to determine toner empty. 0: Output pages 1: Pixel counter Sets the number of output pages to determine toner empty. This setting is valid when 0 is set at 08-1506. Sets the number of output pages to determine toner empty. This setting is valid when 1 is set at 08-1506. Becomes 1 when 081502 is performed. Displays the date on which 08-1502 was performed. Displays the date on which 08-1503 was performed. Displays the date on which 08-1503 was performed.

1501

Pixel counter Pixel counter

1502

Service technician reference counter clearing

ALL

SYS

1503

Pixel counter

Toner cartridge reference counter clearing

ALL

SYS

1504

Pixel counter

Pixel counter display setting

ALL

1 <0-1>

SYS

1505

Pixel counter

Displayed reference setting

ALL

0 <0-1>

SYS

1506

Pixel counter

Toner empty determination counter setting

ALL

0 <0-1>

SYS

1507

Pixel counter

Threshold setting for toner empty determination (Output pages)

ALL

400 <0-999>

SYS

1508

Pixel counter

Threshold setting for toner empty determination (Pixel counter)

ALL

17550 <060000>

SYS

1509

Pixel counter Pixel counter Pixel counter Pixel counter

1510

Pixel counter clear flag/ Service technician reference Service technician reference cleared date Toner cartridge reference cleared date Toner cartridge reference count started date

ALL

0 <0-1> -

SYS

ALL

SYS

1514

ALL

SYS

1518

ALL

SYS

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 134 05/12

Code 1548

Classification Pixel counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Number of output pages PPC <8 digits> SYS (Service technician reference)

Contents Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the copy function, black mode and service technician reference. [Unit. page] Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the printer function and service technician reference. [Unit. page] Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the FAX function and service technician reference. [Unit. page] Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the copy function and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the printer function and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the FAX function and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] Counts the number of time of the toner cartridge replacement. Displays the average pixel count in the copy function and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Displays the average pixel count in the printer function and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%]

Procedur e 2

1550

Pixel counter

Number of output pages (Service technician reference)

PRT

<8 digits>

SYS

1551

Pixel counter

Number of output pages (Service technician reference)

FAX

<8 digits>

SYS

1553

Pixel counter

Number of output pages (Toner cartridge reference)

PPC

<8 digits>

SYS

1555

Pixel counter

Number of output pages/ black (Toner cartridge reference)

PRT

<8 digits>

SYS

1556

Pixel counter

Number of output pages (Toner cartridge reference)

FAX

<8 digits>

SYS

1566

Pixel counter Pixel counter

Toner cartridge replacement counter Average pixel count (Service technician reference)

ALL

<3 digits>

SYS

1592

PPC

0 <010000>

SYS

1593

Pixel counter

Average pixel count (Service technician reference)

PRT

0 <010000>

SYS

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 135

Code 1594

Classification Pixel counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM able tion value> Average pixel count FAX 0 SYS (Service technician refer<0ence) 10000>

Contents Displays the average pixel count in the FAX function and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Displays the average pixel count in the copy/ printer/FAX function and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Displays the latest pixel count in the copy function, black mode and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Displays the latest pixel count in the printer function and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Displays the latest pixel count in the FAX function and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Displays the average pixel count in the printer function and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Displays the average pixel count in the printer function, and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Displays the average pixel count in the copy/ printer/FAX function and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Displays the average pixel count in the FAX function and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Displays the latest pixel count in the FAX function and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Displays the latest pixel count in the copy function and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%]

Procedur e 2

1595

Pixel counter

Average pixel count (Service technician reference)

PPC/ PRT/ FAX

0 <010000>

SYS

1606

Pixel counter

Latest pixel count (Service technician reference)

PPC

0 <010000>

SYS

1607

Pixel counter

Latest pixel count (Service technician reference)

PRT

0 <010000>

SYS

1608

Pixel counter

Latest pixel count (Service technician reference)

FAX

0 <010000>

SYS

1613

Pixel counter

Average pixel count (Toner cartridge reference)

PPC

0 <010000>

SYS

1619

Pixel counter

Average pixel count (Toner cartridge reference)

PRT

0 <010000>

SYS

1624

Pixel counter

Average pixel count (Toner cartridge reference)

PPC/ PRT/ FAX

0 <010000>

SYS

1625

Pixel counter

Average pixel count (Toner cartridge reference)

FAX

0 <010000>

SYS

1634

Pixel counter

Latest pixel count (Toner cartridge reference)

FAX

0 <010000> 0 <010000>

SYS

1639

Pixel counter

Latest pixel count (Toner cartridge reference)

PPC

SYS

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 136

Code 1640

Classification Pixel counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO350/450> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Latest pixel count PRT 0 SYS (Toner cartridge reference) <010000>

Contents Displays the latest pixel count in the printer function and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the copy function are displayed. [Unit: page]

Procedur e 2

2
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14

1649-0 1649-1 1649-2 1649-3 1649-4 1649-5 1649-6 1649-7 1649-8 1649-9 1650-0 1650-1 1650-2 1650-3 1650-4 1650-5 1650-6 1650-7 1650-8 1650-9 1651-0 1651-1 1651-2 1651-3 1651-4 1651-5 1651-6 1651-7 1651-8 1651-9

Pixel counter

Pixel count distribution

Pixel counter

Pixel count distribution

Pixel counter

Pixel count distribution

0-5% 5.1-10% 10.1-15% 15.1-20% 20.1-25% 25.1-30% 30.1-40% 40.1-60% 60.1-80% 80.1100% 0-5% 5.1-10% 10.1-15% 15.1-20% 20.1-25% 25.1-30% 30.1-40% 40.1-60% 60.1-80% 80.1100% 0-5% 5.1-10% 10.1-15% 15.1-20% 20.1-25% 25.1-30% 30.1-40% 40.1-60% 60.1-80% 80.1100%

PPC PPC PPC PPC PPC PPC PPC PPC PPC PPC PRT PRT PRT PRT PRT PRT PRT PRT PRT PRT FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX

<8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits>

SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS

The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the printer function are displayed. [Unit: page]

The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the FAX function are displayed. [Unit: page]

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 137 05/11

<<PM support mode related code>> The management items at PM support mode can also be operated at setting mode (08). The following items are displayed or set by using sub-codes at PM management setting in the table below. <Sub-codes> 0: Present number of output pages - Means the present number of output pages. 1: Recommended number of output pages for replacement - Means the recommended number of output pages for replacement. 2: Number of output pages at the last replacement - Means the number of output pages at the last replacement. 3: Present driving counts - Means the present drive counts (1 count = 2 seconds). 4: Recommended driving counts to be replaced - Means the recommended drive counts for replacement (1 count = 2 seconds). 5: Driving counts at the last replacement - Means the drive counts at the last replacement. 6: Present output pages for control - Means the present number of output pages for controlling. 7: Present driving counts for control - Means the present drive counts for controlling (1 count = 2 seconds). 8: Number of times replaced - Counts up when clearing the counter of each unit in the PM Support Mode Screen. Notes: Sub-code 3 is equivalent to sub-code 7. When the value of sub-code 3 is changed, the value of sub-code 7 is also updated and vice versa. When "0" is set at one of sub-codes 0, 3, 6 and 7, the rest of them are automatically updated to "0". <e-STUDIO350/450>
Items Photoconductive drum PM management setting <Procedure 4> *Indicated in 8 digits 1150-0 to 8 Date of previous replacement <Procedure 2> 1151 Remarks <Default values of code 1150 (e-STUDIO350/450)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000 <Default values of code 1158 (e-STUDIO350/450)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000 <Default values of code 1172 (e-STUDIO350/450)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000 <Default values of code 1174 (e-STUDIO350/450)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000

Drum cleaning blade

1158-0 to 8

1159

Drum separation finger

1172-0 to 8

1173

Main charger grid

1174-0 to 8

1175

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 138 05/12

Items Main charger wire

PM management setting <Procedure 4> *Indicated in 8 digits 1182-0 to 8

Date of previous replacement <Procedure 2> 1183

Remarks <Default values of code 1182 (e-STUDIO350/450)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000 <Default values of code 1198 (e-STUDIO350/450)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000 <Default values of code 1200 (e-STUDIO350/450)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000 <Default values of code 1214 (e-STUDIO350/450)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000 <Default values of code 1224 (e-STUDIO350/450)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000 <Default values of code 1246 (e-STUDIO350/450)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000 <Default values of code 1250 (e-STUDIO350/450)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000 <Default values of code 1266 (e-STUDIO350/450)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000 <Default values of code 1268 (e-STUDIO350/450)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000 <Default values of code 1282 (e-STUDIO350/450)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/120000 <Default values of code 1284 (e-STUDIO350/450)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/120000 <Default values of code 1286 (e-STUDIO350/450)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/120000

Ozone filter

1198-0 to 8

1199

Developer material

1200-0 to 8

1201

Transfer charger wire

1214-0 to 8

1215

Separation charger wire

1224-0 to 8

1225

Fuser roller

1246-0 to 8

1247

Pressure roller

1250-0 to 8

1251

Cleaning roller

1266-0 to 8

1267

Fuser roller separation finger

1268-0 to 8

1269

Pickup roller (RADF)

1282-0, 1, 2, 8

1283

Feed roller (RADF)

1284-0,1,2,8

1285

Separation roller (RADF)

1286-0, 1, 2, 8

1287

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 139 05/12

Items Pickup roller (Upper drawer)

PM management setting <Procedure 4> *Indicated in 8 digits 1290-0, 1, 2, 8

Date of previous replacement <Procedure 2> 1291

Remarks <Default values of code 1290 (e-STUDIO350/450)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1292 (e-STUDIO350/450)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1294 (e-STUDIO350/450)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 160000/160000 <Default values of code 1298 (e-STUDIO350/450)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1300 (e-STUDIO350/450)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1302 (e-STUDIO350/450)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 160000/160000 <Default values of code 1306 (e-STUDIO350/450)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1308 (e-STUDIO350/450)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1310 (e-STUDIO350/450)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 160000/160000 <Default values of code 1312 (e-STUDIO350/450)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1314 (e-STUDIO350/450)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1316 (e-STUDIO350/450)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1320 (e-STUDIO350/450)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1322 (e-STUDIO350/450)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000

Pickup roller (Lower drawer)

1292-0,1,2,8

1293

Pickup roller (LCF)

1294-0,1,2,8

1295

Feed roller (Upper drawer)

1298-0,1,2,8

1299

Feed roller (Lower drawer)

1300-0,1,2,8

1301

Feed roller (LCF)

1302-0, 1, 2, 8

1303

Separation roller (Upper drawer)

1306-0,1,2,8

1307

Separation roller (Lower drawer)

1308-0,1,2,8

1309

Separation roller (LCF)

1310-0,1,2,8

1311

Separation roller (PFP upper drawer)

1312-0,1,2,8

1313

Separation roller (PFP lower drawer)

1314-0,1,2,8

1315

Separation roller (Bypass unit)

1316-0,1,2,8

1317

Feed roller (PFP upper drawer)

1320-0,1,2,8

1321

Feed roller (PFP lower drawer)

1322-0,1,2,8

1323

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 140 05/12

Items Feed roller (Bypass unit)

PM management setting <Procedure 4> *Indicated in 8 digits 1324-0,1,2,8

Date of previous replacement <Procedure 2> 1325

Remarks <Default values of code 1324 (e-STUDIO350/450)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1328 (e-STUDIO350/450)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1330 (e-STUDIO350/450)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1332 (e-STUDIO350/450)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000

Pickup roller (PFP upper drawer)

1328-0,1,2,8

1329

Pickup roller (PFP lower drawer)

1330-0,1,2,8

1331

Pickup roller (Bypass unit)

1332-0, 1, 2, 8

1333

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 141 05/12

<<Procedure to copy the total counter value (08-257)>> (1) Turn ON the power while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously. (2) Key in the code 257 and press the [START] button (the following is displayed). Note: Before performing the following operations, note the current counter values.

(3)

Key in the value 1 or 2 and press the [START] button. The value entered is displayed on the left of the %, and the [ENTER] button is displayed. Note: The value can be erased by pressing the [CLEAR] button to change as long as the [START] button is not pressed. (The value on the left of the % is reset to 0 by pressing the [CLEAR] button.) Key in 1 to copy the value of the total counter (LGC board) (A) onto the value of the backup counter (SYS board) (B).

(A)

(B)

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 142 05/12

Key in 2 to copy the value of the backup counter (SYS board) (B) onto the value of the total counter (LGC board) (A).

(A)

(B)

(4)

Press the [ENTER] button to complete overwriting of the counter value.

Note: The screen returns to the code entry screen without copying (overwriting) the value when the [CANCEL] button is pressed.

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 143 05/12

2.2.8

Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)

The items in the setting code list can be set or changed in this setting mode (08).

Procedure 1
[CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [Digital key] *[FUNCTION CLEAR] Sets or changes value [ENTER] [POWER] OFF/ON or (Exit) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM)

[CLEAR] (Corrects value)

* Procedure 2
[0][8] [POWER]

Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).

[Digital key] (Code)

[START]

[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] Adjustment value cannot be changed

[POWER]OFF/ON (Exit)

Procedure 3
[0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [ENTER] or (Automatic setting) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM) [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]

Procedure 4
[CANCEL] [START] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [Digital key] (Sub-code) [START] [ENTER] or [Digital key] [INTERRUPT] * [FUNCTION CLEAR] (Stores value Sets or in RAM) changes value [CLEAR] (Corrects value) [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

[CLEAR] (Corrects value)

Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 144 07/11

Procedure 5
[CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [Digital key] *[HELP] Sets or changes value [ENTER] [POWER] OFF/ON or (Exit) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM)

[CLEAR] (Corrects value)

* Procedure 7

Press [HELP] to enter "-".

[CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [Digital key] (Setting)

[ENTER] or (HDD formatting) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM)

[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

[CLEAR] (Corrects value)

Procedure 9
[CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [ENTER] [POWER] OFF/ON or (Exit) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM) [CLEAR] (Corrects value)

[Select icon]

Procedure 10
[CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [Digital key] (1st setting) [START] [Digital key] (2nd setting) [POWER] [ENTER] or OFF/ON [INTERRUPT] (Exit) (Stores value in RAM) [CLEAR] (Corrects value)

[CLEAR] (Corrects value)

Procedure 11 and 12
[CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [Digital key] or [ENTER] [START] [Software keyboard] *2(Stores value in RAM) *1 [MONITOR/PAUSE] Sets or changes value [CLEAR] (Corrects value)

[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

*1 Press [MONITOR/PAUSE] to enter "-", when entering telephone number. *2 The data are stored in SYS-RAM in procedure 11 and stored in NIC-RAM in procedure 12.

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 145 05/12

Procedure 14
[CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [Digital key] (Sub-code) [START] [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] Adjustment value cannot be changed [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

[CLEAR] (Corrects value)

Notes: 1. The digit after the hyphen in Code of the following table is a sub code. 2. e-STUDIO352/353/452/453: In "RAM", the NVRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated. "M" stands for the LGC board, "SYS", "NIC" and "UTY" stands for the SYS board.
Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Date and time setting ALL Year/month/date/day/ <13 dighour/minute/second its> Example: 03 07 0 13 13 27 48 Day - 0 is for Sunday. Proceeds Monday through Saturday from 1 to 6. M 0: EUR Destination selection ALL EUR: 0 UC: 1 1: UC JPN: 2 2: JPN <0-2> Counter installed externally ALL 0 M 0: No external counter <0-3> 1: Coin controller 2: Copy key card (This value is valid only when 2 is set to 08-201.) 3: Key copy counter Line adjustment mode ALL 0 M 0: For factory ship<0-1> ment 1: For line * Field: 0 must be selected Auto-clear timer setting ALL 3 SYS Timer to return the <0-10> equipment to the default settings when the [START] button is not pressed after the function and the mode are set 0: Not cleared 1 to 10: Set number x 15 sec.

Code 200

Classification General

Procedur e 5

201

General

202

User interface

203

General

204

User interface

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 146 07/11

Code 205

Classification User interface

206

User interface

207

User interface

209

User interface

210

Paper feeding

213

User interface

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default ProFunc- <AcceptItems RAM Contents cedur tion able e value> 1 Auto power save mode ALL JPN: 6 SYS Timer to automatically timer setting Other: 11 switch to the Auto <0, 6-15> power save mode when the equipment has not been used 0: Invalid 6: 3min. 7: 4min. 8: 5min. 9: 7min. 10: 10min. 11: 15min. 12: 20min. 13: 30min. 14: 45min. 15: 60min. 1 SYS Timer to turn OFF the Auto Shut Off Mode timer ALL Refer to setting (Auto Shut Off content power or to enter the Mode / Sleep Mode) <0-20> Sleep Mode automatically when the equipment has not been used 0: 3min. 1: 5min. 2: 10min. 3: 15min. 4: 20min. 5: 25min. 6: 30min. 7: 40min. 8: 50min. 9: 60min. 10: 70min.11: 80min. 12: 90min. 13: 100min. 14: 110min. 15: 120min. 16: 150min. 17:180min. 18: 210min. 19:240min. 20: Not used <Default value> e-STUDIO352/353 JPN: 0 UC, EUR: 9 Others: 9 e-STUDIO452/453 JPN: 0 UC, EUR: 12 Others: 12 Highlighting display on ALL 0 SYS 0: Black letter on white 1 LCD <0-1> background 1: White letter on black background 1 Default setting of filing forALL 1 SYS 0: TIFF (Multi) mat when E-mailing <0-6> 1: PDF (Multi) 2: Not used 3: TIFF (Single) 4: PDF (Single) 5: XPS (Multi) 6: XPS (Single) Paper size (A6-R) PRT 148/105 M 10 feeding/width wise direc<148tion 432/105297> Display of [REVERSE ALL 0 SYS 0: Not displayed 1 ORDER] button <0-1> 1: Displayed

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 147 07/11

Code 219

Classification User interface

220

User interface

221

User interface

224 225

Paper feeding Paper feeding Paper feeding Paper feeding

226

227

228

Paper feeding Paper feeding

229

230

Paper feeding

231

Paper feeding

232

Paper feeding

233

Paper feeding

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Default setting of filing forSCN 0 SYS 0: TIFF (Multi) mat when storing files <0-6> 1: PDF (Multi) 2: Not used 3: TIFF (Single) 4: PDF (Single) 5: XPS (Multi) 6: XPS (Single) Language displayed at ALL EUR: 0 SYS 0: Language 1 power-ON UC: 0 1: Language 2 JPN: 5 2: Language 3 3: Language 4 <0-6> 4: Language 5 5: Language 6 6: Language 7 Language selection in UI ALL EUR: 0 SYS 0: Language 1 data at Web power ON UC: 0 1: Language 2 JPN: 5 2: Language 3 <0-6> 3: Language 4 4: Language 5 5: Language 6 6: Language 7 Paper size for bypass feed PPC UNDEF SYS Press the button on the LCD to select the size. Paper size for upper ALL EUR: A4 M Press the button on the drawer UC: LT LCD to select the size. JPN: A4 M Press the button on the Paper size for lower ALL EUR: A3 LCD to select the size. drawer UC: LD JPN: A3 Paper size for PFP upper ALL EUR: M Press the button on the drawer A4-R LCD to select the size. UC: LT-R JPN: A4-R Paper size for PFP lower ALL EUR: A4 M Press the button on the drawer UC: LG LCD to select the size. JPN: B4 ALL 420/297 M Paper size (A3) <182feeding/width wise direc432/140tion 297> ALL 297/210 M Paper size (A4-R) <182feeding/width wise direc432/140tion 297> ALL 210/148 M Paper size (A5-R) <182feeding/width wise direc432/140tion 297> ALL 364/257 M Paper size (B4) <182feeding/width wise direc432/140tion 297> ALL 257/182 M Paper size (B5-R) <182feeding/width wise direc432/140tion 297>

Procedur e 1

9 9

10

10

10

10

10

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 148 07/11

Code 234

Classification Paper feeding

235

Paper feeding

236

Paper feeding

237

Paper feeding

238

Paper feeding

239

Paper feeding

240

Paper feeding

241

Paper feeding

242

Paper feeding

243

Paper feeding

244

Paper feeding

245

Paper feeding

247

Paper feeding

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Paper size (LT-R) ALL 279/216 M feeding/width wise direc<182tion 432/140297> Paper size (LD) ALL 432/279 M feeding/width wise direc<182tion 432/140297> Paper size (LG) ALL 356/216 M feeding/width wise direc<182tion 432/140297> Paper size (ST-R) ALL 216/140 M feeding/width wise direc<182tion 432/140297> Paper size (COMPUTER) ALL 356/257 M feeding/width wise direc<182tion 432/140297> ALL 330/210 M Paper size (FOLIO) <182feeding/width wise direc432/140tion 297> ALL 330/216 M Paper size (13LG) <182feeding/width wise direc432/140tion 297> ALL 216/216 M Paper size (8.5X8.5) <182feeding/width wise direc432/140tion 297> ALL 432/279 SYS Paper size (Non-standard) <148feeding/width wise direc432/105tion 297> ALL 148/100 SYS Registers the paper Memory 1 <148size of bypass feed Paper size (bypass feed432/100(non-standard type) into ing/non-standard type) 297> [MEMORY 1]. feeding/width wise direction Paper size (8K) ALL 390/270 M feeding/width wise direc<182tion 432/140297> Paper size (16K-R) ALL 270/195 M feeding/width wise direc<182tion 432/140297> ALL 148/100 SYS Registers the paper Memory 2 <148size of bypass feed Paper size (bypass feed432/100(non-standard type) into ing/non-standard type) 297> [MEMORY 2]. feeding/width wise direction

Procedur e 10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 149 07/11

Code 248

Classification Paper feeding

249

Paper feeding

250

Maintenance

251

Maintenance

252

Maintenance Maintenance Paper feeding

253 254

255

Paper feeding

256

Paper feeding

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> ALL 148/100 SYS Registers the paper Memory 3 <148size of bypass feed Paper size (bypass feed432/100(non-standard type) into ing/non-standard type) 297> [MEMORY 3]. feeding/width wise direction Memory 4 ALL 148/100 SYS Registers the paper <148size of bypass feed Paper size (bypass feeding/non-standard type) 432/100(non-standard type) into feeding/width wise direc297> [MEMORY 4]. tion SYS A telephone number Service technician teleALL 0 can be entered up to 32 phone number <32 digdigits. its> Use the [MONITOR/ PAUSE] button to enter a hyphen(-). Setting value of PM ALL Refer to M <Default> counter content e-STUDIO352/353 <8 digits> UC, EUR: 120000 JPN: 0 e-STUDIO452/453 UC, EUR: 150000 JPN: 0 Current value of PM ALL 0 M Counts up when the counter Display/0 clearing <8 digits> registration sensor is ON. Error history display ALL SYS Displays the latest 20 errors data LTA4/LDA3 PRT 0 SYS Sets whether the data is <0-1> printed on the different but similar size paper or not when the paper of corresponding size is not available. 0: Valid (The data is printed on A4/A3 when LT/LD is selected or vice versa.) 1: Invalid (The message to use the selected paper size is displayed.) PFP/LCF installation ALL 0 M 0: Automatic <0-4> 1: PFP single-drawer type installed 2: PFP dual-drawer type installed 3: LCF installed 4: Not installed M Press the icon on the Paper size setting /LCF ALL EUR: A4 LCD to select the size. UC: LT JPN: A4

Procedur e 10

10

11

2 1

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 150 07/11

Code 257

Classification Counter

258

Maintenance

259

Network

260

Network

263

User interface

264 265 266

Network Network Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Counter copy ALL 1: Electrical counter -> <1-2> Backup counter (NVRAM-> SRAM) 2: Backup counter -> Electrical counter (SRAM-> NVRAM) (P. 2-142) FSMS acceptance ALL 1 SYS Sets whether the FSMS <0-2> connection is accepted or not. 0: Prohibited 1: Accepted (serial connection only) 2: Accepted (both serial and USB connections) Storage period at trail and PRT 14 SYS 0: No limits private <0-30> 1 to 30: 1 to 30 days 31: 1hour 32: 2hours 33: 4hours 34: 8hours 35: 12hours Web data retention period SCN 10 SYS When a certain period <3 digits> of time has passed without operation after accessing TopAccess, the data being registered is automatically reset. This period is set at this code. (Unit: Minute) Administrator's password ALL 123456 The password can be (Maximum 10 digits) <10 digentered in alphabets its> and figures (A-Z, a-z and 0-9) within 10 digits. File retention period SCN 30 SYS 0: No limits <0-999> 1 to 999: 1 to 999 days Maximum data capacity at SCN 30 SYS 2 to 30 M bytes E-mailing <2-30> Maximum data capacity at ALL 30 SYS 2 to 30 M bytes Internet FAX <2-30>

Procedur e -

2
1

11

1 1 1

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 151 07/11

Code 267

270

271

272

273

274

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default ClassifiFunc- <AcceptItems RAM Contents cation tion able value> ElecFull guarantee of docuALL 1 SYS Sets the file retention tronic ments in Electronic Filing <0-1> level when editing the filing when HDD is full files in the Electronic Filing (at CutDoc/SaveDoc command execution). 0: Not full retained 1: Fully retained Retains the source file until CutDoc/SaveDoc command is completed. * The file is not deleted even if the HDD has become full during the execution of command when "1" is set. ElecDefault setting of user box ALL 0 SYS Sets the data retention tronic retention period <0-999> period when creating a filing user box. 0: Not deleted 1 to 999: Retention period (Unit: Day) General Warning notification of the ALL 90 SYS Sets the percentage of File Share and e-Filing par<0-100> HDD partition filled titions are filled when warning notification is sent. 0 to 100: 0 to 100% * Related code 08-288 Scanning Notification setting of EALL 3 SYS Sets the days left the mail saving time limit <0-99> notification of E-mail saving time limit appears 0 to 99: 0 to 99 days Scanning Default setting of partial ALL 0 SYS Sets the default value size when transmitting E<0-6> for the partial size of Email mail to be transmitted when creating a template. 0: Not divided 1: 64 2: 128 3: 256 4: 512 5: 1024 6: 2048 (Unit: KB) FAX Default setting of page by ALL 0 SYS Sets the default value page when transmitting <0-4> for the page by page of Internet FAX Internet FAX to be transmitted when creating a template. 0: Not divided 1: 256 2: 512 3: 1024 4: 2048 (Unit: KB)

Procedur e 1

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 152 07/11

Code 276

Classification User interface

281

User interface

283

User interface

284

User interface User interface

285

286

User interface

288

General

290

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default ProFunc- <AcceptItems RAM Contents cedur tion able e value> 1 Default setting of density SCN 0 SYS 0: Automatic density adjustment <0-11> 1: Step -5 2: Step -4 3: Step -3 4: Step -2 5: Step -1 6: Step 0 (center) 7: Step +1 8: Step +2 9: Step +3 10: Step +4 11: Step +5 (1 to 11: Manual density) Default setting of resolution SCN 1 SYS 0: 150 dpi 1 <0-4> 1: 200 dpi 2: 300 dpi3: 400dpi 4: 600 dpi Default setting of original SCN 0 SYS 0: Text 1 mode <0-3> 1: Text/Photo 2: Photo 3: Gray scale Default setting of scanning SCN 0 SYS 0: Single 1 mode <0-2> 1: Book 2: Tablet Default setting of rotation SCN 0 SYS 0: 0 degree 1 mode <0-3> 1: 90 degrees 2: 180 degrees 3: 270 degrees 1 Default setting of original SCN 0 SYS 0: Automatic paper size <0-22> 1: A3 2: A4 3: LD 4: LT 5: A4-R 6: A5-R 7: LT-R 8: LG 9: B4 10: B5 11: ST-R 12: COMP 13: B5-R 14: FOLIO 15: 13"LG 16: 8.5"x 8.5" 18: A6-R 19: Size mixed20: 8K 21: 16K 22: 16K-R 1 Searching interval of deletALL 12 SYS Sets the search intering expired files and check<1-24> val of deleting expired ing capacity of HDD files and checking partitions capacity of HDD partitions. (Unit: Hour) * Related code 08-271 Raw printing job (Duplex) PRT 1 SYS 0: Valid 1 <0-1> 1: Invalid

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 153 07/11

Code 291

Classification Network

292

Network

293 294 295

Network Network Network

296

Network

297

Network

298

Network

299 300 302

Network User interface User interface

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Raw printing job PRT EUR: 6 SYS 0: LD 1: LG (Paper size) UC: 2 2: LT 3: COMP JPN: 6 4: ST 5: A3 <0 -13> 6: A4 7: A5 8: A6 9: B4 10: B5 11: FOLIO 12: 13 "LG 13: 8.5" x 8.5" Raw printing job PRT 0 SYS 0: Plain paper (Paper type) <0-5> 1: Thick paper 1 2: Thick paper 2 3: Thick paper 3 4: OHP film 5: Tab paper Raw printing job PRT 0 SYS 0: Portrait (Paper direction) <0-1> 1: Landscape Raw printing job (Staple) PRT 1 SYS 0: Valid <0-1> 1: Invalid Raw printing job (receiving PRT 0 SYS 0: Inner tray tray) <0-5> 1: Finisher tray 1 2: Finisher tray 2 3: Not used 4: Job Separator upper tray 5: Job Separator lower tray* The settings 4 and 5 are effective only when the Job Separator (MJ-5004) is installed. SYS Sets the number of Raw printing job PRT 1200 form lines from 5 to (Number of form lines) <500128. (A hundredfold of 12800> the number of form lines is defined as the setting value.) Raw printing job PRT 1000 SYS Sets the font pitch from (PCL font pitch) <440.44 to 99.99. (A hun9999> dredfold of the font pitch is defined as the setting value.) SYS Sets the font size from Raw printing job PRT 1200 4 to 999.75. (PCL font size) <400(A hundredfold of the 99975> font size is defined as the setting value.) Raw printing job PRT 0 SYS Sets the PCL font num(PCL font number) <0-79> ber. Maximum number of copy PPC 0 SYS 0: 999 1: 99 2: 9 volume (MAX9) <0-2> Original counter display PPC EUR: 2 SYS Sets whether the origiUC: 0 nal counter is disJPN: 0 played or not. <0, 2, 4> 0: Not displayed 2: Displayed 4: Displayed (Doublesized original is counted as 2.)

Procedur e 1

1 1 1

1 1 1

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 154 07/11

Code 305-0 305-1 305-2 305-3 305-4 305-5 305-6 305-7 305-8 305-9 305-10 305-11 305-12 305-13 305-14 305-15 305-16 306-0 306-1 306-2 306-3 306-4 306-5 306-6 306-7 306-8 306-9 306-10 306-11 306-12 306-13 306-14 306-15 306-16

Classification Counter

Counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Number of A3 PPC 0 SYS Counts the output output pages A4 <8 digits> pages in the copier in copier func- A5 function for each paper tion size according to the A6 setting for the count B4 setting of large-sized B5 paper (08-352) and the definition setting of FOLIO largesized paper (08LD 353). LG LT ST COMP 13LG 8.5 x 8.5 16K 8K Others Number of A3 PRT 0 SYS Counts the output output pages A4 <8 digits> pages in the printer in Printer function for each paper A5 Function size according to the A6 setting for the count B4 setting of large-sized B5 paper (08-352) and the definition setting of FOLIO largesized paper (08LD 353). LG LT ST COMP 13LG 8.5 x 8.5 16K 8K Others

Procedur e 4

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 155 07/11

Code 307-0 307-1 307-2 307-3 307-4 307-5 307-6 307-7 307-8 307-9 307-10 307-11 307-12 307-13 307-14 307-15 307-16 308-0 308-1 308-2 308-3 308-4 308-5 308-6 308-7 308-8 308-9 308-10 308-11 308-12 308-13 308-14 308-15 308-16

Classification Counter

Counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Number of A3 PRT 0 SYS Counts the output output pages A4 <8 digits> pages at the List Print at List Print Mode for each paper A5 Mode size according to the A6 setting for the count B4 setting of large-sized B5 paper (08-352) and the definition setting of FOLIO largesized paper (08LD 353). LG LT ST COMP 13LG 8.5 x 8.5 16K 8K Others Number of A3 FAX 0 SYS Counts the output output pages A4 <8 digits> pages in the FAX Funcin FAX Func- A5 tion for each paper size tion according to the setting A6 for the count setting of B4 large-sized paper (08B5 352) and the definition setting of largesized FOLIO paper (08-353). LD LG LT ST COMP 13LG 8.5 x 8.5 16K 8K Others

Procedur e 4

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 156 07/11

Code 312-0 312-1 312-2 312-3 312-4 312-5 312-6 312-7 312-8 312-9 312-10 312-11 312-12 312-13 312-14 312-15 312-16 313-0 313-1 313-2 313-3 313-4 313-5 313-6 313-7 313-8 313-9 313-10 313-11 313-12 313-13 313-14 313-15 313-16

Classification Counter

Counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> A3 PPC 0 SYS Counts the scanning Number of <8 digits> pages in the Copier scanning A4 Function for each paper pages in A5 size according to the Copier FuncA6 setting for the count tion B4 setting of largesized B5 paper (08-352) and the definition setting of FOLIO largesized paper (08LD 353). LG LT ST COMP 13LG 8.5 x 8.5 16K 8K Others A3 SCN 0 SYS Counts the scanning Number of <8 digits> pages in the Scanning scanning A4 Function for each paper pages in A5 size according to the Scanning A6 setting for the count Function B4 setting of large-sized B5 paper (08-352) and the definition setting of FOLIO largesized paper (08LD 353). LG LT ST COMP 13LG 8.5 x 8.5 16K 8K Others

Procedur e 4

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 157 07/11

Code 314-0 314-1 314-2 314-3 314-4 314-5 314-6 314-7 314-8 314-9 314-10 314-11 314-12 314-13 314-14 314-15 314-16 315-0 315-1 315-2 315-3 315-4 315-5 315-6 315-7 315-8 315-9 315-10 315-11 315-12 315-13 315-14 315-15 315-16

Classification Counter

Counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Number of A3 FAX 0 SYS Counts the scanning scanning <8 digits> pages in the FAX FuncA4 pages in FAX A5 tion for each paper size Function according to the setting A6 for the count setting of B4 large-sized paper (08B5 352) and the definition setting of largesized FOLIO paper (08-353). LD LG LT ST COMP 13LG 8.5 x 8.5 16K 8K Others Number of A3 FAX 0 SYS Counts the transmitted transmitted <8 digits> pages in the FAX FuncA4 pages in FAX A5 tion for each paper size Function according to the setting A6 for the count setting of B4 large-sized paper (08B5 352) and the definition setting of largesized FOLIO paper (08-353). LD LG LT ST COMP 13LG 8.5 x 8.5 16K 8K Others

Procedur e 4

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 158 07/11

Code 316-0 316-1 316-2 316-3 316-4 316-5 316-6 316-7 316-8 316-9 316-10 316-11 316-12 316-13 316-14 316-15 316-16 320-0 320-1 320-2

Classification Counter

Counter Counter Counter

321-0 321-1 321-2

Counter Counter Counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Number of A3 FAX 0 SYS Counts the received received <8 digits> pages in the FAX FuncA4 pages in FAX A5 tion for each paper size Function according to the setting A6 for the count setting of B4 large-sized paper (08B5 352) and the definition setting of largesized FOLIO paper (08-353). LD LG LT ST COMP 13LG 8.5 x 8.5 16K 8K Others Large PPC 0 SYS Counts the number of Display of <8 digits> output pages in the number of output pages Small PPC 0 SYS Copier Function according to its size in Copier <8 digits> Function Total PPC 0 SYS (large/small). Large: <8 digits> Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. Large PRT 0 SYS Counts the number of Display of <8 digits> output pages in the number of output pages Small PRT 0 SYS Printer Function according to its size in Printer <8 digits> Function Total PRT 0 SYS (large/small). Large: <8 digits> Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes.

Procedur e 4

14 14 14

14 14 14

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 159 07/11

Code 322-0 322-1 322-2

Classification Counter Counter Counter

323-0 323-1 323-2

Counter Counter Counter

327-0 327-1 327-2

Counter Counter Counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Large PRT 0 SYS Counts the number of Display of <8 digits> output pages at the List number of output pages Small PRT 0 SYS Print Mode Function according to its size at List Print <8 digits> Mode Total PRT 0 SYS (large/small). Large: <8 digits> Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. Large FAX 0 SYS Counts the number of Display of <8 digits> output pages in the FAX number of output pages Small FAX 0 SYS Function according to its size (large/small). in FAX Func<8 digits> tion Total FAX 0 SYS Large: Number of output <8 digits> pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. Display of Large PPC 0 SYS Counts the number of number of <8 digits> scanning pages in the scanning Small PPC 0 SYS Copier Function pages in according to its size <8 digits> Copier Func- Total PPC 0 SYS (large/small). tion Large: <8 digits> Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes.

Procedur e 14 14 14

14 14 14

14 14 14

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 160 07/11

Code 328-0 328-1 328-2

Classification Counter Counter Counter

329-0 329-1 329-2

Counter Counter Counter

330-0 330-1 330-2

Counter Counter Counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Large FAX 0 SYS Counts the number of Display of <8 digits> scanning pages in the number of scanning Small FAX 0 SYS FAX Function according to its size (large/small). pages in FAX <8 digits> Function Total FAX 0 SYS Large: Number of output <8 digits> pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. Large SCN 0 SYS Counts the number of Display of <8 digits> scanning pages in the number of scanning Small SCN 0 SYS Scanning Function according to its size pages in <8 digits> Scanning Total SCN 0 SYS (large/small). Large: Function <8 digits> Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. Display of Large FAX 0 SYS Counts the number of number of <8 digits> transmitted pages in the transmitted Small FAX 0 SYS FAX Function according pages in FAX to its size (large/small). <8 digits> Function Total FAX 0 SYS Large: Number of output <8 digits> pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes.

Procedur e 14 14

2
14

14 14 14

14 14 14

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 161 07/11

Code 331

Classification User interface

332-0 332-1 332-2

Counter Counter Counter

335-0 335-1 335-2 342

Counter Counter Counter User interface

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents able tion value> Default setting of screen ALL 0 SYS Sets the screen to be <0-5> displayed after the auto-clear time has passed or it has recovered from the energy saving mode or sleep mode. 0: Copier 1: Fax 2: Scan 3: Box 4: Job Status 5: Template Large FAX 0 SYS Counts the number of Display of <8 digits> received pages in the number of received Small FAX 0 SYS FAX Function according to its size (large/small). pages in FAX <8 digits> Function Total FAX 0 SYS Large: Number of output <8 digits> pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. Display of Large ALL 0 SYS Displays the total numtotal number <8 digits> ber of pages in the of pages Small ALL 0 SYS Copier/Printer/Scanning/FAX Functions. <8 digits> Total Displaying number of original pages placed on original glass ALL PPC 0 <8 digits> 0 <0-1> SYS SYS This setting is whether the number of pages of originals placed on the original glass is displayed or not. 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed 0: Counted as 1 1: Counted as 2 0: Counted as 1 1: Counted as 2 0: A3/LD 1: A3/LD/B4/LG/ FOLIO/COMP 0: Counted as 1 1: Counted as 2 0: Counted as 1 1: Counted as 2

Procedur e 1

14 14 14

14 14 14 1

344 346 347

Counter Counter Counter

Count setting of tab paper (PM) Count setting of largesized paper (PM) Definition setting of largesized paper (PM) Count setting of thick paper (PM) Count setting of OHP film (PM)

ALL ALL ALL

1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1>

M M M

1 1 1

348 349

Counter Counter

ALL ALL

M M

1 1

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 162 07/11

Code 352

Classification Counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Count setting of largeALL JPN: 0 M 0: sized paper (Fee charging OTHER: 1: system counter) 1 2: <0-2> Definition setting of largesized paper (Fee charging system counter) Counter for upper drawer feeding Counter for lower drawer feeding Counter for bypass feeding ALL 0 <0-1> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 1 <0-7> M

Contents

Procedur e 1

353

Counter

356

Counter

ALL

357

Counter

ALL

358

Counter

ALL

359 360

Counter Counter

Counter for LCF feeding Counter for PFP upper drawer feeding Counter for PFP lower drawer feeding Counter for ADU

ALL ALL

M M

370

Counter

ALL

372

Counter

ALL

374 381

Counter Counter

Counter for RADF Setting for counter installed externally

ALL ALL

SYS M

390 391 392 393 398

Counter Counter Counter Counter Laser

Number of errors in HDD (Copier) Number of errors in HDD (FAX) Number of errors in HDD (Scanning) Number of errors in HDD (Printer) Number of polygonal motor rotational speed switching

PPC FAX SCN PRT ALL

0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>

SYS SYS SYS SYS M

Counted as 1 Counted as 2 Counted as 1 (Mechanical counter is double counter) 0: A3/LD 1: A3/LD/B4/LG/ FOLIO/COMP/8k Counts the number of sheets fed from upper drawer Counts the number of sheets fed from lower drawer Counts the number of sheets fed from bypass feed Counts the number of sheets fed from LCF Counts the number of sheets fed from PFP upper drawer Counts the number of sheets fed from PFP lower drawer Counts the number of output pages of duplex printing. Counts the number of originals fed from RADF Selects the job to count up for the external counter. 0: Not selected 1: Copier 2: FAX 3: Copier/FAX 4: Printer 5: Copier/Printer 6: Printer/FAX 7: Copier/Printer/FAX The number of error is reset at HDD formatting.

2
1

2 2

2 1

2 2 2 2

Counts the number of time the polygonal motor has switched its rotational speed between normal rotation and standby rotation

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 163 07/11

Code 399

Classification Laser

400

Fuser

409

Fuser

410

Fuser

411

Fuser

412

Fuser

413

Fuser

414

Developer

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Accumulated time of polygALL 0 M Accumulates the time onal motor at normal rota<8 digits> the polygonal motor has tion rotated at normal rotation. Fuser unit error status ALL 0 M 0: No error counter <0-19> 1: C411(Once) 2: C410(consecutively occurred) 3: 4: 5: C440 6: C450 7: C440 8: C450 9: C440 10: C470 11: C470 12: C480 13: C480 14: C470 15: C480 16: C490 17: C470 18: C480 19: C490 Fuser roller temperature at ALL 0 M 0: OFF 1: 40C a energy saver mode <0-13> 2: 50C 3: 60C (Center thermistor) 4: 70C 5: 80C 6: 90C 7: 100C 8: 110C 9: 120C 10: 130C 11: 140C 12: 150C 13: 160C ALL 12 M 0: 140C 1: 145C Fuser roller temperature <0-14> 2: 150C 3: 155C during printing (Center 4: 160C 5: 165C thermistor/Plain paper) 6: 170C 7: 175C 8: 180C 9: 185C 10: 190C 11: 195C 12: 200C 13: 205C 14: 210C Fuser roller temperature on ALL 12 M 0: 140C 1: 145C standby (Center ther<0-12> 2: 150C 3: 155C mistor) 4: 160C 5: 165C 6: 170C 7: 175C 8: 180C 9: 185C 10: 190C 11: 195C 12: 200C Fuser roller temperature ALL 12 M 1: 140C 1: 145C during printing <0-14> 3: 150C 4: 155C (Center thermistor/Thick 5: 160C 6: 165C paper 3) 7: 170C 8: 175C 9: 180C 10: 185C 11: 190C 12: 195C 13: 200C 14: 210C Fuser roller temperature ALL 12 M 0: 140C 1: 145C during printing <0-14> 2: 150C 3: 155C (Center thermistor/Thick 4: 160C 5: 165C paper 1) 6: 170C 7: 175C 8: 180C 9: 185C 10: 190C 11: 195C 12: 200C 13: 210C Toner density correctionALL 0 M 0: Invalid 1: +3bit setting <0-8> 2: +6bit 3: +9bit 4: +12bit 5: -3bit 6: -6bit 7: -9bit 8: -12bit

Procedur e 2

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 164 07/11

Code 417

Classification Fuser

419

Image Processing

420

Fuser

437

Fuser

438

Fuser

439

Fuser

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default ProFunc- <AcceptItems RAM Contents cedur tion able e value> 1 Pre-running time for first ALL 0 M 0: Invalid 1: 1 sec. printing (Thick paper 3) <0-15> 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec. 10: 10 sec. 11: 12 sec. 12: 14 sec. 13: 16 sec. 14: 18 sec. 15: 20 sec. 1 Black band pattern ALL 0 M Sets whether or not a between sheets of paper <0-20> black band pattern is formed on the drum between two sheets of paper being transported. 0: Invalid 1 to 20: Black band width (Unit: mm) 1 Pre-running time at ALL JPN: 3 M 0: Invalid 1: 1 sec. warming-up UC: 4 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. EUR: 4 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. <0-10> 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec. 10: 10 sec. 1 Fuser roller temperature ALL 12 M 0: 140C 1: 145C during printing <0-14> 2: 150C 3: 155C (Center thermistor /Thick 4: 160C 5: 165C paper 2) 6: 170C 7: 175C 8: 180C 9: 185C 10: 190C 11: 195C 12: 200C 13: 205C 14: 210C 1 Fuser roller temperature ALL 12 M 0: 140C 1: 145C during printing <0-14> 2: 150C 3: 155C (Center thermistor/OHP 4: 160C 5: 165C film) 6: 170C 7: 175C 8: 180C 9: 185C 10: 190C 11: 195C 12: 200C 13: 205C 14: 210C 1 Pre-running time for first ALL 0 M 0: Invalid 1: 1 sec. printing (Thick paper 2) <0-15> 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec. 10: 10 sec. 11: 12 sec. 12: 14 sec. 13: 16 sec. 14: 18 sec. 15: 20 sec.

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 165 07/11

Code 440

Classification Fuser

441

Fuser

449 455

Paper feeding Image processing

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Pre-running time for first ALL 0 M 0: Invalid 1: 1 sec. printing <0-15> 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. (Plain paper) 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec. 10: 10 sec. 11: 12 sec. 12: 14 sec. 13: 16 sec. 14: 18 sec. 15: 20 sec. Pre-running time for first ALL 0 M 0: Invalid 1: 1 sec. printing <0-15> 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. (Thick paper 1) 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec. 10: 10 sec. 11: 12 sec. 12: 14 sec. 13: 16 sec. 14: 18 sec. 15: 20 sec. Incorrect paper size jam ALL 0 M 0: Enabled detection switching <0-1> 1: Disabled Toner supply amount corALL 0 M Corrects the period of rection setting <0-2> the toner motor rotation time during toner supply. 0: 100% 1: 90% 2: 80%

Procedur e 1

1 1

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 166 07/11

Code 462

Classification RADF

463-0 463-1

Paper feeding

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Setting for switchback ALL 0 M This setting is whether operation in mixed-size <0-2> the original length is copying using RADF detected or not by transporting without scanning in reverse when A4-R/FOLIO paper or LT-R/LG paper is detected in a mixedsize copying. 0: Disabled AMS: A series - Judges as A4-R without transporting in reverse with no scanning. LT series - Judges whether it is LT-R or LG by its length without transporting in reverse with no scanning. APS: A series - Judges whether it is A4-R or FOLIO without transporting in reverse with no scanning. LT series - Judges whether it is LT-R or LG without transporting in reverse with no scanning. 1: Enable 1 AMS: A series - Judges whether it is A4-R or FOLIO by transporting without scanning in reverse to detect its length. LT series - Judges whether it is LT-R or LG by transporting without scanning in reverse to detect its length. APS: The same as that of APS in 0: Disabled. 2: Enable 2 AMS/APS: The same as that of AMS in 1: Enable 1. Feeding retry Plain ALL 5 M Sets the number of number setpaper <0-5> times of the feeding ting (upper retry from the upper Others ALL 5 M drawer) drawer. <0-5>

Procedur e 1

4 4

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 167 07/11

Code 464-0 464-1 465-0 465-1 466-0 466-1 467-0 467-1 468-0 468-1 469 471

Classification Paper feeding

Paper feeding

Paper feeding

Paper feeding

Paper feeding

Fan Paper feeding

472 478

Fan Laser

479

Laser

480

Paper feeding

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Feeding retry Plain ALL 5 M Sets the number of number setpaper <0-5> times of the feeding ting (lower retry from the lower Others ALL 5 M drawer) drawer. <0-5> Feeding retry Plain ALL 5 M Sets the number of number setpaper <0-5> times of the feeding retry from the PFP ting (PFP Others ALL 5 M upper drawer) upper drawer. <0-5> Feeding retry Plain ALL 5 M Sets the number of number setpaper <0-5> times of the feeding ting (PFP retry from the PFP Others ALL 5 M lower drawer) lower drawer. <0-5> Feeding retry Plain ALL 5 M Sets the number of number setpaper <0-5> times of the feeding ting (bypass retry from the bypass Others ALL 5 M feed) tray. <0-5> ALL 5 M Sets the number of Feeding retry Plain paper <0-5> times of the feeding number setretry from the LCF. ting (LCF) Others ALL 5 M <0-5> Speed switching for subALL 0 M 0: High speed separation fan <0-1> 1: Low speed Paper size (Post card) ALL 148/100 M * Post card is supfeeding/width wise direc<148ported only for JPN tion 432/100model. 297> Speed switching for midALL 0 M 0: High speed dle fan <0-1> 1: Low speed ALL 0 M Displays the error Judged number of polygo<0-1> [CA10] when the set nal motor rotation error number of rotation error (Normal rotation) has been detected. 0: 2 times 1: 12 times Judged number of polygoALL 0 M 0: Waiting time for nal motor rotation error <0-1> polygonal motor (At acceleration/decelerarotation overshoottion) ing 0.6 sec. 1: Waiting time for polygonal motor rotation overshooting 2.2 sec. Default setting of paper PPC 0 SYS 0: A4/LT source <0-5> 1: LCF 2: Upper drawer 3: Lower drawer 4: PFP upper drawer 5: PFP lower drawer

Procedur e 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 10

1 1

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 168 07/11

Code 481

Classification Paper feeding

482 483

Paper feeding Laser

484

Laser

485

Laser

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default ProFunc- <AcceptItems RAM Contents cedur tion able e value> 1 Automatic change of paper PPC 1 SYS Sets whether or not source <0-2> changing the drawer automatically to the other drawer with the paper of the same size when paper in the selected drawer has run out. 0: OFF 1: ON (Changes to the drawer with the same paper direction and size: ex. A4 to A4) 2: ON (Changes to the drawer with the same paper size. Paper with the different direction is acceptable as long as the size is the same: ex., A4 to A4R, LT-R to LT. 1 is applied when the staple/holepunch is specified.) Feeding retry setting ALL 0 M 0: ON 1 <0-1> 1: OFF 1 Pre-running rotation of ALL 0 SYS Sets whether or not polygonal motor <0-2> switching the polygonal motor from the standby rotation to the normal rotation when the original is set on the RADF or the platen cover is opened. 0: Valid (when using RADF and the original is set manually) 1: Invalid 2: Valid (when using RADF only) 1 ALL 0 SYS Sets whether or not Polygonal motor rotational <0-1> switching the polygonal status switching at the Auto motor from the normal Clear Mode rotation to the standby rotation at the Auto Clear Mode. 0: Valid 1: Invalid Rotational status of polygoALL 0 SYS Sets the rotational sta1 nal motor on standby <0-1> tus of polygonal motor on standby. 0: Rotated (The rotational speed is set at 08-490.)1: Stopped

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 169 07/11

Code 486

Classification Laser

488

Laser

489

Laser

490 491

Laser Transfer

492

Transfer

493

Transfer

502

Image

503 508

User interface Image

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Timing of auto-clearing of ALL 0 SYS Switches the polygonal polygonal motor pre-run<0-2> motor to the standby ning rotation rotation when a certain period of time has passed from the prerunning. At this code, the period to switch the status to the standby rotation is set. 0: 15 sec. 1: 30 sec. 2: 45 sec. * This setting is effective when 0 or 2 is set at 08-483. Setting of polygonal motor ALL 3 M Set the type of polygotype <2-3> nal motor. 2: 2 clock type 3: 3 clock type Polygonal motor rotation ALL 5 M 0: 38090.55rpm number on standby <0-5> 1: 35000rpm 2: 30000rpm 3: 25000rpm 4: 20000rpm 5: 10000rpm Polygonal motor rotation in ALL 0 M 0: Stopped the energy saving mode <0-1> 1: 10000rpm Transfer charger bias corALL 165 M Corrects the transfer rection (L) at duplexing <0-255> charger bias output value of the leading edge area of paper at duplexing. Transfer charger bias corALL 106 M Corrects the transfer rection (H) at duplexing <0-255> charger bias output value of the center area of paper at duplexing. Transfer charger bias corALL 128 M Corrects the transfer rection (L) at duplexing <0-255> charger bias output value of the trailing edge area of paper at duplexing. Error diffusion and dither PPC 1 SYS Sets the image reprosetting at photo mode <0-1> duction method at photo mode. 0: Error diffusion 1: Dither Default setting of density PPC 0 SYS 0: Automatic adjustment <0-1> 1: Manual (Center) Custom Mode setting PPC 0 SYS 0: Not used <0-3> 1: Custom Mode 1 when Text/Photo is set as a base 2: Custom Mode 2 when Text is set as a base 3: Custom Mode 3 when Photo is set as a base

Procedur e 1

1 1

1 1

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 170 07/11

Code 509

Classification Image

526

Fuser

550

Image

601 602

User interface User interface

603

User interface

604

User interface

605

User interface User interface

607

610 611

User interface User interface

612

General

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default ProFunc- <AcceptItems RAM Contents cedur tion able e value> Error diffusion and dither PPC 1 SYS Switches the image 1 setting at a photo mode <0-1> processing method (Custom Mode) when Custom Mode 3 is set. 0: Error diffusion 1: Dither 1 Pre-running time for first ALL 6 M 0: Invalid 1: 0 sec. printing (OHP film) <0-15> 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec. 10: 10 sec. 11: 12 sec. 12: 14 sec. 13: 16 sec. 14: 18 sec. 15: 20 sec. Default setting of Original PPC 0 SYS 0: Text/Photo 1 mode <0-3> 1: Photo 2: Text 3: Custom Mode Setting for the EnergySavALL 0 SYS 0: Auto Shut Off Mode 1 ing Mode <0-1> 1: Sleep Mode Screen setting for Auto ALL EUR:0 SYS 0: OFF 1 power Save Mode and UC:1 1: ON Auto Shut OFF Mode JPN:1 <0-1> Setting for automatic ALL 0 SYS 0: Invalid 1 duplexing mode <0-3> 1: Single-sided to duplex copying 2: Double-sided to duplex copying 3: User selection 1 Default setting for APS/ ALL 0 SYS 0: APS (Automatic AMS <0-2> Paper Selection) 1: AMS (Automatic Magnification Selection) 2: Not selected Centering printing of priPPC 1 SYS 0: Invalid 1 mary/secondary direction <0-1> 1: Valid at AMS Default setting of RADF PPC 0 SYS 0: Continuous feeding 1 mode <0-1> (by pressing the [START] button) 1: Single feeding (by setting original on the tray) Key touch sound of control ALL 1 SYS 0: OFF 1 panel <0-1> 1: ON Book type original priority PPC 0 SYS 0: Left page to right 1 <0-1> page 1: Right page to left page Summer time mode ALL 0 SYS 0: Not summer time 1 <0-1> 1: Summer time

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 171 07/11

Code 613

Classification User interface

614

Network

615

General

617

User interface User interface

618

619

Paper feeding

620 621 622 623 624 625

User interface User interface User interface User interface User interface User interface

627

User interface

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Paper size selection for PPC EUR: SYS Press the icon on the [OTHER] button FOLIO LCD to select the size. UC: COMP JPN: A5-R Local I/F time-out period PRT 6 SYS Sets the period of time <1-50> when the job is judged as completed in local I/ F printing (USB or parallel). 1: 1.0 sec. 2: 1.5 sec. -50: 25.5 sec. (in increments of 0.5 sec.) Size information of main ALL SYS Displays the sizes of memory and page memory the main memory and page memory. Enables to check if each memory is properly recognized. Print setting without ALL 1 SYS 0: Printed forcibly department code <0-2> 1: Not printed 2: Deleted forcibly PPC 0 SYS 0: Scanned as all in Default setting when mixed <0-1> same size size originals are set on 1: Scanned as each RADF original size Time lag before Auto Job ALL 4 SYS Sets the time taken to Start of bypass feeding <0-10> add paper feeding when paper in the bypass tray has run out during the bypass feed copying. 0: Paper is not drawn in unless the [START] button is pressed. 1-10: Setting value x 0.5sec. Department management PPC 1 SYS 0: Invalid setting (Copier) <0-1> 1: Valid Department management FAX 1 SYS 0: Invalid setting (FAX) <0-1> 1: Valid Department management PRT 1 SYS 0: Invalid setting (Printer) <0-1> 1: Valid Department management SCN 1 SYS 0: Invalid setting (Scanner) <0-1> 1: Valid Department management PRT 1 SYS 0: Invalid setting (List print) <0-1> 1: Valid Blank copying prevention PPC 0 SYS 0: OFF mode during RADF jam<0-1> 1: ON (Start printing ming when the scanning of each page is finished) Rotation printing at the ALL 0 SYS 0: Not rotating nonsorting <0-1> 1: Rotating

Procedur e 9

1 1 1 1 1 1

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 172 07/11

Code 628 629 633

634 636

638

640

641

642

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default ClassifiFunc- <AcceptItems RAM Contents cation tion able value> User Direction priority of original PPC 0 SYS 0: Automatic interface image <0-1> 1: Portrait User Department management ALL 0 SYS 0: Invalid interface setting <0-1> 1: Valid Releasing F200 service ALL 0 SYS 0: Not used Data <0-2> 1: Board installed overwrite call (GP-1060) kit 2: Service call User Inner receiving tray priority ALL 0 SYS 0: Normal interface at Non-sort Mode <0-1> 1: Inner receiving tray User Width setting for image PPC 0 SYS 0: ON interface shift copying (linkage of <0-1> 1: OFF front side and back side) General Time differences ALL EUR: 24 SYS 0: +12.0h 1: +11.5h UC: 40 2: +11.0h 3: +10.5h JPN: 6 4: +10.0h 5: 9.5h <0-47> 6: +9.0h 7: +8.5h 8: +8.0h 9: +7.5h 10: +7.0h 11: +6.5h 12: +6.0h 13: +5.5h 14: +5.0h 15: +4.5h 16: +4.0h 17: +3.5h 18: +3.0h 19: +2.5h 20: +2.0h 21: +1.5h 22: +1.0h 23: +0.5h 24: 0.0h 25:-0.5h 26: -1.0h 27: -1.5h 28: -2.0h 29: -2.5h 30: -3.0h 31: -3.5h 32: -4.0h 33: -4.5h 34: -5.0h 35: -5.5h 36: -6.0h 37: -6.5h 38: -7.0h 39: -7.5h 40: -8.0h 41: -8.5h 42: -9.0h 43: -9.5h 44: -10.0h 45: -10.5h 46: -11.0h 47: -11.5h User Date display format ALL EUR:1 SYS 0: YYYY.MM.DD. interface UC:2 1: DD.MM.YYYY JPN:0 2: MM.DD.YYYY <0-2> User Automatic Sorting Mode PPC 2 SYS 0: Invalid interface setting (RADF) <0-4> 1: STAPLE 2: SORT 3: GROUP 4: ROTATE SORT User Default setting of Sorter PPC 0 SYS 0: NON-SORT interface Mode <0-4> 1: STAPLE 2: SORT 3: GROUP 4: ROTATE SORT

Procedur e 1 1

2
1

1 1

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 173 07/11

Code 645

Classification User interface

646

User interface

648

User interface

649

User interface

650 651

User interface User interface

652 653 657

User interface User interface User interface

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Correction of reproduction PPC 10 SYS Sets the reproduction ratio in editing copy <0-10> ratio for the X in 1 printing (including magazine sort) to the Reproduction ratio x Correction ratio. 0: 90% 1: 91% 2: 92% 3: 93% 4: 94% 5: 95% 6: 96% 7: 97% 8: 98% 9: 99% 10: 100% Image position in editing PPC 2 SYS Sets the page pasted <0-3> position for X in 1 to the upper left corner/ center. 0: PPC:Cornering/ PRT:Cornering 1: PPC:Centering/ PRT:Cornering 2: PPC:Cornering/ PRT:Centering 3: PPC:Centering/ PRT:Centering Returning finisher tray ALL 0 SYS Sets whether or not when printing is finished <0-1> returning the finisher tray to the bin 1 when printing is finished. 0: Not returned 1: Returned Magazine sort setting PPC 0 SYS 0: Left page to right <0-1> page 1: Right page to left page 2 in 1/4 in 1 page allocating PPC 0 SYS 0: Horizontal order setting <0-1> 1: Vertical Printing format setting for PPC 2 SYS Hyphen Time Stamp and Page <0-3> (with page number) Number /Dropout (with date, time and page number) 0: OFF/OFF 1: ON/OFF 2: OFF/ON 3: ON/ON Note: Note: Hyphen printing format ON: -1- OFF: 1 Cascade operation setting PPC 0 SYS 0: OFF <0-1> 1: ON Cascade operation setting PRT 0 SYS 0: OFF <0-1> 1: ON Direction priority for date PPC 0 SYS 0: Short edge and time stamp printing <0-1> 1: Long edge

Procedur e 1

1 1

1 1 1

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 174 07/11

Code 658

Classification User interface

659

User interface

660 661 662

Network Network General

665

General

666 667 669 670 671

General General General General User interface

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Auto Job Start setting for PRT 0 SYS Sets whether or not bypass feed printing <0-1> feeding a paper automatically into the equipment when it is placed on the bypass tray. 0: OFF (Press the [START] button to start feeding.) 1: ON (Automatic feeding) Auto Job start setting for PPC 1 SYS Sets whether or not bypass feed printing <0-1> feeding a paper automatically into the equipment when it is placed on the bypass tray. 0: OFF (Press the [START] button to start feeding.) 1: ON (Automatic feeding) Auto-forwarding setting of ALL 0 SYS 0: Invalid1:Valid received FAX <0-1> Auto-forwarding setting of ALL 0 SYS 0: Invalid1: Valid received E-mail <0-1> Clearing of SMS partition ALL SYS Clears SMS partition. (Performs when the service call [F106] has occurred.) M/SYS all clearing ALL M/ Initializes all the adjustSYS ment modesand the setting modes. /SHA partition clearing ALL SYS Initializes the Electronic Filing. /SHA partition clearing ALL SYS Initializes the shared folder. System all clearing ALL SYS Initializes system NVRAM area. HDD diagnostic menu disALL SYS Display the HDD inforplay mation Size indicator ALL 0 SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid <0-1>

Procedur e 1

1 1 3

3 3 3 2 1

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 175 07/11

Code 672

Classification General

673

General

678

General

679 680 681

General General General

682

Use interface

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default ProFunc- <AcceptItems RAM Contents cedur tion able e value> 3 Initialization of department SYS Initializing of the departmanagement information ment management information * Key in the code and press the [INITIALIZE] button to perform the initialization. If the area storing the department management information is destroyed for some reason, Enter Department Code is displayed on the control panel even if the department management function is not set on. In this case, initialize the area with this code. This area is normally initialized at the factory. 1 Trial period setting ALL 254 SYS Sets the trial period <1-60> from 1 to 60 days. This setting is effective only when the default value is "254". Once the default value is set, this value is only used for a reference. 1 Setting of banner advertisALL 0 SYS Sets whether or not dising display <0-1> playing the banner advertising. The setting contents of 08-679 and 08-680 are displayed at the time display section on the right top of the screen. When both are set, each content is displayed alternately. 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed Banner advertising display ALL SYS Maximum 27 letters 11 1 (one-byte character) Banner advertising display ALL SYS Maximum 27 letters 11 2 (one-byte character) 1 Display of [BANNER MESALL 0 SYS 0: Not displayed SAGE] button <0-1> 1: Displayed * This button enables the entry of Banner advertising display 1 (08-679) and Banner advertising display 2 (08-680) on the control panel. Offsetting between jobs ALL 1 SYS 0: Invalid 1 <0-1> 1: Valid
2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 176 07/11

Code 683

Classification General

684 685

General General

686 689

General FAX

690 691

General General

692

Maintenance

693

General

694 695

General General

696

697

Scrambler board Paper feeding

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Duplex printing setting ALL 1 SYS When the duplex printwhen coin controller is <0-1> ing is short paid with a used coin controller, reverse side of the original is not printed and is considered as a defect (printing job may be cleared). To solve this problem, the selection of printing method is enabled with this setting. 0: Invalid (Both sides printed) 1: Valid (Only one side printed) Rebuilding all databases ALL SYS Rebuilds all databases. Rebuilding all databases ALL SYS Rebuilds all databases related to Address Book related to the Address Book. Rebuilding all databases ALL SYS Rebuilds all databases related to log related to the logs. Adaptation of paper source FAX 0 SYS 0: Not subjected for priority selection <0-1> APS judgment 1: Subjected for APS judgment HDD formatting ALL SYS 2: Normal formatting <2> HDD type display ALL SYS 0: Not formatted <0-2> 1: Not used 2: Normal format Performing panel calibraALL SYS Performs the calibration tion of the pressing position on the touch panel (LCD screen). The calibration is performed by pressing 2 reference positions after this code is started up. Initialization of NIC inforALL SYS Returns the value to the mation factory shipping default value. Performing HDD testing ALL SYS Checks the bad sector. Sets when the end of trial PRT/ 3 SYS Sets when the end of period is notified. SCN <0-59> trial period is notified. 0: On the day it ends 1 to 59: n days before Installation of scrambler ALL 0 0: Not installed board (Option) <0-1> 1: Installed Paper type priority PPC 1 <1-2> SYS Sets the paper type priority during copying. 1: Plain paper 2: Thick paper 1

Procedur e 1

3 3

3 1

7 7

3 1

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 177 07/11

Code 698

Classification Scrambler board

699

701

Scrambler board FAX

702

Maintenance

703

Maintenance User interface

704-0

704-1

707

Maintenance

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default ProFunc- <AcceptItems RAM Contents cedur tion able e value> 5 Entering the key code for ALL Start up this code and scrambler board have the user enter the key code. Once the key code has been set, this code cannot be set again on security grounds. Erasing all data in HDD ALL This setting is effective 3 only when the scrambler board is installed. 1 SYS 0: Japan Destination setting for FAX FAX EUR: 5 1: Asia UC: 4 2: Australia JPN: 0 3: Hong Kong Other: 1 4: U.S.A./Canada <0-25> 5: Germany 6: U.K. 7: Italy 8: Belgium 9: Netherlands 10: Finland 11: Spain 12: Austria 13: Switzerland 14: Sweden 15: Denmark 16: Norway 17: Portugal 18: France 19: Greece 20: Poland 21: Hungary 22: Czech 23: Turkey 24: South Africa 25: Taiwan Remote-controlled service ALL 2 SYS 0: Valid (Remote-con1 function <0-2> trolled server) 1: Valid (L2) 2: Invalid ALL SYS Maximum 256 Bytes 11 Remote-controlled service HTTP server URL setting Interruption of Copying ALL 1 SYS 0: Continues printing 4 stapling oper<0-1> by switching sort ation (no stasetting ple) 1: Interrupts printing Printing / ALL 1 SYS 0: Continues printing 4 BOX print<0-1> by switching sort ing setting 1: Interrupts printing SYS Maximum 256 Bytes 11 Remote-controlled service ALL https:// HTTP initially-registered device.mf server p-supURL setting port.com: 443/ device/firstregist.ashx
2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 178 07/11

Code 710

Classification Maintenance

711 715

Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance

716

717

718

719 720

Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance

721

723 726 727

Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance

728

Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance (Remote)

729 730 731 732

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Short time interval setting ALL 24 SYS Sets the time interval to of recovery from Emer<1-48> recover from the Emergency Mode gency Mode to the Normal Mode. (Unit: Hour) Short time interval setting ALL 60 SYS Unit: Minute of Emergency Mode <30-360> ALL 1230 SYS 0 (0:00) to 2359 (23:59) Remote-controlled service periodical polling timing (Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute) Remote-controlled service ALL 0 SYS 0: Prohibited Writing data of self-diag<0-1> 1: Accepted nostic code Remote-controlled service ALL 3 SYS Unit: Minute response waiting time <1-30> (Timeout) Remote-controlled service ALL 0 SYS 0: OFF initial registration <0-3> 1: Start 2: Only certification is scanned 3: Sattelite communication starts Remote-controlled service ALL SYS Maximum 10 letters tentative password Status of remote-conALL 0 SYS 0: Not registered trolled service initial regis<0-1> 1: Registered tration (Display only) Service center call function ALL 2 SYS 0: OFF <0-2> 1: Notifies all service calls 2: Notifies all but paper jams Service center call HTTP ALL SYS Maximum 256 letters server URL setting HTTP proxy setting ALL 1 SYS 0: Valid <0-1> 1: Invalid HTTP proxy IP address ALL SYS 000.000.000.000 setting 255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) HTTP proxy port number ALL 0 SYS setting <065535> HTTP proxy ID setting ALL SYS Maximum 30 letters HTTP proxy password setting HTTP proxy panel display Automatic ordering function of supplies ALL ALL ALL 1 <0-1> 3 <0-3> SYS SYS SYS Maximum 30 letters 0: Valid 1: Invalid 0: Ordered by FAX 1: Ordered by E-mail 2: Ordered by HTTP 3: OFF Maximum 32 digits Enter hyphen with the [Monitor/Pause] button

Procedur e 1

2
1 1

11 2

11 1 11

11 11 1 1

733

Mainte- Automatic ordering function of supplies nance (Remote) FAX number

ALL

SYS

11

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 179 07/11

Code 734

Classification Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote)

738

739

740

741

742

743

744

745

746

747

748

758

759

760

761

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Automatic ordering funcALL SYS Maximum 192 letters tion of supplies List: 256 digits E-mail address ALL SYS Maximum 50 letters Automatic ordering function of supplies User's name ALL SYS Maximum 32 digits Automatic ordering function of supplies Enter hyphen with the User's telephone number [Monitor/Pause] button Automatic ordering funcALL SYS Maximum 192 letters tion of supplies List: 256 digits User's E-mail address ALL SYS Maximum 100 letters Automatic ordering function of supplies User's address Automatic ordering funcALL SYS Maximum 5 digits tion of supplies Service number ALL SYS Maximum 50 letters Automatic ordering function of supplies Service technician's name Automatic ordering funcALL SYS Maximum 32 digits tion of supplies Enter hyphen with the Service technician's tele[Monitor/Pause] button phone number Automatic ordering funcALL SYS Maximum 192 letters tion of supplies List: 256 digits Service technician's E-mail address Automatic ordering funcALL SYS Maximum 50 letters tion of supplies Supplier's name Automatic ordering funcALL SYS Maximum 100 letters tion of supplies Supplier's address ALL SYS Maximum 128 letters Automatic ordering function of supplies Notes Information about supplies ALL SYS Maximum 20 digits Part number of toner cartridge K Information about supplies ALL 1 SYS Order quantity of toner car<1-99> tridge K ALL 1 SYS Information about supplies <1-99> Condition number of toner cartridge K Information about supplies ALL SYS Maximum 20 digits Part number of toner bag Information about supplies Order quantity of toner bag Information about supplies Condition number of toner bag ALL 1 <1-99> 1 <1-99> SYS

Procedur e 11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

762

763

ALL

SYS

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 180 07/11

Code 765

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default ClassifiFunc- <AcceptItems RAM cation tion able value> Mainte- Automatic ordering supALL EUR: 2 SYS 0: nance plies UC: 0 (Remote) Display JPN: 2 1: <0-2>

Contents

Procedur e 1

767

Mainte- Service Notification setting nance (Remote)

ALL

0 <0-2>

SYS

768

769

770

771

772

Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance Maintenance

Destination E-mail address

ALL

SYS

Valid (FAX/Internet FAX) Valid (FAX/Internet FAX/ HTTP) 2: Invalid Enables to set up to 3 E-mail addresses to be sent. (08-768, 777, 778) 0: Invalid 1: Valid (E-mail) 2: Valid (FAX) Maximum 192 letters

2
1

11

Total counter information transmission setting Total counter transmission date setting PM counter notification setting Dealer's name

ALL

0 <0-1> 0 <0-31> 0 <0-1> -

SYS

0: Invalid 1: Valid 0 to 31

ALL

SYS

ALL

SYS

0: Invalid 1: Valid Maximum 100 letters Needed at initial registration Maximum 20 letters Needed at initial registration 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed

ALL

SYS

11

773

Login name

ALL

SYS

11

774

Mainte- Display setting of [Service nance Notification] button (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance Sending error contents of equipment Setting total counter transmission interval (Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute) Destination E-mail address 2 Destination E-mail address 3 Remote-controlled service polling day selection Day-1

ALL

775

ALL

EUR: 0 UC: 1 JPN: 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> -

SYS

SYS

0: Invalid 1: Valid

776

ALL

SYS

777

ALL

SYS

Maximum 192 letters

11

778

ALL

SYS

Maximum 192 letters

11

780

ALL

0 <0-31>

SYS

781

Maintenance

Remote-controlled service polling day selection Day-2

ALL

0 <0-31>

SYS

0: OFF 1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a month 0: OFF 1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a month

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 181 07/11

Code 782

Classification Maintenance

783

Maintenance

784

Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance General

785

786

787

788

789 790

794 795 796

797 798

799

General

826

Charger

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Remote-controlled service ALL 0 SYS 0: OFF polling day selection Day-3 <0-31> 1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a month Remote-controlled service ALL 0 SYS 0: OFF polling day selection Day-4 <0-31> 1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a month Remote-controlled service ALL 0 SYS 0: Invalid polling day selection Sun<0-1> 1: Valid day ALL 0 SYS 0: Invalid Remote-controlled service <0-1> 1: Valid polling day selection Monday Remote-controlled service ALL 0 SYS 0: Invalid polling day selection Tues<0-1> 1: Valid day Remote-controlled service ALL 0 SYS 0: Invalid polling day selection <0-1> 1: Valid Wednesday Remote-controlled service ALL 0 SYS 0: Invalid polling day selection <0-1> 1: Valid Thursday Remote-controlled service ALL 0 SYS 0: Invalid polling day selection Friday <0-1> 1: Valid Remote-controlled service ALL 0 SYS 0: Invalid polling day selection Satur<0-1> 1: Valid day Information of supplies setALL 0 SYS 0: Invalid ting of toner cartridge K <0-1> 1: Valid Information of supplies setALL 0 SYS 0: Invalid ting of toner bag <0-1> 1: Valid ALL 0 SYS 0: Invalid Remote-controlled service <0-1> 1: Valid lengthened interval polling (End of month) Firmware download ALL 0 SYS 0: Accepted <0-1> 1: Prohibited Notifying address of trialpPRT/ 3 SYS Sets where the end of eriod end SCN <0-3> the trial period is to be notified. 0: OFF 1: User 2: Service center 3: User and service center Forcible end of trial period PRT/ SYS [CANCEL]: Cancel SCN [EXECUTION]: Forcible end When the Forcible end of trial period is performed, 0 is set in the code (08-673) to end up the trial period forcibly. Main charger bias correcPRT 128<0M Corrects the value of tion (Toner saving mode) 255> the main charger bias adjustment (05-210).

Procedur e 1

1 1

1 1 1

1 1

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 182 07/11

Code 840 841

Classification Image control Transfer

855

Fuser

856

Fuser

859

Developer Developer Developer Developer Developer Charger

860

861

862

863

864

865

Charger

866

Charger

867

Charger

868

Transfer

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Setting of toner density ALL 0 M 0: Controlled temperature control <0-1> 1: Not controlled Transfer timing correction ALL 0 M 0: Standard <0-7> 1: Timing 1 2: Timing 2 3: Timing 3 4: Timing 4 5: Timing 5 6: Timing 6 7: Timing 7 ALL 12 M 0: 140C 1: 145C Fuser roller temperature <0-14> 2: 150C 3: 155C during printing (Center 4: 160C 5: 165C thermistor / Tab paper) 6: 170C 7: 175C 8: 180C 9: 185C 10: 190C 11: 195C 12: 200C 13: 205C 14: 210C Pre-running time for first ALL 10 M 0: Invalid 1: 1 sec. printing (Tab paper) <0-15> 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec. 10: 10 sec. 11: 12 sec. 12: 14 sec. 13: 16 sec. 14: 18 sec. 15: 20 sec. Developer bias DC correcPRT 128 M Corrects the value of tion(Toner saving mode) <0-255> the developer bias adjustment (05-205). Developer bias DC correcPRT 128 M Corrects the value of tion (Normal) <0-255> the developer bias adjustment (05-205). Developer bias DC correcPPC 128 M Corrects the value of tion (Text/Photo) <0-255> the developer bias adjustment (05-205). Developer bias DC correcPPC 128 M Corrects the value of tion (Text) <0-255> the developer bias adjustment (05-205). Developer bias DC correcPPC 128 M Corrects the value of tion (Photo) <0-255> the developer bias adjustment (05-205). Main charger bias correcPRT 128 M Corrects the value of tion (Normal) <0-255> the main charger bias adjustment (05-210). Main charger bias correcPPC 128 M Corrects the value of tion (Text/Photo) <0-255> the main charger bias adjustment (05-210). Main charger bias correcPPC 128 M Corrects the value of tion (Text) <0-255> the main charger bias adjustment (05-210). Main charger bias correcPPC 128 M Corrects the value of tion (Photo) <0-255> the main charger bias adjustment (05-210). Transfer charger bias corALL 128 M Corrects the transfer rection (H) <0-255> charger bias output value of the leading edge area of paper.

Procedur e 1 1

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 183 07/11

Code 869

Classification Transfer

872

Laser

873

Laser

875

Laser

876

Laser

877

Laser

900

Version

903 905 907 908 911

Version Version Version Version Version

915 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930

Version Version Version Version Version Version Version Version Version Version Version Version

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Transfer charger bias corALL 84 M Corrects the transfer rection (L) <0-255> charger bias output value of the trailing edge area of paper. Laser power correction PRT 128 M Corrects the value of (Normal) <0-255> the laser power adjustment (05-286). Laser power correction PPC 128 M Corrects the value of (Text/Photo) <0-255> the laser power adjustment (05-286). Laser power correction PRT 128 M Corrects the value of (Toner saving mode) <0-255> the laser power adjustment (05-286). Laser power correction PPC 128 M Corrects the value of (Text) <0-255> the laser power adjustment (05-286). Laser power correction PPC 128 M Corrects the value of (Photo) <0-255> the laser power adjustment (05-286). System firmware ROM verALL JPN: T364SY0JXXX sion UC: T364SY0UXXX EUR: T364SY0EXXX Others: T364SY0XXXX Engine ROM version ALL 364M-XXX Scanner ROM version ALL 364S-XXX RADF ROM version ALL DF-XXXX Finisher main ROM version ALL SDL-XX FIN-XX Finisher hole punch ROM ALL PUN-XX version (This setting is displayed only when the MJ-6101E is installed.) FAX board ROM version FAX F562-XXX FROM basic section softALL VX.XX/X.XX ware version FROM internal program ALL VXXX.XXX X UI data fixed section verALL VXXX.XXX X sion UI data common section ALL VXXX.XXX X version Version of UI data lanALL VXXX.XXX X guage 1 in HDD Version of UI data lanALL VXXX.XXX X guage 2 in HDD Version of UI data lanALL VXXX.XXX X guage 3 in HDD Version of UI data lanALL VXXX.XXX X guage 4 in HDD Version of UI data lanALL VXXX.XXX X guage 5 in HDD Version of UI data lanALL VXXX.XXX X guage 6 in HDD Version of UI data in ALL VXXX.XXX X FROM displayed at powerON

Procedur e 1

2 2 2 2 2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 184 07/11

Code 931 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 944

Classification Version Version Version Version Version Version Version Version Version

945 947

Network General

949

General

950

Electronic filing

953

User interface User interface

954

969 970

User interface User interface User interface

972

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Version of UI data lanALL VXXX.XXX X guage 7 in HDD Web data whole version ALL VXXX.XXX X Web UI data in HDD ALL VXXX.XXX X Version: Language 1 Web UI data in HDD ALL VXXX.XXX X Version: Language 2 Web UI data in HDD ALL VXXX.XXX X Version: Language 3 Web UI data in HDD ALL VXXX.XXX X Version: Language 4 Web UI data in HDD ALL VXXX.XXX X Version: Language 5 Web UI data in HDD ALL VXXX.XXX X Version: Language 6 HD version ALL JPN: T364HD0JXXX UC: T364HD0UXXX EUR: T364HD0EXXX Others: T364HD0XXXX Two-way setting of RawALL 2 UTY 1: Valid Port 9100 <1-2> 2: Invalid Initialization after software ALL SYS Perform this code when version upgrade the software in this equipment has been upgraded. Automatic interruption ALL 0 SYS Sets the number of page setting during black <0-100> pages to interrupt the printing printing automatically. 0-100: 0 to 100 pages Start-up method of ElecALL 0 SYS Sets the start-up tronic Filing <0-2> method of the Electronic Filing. 0: Standard 1: Forced start-up (Not recovered) 2: Forced start-up (Recovered) Access code entry for ALL 0 SYS 0: Renewed automatiElectronic Filing printing <0-1> cally 1: Enter every time Clearing timing for files and ALL 1 SYS 0: Immediately after Electronic Filing Agent <0-1> the completion of scanning 1: Cleared by Auto Clear Error sound ALL 1 SYS 0: OFF <0-1> 1: ON Sound setting when ALL JPN: 0 SYS 0: OFF switching to Energy Saving Other: 1 1: ON Mode <0-1> ALL 0 SYS 0: Disabled Enables/disables the dis<0-1> 1: Enabled play that the toner is nearly empty

Procedur e 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

12 3

1 1

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 185 07/11

Code 973

Classification Network

975

General

976

Electronic Filing

977

Network

978

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> PCL line feed code setting PRT 0 SYS Sets the PCL line feed <0-3> code. 0: Automatic setting 1: CR=CR, LF=LF 2: CR=CR+LF, LF=LF 3: CR=CR, LF=CR+LF ALL 1 SYS Sets whether pause or Job handling when print<0-1> stop the printing job ing is short paid with coin when it is short paid controller using a coin controller. 0: Pause the job 1: Stop the job Equipment name and user ALL 0 SYS Sets whether or not name setting to a folder <0-2> adding the equipment when saving files name and user name to the folder when saving files. 0: Not add 1: Add the equipment name 2: Add the user name ALL 0 SYS 0: ISO8859-1 Switching of extended <0-1> 1: ISO8859-2 ASCII code in catFs filesystem Raw printing job PRT 0 SYS 0: AUTO (Paper feeding drawer) <0-5> 1: Upper drawer 2: Lower drawer 3: PFP upper drawer 4: PFP lower drawer 5: LCF

Procedur e 1

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 186 07/11

Code 979

Classification Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> Raw printing job PRT 0 SYS 0: (PCL symbol set) <0-39> 1: 2: 3: 4:

Contents

Procedur e 1

983 985

User interface Electronic Filing General

JOB STATUS initial screen setting Print mode setting of mixed input source of Electronic Filing Copy function setting

ALL ALL

0 <0-1> 0 <0-1>

SYS SYS

986

PPC

0 <0-1>

SYS

988

Paper feeding

Setting of paper size switching to 13" LG

ALL

0 <0-2>

SYS

Roman-8 ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 ISO 8859/2 Latin 2 ISO 8859/9 Latin 5 PC-8,Code Page 437 5: PC-8 D/N, Danish/ Norwegian 6: PC-850,Multilingual 7: PC-852, Latin2 8: PC-8 Turkish 9: Windows 3.1 Latin 1 10: Windows 3.1 Latin 2 11: Windows 3.1 Latin 5 12: DeskTop 13: PS Text 14: Ventura International 15: Ventura US 16: Microsoft Publishing 17: Math-8 18: PS Math 19: Ventura Math 20: Pi Font 21: Legal 22: ISO 4: United Kingdom 23: ISO 6:ASCII 24: ISO 11 25: ISO 15: Italian 26: ISO 17 27: ISO 21: German 28: ISO 60: Danish/Norwegian 29: ISO 69: French 30: Windows 3.0 Latin 1 31: MC Text 32: PC Cyrillic 33: ITC Zapf Dingbats 34: ISO 8859/10 Latin 6 35: PC-775 36: PC-1004 37: Symbol 38: Windows Baltic 39: Wingdings 0: Print 1: Private 0: Image quality priority mode 1: Function priority mode Sets the copy function to be invalid. 0: Valid 1: Invalid 0: Not switched 1: LG13"LG 2: FOLIO13"LG

1 1

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 187 07/11

Code 995

Classification Version

999 1002

Maintenance Network

1003

Network

1005 1006

Network Network

1007 1008

Network Network

1009

Network

1010

Network

1011 1012

Network Network

1013 1014 1015 1016

Network Network Network Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Equipment number ALL 0 SYS This code can be also (serial number) display <10 digkeyed in from the its> adjustment mode (05976). 10 digits FSMS total counter ALL 0 SYS Refer to values of total <8 digits> counter. Selection of NIC board staALL 1 NIC 1: Not printed out tus information <1-2> when the equipment is restarted 2: Printed out when the equipment is restarted Communication speed and ALL 1 NIC 1: Auto settings of Ethernet <1-5> 2: 10MBPS Half Duplex 3: 10MBPS Full Duplex 4: 100MBPS Half Duplex 5: 100MBPS Full Duplex Availability of IP ALL 1 NIC 1: Available <1-2> 2: Not available Address Mode ALL 2 NIC 1: Fixed IP address <1-3> 2: Dynamic IP address 3: Dynamic IP address without AutoIP Domain name ALL NIC Maximum 96 letters IP address ALL NIC 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) Subnet mask ALL NIC 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) Gateway ALL NIC 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) Availability of IPX ALL 1 NIC 1: Available <1-2> 2: Not available Network frame type ALL 1 NIC 1: Automatic <1-5> 2: IEEE802.3 3: Ethernet II 4: IEEE802.3 SNAP 5: IEEE802.2 Availability of NCP Burst ALL 1 NIC 1: Available <1-2> 2: Not available Availability of AppleTalk ALL 1 NIC 1: Available <1-2> 2: Not available Zone setting of AppleTalk ALL * NIC Maximum 32 letters *: Wildcard character Availability of LDAP ALL 1 NIC 1: Available <1-2> 2: Not available

Procedur e 11

1 12

12

12 12

12 12

12

12

12 12

12 12 12 12

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 188 07/11

Code 1017 1018

Classification Network Network

1019

Network

1020

Network

1023

Network

1024

Network

1025

Network

1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031

Network Network Network Network Network Network

1032

Network

1037 1038 1039

Network Network Network

1040 1041

Network Network

1042

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Availability of DNS ALL 1 NIC 1: Available <1-2> 2: Not available IP address to DNS server ALL NIC 000.000.000.000(Primary) 255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) IP address to DNS server ALL NIC 000.000.000.000(Secondary) 255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) DDNS Desired level ALL 1 NIC 1: Invalid <1-5> 2: Via DHCP 3: Insecure DDNS 4: Secure DDNS 5: Multi-secure DDNS NetBios name ALL MFP_ UTY Maximum 15 letters serial The network-related serial number of the equipment appears at serial Name of WINS server or IP ALL UTY 000.000.000.000address (Primary) 255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) Name of WINS server or IP ALL UTY 000.000.000.000address (Secondary) 255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) Availability of Bindery ALL 1 NIC 1: Available <1-2> 2: Not available Availability of NDS ALL 1 NIC 1: Available <1-2> 2: Not available Directory service context ALL NIC Maximum 127 letters Directory service tree ALL NIC Maximum 47 letters Availability of HTTP server ALL 1 NIC 1: Available <1-2> 2: Not available NIC Port number to NIC HTTP ALL 80 server <165535> Port number to system ALL 8080 NIC HTTP server <165535> Availability of SMTP client ALL 1 NIC 1: Available <1-2> 2: Not available FQDN or IP address to ALL NIC Maximum 128 Bytes SMTP server NIC TCP port number of SMTP ALL 25 client <165535> Availability of SMTP server ALL 1 UTY 1: Available <1-2> 2: Not available UTY TCP port number of SMTP ALL 25 server <165535> E-mail box name to SMTP ALL UTY Maximum 192 letters server

Procedur e 12 12

2
12

12

12

12

12

12 12 12 12 12 12

12

12 12 12

12 12

12

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 189 07/11

Code 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048

Classification Network Network Network Network Network Network

1049 1050 1051 1052

Network Network Network Network

1055

Network

1057 1058 1059 1060

Network Network Network Network

1061 1062 1063 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069

Network Network Network Network Network Network Network Network

1070 1073 1074

Network Network Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Availability of Offramp ALL 2 UTY 1: Available <1-2> 2: Not available Offramp security ALL 1 UTY 1: Available <1-2> 2: Not available Printing at Offramp ALL 1 UTY 1: Available <1-2> 2: Not available Availability of POP3 clients ALL 1 NIC 1: Available <1-2> 2: Not available FQDN or IP address to ALL NIC Maximum 128 Bytes POP3 server Types of POP3 server ALL 1 NIC 1: Automatic <1-3> 2: POP3 3: APOP Login name to POP3 ALL NIC Maximum 96 letters server Login password to POP3 ALL NIC Maximum 96 letters E-mail reception interval ALL 5 NIC (Unit: Minute) <0-4096> NIC TCP port number of POP3 ALL 110 client <165535> TCP port number of FTP ALL 21 UTY client <165535> Login name to FTP server ALL SYS Maximum 31 letters Login password to FTP ALL SYS Maximum 31 letters server Availability of FTP server ALL 1 NIC 1: Available <1-2> 2: Not available UTY TCP port number of FTP ALL 21 server <165535> Login name to FTP client ALL SYS Maximum 31 letters Login password to FTP cliALL SYS Maximum 31 letters ent MIB function ALL 1 NIC 1: Valid <1-2> 2: Invalid Setting of read Community ALL public NIC Maximum 31 letters Setting of read/Write ComALL private NIC Maximum 31 letters munity Authentication TRAP funcALL 1 NIC 1: Valid tion <1-2> 2: Invalid ALERTS TRAP function ALL 1 NIC 1: Valid <1-2> 2: Invalid TRAP destination IP ALL UTY 000.000.000.000address 255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) Community setting of ALL public NIC Maximum 31 letters TRAP (via IP) Availability of Raw/TCP ALL 1 NIC 1: Valid <1-2> 2: Invalid NIC TCP port number of Raw ALL 9100 <165535>

Procedur e 12 12 12 12 12 12

12 12 12 12

12

11 11 12 12

11 11 12 12 12 12 12 12

12 12 12

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 190 07/11

Code 1075 1076

Classification Network Network

1077 1078 1079 1080

Network Network Network Network

1081

Network

1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087

Network Network Network Network Network Network

1088 1089 1090 1091 1092

Network Network Network Network Network

1093

Network

1094 1095 1096 1097

Network Network Network Network

1098

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Availability of LPD client ALL 1 NIC 1: Valid <1-2> 2: Invalid TCP port number of LPD ALL 515 NIC <165535> LPD queue name ALL NIC Maximum 31 letters Availability of IPP ALL 1 NIC 1: Valid <1-2> 2: Invalid Availability of IPP port ALL 1 NIC 1: Valid number 80 <1-2> 2: Invalid NIC TCP port number of IPP ALL 631 <165535> IPP printer name ALL MFP_seri NIC Maximum 127 letters al The network-related serial number of the equipment appears at serial IPP printer location ALL NIC Maximum 127 letters IPP printer information ALL NIC Maximum 127 letters IPP printer information ALL NIC Maximum 127 letters (more) Installer of IPP printer ALL NIC Maximum 127 letters driver IPP printer Make and ALL NIC Maximum 127 letters Model IPP printer information ALL NIC Maximum 127 letters (more) MFGR IPP message from operaALL NIC Maximum 127 letters tor Availability of FTP print ALL 1 NIC 1: Available <1-2> 2: Not available Printer user name of FTP ALL print NIC Maximum 31 letters Printer user password of ALL NIC Maximum 31 letters FTP TCP port number to FTP ALL 21 NIC print server <165535> Login name to Novell print ALL MFP_ NIC Maximum 47 letters server serial The network-related serial number of the equipment appears at serial Login password to Novell ALL NIC Maximum 31 letters print server Name of SearchRoot ALL NIC Maximum 31 letters server Scan rate setting of print ALL 5 NIC Unit: Second queue <1-255> Page number limitation for ALL 5 UTY printing text of received <1-99> Email MDN return mail setting ALL 2 UTY 1: Valid when receiving E-mail <1-2> 2: Invalid

Procedur e 12 12

2
12 12 12 12

12

12 12 12 12 12 12

12 12 12 12 12

12

12 12 12 12

12

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 191 07/11

Code 1099

Classification Network

1100

Network

1101 1102 1103 1104

Network Network Network Network

1105

Network

1111 1112

Network Network

1113 1114 1117 1118 1119

Network Network Network General Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents able tion value> Trap destination of IPX ALL UTY Maximum 24 letters (Valid from 0 to 9 and from A to F) Method of SMTP server ALL 1 NIC 1: Disable authentication <1-7,10> 2: Plain 3: Login 4: Cram-MD5 5: Digest MD5 6: Kerberos 7: NTLM 10: Auto Login name for SMTP ALL NIC Maximum 64 letters server authentication Login password for SMTP ALL NIC Maximum 64 letters server authentication Rendezvous setting ALL 1 NIC 1: Valid <1-2> 2: Invalid Link local host name ALL MFP_ NIC Maximum 127 letters serial The network-related serial number of the equipment appears at serial Service name setting ALL Refer to NIC Maximum 63 letters contents The network-related serial number of the equipment appears at serial e-STUDIO352: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO352_serial e-STUDIO353: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO353_serial e-STUDIO452: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO452_serial e-STUDIO453: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO453_serial POP Before SMTP setting ALL 2 NIC 1: Valid <1-2> 2: Invalid Host name ALL MFP_ NIC Maximum 63 letters serial The network-related serial number of the equipment appears at serial Windows domain No.1 of ALL UTY Maximum 128 letters user authentication Sending mail text of InterALL 1 SYS 0: Invalid netFAX <0-1> 1: Valid SMB time-out period ALL 300 SYS Unit: Second <1-9999> Clearing of TAT partition ALL SYS Initialization of NIC inforALL Initializes only the information mation of the Network setting items.

Procedur e 12

12

12 12 12 12

12

12 12

12 1 1 3 3

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 192 07/11

Code 1121 1122 1123

Classification Network Network Network

1124 1125

Network General

1126

Counter

1128 1129 1130

Network Network User interface

1131

User interface

1132

General

1134 1135

Network Paper feeding

1138

Network

1139

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> PDC (Primary Domain ALL UTY Maximum 128 letters Controller) name BDC (Backup Domain ALL UTY Maximum 128 letters Controller) name NT domain ON/OFF setALL 4 UTY 3: ON (Domain ting <3-4> selected) 4: OFF (Work group selected) Workgroup name ALL workUTY Maximum 15 letters group Data writing of address ALL 0 SYS 0: Invalid book data import <0-1> 1: Valid (overwriting method) ALL 0 SYS 0: Invalid Validity of interrupt copy<0-1> 1: Valid ing when external counters are installed NetwareUserAuthTree ALL UTY Maximum 47 letters Name1 NetwareUserAuthContext ALL UTY Maximum 127 letters Name1 Job Build Function ALL 1 SYS Sets the Job Build <0-1> Function. 0: Invalid 1: Valid Maximum number of time ALL 2000 SYS Sets the maximum job build performed <5-2000> number of time a job build has been performed. 5-2000: 5 to 2000 times Default screen selection of ALL 1 SYS Selects the default the User Function menu <0-1> screen when entering the User Function menu by pressing the [USER FUNCTIONS] button. 0: ADDRESS 1: COUNTER NetwareUserAuthTree ALL UTY Maximum 47 letters Name2 Default setting of drawers PRT 1 SYS 1: LCF (Printer/BOX) <1-5> 2: Upper drawer 3: Lower drawer 4: PFP upper drawer 5: PFP lower drawer LDAP search method setALL 0 SYS Sets the search method ting <0-3> when performing a LDAP search. 0: Partial match 1: Prefix match 2: Suffix match 3: Full match LDAP authentication setALL 0 SYS 0: Not authenticated ting <0-1> 1: Authenticated

Procedur e 12 12

2
12

12 1

12 12 1

12 1

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 193 07/11

Code 1140

1141

1143 1144 1145

1148 1149 1372

1376

1385

1386

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default ClassifiFunc- <AcceptItems RAM Contents cation tion able value> User Restriction of the template ALL 0 SYS Selects the restriction of interface function with the adminis<0-1> the template function trator privilege usage setting. 0: No restriction 1: Only available with the administrator privilege. Network Display of MAC address ALL SYS (**:**:**:**:**:**) The address is displayed as above (6-byte data is divided by a colon at every 2 bytes). Network NetwareUserAuthContext ALL UTY Maximum 127 letters Name2 Network NetwareUserAuthTree ALL UTY Maximum 47 letters Name3 Mainte- Counter notification ALL SYS Maximum 32 digits nance Remote FAX setting Enter a hyphen with the (Remote) [MONITOR/PAUSE] button. Network NetwareUserAuthContext ALL UTY Maximum 127 letters Name3 General Enhanced bold for PCL6 ALL 0 SYS 0:OFF <0-1> 1:ON Image Heater and energizing time ALL 0 M Counts up the heater process- accumulating counter Dis<8 digits> control time accumuing play/0 clearing lated (when power of the equipment is ON) but does not count at the Sleep Mode. When the counter value of the fuser roller is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at the PM support mode. ALL 0 M Counts the rotation Toner cartridge drive Image <8 digits> number of the toner process- counter Number of output cartridge. pages ing Image Number of output pages ALL 0 M Counts up when the process- (Thick paper 1) <8 digits> registration sensor is ing ON. When the counter value of the fuser roller is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at the PM support mode. Number of output pages ALL 0 M Counts up when the Image <8 digits> registration sensor is process- (Thick paper 2) ON. When the counter ing value of the fuser roller is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode.

Procedur e 1

12 12 11

12 1 1

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 194 07/11

Code 1387

Classification Image processing

1388

Image processing

1390

Paper feeding

1391

Paper feeding

1392

Paper feeding

1393

Paper feeding

1394

Paper feeding

1395

Paper feeding Paper feeding Paper feeding Paper feeding Paper feeding Paper feeding Paper feeding

1396

1397

1398

1399

1400

1401

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Number of output pages ALL 0 M Counts up when the (Thick paper 3) <8 digits> registration sensor is ON. When the counter value of the fuser roller is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode. Number of output pages ALL 0 M Counts up when the (OHP film) <8 digits> registration sensor is ON. When the counter value of the fuser roller is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode. Feeding retry counter ALL 0 M Counts the number of (upper drawer) <8 digits> times of the feeding retry from the upper drawer. Feeding retry counter ALL 0 M Counts the number of (lower drawer) <8 digits> times of the feeding retry from the lower drawer. Feeding retry counter ALL 0 M Counts the number of (PFP upper drawer) <8 digits> times of the feeding retry from the PFP upper drawer. Feeding retry counter ALL 0 M Counts the number of (PFP lower drawer) <8 digits> times of the feeding retry from the PFP lower drawer. Feeding retry counter ALL 0 M Counts the number of (bypass feed) <8 digits> times of the feeding retry from the bypass tray. Feeding retry counter ALL 0 M Counts the number of (LCF) <8 digits> times of the feeding retry from the LCF. Feeding retry counter ALL 0 M When the number of upper limit value <8 digits> feeding retry (08-1390 (upper drawer) to 08-1395) exceeds the setting value, the ALL 0 M Feeding retry counter feeding retry will not be <8 digits> upper limit value performed subse(lower drawer) quently. In case 0 is Feeding retry counter ALL 0 M set as a setting value, upper limit value <8 digits> however, the feeding (PFP upper drawer) retry continues regardFeeding retry counter ALL 0 M less of the counter setupper limit value <8 digits> ting value. (PFP lower drawer) ALL 0 M Feeding retry counter <8 digits> upper limit value (Bypass feed) Feeding retry counter ALL 0 M upper limit value (LCF) <8 digits>

Procedur e 1

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 195 07/11

Code 1410

Classification Counter

1412

Counter

1422

Data overwrite kit

1424

Data overwrite kit

1426

Data overwrite kit

1427

Data overwrite kit

1428

Data overwrite kit

1429

User interface

1430

User interface

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Counter for period of toner ALL 0 M Counts up the period of cartridge rotation time <8 digits> rotation time of the toner cartridge. Counter for tab paper ALL 0 M Counts up when the <8 digits> registration sensor is ON. When the counter value of the fuser roller is reset, this counter is reset in sync at the PM support mode. HDD data overwriting type ALL 0 SYS Select the type of the setting <0-2> overwriting level; LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH for deleting HDD data. (This setting is enabled only when the GP-1060 is installed.) 0: LOW 1: MEDIUM 2: HIGH HDD data clearing type ALL 0 SYS Select the type of the setting (forcible clearing) <0-2> overwriting level; LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH for deleting HDD data. (This setting is enabled only when the GP-1060 is installed.) 0: LOW 1: MEDIUM 2: HIGH Forcible HDD data clearing ALL HDD data is cleared in the procedure set in 081424. * This setting is enabled only when the GP-1060 is installed. Forcible NVRAM data all ALL When this code is perclearing formed, the equipment cannot be started up. * This setting is enabled only when the GP-1060 is installed. Forcible SRAM backup ALL When this code is perdata all clearing formed, the equipment cannot be started up. * This setting is enabled only when the GP-1060 is installed. Margin width ALL Front: 7/ SYS This setting is not (Top/Bottom, Left/Right) Back: 7 reflected in "Right", <2-100/even if the value less 100-100> than 2 is set for "Back". Margin width ALL 14 SYS (Bookbinding margin) <2-30>

Procedur e 1

10

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 196 07/11

Code 1431

Classification Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM tion able value> ACC ALL 1 SYS 0: (AT_CASETTE_CHANGE) <0-2> 1: for Printer/Box printing 2:

Contents ACC prohibited Only in the same paper direction In both same direction and different directions Normal mode Mode for Private Print Function OFF (no restriction on data saving or other operations) Function ON (Data saving or other operations are restricted) Function OFF (no restriction on data saving or other operations) Function ON (Data saving or other operations are restricted No hole punch Hole punch Disabled Enabled

Procedur e 1

2
1

1432

Network

Mode only for Private Print

ALL

0 <0-1> 0 <0-1>

SYS

0: 1: 0:

1435

Network

"Disable private and proof print save" function

ALL

SYS

1:

1436

Network

"Disable fax save" function

ALL

0 <0-1>

SYS

0:

1:

1437 1438

Paper feeding Paper feeding

Hole punch on tab paper Automatic feed setting of tab paper and insertion sheet (Remote) Automatic feed setting of tab paper and insertion sheet (Local) IP Conflict Detect

ALL ALL

0 <0-1> 1 <0-1>

SYS SYS

0: 1: 0: 1:

1 1

1439

Paper feeding

ALL

1 <0-1>

SYS

0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1440

Network

ALL

1 <1-2> 2 <1-2> 24 <1-168> 123 <165535> -

1441

Network

SNTP Enable

ALL

1442 1444 1445 1446

Network Network Network Network

SNTP Polling rate Primary SNTP Address Secondary SNTP Address Port number to SNTP

ALL ALL ALL ALL

OFF/ON 1: Valid 2: Invalid OFF/ON 1: Valid 2: Invalid Data obtaining interval (Unit: Hour) SNTP server IP Address (Primary) SNTP server IP Address (Secondary)

12

12

12 12 12 12

1447

Network

IPP administrator name

ALL

1448

Network

IPP administrator password

ALL

This should be an account which can control all IPP jobs. This should be the password of an account which can control all IPP jobs.

12

12

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 197 07/11

Code 1449

Classification Network

1450

Network

1451

Network

1464

Network

1470 1471

General General

1472

General

1473 1474

General General

1476

Network

1477

Network

1478

User interface

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> IPP authentication method ALL 1 1: Disabled <1-4> 2: Basic 3: Digest 4: Basic Digest User name for IPP authenALL This should be the tication account at the time IPP authentication was performed. Password for IPP authentiALL This should be the cation password of the account at the time IPP authentication was performed. Samba server ON/OFF ALL 1 NIC 1: Samba enabled setting <1-4> 2: Samba disabled 3: Print Share disabled 4: File Share disabled Device authentication funcALL 0 SYS 0: OFF tion setting <0-1> 1: ON User authentication ALL 0 SYS 0: Local method <0-5> 1: NTLM (NT Domain) 2: LDAP 3: Kerberos (Active Directory) ALL 0 SYS 0: Disabled User data management <0-1> 1: Enabled automatic registration function setting User data management ALL 0 SYS 0: Disabled limitation setting <0-1> 1: Enabled User data management ALL 0 SYS 0-9,999,999: limitation <7 digits> 0-9,999,999 sheets Setting by number of printouts ALL 0 SYS Some restrictions can Restriction on Address <0-1> be given on the adminbook operation by adminisistrator for operating the trator Address book. 0: No restriction 1: Can be operated only under the administrator's authorization Restriction on "To" ("cc") ALL 0 SYS 0: No restriction address <0-3> 1: Can be set from both of the Address book and LDAP server 2: Can be set only from the Address book 3: Can be set only from the LDAP server ALL JPN: 0 SYS 0: Not displayed Display of paper size setUC: 1 1: Displayed ting by installation operaEUR: 0 tion of drawers <0-1>

Procedur e 12

12

12

12

1 1

1 1

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 198 07/11

Code 1479

Classification User interface

1481

General

1482

General

1483

General

1484

Network

1485

Network

1487

Network

1489 1491

Network Network

1492

Paper feeding General

1494

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Default setting of sharpALL 5 SYS 1: -4 2: -3 ness <1-9> 3: -2 4: -1 5: 0 6: +1 7: +2 8: +3 9: +4 User data management ALL All the user data in the clearing database and backup files can be deleted. User data department ALL 0 SYS 0: Invalid management <0-1> 1: Valid * When this code is set to 1 (Valid), the department management setting (08-629) should be 1 (Valid). User data recovery ALL The data in the database is overwritten with the data in the backup file. Authentication method of ALL 0 SYS 0: Disabled "Scan to Email" <0-2> 1: SMTP authentication 2: LDAP authentication Setting whether use of ALL 0 SYS 0: Not permitted Internet FAX is permitted <0-1> 1: Permitted or not when it is given an authenticationn "From" address assignALL 0 SYS 0: "User name" + @ + ment method when it is <0-2> "Domain name" given an authentication 1: LDAP searching 2: Use the address registered at "From" field of E-mail setting Setting for "From" address ALL 0 SYS 0: Not permitted edit at "Scan to Email" <0-1> 1: Permitted E-mail domain name ALL SYS 96 + 2 (delimiter) character ASCll sequence only Detection method of 13" ALL 0 SYS 0: Disabled LG for single-size docu<0-1> 1: Enabled ment Limitation check method ALL 0 SYS 0: Checked at every <0-1> page printed 1: Checked at every job printed

Procedur e 1

1 11

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 199 07/11

Code 1495

Classification Maintenance

1496

General

1497

Network

1498

FAX

1530-0

Counter

1530-1

1530-2

1530-3

1530-4

1530-7

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default ProFunc- <AcceptItems RAM Contents cedur tion able e value> 12 Service call checking ALL 6 0: No checking period period setting <0-12> specified (= Calls service technician immediately) 0: 10 minutes 1: 30 minutes 3: 1 hour 4: 6 hours 5: 12 hours 6: 24 hours 7: 48 hours 8: 7 days 9: 1 month 10: 1 year 11: 5 years 12: Not limited (= Calls service technician if such error has occurred in the past even once or more) 1 Operation setting for User ALL 1 SYS 0 : Disables operation authentication/registration <0-1> setting for User authentication/registration 1 : Enables operation setting for User authentication/registration e-Filing Access Mode (for ALL 0 SYS 0: Mode 1 1 Client) <0-2> 1: Mode 2 2: Mode 3 Inbound FAX function 1 SYS 0: OFF 1 (Forwarding by TSI) <0-1> (Function disabled) 1: ON (Function enabled) Number of 1-UP / PPC 0 SYS Counts the number of 4 output pages Duplex <8 digits> output pages. printing PPC 0 SYS Counts the number of 4 2-UP / <8 digits> output pages using Duplex [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE printing SORT]. 4 PPC 0 SYS Counts the number of 2-UP / <8 digits> sheets using [2IN1] or Simplex [MAGAZINE SORT]. printing 4-UP / PPC 0 SYS Counts the number of 4 Duplex <8 digits> output pages using printing [4IN1]. 4-UP / PPC 0 SYS Counts the number of 4 Simplex <8 digits> sheets using [4IN1]. printing PPC 0 SYS Counts the number of 4 1-UP / <8 digits> output pages. Simplex printing

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 200 07/11

Code 1533-0

Classification Counter

1533-1

1533-2

1533-3

1533-4

1533-5

1533-6

1533-7

1535-0

Counter

1535-7

1660 1661 1662 1663 1664 1665

Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN

1666

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Number of 1-UP / PRT 0 SYS Counts the number of output pages Duplex <8 digits> output pages. of the printer printing or BOX PRT 0 SYS Counts the number of 2-UP / <8 digits> output pages using Duplex [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE printing SORT]. * When printing is performed using a Windows driver, the 1-UP image will be output. 2-UP / PRT 0 SYS Counts the number of Simplex <8 digits> sheets using [2IN1] or printing [MAGAZINE SORT]. 4-UP / PRT 0 SYS Counts the number of Duplex <8 digits> output pages using printing [4IN1]. PRT 0 SYS Counts the number of 4-UP / <8 digits> sheets using [4IN1]. Simplex printing N-UP / PRT 0 SYS Counts the number of Duplex <8 digits> output pages using [N printing IN1]. PRT 0 SYS Counts the number of N-UP / <8 digits> sheets using [N IN1]. Simplex printing 1-UP / PRT 0 SYS Counts the number of Simplex <8 digits> output pages . printing 1-UP / FAX 0 SYS Counts the number of Number of <8 digits> sheets in the default output pages Duplex printing settings. of the FAX printing FAX 0 SYS 1-UP / (1-UP / <8 digits> Simplex Duplex printprinting ing) Wireless LAN driver ALL 1 1: OFF 2: ON Radio ON/OFF setting <1-2> Wireless LAN driver ALL Maximum 32 letters SSID Wireless LAN driver ALL 1 1: Infrarstructure Network type <1-2> 2: Ad-Hoc Wireless LAN driver ALL 4 1: 802.1x 2: WPA-PSK Security <1-4> 3: WEP 4: NONE Wireless LAN driver ALL 1 1: TKIP 2: AES Encryption system <1-3> 3: Dynamic WEP Wireless LAN driver ALL 1 1: 100% 2: 50% Transmission output power <1-5> 3: 25% 4: 12.5% 5: min Wireless LAN driver ALL 1 1: Auto 2: Manual Transmission rate <1-2>

Procedur e 4

12 12 12 12 12 12

12

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 201 07/11

Code 1667

Classification Wireless LAN

1668 1669 1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 1675 1676

Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN

1677 1678 1679

1681

Wireless LAN

1682

Wireless LAN

1684

Wireless LAN

1685

Wireless LAN

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents able tion value> Wireless LAN driver ALL 1 1: 1 2: 2 Transmission rate value <1-12> 3: 5.5 4: 11 5: 6 6: 9 7: 12 8: 18 9: 24 10: 36 11: 48 12: 54 Wireless LAN driver ALL 1 1: Auto 2: Manual Operation channel <1-2> Wireless LAN driver ALL 1 Operation channel value <1-11> Wireless LAN driver ALL 1 1: 64 2: 128 WEP bit number <1-3> 3: 152 Wireless LAN driver ALL 2 1: Hex 2: ASCII WEP key entry system <1-2> Wireless LAN driver ALL Maximum 32 letters WEP key value Wireless LAN driver ALL Maximum 64 letters WPA-PSK passphrase Wireless LAN driver ALL 1 1: Off 2: Max Sleep mode setting <1-3> 3: Normal Wireless LAN driver ALL 1 1: Long 2: Short Slot-time limitation <1-2> ALL 5 Wireless LAN driver <0-1000> Number of times of software retry Wireless LAN driver ALL 1 1: Long 2: Longshort Preamble <1-2> Wireless LAN driver ALL 1 1: All 2: 11b Operation mode <1-3> 3: 11g Wireless LAN supplicant ALL 1 This setting is whether Wireless LAN setting <1-3> the wireless LAN connection is enabled or disabled. 1: Unset 2: Enabled 3: Disabled ALL This should be the path Wireless LAN supplicant name in full where the Path name for client certificlient certificate is cate located. (Maximum 255 letters) Wireless LAN supplicant ALL This should be the path Path name for secret key name in full where the of client certificate client certificate is located. (Maximum 255 letters) Wireless LAN supplicant ALL This should be the path Path name for CA self-cername in full where the tificate CA self-certificate is located. (Maximum 255 letters) Wireless LAN supplicant ALL This should be the user EAP user name name when the EAPTLS is used.

Procedur e 12

12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12

12 12 12

12

12

12

12

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 202 07/11

Code 1686

Classification Wireless LAN Wireless LAN

1689

1690

Wireless LAN

1691

Wireless LAN

1692

Wireless LAN

1693

Wireless LAN

1696

Wireless LAN

1697

Wireless LAN

1699

Wireless LAN

1700

Wireless LAN

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default ProFunc- <AcceptItems RAM Contents cedur tion able e value> Wireless LAN supplicant ALL This should be the user 12 EAP user name name when the PEAP is used. This should be the time12 Wireless LAN supplicant ALL 30 out interval between Authentication interval <30EAP responses. 65535> 30: 30 seconds 12 M The EAP authenticaWireless LAN supplicant ALL 60 tion will start after havHolding interval <60ing been waited in this 65535> period when an EAP failure was received. 60: 60 seconds 12 Wireless LAN supplicant ALL 3 M When an EAPOL-Start EAPOL-Start <1packet has been sent Number of times of packet 65535> and the request ID canretry not be received, this EAPOL-Start packet will be re-sent for the number of times set in this code. 3: 3 times 12 Wireless LAN supplicant ALL 2 This setting is whether Session resume <1-2> the pre-master key should be updated or not upon a TLS renegotiation. 1: Session is resumed 2: Session is not resumed Wireless LAN supplicant ALL 1398 This is a MAC frame 12 MAC Frame size <1-1398> size used in the wireless LAN connection. The data is fragmented into this size. 1398: 1398 bytes 12 ALL /dev/ This should be the Wireless LAN supplicant urandom device file name which Device file setting for can obtain a seed to iniobtaining random number tialize the WEP PRNG for xsupplicant. (Maximum 255 letters) Wireless LAN supplicant ALL This should be the path 12 CRL directory designation name of the directory in full where the CRL file is located. (Maximum 255 letters) 12 Wireless LAN supplicant ALL 1 This setting is for the EAP authentication type <1-3> EAP authentication type which xsupplicant can authenticate. 1: EAP-TLS 2: PEAP 3: EAP-TLS and PEAP Wireless LAN supplicant ALL This should be an 12 CN name authentication server name (basically a domain name in full). (Maximum 255 letters)

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 203 07/11

Code 1701 1704

Classification Wireless LAN Wireless LAN

1705

Wireless LAN

1706

Wireless LAN

1707

Wireless LAN

1708

User interface

1709 1710 1711 1712 1713

Bluetooth Bluetooth Bluetooth Bluetooth Bluetooth

1714

Bluetooth

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Wireless LAN supplicant ALL 1 1: NO 2: YES CN name check <1-2> Wireless LAN supplicant ALL 0 The update interval of a Update interval of PTK <0-720> secret key across AP (Pairwise Transient Key) (Access Point) and STA (Station) can be set. This interval is for updating the secret key from STA. 0: Not updated 1-720: 1-720 minutes of interval Wireless LAN supplicant ALL 1 The Ack bit and request Strict packet check <1-2> bit of EAPOL-Key is checked. 1: Not checked 2: Checked ALL 1 A higher priority is given Wireless LAN supplicant <1-2> to the xsupplicant task Priority change at 4-way when a 4-way handhandshake shake is started. 1: Priority not changed 2: Priority changed Wireless LAN supplicant ALL 1 The encryption capabilSecurity level <1-3> ity output in TLS clientHello message can be selected. 1: LOW 2: MIDDLE 3: HIGH Selectable security level ALL 1 These are the security (EAP-TLS) <1-3> level which can be selected from the user interface. This setting is not applied in case of PEAP. ("LOW" and "MIDDLE" is mandatory for PEAP) 1: LOW + MIDDLE + HIGH 2: MIDDLE + HIGH 3: HIGH Bluetooth ALL 0 SYS 0: Not installed Installation status of option <0-1> 1: Installed Bluetooth ALL 1 SYS 0: OFF ON/OFF setting <0-1> 1: ON Bluetooth ALL MFP SYS Maximum 32 letters Device name Bluetooth ALL 1 SYS 0: Not allowed Discovery <0-1> 1: Allowed Bluetooth ALL 1 SYS 0: Security function Security <0-1> OFF 1: Security function ON Bluetooth ALL 0000 SYS Maximum 8 digits PIN (8-digit sequence) This setting is valid only when the bluetooth security function is ON.

Procedur e 12 12

12

12

12

12

1 1 11 1 1

11

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 204 07/11

Code 1715

Classification Bluetooth

1716

Bluetooth Bluetooth Bluetooth

1717

1719

1720

Network

1721

Network

1722

Network

1723

Network

1724

Network

1725

Network

1726

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Bluetooth ALL 1 SYS 0: Not encrypted Data encryption <0-1> 1: Encrypted This setting is valid only when the bluetooth security function is ON. Bluetooth ALL 6 SYS Setting value ~ 0.5 sec. HCRP reception time-out <1-50> period ALL 6 SYS Setting value ~ 0.5 sec. Bluetooth HCRP transmission time<1-50> out period Bluetooth ALL 0 SYS 0: Fit page BIP Paper type <0-3> 1: 1/2 size 2: 1/4 size 3: 1/8 size ALL IP filter minimum area 1 IP address range for IP fil000.000.000.000ter 255.255.255.255 (Minimum area 1) (Default value: 000.000.000.000) ALL IP filter maximum area IP address range for IP fil1 ter 000.000.000.000(Maximum area 1) 255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP address range for IP filALL IP filter minimum area 2 ter I 000.000.000.000(Minimum area 2) 255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) ALL IP filter maximum area IP address range for IP fil2 ter 000.000.000.000(Maximum area 2) 255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP address range for IP filALL IP filter minimum area 3 ter 000.000.000.000(Minimum area 3) 255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) ALL IP filter maximum area IP address range for IP fil3 ter 000.000.000.000(Maximum area 3) 255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP address range for IP filALL IP filter minimum area 4 ter 000.000.000.000(Minimum area 4) 255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000)

Procedur e 1

2
1

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 205 07/11

Code 1727

Classification Network

1728

Network

1729

Network

1730

Network

1731

Network

1732

Network

1733

Network

1734

Network

1735

Network

1736

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> IP address range for IP filALL IP filter maximum area ter 4 (Maximum area 4) 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) ALL IP filter minimum area 5 IP address range for IP fil000.000.000.000ter 255.255.255.255 (Minimum area 5) (Default value: 000.000.000.000) ALL IP filter maximum area IP address range for IP filter 5 (Maximum area 5) 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) ALL IP filter minimum area 6 IP address range for IP fil000.000.000.000ter 255.255.255.255 (Minimum area 6) (Default value: 000.000.000.000) ALL IP filter maximum area IP address range for IP fil6 ter 000.000.000.000(Maximum area 6) 255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP address range for IP filALL IP filter minimum area 7 ter 000.000.000.000(Minimum area 7) 255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) ALL IP filter maximum area IP address range for IP fil7 ter 000.000.000.000(Maximum area 7) 255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP address range for IP filALL IP filter minimum area 8 ter 000.000.000.000(Minimum area 8) 255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) ALL IP filter maximum area IP address range for IP fil8 ter 000.000.000.000(Maximum area 8) 255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP address range for IP filALL IP filter minimum area 9 ter 000.000.000.000(Minimum area 9) 255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000)

Procedur e 12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 206 07/11

Code 1737

Classification Network

1738

Network

1739

Network

1740

Network

1741

Network

1742 1743

Network Network

1744

Network

1745

Network

1746

Network

1747

Network

1748

Network

1749

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> IP address range for IP filALL IP filter maximum area ter 9 (Maximum area 9) 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) ALL IP filter minimum area IP address range for IP fil10 ter 000.000.000.000(Minimum area 10) 255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP address range for IP filALL IP filter maximum area ter 10 (Maximum area 10) 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) SSL setting ALL 2 1: Enabled HTTP server OFF/ON set<1-2> 2: Disabled ting SSL setting ALL 10443 SSL HTTP server port HTTP server port number <1number 65535> SSL setting ALL 2 1: Enabled IPP server OFF/ON setting <1-2> 2: Disabled SSL setting ALL 443 SSL IPP server port IPP server port number <1number 65535> SSL setting ALL 2 OFF/ON SSL ftp server OFF/ON <1-2> 1: Valid 2: Invalid Port number to FTP SSL setting ALL 990 Server SSL ftp server Port <165535> SSL setting ALL 2 OFF/ON SSL LDAP Client OFF/ON <1-3> 1: Valid 2: Invalid 3: Use imported certificate Port number to LDAP SSL setting ALL 636 Server SSL LDAP Client Port <165535> SSL setting ALL 2 OFF/ON SSL POP3 Client OFF/ON <1-3> 1: Valid 2: Invalid 3: Use imported certificate Port number to POP3 SSL setting ALL 995 Server SSL POP3 Client Port <165535>

Procedur e 12

2
12

12

12

12

12 12

12

12

12

12

12

12

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 207 07/11

Code 1750

Classification Network

1751

Network

1755

Network

1756

Network

1757

Network

1759

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default ProFunc- <AcceptItems RAM Contents cedur tion able e value> 12 SSL setting ALL 2 2: Invalid SSL SMTP Client OFF/ON <2-6> 3: Accept all certificates of SMTP with TLS (STARTTLS) server 4: Accept all certificates of SMTPS (SMTP OverSSL) server 5: Use imported certificates of SMTP with TLS (STARTTLS) server 6: Use imported certificates of SMTPS (SMTP OverSSL) server SSL setting ALL 465 Port number to SMTP 12 SSL SMTP Client Port <1Server 65535> 12 Enabling server's IP ALL 2 Domain Name Server address acquired by DHCP <1-2> option (6) 1: Enabled 2: Disabled * This value is used only when DHCP is enabled. 12 Enabling server's IP ALL 2 NetBIOS over TCP/IP address acquired by DHCP <1-2> Name Server option (44) = Primary and Secondary Wins NAME 1: Enabled 2: Disabled * This value is used only when DHCP is enabled. 12 Enabling server's IP ALL 1 The Host Name Venaddress acquired by DHCP <1-2> dor Extension option (12) 1: Enabled 2: Disabled * This value is used only when DHCP is enabled. 12 Enabling server's IP ALL 2 SMTP Server Option address acquired by DHCP <1-2> (69) Simple Mail Server Address 1: Enabled 2: Disabled * This value is used only when DHCP is enabled.

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 208 07/11

Code 1760

Classification Network

1762

Network

1764

Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Network

1765

1766

1767

1768

General

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents able tion value> Enabling server's IP ALL 2 POP3 Server Option address acquired by DHCP <1-2> (70) Post Office Server Address 1: Enabled 2: Disabled * This value is used only when DHCP is enabled. Enabling server's IP ALL 2 SNTP Server Option address acquired by DHCP <1-2> (42) NTP Server Address 1: Enabled 2: Disabled * This value is used only when DHCP is enabled. ALL Maximum 255 letters Wireless LAN supplicant Control sequence setting of "Cipher Suite" Wireless LAN supplicant ALL Maximum 63 letters Path name for user certificate ALL Maximum 63 letters Wireless LAN supplicant Path name entered for CA self-certificate Enabling server's IP ALL 2 SYS DNS domain name address acquired by DHCP <1-2> Option (15) DNS domain name of the client 1: Enabled 2: Disabled * This value is used only when DHCP is enabled. Previous IP address ALL 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000)

Procedur e 12

12

12

12

12

12

12

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 209 07/11

Code 1772

Classification General

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default ProFunc- <AcceptItems RAM Contents cedur tion able e value> 5 Card reading device setALL 0 SYS To enable the e-Bridge ting <8 digits> ID Gate, a card reading device should be set in the order of "ABYYZZZZ". (Enter the corresponding values to "A", "B", "YY" and "ZZZZ".) - AB:Special setting - A :Debugging NIC 0: Not used 1: Used - B :Interface 0: USB connection 1: N/A - YY: Authentication 00: No authentication using a noncontact IC card 02: Authentication using a noncontact IC card (KP-2003) 03: Authentication using a noncontact IC card (KP-2005) 04: Authentication using a noncontact IC card (KP-2004) - ZZZZ: Sub-code 0000: No authentication using a noncontact IC card 0001: Use CSN (Card Serial Number) of a noncontact IC card 0002: Use the Data Area Address Information of a noncontact IC card

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 210 07/11

Code 1773

Classification General

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Card reader format inforALL SYS To access the data in mation -1 the noncontact IC card, the Key Information "LLLL" and the Sector Number "MMMM" should be set. The "LLLL" should be set first, and then "MMMM". KP-2003: LLLL: System code (hexadecimal number) MMMM: Service code (hexadecimal number) KP-2005: LLLL : Key information MMMM: Sector number (hexadecimal number) The data of the block number in the noncontact IC is set. KP-2003: <PPQRSSTU (hexadecimal number)> PP:1st block Q: 1st block beginning byte R: 1st block endingbyte SS:2nd block T: 2nd block beginning byte U: 2nd block ending byte KP-2005: <RRBSEbse (hexadecimal number)> RR:00 (Fixed) B: 1st area block number S: 1st area beginning byte offset E: 1st area ending byte offset b: 2nd area block number s: 2nd area beginning byte offset e: 2nd area ending byte offset * If the 2nd block/area is not used, set the SSTU to "FFFF" (hexadecimal number), the bse to"FFF" (hexadecimal number).

Procedur e 5

1774

General

Card reader format information -2

ALL

SYS

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 211 07/11

Code 1775

Classification General

1776

General

1777

General

1778

General

1779

Network

1781-0 1781-1 1782

Network

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default ProFunc- <AcceptItems RAM Contents cedur tion able e value> 5 Card reader format inforALL SYS Security key mation -3 KKKKKKKKKKKK (12 digits) <hexadecimal number> in the [Key Information] of the [Sector Number] set in the code 08-1773 should be entered. 1 Card authentication LDAP ALL 0 SYS LDAP server number server <0-100> for the card authentication when a noncontact IC card is used should be set. 11 Card authentication LDAP ALL SYS LDAP search index search index when a noncontact IC card is used is set. 1 ALL 1 SYS 0: 0 min. Period for locking the con<0-7> 1: 0.5 min. (30 sec.) trol panel when an incorrect administrator 2: 1 min. 3: 3 min. password has been entered 3 consecutive 4: 5 min. 5: 10 min. times 6: 15 min. 7: 30 min. Default data saving direcALL 0 SYS 0: Local directory 1 tory of "Scan to File" <0-2> 1: REMOTE 1 2: REMOTE 2 4 Notification of When job ALL 0 SYS Sets the notification scan job completed <0-1> method of scan job On error ALL 0 SYS completion. 4 0: Invalid <0-1> 1: Valid 1 File name format of "Save ALL 0 SYS Sets the naming as file" and Email transmis<0-6> method of the file of sion "Save as file" and Email transmission. 0: [FileName]-[Data][Page] 1: [FileName]-[Page][Data] 2: [Data]-[FileName][Page] 3: [Data]-[Page]-[FileName] 4: [Page]-[FileName][Data] 5: [Page]-[Data]-[FileName] 6: [HostName]_[Data][Page]

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 212 07/11

Code 1783

Classification Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Date display format of the ALL 0 SYS Sets the data display file name of "Save as file" <0-5> format of the file of and Email transmission "Save as file" and Email transmission. 0: [YYYY][MM][DD] [HH][mm][SS] 1: [YY][MM][DD] [HH][mm][SS] 2: [YYYY][MM][DD] 3: [YY][MM][DD] 4: [HH][mm][SS] 5: [YYYY][MM][DD] [HH][mm][SS][mm0] The order of [YY], [MM] and [DD] varies depending on the setting of the code 08-640 (Data display format). Sets the directory where the file of "Save as file" is saved. 0: Save it under a subfolder 1: Save it without creating a subfolder Sets the digit of a page number attached on the file. 3-6: 3-6 digits Sets the extension digits of the file to be saved. 3: Auto 4: 4 digits 5: 5 digits 6: 6 digits Number of maximum connections (IPP). Number of active connections (IPP). Number of maximum connections (LPD). Number of active connections (LPD). Number of maximum connections (AppleTalk). Number of active connections (AppleTalk). Number of maximum connections (RawPrint). Number of active connections (RawPrint). 3-30 sec. (in increments of 1 sec.)

Procedur e 1

1784

Network

Single page data saving directory at "Save as file"

ALL

0 <0-1>

SYS

1785

Network

1786

Network

Page number display format of the file of "Save as file" and Email transmission Extension (suffix) format of the file of "Save as file"

ALL

4 <3-6>

SYS

ALL

3 <3-6>

SYS

1850 1851 1852 1853 1854

Network Network Network Network Network

IPP MaxConnection IPP ActiveConnection LPD MaxConnection LPD ActiveConnection AppleTalk MaxConnection AppleTalk ActiveConnection RawPrint MaxConnection RawPrint ActiveConnection Manual stapling time-out period

ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

16 <1-16> 10 <1-16> 10 <1-16> 10 <1-16> 10 <1-16> 10 <1-16> 10 <1-16> 10 <1-16> 15 <3~30>

NIC NIC NIC NIC NIC

12 12 12 12 12

1855 1856 1857 1911

Network Network Network Finisher

ALL ALL ALL ALL

NIC NIC NIC M

12 12 12 1

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 213 07/11

Code 1912 1913

Classification Finisher General

1914

General

1915

Network

1916 1920 1921 1922 1923 1924 1925

General Network Network Network Network Network Network

1926

FAX

1927

Network

1928

Network

1929

User interface

1930

User interface

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Finisher model switching ALL 0 M 0: MJ-1023/MJ-1024 setting value <0~1> 1: MJ-1101 Page number addition on ALL 0 SYS multipage file names of <0-1> "File/Email" Maximum number of deciALL 2 SYS 0: 0 digit mals in extension fields <0-6> 1: 1 digit 2: 2 digits 3: 3 digits 4: 4 digits 5: 5 digits 6: 6 digits Filing size for Network ALL 0 SYS 0: Eliminates 2 mm scanning function <0-1> from circumference (Void: 2 mm) 1: No space eliminated (Void: 0 mm) Default saving/attachment ALL 0 SYS files of "File/Email" <0-1> Device domain name of ALL UTY Maximum 128 letters device authentication Windows domain No. 2 of ALL UTY Maximum 128 letters user authentication Windows domain No. 3 of ALL UTY Maximum 128 letters user authentication LDAP authentication ALL 1 NIC 1: Windows Server Server type <1-2> 2: Not Windows Server LDAP authentication ALL NIC Sets a user attribute User attribute name. Execution of user authentiALL 2 SYS 0: Forcible execution cation when the user ID is <0-2> 1: Execution impossinot entered ble (pooled in the invalid queue) 2: Forcible deletion ALL 0 SYS Sets on or off of the Tab/cover sheet printing at <0-1> printing function of speFAX reception cial sheets such as tab Printing stop function or cover sheet of FAX, Email or list print. 0: Function off 1: Function on ALL eBMUser SYS Up to 32 letters LDAP server attribute Card name setting for card authentication Role Based Access ALL 0 SYS LDAP search index <04294967 295> Keyboard layout for LanALL 0 SYS 1: QWERTY layout guage 1 <0-2> (for Europe) 2: QWERTZ layout 3: AZERTY layout Keyboard layout for LanALL 1 SYS 1: QWERTY layout guage 2 <0-2> (for Europe) 2: QWERTZ layout 3: AZERTY layout

Procedur e 1 1

1 12 12 12 12 12 1

11

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 214 07/11

Code 1931

Classification User interface

1932

User interface

1933

User interface

1934

User interface

1935

User interface

1936

Network

1937

Network

1940

General

1941

Bluetooth

1942

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents able tion value> Keyboard layout for LanALL EUR:2 SYS 1: QWERTY layout guage 3 Other:0 (for Europe) <0-2> 2: QWERTZ layout 3: AZERTY layout Keyboard layout for LanALL 0 SYS 1: QWERTY layout guage 4 <0-2> (for Europe) 2: QWERTZ layout 3: AZERTY layout Keyboard layout for LanALL 0 SYS 1: QWERTY layout guage 5 <0-2> (for Europe) 2: QWERTZ layout 3: AZERTY layout Keyboard layout for LanALL 0 SYS 1: QWERTY layout guage 6 <0-2> (for Europe) 2: QWERTZ layout 3: AZERTY layout Keyboard layout for LanALL 0 SYS 1: QWERTY layout guage 7 <0-2> (for Europe) 2: QWERTZ layout 3: AZERTY layout AppleTalk device name ALL MFP_ UTY Maximum 32 letters serial The Network-related serial number of the equipment appears at "serial". User name and password ALL 0 SYS 0: User name and at user authentication or <0-2> password of the "Save as file" device 1: User name and password at the user authentication (Template registration information comes first when a template is retrieved.) 2: User name and password at the user authentication (User information of the authentication comes first when a template is retrieved.) STAGE port number SCN 20080 SYS Port number used for <0the remote scanning is 65535> set. Bluetooth ALL EUR: 6 SYS 0: Ledger 1: Legal BIP Paper size UC: 2 2: Letter 3: Computer JPN: 6 4: Statement 5: A3 <0-13> 6: A4 7: A5 8: A6 9: B4 10: B5 11: Folio 12: Legal13" 13: LetterSquare Device authentication ALL 60 NIC Unit: Second PDC/BDC time-out period <1-180>

Procedur e 1

12

12

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 215 07/11

Code 1943 1944

Classification Network Network

1950

Network

1951

Network

1952 1953

Network Network

1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961

Network Network Network Network Network Network General General

1963

General

1964

General

1965 1966 1967 1968

General General General General

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> User authentication ALL 30 NIC Unit: Second PDC/BDC time-out period <1-180> Device/User authentication ALL 1 NIC 1: Auto Method of Windows <1-3> 2: Kerberos domain authentication 3: NTLMv2 SMB signature for SMB ALL 1 UTY 1: Auto server <1-3> 2: Valid 3: Invalid SMB signature for SMB cliALL 1 UTY 1: Auto ent <1-3> 2: Valid 3: Invalid Device name for device ALL UTY Maximum 128 letters authentication ALL UTY Maximum 128 letters Password for the device name used for device authentication PDC2 of user authenticaALL UTY Maximum 128 letters tion BDC2 of user authenticaALL UTY Maximum 128 letters tion PDC3 of user authenticaALL UTY Maximum 128 letters tion BDC3 of user authenticaALL UTY Maximum 128 letters tion PDC of device authenticaALL UTY Maximum 128 letters tion BDC of device authenticaALL UTY Maximum 128 letters tion KS Filter operation mode ALL 0 SYS 0: Disabled <0-1> 1: Enabled KS/KSSM setting all clearALL Does not reset the ing value of the code 081960 but resets those of the codes 08-1963 to 1994. KS Filter Emulation Mode ALL 0 SYS 0: Auto <0-2> 1: KS 2: KSSM KS Filter Paper Size ALL 1 SYS 0: A3 <0-5> 1: A4 2: B4 3: B5 4: Letter 5: Legal KS Filter Orientation ALL 0 SYS 0: Portrait <0-1> 1: Landscape KS Filter Copies ALL 1 SYS <1-999> KS Paper Source ALL 0 SYS <0-1> KS Duplex Mode ALL 0 SYS <0-2>

Procedur e 12 12

12

12

12 12

12 12 12 12 12 12 1 3

1 1 1 1

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 216 07/11

Code 1970

Classification General

1971

General

1972

General

1973

General

1974 1975

General General

1976

General

1977

General

1978 1979 1980

General General General

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> KS CPI (English CPI/ ALL 1 SYS 0: (5/10) Hangle CPI) <0-10> 1: (6/12) 2: (6.7/13.3) 3: (6.9/13.8) 4: (7.5/15) 5: (8.3/16.7) 6: (9/18) 7: (10/10) 8: (10/20) 9: (12/24) 10: (15/30) KS LPI ALL 60 SYS Key in the value 10 <30-160> times as the desired font size. (e.g.: Key in "45" for a font size 4.5.) KS Type Face ALL 0 SYS 0: MYUNGJO <0-5> 1: GOTHIC 2: GUNGSEO 3: GULLIM 4: GRAPH 5: SAMMUL KS Font Size ALL 96 SYS Key in the value 10 <96-160> times as the desired font size. (e.g.: Key in "100" for a font size 10.0.) KS Zoom ALL 100 SYS <20-400> KS CR/LF Mode ALL 2 SYS 0: CR->CR, <0-3> LF->LF 1: CR->CR+LF, LF->LF 2: CR->CR, LF->CR+LF 3: CR->CR+LF, LF->CR+LF KS Top Margin ALL 0 SYS Key in the value 10 <0-50> times as the desired font size. (e.g.: Key in "40" for a font size 4.0.) KS Left Margin ALL 0 SYS Key in the value 10 <0-50> times as the desired font size. (e.g.: Key in "40" for a font size 4.0.) KS Auto Wrap ALL 0 SYS 0: OFF <0-1> 1: ON KS Han Mode ALL 1 SYS 0: OFF <0-1> 1: ON KS Han Code ALL 0 SYS 0: Wansung <0-1> 1: Johap

Procedur e 1

1 1

1 1 1

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 217 07/11

Code 1984

Classification General

1985

General

1986

General

1987

General

1988 1989

General General

1990

General

1991

General

1992 1993 1994 3506

General General General General

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> KSSM CPI ALL 1 SYS 0: (5/10) (English CPI/ Hangle CPI) <0-10> 1: (6/12) 2: (6.7/13.3) 3: (6.9/13.8) 4: (7.5/15) 5: (8.3/16.7) 6: (9/18) 7: (10/10) 8: (10/20) 9: (12/24) 10: (15/30) KSSM LPI ALL 60 SYS Key in the value 10 <30-160> times as the desired font size. (e.g.: Key in "45" for a font size 4.5.) KSSM Type Face ALL 0 SYS 0: MYUNGJO <0-5> 1: GOTHIC 2: GUNGSEO 3: GULLIM 4: GRAPH 5: SAMMUL KSSM Font Size ALL 96 SYS Key in the value 10 <96-160> times as the desired font size. (e.g.: Key in "100" for a font size 10.0.) KSSM Zoom ALL 100 SYS <20-400> KSSM CR/LF Mode ALL 2 SYS 0: CR->CR, <0-3> LF->LF 1: CR->CR+LF, LF->LF 2: CR->CR, LF->CR+LF 3: CR->CR+LF, LF->CR+LF KSSM Top Margin ALL 0 SYS Key in the value 10 <0-50> times as the desired font size. (e.g.: Key in "40" for a font size 4.0.) KSSM Left Margin ALL 0 SYS Key in the value 10 <0-50> times as the desired font size. (e.g.: Key in "40" for a font size 4.0.) KSSM Auto Wrap ALL 0 SYS 0: OFF <0-1> 1: ON KSSM Han Mode ALL 1 SYS 0: OFF <0-1> 1: ON KSSM Han Code ALL 0 SYS 0: Wansung <0-1> 1: Johap "Attribute 1" indicated in ALL company SYS Attribute name for the LDAP search result "Attribute 1" indicated in the LDAP search result list

Procedur e 1

1 1

1 1 1 11

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 218 07/11

Code 3507

Classification General

3736

Network

3737

Network

3738

Network

3739

Network

3740

Network

3741

Network

3742

Network

3743

Network

3744

Network

3745 3746

General General

3747

General

3748

General

3749

General

3750

General

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> "Attribute 2" indicated in ALL departSYS Attribute name for the LDAP search result ment "attribute 2" indicated in the LDAP search result list DNS Client Time Out ALL 60 NIC Use when a timeout <1-180> occurred at DNS client connection DDNS Client Time Out ALL 60 NIC Use when a timeout <1-180> occurred at DDNS client connection HTTP Client Time Out ALL 60 NIC Use when a timeout <1-180> occurred at HTTP client connection FTP Client Time Out ALL 30 NIC Use when a timeout (SCAN) <1-180> occurred at FTP client connection SNTP Client Time Out ALL 30 NIC Use when a timeout <1-180> occurred at SNTP client connection SMTP Client Time Out ALL 30 NIC Use when a timeout <1-180> occurred at SMTP client connection POP3 Client Time Out ALL 30 NIC Use when a timeout <1-180> occurred at POP3 client connection LDAP Client Time Out ALL 30 NIC Use when a timeout <1-180> occurred at LDAP client connection POP3 Authentication ALL 1 NIC POP3 authentication method <1-3> method setting 1: Disable (Default) 2: NTLM 3: Kerberos Secure DDNS Primary ALL NIC Login name for login Login Name <1-128> with the Primary DDNS Secure DDNS Primary ALL NIC Login password for Login Password <1-128> login with the Primary DDNS Secure DDNS Secondary ALL NIC Login name for login Login Name <1-128> with the Secondary DDNS Secure DDNS Secondary ALL NIC Login password for Login Password <1-128> login with the Secondary DDNS DPWS Friendly Name ALL NIC MFP name indicated in DPWS search result <Default value> TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxx [NIC serial number] DPWS Printer Name ALL NIC Printer name used for installing the printer with DPWS <Default value> TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxx Printer[NIC serial number]

Procedur e 11

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12 12

12

12

12

12

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 219 07/11

Code 3751

Classification General

3752

General

3753

General

3754

Network

3755

Network

3756

Network

3757

Network

3758

Network

3759

Network

3760

Network

3761

Network

3762

Network

3763

Network

3764

Network

3765

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> DPWS Scanner Name ALL NIC Scanner name used for installing the printer with DPWS <Default value> TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxx Scanner[NIC serial number] DPWS Printer Information ALL NIC Information regarding DPWS printer <Default value> NULL DPWS Scanner InformaALL NIC Information regarding tion DPWS scanner <Default value> NULL Switching DPWS Printer ALL 1 NIC DPWS printer /DPWS setting <1-3> secure printer function is switched. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled 3: Security enabled Switching DPWS Scanner ALL 1 NIC DPWS scanner function setting <1-2> is switched. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled Switching DPWS Security ALL 1 NIC DPWS security funcsetting <1-2> tion is switched. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled NIC Port number used for DPWS Discovery Port ALL 3702 DPWS Discovery Number <165535> DPWS Metadata ALL 5081 NIC Port number used for Exchange Port Number <1DPWS Metadata 65535> Exchange DPWS Print Port Number ALL 5082 NIC Port number used for <1DPWS Print 65535> NIC Port number used for DPWS Scan Port Number ALL 5083 DPWS Scan <165535> DPWS Security Discovery ALL 3702 NIC Port number used for Port Number <1DPWS Security Discov65535> ery DPWS Security Metadata ALL 5084 NIC Port number used for Exchange Port Number <1DPWS Security Meta65535> data Exchange NIC Port number used for DPWS Security Print Port ALL 5085 DPWS Security Print Number <165535> DPWS Security Scan Port ALL 5086 NIC Port number used for Number <1DPWS Security Scan 65535> DPWS Print Max numbers ALL 10 NIC Maximum numbers of connection <1-20> received from more than one connection request in the DPWS print

Procedur e 12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 220 07/11

Code 3766

Classification Network

3767

Network

3768

Network

3769

Network

3770

Network

3771 3772

Network Network

3773 3774

Network Network

3775

Network

3776

Network

3777

Network

3778

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> DPWS Print Max numbers ALL 10 NIC Maximum numbers of of reception <1-20> data received from more than one clients in the DPWS print Switching IPv6 setting ALL 2 NIC IPv6 function is <1-2> switched. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled Switching IP(IPv6) ALL 2 NIC IP(IPv6) Address Address Acquisition <1-2> Acquisition setting is switched. 1: Manual 2: Auto configuration Link Local Address ALL NIC Link Local Address is <0-16> displayed. Unique IP address (128 bits) is set using Mac address. IPv6 Address ALL 0 NIC DHCPv6 Address in <0-16> Manual/Auto configuration is displayed. Prefix display setting ALL 0 NIC The range of Prefix dis<0-128> play is set. Default Gateway setting ALL 0 NIC Default Gateway of <0-16> DHCPv6 Address in Manual/Auto configuration is set. Displaying previous ALL 0 NIC The previous DHCPv6 DHCPv6 Address <0-16> Address is displayed. DHCPv6 Option setting ALL 2 NIC DHCPv6 Option is <1-2> switched when the Manual is set. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled Stateless Address Auto ALL 1 NIC Stateless Address Auto Configuration <1-2> Configuration is switched. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled Stateless Address setting ALL 2 NIC When Prefix sent from continuation <1-2> router is changed, Stateless Address is continued to be set. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled Stateless Address setting ALL 2 NIC IP Address is acquired <1-2> by both Stateless and State full Address. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled Acquiring DHCPv6 Option ALL 2 NIC When Stateless <1-2> Address is selected, an option is acquired from DHCPv6 server. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled

Procedur e 12

12

12

12

12

12 12

12 12

12

12

12

12

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 221 07/11

Code 3779

Classification Network

3780

Network

3781 3782

Network Network

3783

Network

3784

Network

3785

Network

3793

Network

3794

Network

3804

Scanner

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> State full Address setting ALL 2 NIC IP Address is acquired <1-2> from DHCPv6 server. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled State full Option setting ALL 2 NIC An option is acquired <1-2> from DHCPv6 server. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled Primary DNS Server ALL 0 NIC Registration of Primary Address Registration <0-16> DNS Server Address Secondary DNS Server ALL 0 NIC Registration of SecondAddress Registration <0-16> ary DNS Server Address Selecting SAMBA Protocol ALL 2 NIC Either IPv6 or IPv4 is <2-3> selected to use SAMBA. 2: IPv6 3: IPv4 DSN Server resolve type ALL 4 NIC Either "ip6.arpa" or <1-4> "ip6.int" is selected for the name resolution in DNS. 1: "ip6.arpa" only 2: "ip6.int" only 3: In case of error with "ip6.int", "ip6.arpa" is requested. 4: In case of error with ip6.arpa, ip6.int is requested. DPWS IPv4 or IPv4 with ALL 2 NIC Either IPv4 only or IPv6 IPv6 <1-2> together with it is selected to operate Print, Scan and Security related with DPWS. 1: Multi (IPv4 and IPv6) 2: IPv4 Switching LLTD setting ALL 1 NIC LLTD function is <1-2> switched. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled Switching LLMNR setting ALL 2 NIC LLMNR function is switched. <1-2> 1: Enabled 2: Disabled List Analysis Logic of Scan ALL 0 SYS Acquisition of Contents to File (FTP) <0-1> in Host side is switched by Scan to File (FTP). 0: NLST 1: LIST

Procedur e 12

12

12 12

12

12

12

12

12

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 222 07/11

Code 3805

Classification Scanner

3810

Network

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default ProFunc- <AcceptItems RAM Contents cedur tion able e value> 1 Department Management ALL 0 SYS Department Managesetting by Remote Scan <0-3> ment is set when Remote Scan is performed. 0: w/o GUI OFF, w/ GUI OFF 1: w/o GUI ON, w/ GUI OFF 2: w/o GUI OFF, w/ GUI ON 3: w/o GUI ON, w/ GUI ON 1 Direct SMTP communicaALL 0 When an Internet Fax is SYS tion setting <0-1> sent, Direct SMTP communication is set. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled When "0: Disabled" is set, an Internet Fax is sent using an SMTP server. When "1: Enabled" is set, direct SMTP communication is enabled and an Internet Fax is sent to MFPs on the intranet without using an SMTP server. Since no SMTP server is used, the SSL encryption and SMTP-AUTH function cannot be used for internet Fax transmission. If "1: Enabled" is set in 08-3810, set "1: Enabled" in 08-3812 as well. When Direct SMTP communication is performed, an attached image is encrypted. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled When an Internet Fax is sent, the resolution ratio and the paper size of an attached image are set to the full mode. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled If "1: Enabled" is set in 08-3810, set "1: Enabled" in 08-3812 as well.

3811

Network

Image encrypting at the Direct SMTP communication

ALL

0 <0-1>

SYS

3812

Scanner

Dummy full mode at the Internet Fax transmission

ALL

0 <0-1>

SYS

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 223 07/11

Code 3815

Classification Scanner

3816

Scanner

3817

Scanner

3818

Scanner

3819

General

3820

General

3821

General

3822

General

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default ProFunc- <AcceptItems RAM Contents cedur tion able e value> XPS file thumbnail addition ALL 1 SYS Thumbnail is added to 1 <0-1> the XPS file produced by the Scan function. 0: Not added 1: Only the top page added 1 XPS file paper size setting ALL 1 SYS The paper size of the <0-1> XPS file produced by the Scan function is set. 0: Scanned image size 1: Standard size 1 PDF file version setting ALL 0 SYS The version of PDF file <0-1> produced by the Scan function is set. 0: PDF V1.3 1: PDF V1.4 DPWS Scan operation ALL 1 SYS The operation mode in 1 mode <0-1> the DPWS Scan function is switched. 0: Batch type 1: Serial type 1 Network Fax/Internet Fax ALL 2 SYS The processing mode processing mode (STD) <0-2> of the network Fax/ Internet Fax is switched. 0: High speed/Low image quality 1: Standard 2: Low speed/High image quality 1 Network Fax/Internet Fax ALL 0 The processing mode SYS processing mode (FINE) <0-2> of the network Fax/ Internet Fax is switched. 0: High speed/Low image quality 1: Standard 2: Low speed/High image quality 1 Network Fax/Internet Fax ALL 0 SYS The processing mode processing mode (S-FINE) <0-2> of the network Fax/ Internet Fax is switched. 0: High speed/Low image quality 1: Standard 2: Low speed/High image quality 1 Network Fax/Internet Fax ALL 0 SYS The processing mode processing mode (U-FINE) <0-2> of the network Fax/ Internet Fax is switched. 0: High speed/Low image quality 1: Standard 2: Low speed/High image quality

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 224 07/11

Code 3823

Classification General

3824

General

3825

General

3826

General

3827

General

3828

General

3829

General

3830

General

3831

Network

3833

General

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default ProFunc- <AcceptItems RAM Contents cedur tion able e value> 1 Processing mode threshALL 254 SYS Image quality adjustold for network Fax/Inter<0-255> ment when "Standard" net Fax (STD) [Standard] is set for the Network Fax/Internet Fax processing mode (STD) Processing mode threshALL 254 SYS Image quality adjust1 old for network Fax/Inter<0-255> ment when "Standard" net Fax (FINE) [Standard] is set for the Network Fax/Internet Fax processing mode (FINE) 1 Processing mode threshALL 166 SYS Image quality adjustold for network Fax/Inter<0-255> ment when "Standard" net Fax (S-FINE) is set for the Network [Standard] Fax/Internet Fax processing mode (S-FINE) 1 Processing mode threshALL 170 SYS Image quality adjustold for network Fax/Inter<0-255> ment when "Standard" net Fax (U-FINE) is set for the Network [Standard] Fax/Internet Fax processing mode (U-FINE) 1 Processing mode threshALL 200 SYS Image quality adjustold for network Fax/Inter<0-255> ment when "Low speed/ net Fax (STD) [Low speed/ High image quality" is High image quality] set for the Network Fax/ Internet Fax processing mode (STD) 1 Processing mode threshALL 204 SYS Image quality adjustold for network Fax/Inter<0-255> ment when "Low speed/ net Fax (FINE) [Low High image quality" is speed/High image quality] set for the Network Fax/ Internet Fax processing mode (FINE) Processing mode threshALL 206 SYS Image quality adjust1 old for network Fax/Inter<0-255> ment when "Low speed/ net Fax (S-FINE) [Low High image quality" is speed/High image quality] set for the Network Fax/ Internet Fax processing mode (S-FINE) Processing mode threshALL 161 SYS Image quality adjust1 old for network Fax/Inter<0-255> ment when "Low speed/ net Fax (U-FINE) [Low High image quality" is speed/High image quality] set for the Network Fax/ Internet Fax processing mode (U-FINE) ALL 0 SYS 0: Require eBMUser1 Mode switching for Role <0-1> Role attribute Based Access Control 1: User available function LDAP attribute 1 Home directory function ALL 0 SYS Function to store a file <0-1> in the user's home directory 0: Disabled 1: Enabled

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 225 07/11

Code 3834

Classification General

3837

General

3840

General

3841

General

3842

General

3845

Network

3847

General

3848

General

3849

General

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Backup file encryption ALL 0 SYS When the backup file is <0-1> created from TopAccess, it is encrypted. 0: Enabled (Encryption) 1: Disabled (No encryption) Display switching for the ALL 0 SYS The display method of machine name/computer <0-1> the machine name/ name shown in the notificomputer name shown in the event-related cation notification is switched. 0: IP address 1: NetBIOS name/ FQDN Electronic License Key ALL Licenses for Electronic Registration License Key are registered. Electronic License Key ALL Registered licenses for Deletion Electronic License Key are deleted. Electronic License Key ALL All licenses stored in Display the ELK jig are displayed. SNMP Trap Enterprise OID ALL 0 SYS Trap Enterprise OID is mode setting <0-1> enabled for existing models. 0: Normal (Not enabling for existing models) 1: Enabled for existing models FAX mistransmission preFAX 0 SYS FAX mistransmission vention prevention function is <0-1> switched. 0: OFF (Disabled) 1: ON (Enabled) Restriction on Address 0 SYS Availability of destinaFAX Book destination setting tion selection from the <0-1> Address Book is switched as one of FAX mistransmission prevention functions when setting FAX destinations 0: OFF (Disabled) 1: ON (Enabled) . Restriction on destination 0 SYS Availability of direct FAX direct entry entry is switched as one <0-1> of FAX mistransmission prevention functions when setting FAX destinations. 0: OFF (Disabled ) 1: ON (Enabled)

Procedur e 1

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 226 07/11

Code 3850

Classification General

3851

General

3852

User interface

3853

User interface

3854

User interface

3855

User interface

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Remote Scan ALL 0 SYS User authentication on User authentication Remote Scan driver is <0-3> switched according to the availability of GUI. 0: OFF (No GUI) / OFF (GUI installed) 1: ON (No GUI) / OFF (GUI installed) 2: OFF (No GUI) / ON (GUI installed) 3: ON (No GUI) / ON (GUI installed) Template display ALL 0 SYS The order of displaying <0-1> templates on the LCD screen is switched. 0: Order of IDs 1: Alphabetical order Automatic summer time ALL 0 SYS Automatic summer time change <0-1> change on the day previously set is switched. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled Summer time mode ALL 0 SYS Summer time is started Offset value <0-7> as follows when 083852 is enabled. 0: +2:00 1: +1:30 2: +1:00 3: +0:30 4: -0:30 5: -1:00 6: -1:30 7: -2:00 Summer time mode ALL 1 SYS The month in which Starting month <1-12> summer time is started is set. 1: January 2: February 3: March 4: April 5: May 6: June 7: July 8: August 9: September 10: October 11: November 12: December Summer time mode ALL 1 SYS The week in which Starting week <1-5> summer time is started is set. 1: 1st 2: 2nd 3: 3rd 4: 4th 5: Last

Procedur e 1

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 227 07/11

Code 3856

Classification User interface

3857

User interface

3858

User interface

3859

User interface

3860

User interface

3861

User interface

3862

User interface

3863

User interface

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Summer time mode ALL 0 SYS The day on which sumStarting day mer time is started is <0-6> set. 0: Sunday 1: Monday 2: Tuesday 3: Wednesday 4: Thursday 5: Friday 6: Saturday Summer time mode ALL 0 SYS The time at which sumStarting time mer time is started is <00-23> set. 00-23 Summer time mode ALL 0 SYS The minute at which Starting minute summer time is started <00-59> is set. 00-59 Summer time mode ALL 1 SYS The month in which Ending month summer time is ended <1-12> is set. 1: January 2: February 3: March 4: April 5: May 6: June 7: July 8: August 9: September 10: October 11: November 12: December Summer time mode ALL 1 SYS The week in which Ending week summer time is ended <1-5> is set. 1: 1st 2: 2nd 3: 3rd 4: 4th 5: Last Summer time mode ALL 0 SYS The day on which sumEnding day <0-6> mer time is ended is set. 0: Sunday 1: Monday 2: Tuesday 3: Wednesday 4: Thursday 5: Friday 6: Saturday Summer time mode ALL 0 SYS The time at which sumEnding time mer time is ended is <00-23> set. 00-23 Summer time mode ALL 0 SYS The minute at which Ending minute <00-59> summer time is ended is set. 00-59

Procedur e 1

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 228 07/11

Code 3864

Classification Network

3865

Network

3866

Network

3867

Network

3868

Network

6810-0

Counter

6810-1

6810-2

6810-3

6810-4

6810-7

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default ProFunc- <AcceptItems RAM Contents cedur tion able e value> 1 Disclosing Telnet Server ALL 0 SYS Disclosure of Telnet function <0-1> Server function is switched. 0: Not disclosed 1: Disclosed Availability of Telnet Server ALL 2 NIC Availability of Telnet 12 <1-2> Server is switched. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled Telnet Server ALL 23 A port number for Tel12 NIC TCP port number <1net Server is set. 65535> Telnet Server ALL Admin 12 NIC A user name for the TelServer administrator's user <Maxinet Server administraname mum 15 tor is confirmed. letters> Telnet Server ALL System 12 NIC A password for the Telnet Server administraServer administrator's <Maxipassword mum 15 tor is set. letters> 4 PRT 0 SYS Counts the number of Number of 1-UP / <8 digits> output pages printed output pages Duplex only in the black mode. in black mode printing / Large size 4 2-UP / PRT 0 SYS Counts the number of Duplex <8 digits> output pages printed in printing the black mode using [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE SORT]. 4 PRT 0 SYS Counts the number of 2-UP / <8 digits> sheets printed in the Simplex black mode using printing [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE SORT]. 4-UP / PRT 0 SYS Counts the number of 4 Duplex <8 digits> output pages printed in printing the black mode using [4IN1]. 4-UP / PRT 0 SYS Counts the number of 4 Simplex <8 digits> sheets printed in the printing black mode using [4IN1]. 1-UP / PRT 0 SYS Counts the number of 4 Simplex <8 digits> output pages. printing

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 229 07/11

Code 6813-0

Classification Counter

6813-1

6813-2

6813-3

6813-4

6813-5

6813-6

6813-7

6815-0

Counter

6815-7

9117

Network

9359 9394

User interface Network

9629

Network

9739

Maintenance

9819

General

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default ProFunc- <AcceptItems RAM Contents cedur tion able e value> 1-UP / PRT 0 SYS Counts the number of 4 Number of <8 digits> output pages. output pages Duplex printing of the printer or BOX / PRT 0 SYS Counts the number of 4 2-UP / Large <8 digits> output pages using Duplex [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE printing SORT]. 4 PRT 0 SYS Counts the number of 2-UP / <8 digits> sheets using [2IN1] or Simplex [MAGAZINE SORT]. printing 4-UP / PRT 0 SYS Counts the number of 4 Duplex <8 digits> output pages using printing [4IN1]. 4-UP / PRT 0 SYS Counts the number of 4 Simplex <8 digits> sheets using [4IN1]. printing 4 PRT 0 SYS Counts the number of N-UP / <8 digits> output pages using [N Duplex IN1]. printing N-UP / PRT 0 SYS Counts the number of 4 Simplex <8 digits> sheets using [N IN1]. printing PRT 0 SYS Counts the number of 4 1-UP / <8 digits> output pages. Simplex printing Number of 1-UP / FAX 0 SYS Counts the number of 4 <8 digits> output pages in the output pages Simplex printing default settings. of the FAX printing / 1-UP / FAX 0 SYS 4 Large Duplex <8 digits> printing PRT 0 SYS 0: OFF 1 Raw printing job <0-1> 1: ON (Blank page will not be printed) Printing resume after jam ALL 0 SYS 0: Auto resume 1 releasing <0-1> 1: Resume by users 1 Single-page option for storALL 0 SYS 0: Sets 1 page as 1 file ing File and sending Email <0-1> 1: Makes a file based on the original Attribute name for LDAP ALL eBMUser SYS 11 Role Based Access R <-> Remote service ALL 0 SYS 0: RDMS toner empty 1 Toner-end notification <0-2> notified immediately 1: RDMS toner empty notified once a day 2: RDMS toner empty not notified 1 STAGE SSL ALL 1 SYS When remote scanning <0-1> is performed, the SSL communication is carried out. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled(SSL communication)

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 230 07/11

Code 9822

Classification General

9828 9829

General General

9847 9880 9881

Finisher Maintenance General

9882

General

9886

Scanner

9888

Scanner

9889

General

9891

User interface

9946

General

9947

General

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> STAGE SSL port number ALL 20443 SYS When remote scanning <0is performed using SSL 65535> communication, the SSL port number is set. Remote scanning mode ALL 0 SYS 0: Batch <0-1> 1: Sequential Department management ALL 0 SYS Decide the default limilimitation setting <0-1> tation setting when the new department code is created. 0: No limit 1: Limited Hole punching setting ALL 0 SYS 0: Invalid <0-1> 1: Valid Total counter transmission ALL 0 0 to 31 date setting(2) <0-31> Day of total counter data ALL 0 1 byte 00000000(0)transmission <0-127> 01111111(127) From the 2nd bit Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday Display mode of the used ALL 1 SYS 0: All files search capacity on the e-Filing <0-1> mode administrator page 1: Performance priority mode Decimal point indication for SCN EUR: 0 SYS 0: Comma Enhanced Scan Template UC: 1 1: Period JPN: 1 <0-1> Permission setting for SCN 0 SYS 0: Prohibited changing the scan parame<0-1> 1: Accepted ter when recalling an extension Acceptance of data cloning ALL 0 SYS Acceptance of the using USB storage device <0-1> usage of the USB data cloning tool 0: Accepted 1: Not accepted Warning message on the ALL 1 SYS 0: No warning notificatouch panel when PM <0-1> tion (Periodic Maintenance) 1: Warning notification time has come E-mail transmission retry ALL 3 SYS The number of times of number <0-14> E-mail communication retry for Scan to E-mail and Internet Fax is set. E-mail transmission retry ALL 1 SYS When E-mail transmisinterval <0-15> sion retry for Scan to Email and Internet Fax is performed, the interval is set. 0 min - 15 min

Procedur e 1

1 1

1 1 1

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 231 07/11

Code 9960

Classification Maintenance

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default ProFunc- <AcceptItems RAM Contents cedur tion able e value> Displaying equipment ALL 0 SYS Equipment information 2 information <0-2> stored in NVRAM is displayed. 0: Unset 1: e-STUDIO352/452 2: e-STUDIO353/453

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 232 07/11

<<Pixel counter related code>>(Chap. 2.2.9)


Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default ProFunc- <AcceptItems RAM Contents cedur tion able e value> Standard paper size setting ALL EUR: 0 SYS Selects the standard 1 UC: 1 paper size to convert it JPN: 0 into the pixel count (%). <0-1> 0: A4 1: LT 3 Pixel counter all clearing ALL SYS Clears all information related to the pixel counter. 3 Service technician referALL SYS Clears all information ence counter clearing related to the service technician reference pixel counter. Toner cartridge reference ALL SYS Clears all information 3 counter clearing related to the toner cartridge reference pixel counter. 1 Pixel counter display setALL 1 SYS Selects whether or not ting <0-1> to display the pixel counter on the LCD screen. 0: Displayed 1: Not displayed 1 Displayed reference setALL 0 SYS Selects the reference ting <0-1> when displaying the pixel counter on the LCD screen. 0: Service technician reference1: Toner cartridge reference Toner empty determination ALL 0 SYS Selects the counter to 1 counter setting <0-1> determine toner empty. 0: Output pages 1: Pixel counter 1 ALL 400 SYS Sets the number of outThreshold setting for toner <0-999> put pages to determine empty determination (Outtoner empty. This setput pages) ting is valid when 0 is set at 08-1506. 1 Threshold setting for toner ALL 17550 SYS Sets the number of outempty determination (Pixel <0put pages to determine counter) 60000> toner empty. This setting is valid when 1 is set at 08-1506. Pixel counter clear flag/ ALL 0 SYS Becomes 1 when 082 Service technician refer<0-1> 1502 is performed. ence Service technician referALL SYS Displays the date on 2 ence cleared date which 08-1502 was performed. 2 Toner cartridge reference ALL SYS Displays the date on cleared date which 08-1503 was performed. Toner cartridge reference ALL SYS Displays the date on 2 count started date which 08-1503 was performed.

Code 1500

Classification Pixel counter

1501

Pixel counter Pixel counter

1502

1503

Pixel counter

1504

Pixel counter

1505

Pixel counter

1506

Pixel counter

1507

Pixel counter

1508

Pixel counter

1509

Pixel counter Pixel counter Pixel counter Pixel counter

1510

1514

1518

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 233 07/11

Code 1548

Classification Pixel counter

1550

Pixel counter

1551

Pixel counter

1553

Pixel counter

1555

Pixel counter

1556

Pixel counter

1566

Pixel counter Pixel counter

1592

1593

Pixel counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Number of output pages PPC <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of (Service technician referoutput pages conence) verted to the standard paper size in the copy function, black mode and service technician reference. [Unit. page] PRT <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of Number of output pages (Service technician referoutput pages conence) verted to the standard paper size in the printer function and service technician reference. [Unit. page] Number of output pages FAX <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of (Service technician referoutput pages conence) verted to the standard paper size in the FAX function and service technician reference. [Unit. page] Number of output pages PPC <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of (Toner cartridge reference) output pages converted to the standard paper size in the copy function and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] Number of output pages/ PRT <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of black (Toner cartridge refoutput pages conerence) verted to the standard paper size in the printer function and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] Number of output pages FAX <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of (Toner cartridge reference) output pages converted to the standard paper size in the FAX function and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] Toner cartridge replaceALL <3 digits> SYS Counts the number of ment counter time of the toner cartridge replacement. SYS Displays the average PPC 0 Average pixel count pixel count in the copy <0(Service technician referfunction and service 10000> ence) technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Average pixel count PRT 0 SYS Displays the average (Service technician refer<0pixel count in the printer ence) 10000> function and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%]

Procedur e 2

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 234 07/11

Code 1594

Classification Pixel counter

1595

Pixel counter

1606

Pixel counter

1607

Pixel counter

1608

Pixel counter

1613

Pixel counter

1619

Pixel counter

1624

Pixel counter

1625

Pixel counter

1634

Pixel counter

1639

Pixel counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default ProFunc- <AcceptItems RAM Contents cedur able tion e value> 2 Average pixel count FAX 0 SYS Displays the average (Service technician refer<0pixel count in the FAX ence) 10000> function and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Average pixel count PPC/ 0 SYS Displays the average 2 (Service technician referPRT/ <0pixel count in the copy/ ence) FAX 10000> printer/FAX function and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel 2 Latest pixel count (Service technician refer<0count in the copy funcence) 10000> tion, black mode and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] 2 SYS Displays the latest pixel PRT 0 Latest pixel count count in the printer <0(Service technician referfunction and service 10000> ence) technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] 2 SYS Displays the latest pixel FAX 0 Latest pixel count count in the FAX func<0(Service technician refertion and service techni10000> ence) cian reference. [Unit: 0.01%] 2 Average pixel count PPC 0 SYS Displays the average (Toner cartridge reference) <0pixel count in the printer 10000> function and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Average pixel count PRT 0 SYS Displays the average 2 (Toner cartridge reference) <0pixel count in the printer 10000> function, and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] 2 SYS Displays the average 0 Average pixel count PPC/ pixel count in the copy/ <0(Toner cartridge reference) PRT/ printer/FAX function 10000> FAX and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Average pixel count (Toner FAX 0 SYS Displays the average 2 cartridge reference) <0pixel count in the FAX 10000> function and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] SYS Displays the latest pixel 2 Latest pixel count FAX 0 count in the FAX func(Toner cartridge reference) <0tion and toner cartridge 10000> reference. [Unit: 0.01%] 2 SYS Displays the latest pixel Latest pixel count PPC 0 count in the copy func(Toner cartridge reference) <0tion and toner cartridge 10000> reference. [Unit: 0.01%]

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 235 07/11

Code 1640

Classification Pixel counter

1649-0 1649-1 1649-2 1649-3 1649-4 1649-5 1649-6 1649-7 1649-8 1649-9 1650-0 1650-1 1650-2 1650-3 1650-4 1650-5 1650-6 1650-7 1650-8 1650-9 1651-0 1651-1 1651-2 1651-3 1651-4 1651-5 1651-6 1651-7 1651-8 1651-9

Pixel counter

Pixel counter

Setting mode (08) <e-STUDIO352/353/452/453> Default Func- <AcceptItems RAM Contents tion able value> Latest pixel count PRT 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel (Toner cartridge reference) <0count in the printer 10000> function and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel count 0-5% PPC <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data distribution 5.1-10% PPC <8 digits> SYS are divided into 10 10.1-15% PPC <8 digits> SYS ranges. The number of output pages in each 15.1-20% PPC <8 digits> SYS range is displayed. In 20.1-25% PPC <8 digits> SYS this code, the distribu25.1-30% PPC <8 digits> SYS tions in the copy func30.1-40% PPC <8 digits> SYS tion are displayed. 40.1-60% PPC <8 digits> SYS [Unit: page] 60.1-80% PPC <8 digits> SYS 80.1PPC <8 digits> SYS 100% Pixel count 0-5% PRT <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data distribution 5.1-10% PRT <8 digits> SYS are divided into 10 10.1-15% PRT <8 digits> SYS ranges. The number of output pages in each 15.1-20% PRT <8 digits> SYS range is displayed. In 20.1-25% PRT <8 digits> SYS this code, the distribu25.1-30% PRT <8 digits> SYS tions in the printer func30.1-40% PRT <8 digits> SYS tion are displayed. 40.1-60% PRT <8 digits> SYS [Unit: page] 60.1-80% 80.1100% 0-5% 5.1-10% 10.1-15% 15.1-20% 20.1-25% 25.1-30% 30.1-40% 40.1-60% 60.1-80% 80.1100% PRT PRT FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the FAX function are displayed. [Unit: page]

Procedur e 2

14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14

Pixel counter

Pixel count distribution

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 236 07/11

<<PM support mode related code>> The management items at PM support mode can also be operated at setting mode (08). The following items are displayed or set by using sub-codes at PM management setting in the table below. <Sub-codes> 0: Present number of output pages - Means the present number of output pages. 1: Recommended number of output pages for replacement - Means the recommended number of output pages for replacement. 2: Number of output pages at the last replacement - Means the number of output pages at the last replacement. 3: Present driving counts - Means the present drive counts (1 count = 2 seconds). 4: Recommended driving counts to be replaced - Means the recommended drive counts for replacement (1 count = 2 seconds). 5: Driving counts at the last replacement - Means the drive counts at the last replacement. 6: Present output pages for control - Means the present number of output pages for controlling. 7: Present driving counts for control - Means the present drive counts for controlling (1 count = 2 seconds). 8: Number of times replaced - Counts up when clearing the counter of each unit in the PM Support Mode Screen. Notes: Sub-code 3 is equivalent to sub-code 7. When the value of sub-code 3 is changed, the value of sub-code 7 is also updated and vice versa. When "0" is set at one of sub-codes 0, 3, 6 and 7, the rest of them are automatically updated to "0".
Items Photoconductive drum PM management setting <Procedure 4> *Indicated in 8 digits 1150-0 to 8 Date of previous replacement <Procedure 2> 1151 Remarks <Default values of code 1150 (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000 <Default values of code 1158 (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000 <Default values of code 1172 (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000 <Default values of code 1174 (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000

Drum cleaning blade

1158-0 to 8

1159

Drum separation finger

1172-0 to 8

1173

Main charger grid

1174-0 to 8

1175

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 237 07/11

Items Main charger wire

PM management setting <Procedure 4> *Indicated in 8 digits 1182-0 to 8

Date of previous replacement <Procedure 2> 1183

Remarks <Default values of code 1182 (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000 <Default values of code 1198 (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000 <Default values of code 1200 (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000 <Default values of code 1214 (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000 <Default values of code 1224 (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000 <Default values of code 1246 (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000 <Default values of code 1250 (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000 <Default values of code 1266 (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000 <Default values of code 1268 (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000 <Default values of code 1282 (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/120000 <Default values of code 1284 (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/120000 <Default values of code 1286 (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/120000

Ozone filter

1198-0 to 8

1199

Developer material

1200-0 to 8

1201

Transfer charger wire

1214-0 to 8

1215

Separation charger wire

1224-0 to 8

1225

Fuser roller

1246-0 to 8

1247

Pressure roller

1250-0 to 8

1251

Cleaning roller

1266-0 to 8

1267

Fuser roller separation finger

1268-0 to 8

1269

Pickup roller (RADF)

1282-0, 1, 2, 8

1283

Feed roller (RADF)

1284-0,1,2,8

1285

Separation roller (RADF)

1286-0, 1, 2, 8

1287

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 238 07/11

Items Pickup roller (Upper drawer)

PM management setting <Procedure 4> *Indicated in 8 digits 1290-0, 1, 2, 8

Date of previous replacement <Procedure 2> 1291

Remarks <Default values of code 1290 (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1292 (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1294 (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 160000/160000 <Default values of code 1298 (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1300 (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1302 (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 160000/160000 <Default values of code 1306 (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1308 (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1310 (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 160000/160000 <Default values of code 1312 (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1314 (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1316 (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1320 (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1322 (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000

Pickup roller (Lower drawer)

1292-0,1,2,8

1293

Pickup roller (LCF)

1294-0,1,2,8

1295

Feed roller (Upper drawer)

1298-0,1,2,8

1299

Feed roller (Lower drawer)

1300-0,1,2,8

1301

Feed roller (LCF)

1302-0, 1, 2, 8

1303

Separation roller (Upper drawer)

1306-0,1,2,8

1307

Separation roller (Lower drawer)

1308-0,1,2,8

1309

Separation roller (LCF)

1310-0,1,2,8

1311

Separation roller (PFP upper drawer)

1312-0,1,2,8

1313

Separation roller (PFP lower drawer)

1314-0,1,2,8

1315

Separation roller (Bypass unit)

1316-0,1,2,8

1317

Feed roller (PFP upper drawer)

1320-0,1,2,8

1321

Feed roller (PFP lower drawer)

1322-0,1,2,8

1323

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 239 07/11

Items Feed roller (Bypass unit)

PM management setting <Procedure 4> *Indicated in 8 digits 1324-0,1,2,8

Date of previous replacement <Procedure 2> 1325

Remarks <Default values of code 1324 (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1328 (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1330 (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1332 (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000

Pickup roller (PFP upper drawer)

1328-0,1,2,8

1329

Pickup roller (PFP lower drawer)

1330-0,1,2,8

1331

Pickup roller (Bypass unit)

1332-0, 1, 2, 8

1333

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 240 07/11

<<Procedure to copy the total counter value (08-257)>> (1) Turn ON the power while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously. (2) Key in the code 257 and press the [START] button (the following is displayed). Note: Before performing the following operations, note the current counter values.

(3)

Key in the value 1 or 2 and press the [START] button. The value entered is displayed on the left of the %, and the [ENTER] button is displayed. Note: The value can be erased by pressing the [CLEAR] button to change as long as the [START] button is not pressed. (The value on the left of the % is reset to 0 by pressing the [CLEAR] button.) Key in 1 to copy the value of the total counter (LGC board) (A) onto the value of the backup counter (SYS board) (B).

(A)

(B)

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 241 05/12

Key in 2 to copy the value of the backup counter (SYS board) (B) onto the value of the total counter (LGC board) (A).

(A)

(B)

(4)

Press the [ENTER] button to complete overwriting of the counter value.

Note: The screen returns to the code entry screen without copying (overwriting) the value when the [CANCEL] button is pressed.

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 242 05/05

2.2.9

Pixel counter

1) Outline Pixel counter is a function that counts the number of dots emitted by the laser and converts it into the print ratio (%) per standard paper size. This Print ratio (%) per standard paper size is called Pixel count (%). This function enables you to know how each user uses the equipment and to grasp the tendency of toner consumption (number of output pages per cartridge).

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 243 05/05

2) Factors affecting toner consumption Standard number of output pages per cartridge shows the average number of output pages under the condition that the data of print ratio 6% is printed on the standard paper size (A4/LT) at a normal temperature and humidity. However, users do not always print under the above condition. As for the type of original, copy/print mode and environment, each user has different tendency, and as a result, the number of output pages per cartridge becomes different depending on the user. The major factors affecting toner consumption are as follows: - Original/Data coverage - Original/Data density - Original/Print mode - Density setting Also there are other factors in addition to the above, such as environment, individual difference of equipment, difference in lot quality of materials, toner density and drum surface potential. The general relations between the 4 factors mentioned in the previous page and toner consumption per output page in the Copier Function are as follows:

Toner consumption

Original coverage

Toner consumption

Original density

Toner consumption

TEXT /PHOTO

Toner consumption
TEXT PHOTO

Original mode

Manual Manual Automatic Manual Manual Manual density density density density density density -5 -1 Center +1 +5

Density setting
Fig. 2-4 Factors affecting toner consumption and the tendency

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 244 05/05

3) Details of pixel counter - Toner cartridge reference and service technician reference The pixel counter function in this equipment has 2 references, toner cartridge reference and service technician reference. Toner cartridge reference This is a system that accumulates data between the installation of a new toner cartridge and next installation.The installation of new toner cartridge is judged when the total number of pixel count or output pages after the detection of toner empty has exceeded the threshold.The threshold to be used is selectable in the setting mode (08-1506) between the pixel count and output pages (0: Output pages 1: Pixel counter). The threshold of pixel count is set in the setting mode (08-1508) and that of output pages is set in the setting mode (08-1507).When the new toner cartridge is judged as installed, the data related with the previous cartridge is cleared and replaced with the data after the installation of new cartridge.Clearing of the counter of the toner cartridge reference is performed in the setting mode(08-1503). Service technician reference This is a system that accumulates data between clearing the counter of the service technician reference by service technician and subsequently clearing the same counter.Clearing of the counter of the service technician reference is performed in the setting mode(08-1502). Print count (number of output pages) The number of output pages shown at the pixel counter is counted after converting all paper sizes to the standard paper size (A4/LT). Printing on other than the standard size is converted by paper area ratio. The standard paper size is set in the setting mode (08-1500).The examples of conversion are as follows: Ex.) 1. 1 is added to the print count when printing on A4/LT size. 2. 2 is added to the print count when printing on A3/LD size. (area ratio to A4/LT: 200%) 3. 1.49 is added to the print count when printing on B4 size. (area ratio to A4: 149%) 4. 1.27 is added to the print count when printing on LG size. (area ratio to LT: 127%) Pixel count (%) Pixel count (%) shows the ratio of laser emitting pixels to all pixels on standard paper. The examples of pixel count are as follows: Note: In the following examples, solid copy is considered to be 100%. But since the image has 4 margins, it never becomes 100% actually. Ex.) 1. Printing 5 pages on A4/LT size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.) Pixel count: 100%, Print count: 5 2. Printing 5 pages on A4/LT size with blank copy (Laser never emits.) Pixel count: 0%, Print count: 5 3. Printing 2 pages on A4/LT size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.) Printing 2 pages on A4/LT size with blank copy (Laser never emits.) Pixel count: 50%, Print count: 4

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 245 05/05

4. Printing 3 pages on A4/LT size with 6% of laser emission Printing 1 page on A4/LT size with 2% of laser emission Pixel count: 5%, Print count: 4 5. Printing 2 pages on A3/LD size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.) Pixel count: 100%, Print count: 4 6. Printing 2 pages on A3/LD size with 6% of laser emission Pixel count: 6%, Print count: 4 Average pixel count (%) and latest pixel count (%) There are 2 types of the value calculated as the pixel count, average pixel count (%) and latest pixel count (%). Average pixel count (%) The average value of all pixel count data after each reference data is cleared is calculated and displayed. Latest pixel count (%) The value is displayed for printing just before the pixel counter is confirmed. Type of calculated data Since this is multifunctional, the data of pixel count is calculated for each function.The following list is the information that can be confirmed by LCD screen. But actually, more information can be confirmed by the setting mode (08).See after-mentioned (5)-(c) for details. : With data : Without data
Toner cartridge reference Copier function Printer function FAX function Total Service technician reference

Table 2-201 Type of calculated data Setting related with the pixel counter function (f-1) Standard paper size setting The standard paper size (A4 or LT) to convert it into the pixel count is selected (08-1500). (f-2) Pixel counter display setting Whether or not to display the pixel counter on the LCD screen is selected (08-1504). (f-3) Display reference setting The reference when displaying the pixel counter on the LCD screen (toner cartridge reference or service technician reference) is selected (08-1505). (f-4) Determination counter of toner empty This is the counter to determine the replacement of new toner cartridge after the toner empty is detected. After the toner empty is detected by the auto-toner sensor, this counter checks if toner empty is not detected one more time while the specified number of pixel count or output pages is counted.

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 246 05/05

(f-5) Pixel counter clearing There are 3 types for the pixel count clear as follows: 08-1501: All information related to the pixel count is cleared. 08-1502: All information related to the service technician reference pixel count is cleared. 08-1503: All information related to the toner cartridge reference pixel count is cleared. 4) Relation between pixel count and toner consumption The users printing out the image with large coverage or high density may cause the large value of pixel count. And the setting that toner consumption becomes high in the original mode or density setting may cause it as well.In this case, the replacement cycle of toner cartridge is faster than the standard number of output pages. Therefore, this trend needs to be grasped for the service.The relation between pixel count and number of output pages per cartridge is as follows:

Standard number of output pages


Number of output pages per cartridge (page)

X/2

X/10 6% 12% 60% Pixel count (%)


Fig. 2-5 Pixel count and number of output pages per cartridge

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 247 05/05

5) Pixel counter confirmation - Display on LCD screen Whether or not to display the pixel counter on the LCD screen is selected (0: Displayed, 1: Not displayed) in the setting mode (08-1504), and whether or not to display it at the service technician reference or toner cartridge reference is selected (0: Service technician reference, 1: Toner cartridge reference) in the setting mode (08-1505). The following screen is displayed when the buttons, [USER FUNCTIONS], [COUNTER] and [PIXEL COUNTER] are pressed in this order after Displayed is selected with the code above and the power is, as usual, turned ON. The following screen is displayed when the toner cartridge reference is selected in the setting mode (08-1505).

Fig. 2-6 Information screen of toner cartridge reference

The following screen is displayed when the service technician reference is selected in the setting mode (08-1505).

Fig. 2-7 Information screen of service technician reference

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 248 06/09

Data list printing The data for pixel counter can be printed in the list print mode (9S). 9S-104: The data of the toner cartridge reference is printed. 9S-105: The data of service technician reference is printed.
PIXEL COUNTER CODE LIST 2003.4.23 09:55 TONERCARTRIDGE No DATE 0 20030423 1 20030423 2 20030423 Print Count [LT/A4] Average Pixel Count [%] Latest Pixel Count [%] PPC 12345 12345 12345 PRN 23456 23456 23456 FAX 12345 12345 12345 TOTAL 45678 45678 45678

Fig. 2-8 Data list of toner cartridge reference

PIXEL COUNTER CODE LIST 2003.4.23 09:55 SERVICEMAN No DATE 0 20030423 1 20030423 2 20030423 Print Count [LT/A4] Average Pixel Count [%] Latest Pixel Count [%] PPC 12345 12345 12345 PRN 23456 23456 23456 FAX 12345 12345 12345 TOTAL 45678 45678 45678

Fig. 2-9 Data list of service technician reference

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 249 06/09

Display in the setting mode (08) Information of pixel count can be also checked in the setting mode (08). For details, see P. 2-82 "2.2.7 Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO350/450)"/ P. 2-144 "2.2.8 Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)". (c-1) Print count, pixel count
Copier function Print count (page) Average pixel count (%) Latest pixel count (%) Print count (page) Average pixel count (%) Latest pixel count (%) Print count (page) Average pixel count (%) Latest pixel count (%) Average pixel count (%) Toner cartridge reference 1553 1613 1639 1555 1619 1640 1556 1625 1634 1624 Service technician reference 1548 1592 1606 1550 1593 1607 1551 1594 1608 1595

Printer function

FAX function

Total

Table 2-202 Pixel count code table (c-2) Pixel count distribution
Copier function Printer function FAX function Pixel count distribution (page) 1649 1650 1651

Table 2-203 Pixel count code table Note: By entering the sub code at the above code, the pixel count distribution can be displayed dividing into 10 ranges. The sub codes are as follows. 0: 0 - 5% 1: 5.1 - 10% 2: 10.1 - 15% 3: 15.1 - 20% 4: 20.1 - 25% 5: 25.1 - 30% 6: 30.1 - 40% 7: 40.1 - 60% 8: 60.1- 80% 9: 80.1 - 100% (c-3) Other information Toner cartridge replacement counter. The toner cartridge replacement count is displayed. (08-1566) Toner cartridge reference count started date The toner cartridge reference count started date is displayed. (05-1518) Service technician reference cleared date The service technician reference cleared date is displayed. (08-1510) The date (08-1502 was performed) is stored. Toner cartridge reference cleared date The toner cartridge reference cleared date is displayed. The date (08-1503 was performed) is stored.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 250 07/11

2.2.10

Classification List of Adjustment Mode (05) / Setting Mode (08) (e-STUDIO350/450)


e-STUDIO350/450 Adjustment Mode (05) Setting Mode (08) [Date/Time] 200, 638, 640 [Timer] 204, 205, 206, 260 [Screen] 207, 602, 1132 [File] 209, 219, 264, 288 [Language] 220, 221 [Administrator] 263 [Scanning] 265, 266, 273, 274 [Filing] 267, 270, 950, 976, 985 [HDD] 271 [E-mail] 272, 1097, 1098 [default setting] 276, 281, 283, 284, 285, 286, 331, 480, 503, 550, 603, 604, 607, 618, 642, 986, 989, 1135 [Raw printing] 290, 291, 292, 293, 294, 295, 296, 297, 298, 299, 973, 978, 979 [Copy volume] 300 [Original counter] 302 [Custom Mode] 508 [Energy saving] 601 [AMS] 605 [Sound] 610, 969, 970 [Book duplexing] 611 [Summer time] 612 [Paper size] 613 [Department management] 620, 621, 622, 623, 624, 617, 672

Classification User interface

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 251 06/09

Classification User interface

e-STUDIO350/450 Adjustment Mode (05) Setting Mode (08) [Sorting] 627, 634, 641, 649 [Original direction] 628 [Image shift] 636 [Edit copying] 645, 646 [Box printing] 647, 953, 954 [X in 1] 650 [Annotation] 651, 657 [Automatic transfer] 660, 661 [Indicator] 671 [Priority drawer] 689 [Media type] 697 [Offsetting between jobs] 682 [Job build] 1130, 1131 [Position] 305, 306 [Distortion] 308 [Reproduction ratio] 340 [Carriage position] 359 [Margin] 430, 431, 432, 433, 434 -0 to 1, 435, 436, 437, 438 [Image density] 501, 503, 504, 505, 506, 507, 508, 509, 510, 512, 514, 515, 710, 714, 715, 719, 720, 724, 725, 729, 845, 846, 847, 850, 851, 852, 855, 856, 857, 860, 861, 862, 931, 932, 933, 934, 935, 936, 937, 938, 939, 940, 941, 942 [Range correction] 532, 533, 534, 570, 571, 572, 693, 694, 695, 825, 826, 827, 830, 831, 832, 835, 836, 837, 913, 914, 915, 916, 917, 918, 919, 920, 921 [Gamma slope] 593, 594, 595, 943, 944, 945 [Sharpness] 620, 621, 622, 865-0 to 2, 866-0 to 2, 867-0 to 2, 922, 923, 924 [Smudged/Faint text] 653, 654, 655, 928 [Printer density] 672-0 to 4, 676-0 to 4 [Binarizing] 700, 701, 702

Scanner

Image

[Error diffusion / Dither] 502, 509

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 252 06/09

Classification Drive

e-STUDIO350/450 Adjustment Mode (05) [Main motor] 421, 422 [Exit motor] 424, 425 [Aligning amount] 448-0 to 2, 449-0 to 2, 450-0 to 2, 452-0 to 2, 455-0 to 2, 457, 458-0 to 2, 460-0 to 2, 461-0 to 2, 462-0 to 3, 463-0 to 2, 469-0 to 5, 470-0 to 2, 471-0 to 2, 472-0 to 2, 473, 474-0 to 2 [Paper pushing amount] 466-0 to 7, 467 Setting Mode (08)

Paper feeding

Laser

Developer

[Laser power] 286 [Polygonal motor] 401, 405 [Write starting] 410, 411, 440, 441, 442, 443, 444, 445, 498-0 to 1 [Sideways deviation] 497-0 to 5 [Auto-toner] 200, 201

[paper dimension] 210, 229, 230, 231, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238, 239, 240, 241, 242, 243, 244, 245, 471 [Paper feeding] 254, 255, 481, 619, 658, 659, 988 [Retry] 463-0 to 1, 464-0 to 1, 465-0 to 1, 466-0 to 1, 467-0 to 1,468-0 to 1, 482, 1390, 1391, 1392, 1393, 1394, 1395, 1396, 1397, 1398, 1399, 1400, 1401 [Paper size] 216, 217, 224, 225, 226, 227, 228, 247, 248, 249, 256 [Blank copying prevention] 625 [Polygonal motor] 398, 399, 478, 479, 483, 484, 485, 486, 488, 489, 490 [Power correction] 872, 873, 875, 876, 877

High-voltage transformer

[Main charger bias] 210 [Developer bias] 205 [Transfer bias] 221 [Separation bias] 231

Fuser

Fan

RADF

[Aligning amount] 354, 355 [Sensors/EEPROM] 356, 367, 368 [Transporting] 357, 358, 365, 366

[Auto-toner] 414, 455, 840 [Black band] 419 [Transfer bias] 491, 492, 493, 868, 869 [Main charger bias] 826, 864, 865, 866, 867 [Transfer timing] 841 [Developer bias] 859, 860, 861, 862, 863 [Status counter] 400 [Temperature] 409, 410, 411, 412, 413, 437, 438, 855 [Pre-running] 417, 420, 439, 440, 441, 526, 856 [Separation fan] 469 [Middle fan] 472 [Switchback] 462

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 253 06/09

Classification Finisher

e-STUDIO350/450 Adjustment Mode (05) [Folding / Binding position] 468-0 to 2 Setting Mode (08) [Tray reset] 648 [Cascade] 652, 653 [NIC] 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1120 [IP address] 1005, 1006, 1007, 1008, 1009, 1010 [IPX] 1011, 1099 [Frame type] 1012 [NCP] 1013 [Apple Talk] 1014, 1015 [LDAP] 1016, 1138, 1139, 1486 [DNS] 1017, 1018, 1019 [DDNS] 1020 [SLP] 1021 [NetBios] 1023 [WINS] 1024, 1025 [Bindery] 1026 [NDS] 1027 [Directory] 1028, 1029 [HTTP] 1030, 1031, 1032, 1033, 1034, 1035 [SMTP] 1037, 1038, 1039, 1040, 1041, 1042, 1100, 1101, 1102, 1111 [Offramp] 1043, 1044, 1045 [POP3] 1046, 1047, 1048, 1049, 1050, 1051, 1052 [FTP] 1053, 1054, 1055, 1056, 1057, 1058, 1059, 1060, 1061, 1062, 1089, 1090, 1091, 1092, 1107, 1108, 1109, 1110 [MIB] 1063 [Community] 1065, 1066 [TRAP] 1067, 1068, 1069, 1070 [Raw/TCP] 945, 1073, 1074 [LPD] 1075, 1076, 1077 [IPP] 1078, 1079, 1080, 1081, 1082, 1083, 1084, 1085, 1086, 1087, 1088

Network

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 254 06/09

Classification Network

e-STUDIO350/450 Adjustment Mode (05) Setting Mode (08) [Novell] 1093, 1094 [SerchRoot] 1095 [Print queue] 1096 [ASCII code] 977 [Rendezvous] 1103 [Link local host name] 1104 [Service name] 1105 [Host name] 1112 [Internet FAX] 1114, 1485 [SMB] 1117, 1136 [Samba] 1137 [Workgroup name] 1124 [Private print] 1432 [Function] 1433, 1434 [Scan to E-mail] 1484 [From Address] 1487, 1488, 1489 [E-mail domain] 1491 [External counter] 202, 381, 683, 975 [Counter copy] 257 [Paper size] 305-0 to 16, 306-0 to 16, 307-0 to 16, 308-0 to 16, 312-0 to 16, 313-0 to 16, 314-0 to 16, 315-0 to 16, 316-0 to 16 [Large/Small size] 320-0 to 2, 321-0 to 2, 322-0 to 2, 323-0 to 2, 327-0 to 2, 328-0 to 2, 329-0 to 2, 330-0 to 2, 332-0 to 2, 335-0 to 2 [Double count] 344, 346, 347, 348, 349, 352, 353 [Paper source] 356, 357, 358, 359, 360, 370, 372, 374 [HDD] 390, 391, 392, 393 [Department management] 629 [Fuser unit] 1372 [Toner cartridge] 1376 [Media type] 1385, 1386, 1387, 1388, 1412 [Toner cartridge driver counts] 1410
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Counter

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 255 06/09

Classification Version

e-STUDIO350/450 Adjustment Mode (05) Setting Mode (08) [System firmware] 900, 920, 921, 922, 923, 924, 925, 926, 927, 928, 929, 930, 931, 933, 934, 935, 936, 937, 938, 939, 944 [Engine firmware] 903, 905, 907, 908 [FAX] 915 [NIC] 916 [PM counter] 251, 252 [Telephone] 250 [Error history] 253 [FSMS] 258, 999 [Service notification] 702, 703, 707, 710, 711, 715, 716, 717, 718, 719, 720, 721, 723, 767, 768, 769, 770, 771, 772, 773, 774, 775, 776, 777, 778, 779, 780, 781, 782, 783, 784, 785, 786, 787, 788, 789, 790, 796, 1145 [HTTP] 726, 727, 728, 729, 730, 731 [Supply order] 732, 733, 734, 738, 739, 740, 741, 742, 743, 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 758, 759, 760, 761, 762, 763, 765, 794, 795 [Firmware download] 797

Maintenance

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 256 07/11

Classification Others

e-STUDIO350/450 Adjustment Mode (05) [Equipment number] 976 Setting Mode (08) [Destination] 201, 701 [Line] 203 [Private printing] 259 [Local I/F] 614 [Memory] 615 [Partition] 662, 666, 667 [Clear] 665, 669, 693 [Trial period] 673, 695, 798, 799 [Banner] 678, 679, 680 [Database] 684, 685, 686 [HDD] 670, 690, 691, 694, 1422, 1424, 1426 [Control panel] 692 [Scrambler board] 696, 698, 699 [Equipment number] 995 [Message button] 681 [Initialization] 947 [Mode setting] 948, 949 [Template] 1140 [NVRAM] 1427 [SRAM] 1428

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 257 06/09

2.2.11

Classification List of Adjustment Mode (05) / Setting Mode (08) (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)


e-STUDIO352/353/452/453 Adjustment Mode (05) Setting Mode (08) [Date/Time] 200, 638, 640 [Timer] 204, 205, 206, 260 [Screen] 207, 602, 1132 [File] 209, 219, 264, 288 [Language] 220, 221 [Administrator] 263 [Scanning] 265, 266, 273, 274 [Filing] 267, 270, 950, 976, 985 [HDD] 271 [E-mail] 272, 1097, 1098 [default setting] 276, 281, 283, 284, 285, 286, 331, 480, 503, 550, 603, 604, 607, 618, 642, 986, 1135 [Raw printing] 290, 291, 292, 293, 294, 295, 296, 297, 298, 299, 973, 978, 979, 1856, 1857, 9117 [Copy volume] 300 [Original counter] 302 [Custom Mode] 508 [Energy saving] 601 [AMS] 605 [Sound] 610, 969, 970 [Book duplexing] 611 [Summer time] 3852, 3853, 3854, 3855, 3856, 3857, 3858, 3859, 3860, 3861, 3862, 3863 [Paper size] 613 [Department management] 620, 621, 622, 623, 624, 617, 672

Classification User interface

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 258 07/11

Classification User interface

e-STUDIO352/353/452/453 Adjustment Mode (05) Setting Mode (08) [Sorting] 627, 634, 641, 649 [Original direction] 628 [Image shift] 636, 1429, 1430 [Edit copying] 645, 646 [Box printing] 953, 954 [X in 1] 650 [Annotation] 651, 657 [Automatic transfer] 660, 661 [Indicator] 671 [Priority drawer] 689 [Media type] 697 [Offsetting between jobs] 682 [Job build] 1130, 1131 [Display of REVERSE ORDER] 213 [Displaying number of original pages] 342 [Toner is nearly empty] 972 [Paper size setting (drawers)] 1478 [Selectable security level] 1708 [Keyboard layout] 1929, 1930, 1931, 1932, 1933, 1934, 1935 [JOB STATUS] 983 [Jam releasing] 9359 [PM] 9891 [Enhanced template] 9886, 9888

Scanner

[Position] 305, 306 [Distortion] 308 [Reproduction ratio] 340 [Carriage position] 359 [Shading position] 350, 351

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 259 07/11

Classification Image

e-STUDIO352/353/452/453 Adjustment Mode (05) Setting Mode (08) [Margin] 430, 431, 432, 433, 434 -0 to 1, 435, 436, 437, 438 [Image density] 501, 503, 504, 505, 506, 507, 508, 509, 510, 512, 514, 515, 710, 714, 715, 719, 720, 724, 725, 729, 845, 846, 847, 850, 851, 852, 855, 856, 857, 860, 861, 862, 931, 932, 933, 934, 935, 936, 937, 938, 939, 940, 941, 942 [Range correction] 532, 533, 534, 570, 571, 572, 693, 694, 695, 825, 826, 827, 830, 831, 832, 835, 836, 837, 913, 914, 915, 916, 917, 918, 919, 920, 921 [Gamma slope] 593, 594, 595, 943, 944, 945 [Gamma balance] 596-0 to 2, 597-0 to 2, 598-0 to 2, 599-0 to 2 [Sharpness] 620, 621, 622, 865-0 to 2, 866-0 to 2, 867-0 to 2, 922, 923, 924 [Smudged/Faint text] 648, 654, 655, 928 [Printer density] 672-0 to 4, 676-0 to 4 [Binarizing] 700, 701, 702 [Main motor] 421, 422 [Exit motor] 424, 425 [Aligning amount] 448-0 to 2, 449-0 to 2, 450-0 to 2, 452-0 to 2, 455-0 to 2, 457, 458-0 to 2, 460-0 to 2, 461-0 to 2, 462-0 to 3, 463-0 to 2, 469-0 to 5, 470-0 to 2, 471-0 to 2, 472-0 to 2, 473, 474-0 to 2 [Paper pushing amount] 466-0 to 7, 467 [Error diffusion / Dither] 502, 509 [Default setting of sharpness] 1479

Drive

Paper feeding

[paper dimension] 210, 229, 230, 231, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238, 239, 240, 241, 242, 243, 244, 245, 471 [Paper feeding] 254, 255, 481, 619, 658, 659, 988 [Retry] 463-0 to 1, 464-0 to 1, 465-0 to 1, 466-0 to 1, 467-0 to 1,468-0 to 1, 482, 1390, 1391, 1392, 1393, 1394, 1395, 1396, 1397, 1398, 1399, 1400, 1401 [Paper size] 216, 217, 224, 225, 226, 227, 228, 247, 248, 249, 256 [Blank copying prevention] 625 [Incorrect paper size jam] 449 [Tab paper] 1437, 1438, 1439 [Detection method of 13"LG] 1492

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 260 07/11

Classification Laser

e-STUDIO352/353/452/453 Adjustment Mode (05) Setting Mode (08) [Laser power] 286 [Polygonal motor] 401, 405 [Write starting] 410, 411, 440, 441, 442, 443, 444, 445, 498-0 to 1 [Sideways deviation] 497-0 to 5 [Auto-toner] 200, 201 [Polygonal motor] 398, 399, 478, 479, 483, 484, 485, 486, 488, 489, 490 [Power correction] 872, 873, 875, 876, 877

2
[Auto-toner] 414, 455, 840 [Black band] 419 [Transfer bias] 491, 492, 493, 868, 869 [Main charger bias] 826, 864, 865, 866, 867 [Transfer timing] 841 [Developer bias] 859, 860, 861, 862, 863 [Status counter] 400 [Temperature] 409, 410, 411, 412, 413, 437, 438, 855 [Pre-running] 417, 420, 439, 440, 441, 526, 856 [Separation fan] 469 [Middle fan] 472 [Switchback] 462

Developer

High-voltage transformer

[Main charger bias] 210 [Developer bias] 205 [Transfer bias] 221 [Separation bias] 231

Fuser

Fan

RADF

Finisher

[Aligning amount] 354, 355 [Transporting] 357, 358, 365, 366 [Folding / Binding position] 468-0 to 2

[Tray reset] 648 [Cascade] 652, 653 [Interruption of stapling operation (no staple) ] 704-0 to 1 [Manual stapling] 1911 [Finisher model] 1912 [Hole punching] 9847

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 261 07/11

Classification Network

e-STUDIO352/353/452/453 Adjustment Mode (05) Setting Mode (08) [NIC] 1002, 1003, 1119 [IP address] 1005, 1006, 1007, 1008, 1009, 1010, 3769 [IPX] 1011, 1099 [Frame type] 1012 [NCP] 1013 [Apple Talk] 1014, 1015, 1854, 1855, 1936 [LDAP] 1016, 1138, 1139, 3506, 3507, 3743, 9629 [DNS] 1017, 1018, 1019, 3736, 3781, 3782, 3784 [DDNS] 1020, 3737, 3745, 3746, 3747, 3748 [DHCP] 3772, 3773, 3774, 3778, 3779, 3780 [DPWS] 3749, 3750, 3751, 3752, 3753, 3754, 3755, 3756, 3757, 3758, 3759, 3760, 3761, 3762, 3763, 3764, 3765, 3766, 3785 [NetBios] 1023 [WINS] 1024, 1025 [Bindery] 1026 [NDS] 1027 [Directory] 1028, 1029 [HTTP] 1030, 1031, 1032, 3738 [SMTP] 1037, 1038, 1039, 1040, 1041, 1042, 1100, 1101, 1102, 1111, 3741 [Direct SMTP] 3810, 3811 [Offramp] 1043, 1044, 1045 [POP3] 1046, 1047, 1048, 1049, 1050, 1051, 1052, 3742, 3744 [FTP] 1055, 1057, 1058, 1059, 1060, 1061, 1062, 1089, 1090, 1091, 1092, 3739 [MIB] 1063 [Community] 1065, 1066 [TRAP] 1067, 1068, 1069, 1070 [Raw/TCP] 945, 1073, 1074 [LPD] 1075, 1076, 1077, 1852, 1853

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 262 07/11

Classification Network

e-STUDIO352/353/452/453 Adjustment Mode (05) Setting Mode (08) [IPP] 1078, 1079, 1080, 1081, 1082, 1083, 1084, 1085, 1086, 1087, 1088, 1447, 1448, 1449, 1450, 1451, 1850, 1851 [IPv6] 3767, 3768, 3770, 3775, 3776, 3777 [Novell] 1093, 1094 [SerchRoot] 1095 [Print queue] 1096 [ASCII code] 977 [Rendezvous] 1103 [Link local host name] 1104 [Service name] 1105 [Host name] 1112 [Internet FAX] 1114, 1485, 3812, 3819, 3820, 3821, 3822, 3823, 3824, 3825, 3826, 3827, 3828, 3829, 3830 [SMB] 1117, 1950, 1951 [Samba] 1464, 3783, 3883 [Workgroup name] 1124 [Private print] 1432 [Scan to E-mail] 1484 [From Address] 1487, 1489 [E-mail] 3837, 9946, 9947 [E-mail domain] 1491 [User authentication] 1113, 1471, 1496, 1921, 1922, 1925, 1937, 1954, 1955, 1956, 1957, 1943 [PDC] 1121 [BDC] 1122 [NT domain] 1123 [Address book] 1125, 1476, 1477 [Netware] 1128, 1129, 1134, 1143, 1144, 1148 [MAC address] 1141 [ACC] 1431 [Disable print save] 1435

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 263 07/11

Classification Network

e-STUDIO352/353/452/453 Adjustment Mode (05) Setting Mode (08) [Disable fax save] 1436 [IP Confilct] 1440 [SNTP] 1441, 1442, 1444, 1445, 1446, 3740, 3845 [Device authentication] 1470, 1920, 1952, 1953, 1958, 1959, 1942, 1944 [IP Filter] 1720, 1721, 1722, 1723, 1724, 1725, 1726, 1727, 1728, 1729, 1730, 1731, 1732, 1733, 1734, 1735, 1736, 1737, 1738, 1739 [SSL setting] 1740, 1741, 1742, 1743, 1744, 1745, 1746, 1747, 1748, 1749, 1750, 1751, 9819, 9822 [Enable server's IP] 1755, 1756, 1757, 1759, 1760, 1762, 1767 [Previous IP address] 1768 [Card authentification] 1776, 1777, 1927 [Scan to File] 1779, 1784, 1786, 3804, 3815, 3816, 3817, 3818 [Notification of scan job] 1781-0 to 1 [Save as file and Email transmission] 1782, 1783, 1785, 9394 [Network scanning] 1915 [Remote scanning] 1940 [LDAP authentication] 1923, 1924 [Role Based Access] 1928, 3831 [Prefix] 3771 [LLTD] 3793 [LLMNR] 3794 [Telnet] 3864, 3865, 3866, 3867, 3868 [Driver] 1660, 1661, 1662, 1663, 1664, 1665, 1666, 1667, 1668, 1669, 1670, 1671, 1672, 1673, 1674, 1675, 1676, 1677, 1678 [Supplicant] 1679, 1681, 1682, 1684, 1685, 1686, 1689, 1690, 1691, 1692, 1693, 1696, 1697, 1699, 1700, 1701, 1704, 1705, 1706, 1707, 1764, 1765, 1766 [Bluetooth] 1709, 1710, 1711, 1712, 1713, 1714, 1715, 1716, 1717, 1719, 1941

Wireless LAN

Bluetooth

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 264 07/11

Classification Counter

e-STUDIO352/353/452/453 Adjustment Mode (05) Setting Mode (08) [External counter] 202, 381, 683, 975, 1126 [Counter copy] 257 [Paper size] 305-0 to 16, 306-0 to 16, 307-0 to 16, 308-0 to 16, 312-0 to 16, 313-0 to 16, 314-0 to 16, 315-0 to 16, 316-0 to 16 [Large/Small size] 320-0 to 2, 321-0 to 2, 322-0 to 2, 323-0 to 2, 327-0 to 2, 328-0 to 2, 329-0 to 2, 330-0 to 2, 332-0 to 2, 335-0 to 2 [Double count] 344, 346, 347, 348, 349, 352, 353 [Paper source] 356, 357, 358, 359, 360, 370, 372, 374 [HDD] 390, 391, 392, 393 [Department management] 629 [Fuser unit] 1372 [Toner cartridge] 1376 [Media type] 1385, 1386, 1387, 1388, 1412 [Toner cartridge driver counts] 1410 [Number of output pages] 1530-0 to 7, 1533-0 to 7, 1535-0 to 7, 6810-0 to 7, 6813-0 to 7, 6815-0 to 7, [System firmware] 900, 911, 920, 921, 922, 923, 924, 925, 926, 927, 928, 929, 930, 931, 933, 934, 935, 936, 937, 938, 939, 944 [Engine firmware] 903, 905, 907, 908 [FAX] 915

Version

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 265 07/11

Classification Maintenance

e-STUDIO352/353/452/453 Adjustment Mode (05) Setting Mode (08) [PM counter] 251, 252 [Telephone] 250 [Error history] 253 [FSMS] 258, 999 [Service notification] 702, 703, 707, 710, 711, 715, 716, 717, 718, 719, 720, 721, 723, 767, 768, 769, 770, 771, 772, 773, 774, 775, 776, 777, 778, 780, 781, 782, 783, 784, 785, 786, 787, 788, 789, 790, 796, 1145, 9739, 9880, 9881 [HTTP] 726, 727, 728, 729, 730, 731 [Supply order] 732, 733, 734, 738, 739, 740, 741, 742, 743, 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 758, 759, 760, 761, 762, 763, 765, 794, 795 [Firmware download] 797 [Service call checking period] 1495 [Equipment information] 9960

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 266 07/11

Classification Others

e-STUDIO352/353/452/453 Adjustment Mode (05) Setting Mode (08) [Equipment number] 976 [Destination] 201, 701 [Line] 203 [Private printing] 259 [Local I/F] 614 [Memory] 615 [Partition] 662, 666, 667 [Clear] 665, 669, 693 [Trial period] 673, 695, 798, 799 [Banner] 678, 679, 680 [Database] 684, 685, 686 [HDD] 670, 690, 691, 694, 1422, 1424, 1426 [Control panel] 692 [Scrambler board] 696, 698, 699 [Data overwrite kit] 633 [Equipment number] 995 [Message button] 681 [Initialization] 947 [Mode setting] 949 [Template] 1140, 3851 [NVRAM] 1427 [SRAM] 1428 [TAT partition] 1118 [Enhanced bold] 1149 [User data management] 1472, 1473, 1474, 1481, 1482, 1483 [Limitation] 1494, 9829 [Inbound FAX] 1498 [Card reader] 1772, 1773, 1774, 1775 [FAX reception] 1926 [e-Filing Access Mode] 1497 [Administrators password] 1778 [File/Email] 1913, 1916

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 267 07/11

Classification Others

e-STUDIO352/353/452/453 Adjustment Mode (05) Setting Mode (08) [Extension fields] 1914 [KS/KSSM setting] 1961 [KS] 1960, 1963, 1964, 1965, 1966, 1967, 1968, 1970, 1971, 1972, 1973, 1974, 1975, 1976, 1977, 1978, 1979, 1980 [KSSM] 1984, 1985, 1986, 1987, 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994 [Remote scanning] 3850, 9828 [Filing box] 9882 [Data encryption] 3834 [Data cloning] 9889 [Electronic Key] 3840, 3841, 3842 [FAX function] 3847, 3848, 3849

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 268 07/11

3.
3.1

ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment of Auto-Toner Sensor

When the developer material is replaced, adjust the auto-toner sensor in the following procedure. <Procedure> (Adjustment Mode (05-200)) (1) Install the cleaner and developer unit into the equipment. Note: Do not install the toner cartridge. (2) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. The following message will be displayed.

[0] [5] [POWER]

100% TEST MODE

A3

(3)

Key in code [200] and press the [START] button. The display changes as follows.

B 230% [200] [START] TEST MODE 128 C 200

A3 128
A

Notes: A indicates the controlled value of the auto-toner sensor output. B indicates the output voltage of the auto-toner sensor (2.30 V in the above case). The drum, developer unit, etc. are in operation. C indicates the latest adjustment value. (4) After about two minutes, the value B automatically starts changing.

230% TEST MODE 128

200

A3
WAIT

128

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3-1 04/05

(5)

After a short time, the value B becomes stable and the display changes as follows.

B 240% 200

A3 158
A

ADJUSTMENT MODE 128

(6)

Check if the value B is within the range of 235 to 245 (the output voltage range of the auto-toner sensor is 2.35 V to 2.45 V). (7) If the value B is not within the range of 235 to 245, press the Up or Down button to adjust the value manually. Note: The relation between the button and the values A and B is as follows.
Button to be pressed Value A Value B

Up Down (8)

Increased Decreased

Increased Decreased

Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button. The drum, developer unit, etc. are stopped and the following is displayed.

[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT]

100% TEST MODE

A3

(9) Turn the power OFF. (10) Install the toner cartridge.

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-2

3.2
3.2.1

Image Dimensional Adjustment


General description

There are several adjustment items in the image dimensional adjustment, as listed below. When adjusting these items, the following adjustment order should strictly be observed.
Item to be adjusted Paper alignment at the registration roller Code in mode 05 448, 449, 450, 452, 455, 457, 458, 460, 461, 462, 463, 469, 470, 471, 472, 473, 474 401

Printer related adjustment

(a) Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of polygonal motor rotation speed) (b) Primary scanning data laser writing start position (c) Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of main motor rotation speed) (d) Secondary scanning data laser writing start position (e) Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing

3
411 421

441, 440, 444, 443, 442, 445 498 405 306 340 305 430 432 433

Scanner related adjustment

(a) Image distortion (b) Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (c) Image location of primary scanning direction (d) Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (e) Image location of secondary scanning direction (f) Top margin (g) Right margin (h) Bottom margin

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3-3

[Procedure to key in adjustment values] In accordance with the procedure described below, make adjustment of each adjustment item so that the measured values obtained from test copies satisfy the specification. By pressing the [FAX] button, immediately after starting the Adjustment Mode (05S), single-sided test copying can be performed (normal copy mode).
<Operation keys> <Display> 100% 0 1 Digital keys : Enter codes. 100% START TEST MODE Digital keys : Enter adjustment values. ( CLEAR Use to make corrections)
ENTER Value ZZZ is stored

Varies with the code XXX keyed in

A3

TEST MODE

POWER Code No.

XXX
ZZZ

A3

YYY Current adjustment value 100%

Adjustment value newly entered (If no entering, YYY is displayed.)

A3

replacing values YYY. INTERRUPT


or

TEST MODE

100% FAX : Test copy Wait Warming Up

A3

If the test copy does not satisfy the specified values, return to step 1 and repeat the adjustment procedure.

100% COPYING

A3

Power OFF/ON : Exit the Adjustment Mode.

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-4 04/05

3.2.2
Paper type Plain paper Thick paper 1 Thick paper 2 Thick paper 3 OHP

Paper alignment at the registration roller


Upper drawer 450 (*1) 469 (*1) Lower drawer 452 (*1) 470 (*1) PPP upper drawer 448 (*1) 471 (*1) PPP lower drawer 449 (*1) 472 (*1) Bypass feed 458 (*1) 460 (*1) 461 (*1) 462 (*2) 463 (*3)

The aligning amount is adjusted by using the following codes in Adjustment Mode (05).
Weight 64 - 80 g/m2 17 - 20 lb. 81 - 105 g/m2 21 - 28 lb. 106 - 163 g/m2 29 - 43 lb. 164 - 209 g/m2 44 - 55 lb. LCF 457 473 ADU 455 (*1) 474 (*1) -

Sub-code *1 0: Long size 1: Middle size 2: Short size *2 0: Long size 1: Middle size 2: Short size *3 0: Long size of OHP film 1: Middle size of OHP film 2: Short size of OHP film Notes: 1. Long size: 330 mm or longer (13.0 inches or longer) Middle size: 220 - 239 mm (8.7 - 12.9 inches) Short size: 219 mm or shorter (8.6 inches or shorter) 2. The adjustment of "Post card" is for Japan only. <Procedure> (1) Perform the test print according to the following procedure.
(Not necessary for LCF)

3: Post card

[0][5] [Power]

(Code)

[START]
[SET] or [INTERRUPT] Stores in memory

(Sub-code)

[START]
[Drawer selection]

Current value displayed (*3) +[FAX]

Enter new value [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

(Test print)

(*4) 1: Single-sided grid pattern 3: Double-sided grid pattern (2) Check if any transfer void is occurring. If there is a transfer problem, try the values in descending order as 31 30 29 until the transfer void disappears. At the same time, confirm if any paper jam occurs. Also, when the aligning amount has been increased, this may increase the scraping noise caused by the paper and the Mylar sheet as it is transported by the registration roller. If this scraping noise is annoying, try to decrease the value.
Transfer void

50
Fig. 3-1

mm

-1

00

mm

(3)

Perform the same procedure for all paper sources.


e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-5

Note: When paper thinner than specified is used, paper jams may occur frequently at the registration section. In this case, it is advisable to change (or reduce) the aligning amount. However, if the aligning amount is reduced too much, this may cause the shift of leading edge position. So, when adjusting the aligning amount, try to choose the appropriate amount while confirming the leading edge position is not shifted. * As a tentative countermeasure, the service life of the feed roller can be extended by increasing the aligning amount.

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-6

3.2.3

Printer related adjustment

[A] Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of polygonal motor rotation speed (Printer)) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode) Press [1] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower drawer.) Measure the distance A from the 1st line to the 21st line of the grid pattern. Check if the distance A is within 2000.5 mm. If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance A again. <Procedure> (Adjustment Mode) (Key in code [401]) [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) "100% A" is displayed. Press [1] [FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance A becomes. (approx. 0.125 mm/ step)

[B] Primary scanning data laser writing start position (Printer) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode) Press [1] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower drawer.) (3) Measure the distance B from the left edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern. (4) Check if the distance B is within 520.5 mm. (5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance B again. <Procedure> (Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [411]) [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory). "100% A" is displayed Press [1] [FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance B becomes. (approx. 0.05 mm/ step) (6) After the adjustment for the code 411 is completed, apply the same adjustment value for the code 410. <Procedure> (Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [410]) [START] (Key in the same value in the step 5 above) Press [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory). Note: Make sure the first line of the grid pattern is printed out since the line is occasionally vanished. (1) (2)

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3-7 04/09

[C] Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of main motor rotation speed (Copier/Printer)) (1) (2) (3) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment mode) Press [1] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower drawer.) Measure the distance C from the 2nd line at the leading edge of the paper to the 22nd line of the grid pattern. * Normally, the 1st line of the grid pattern is not printed. Check if the distance C is within 2000.5 mm. If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance C again. <Procedure> (Adjustment Mode) (Key in code [421]) [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) "100% A" is displayed Press [1] [FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance C becomes. (approx. 0.125 mm/ step)

(4) (5)

[D] Secondary scanning data laser writing start position This adjustment has to be performed for each paper source. The following table shows the order of the paper source to be adjusted, code, paper size and acceptable values.
Order for adjustment 1 2 3 4 5 Paper source Lower drawer Upper drawer PFP or LCF Bypass feed Duplexing Code 441 440 444/443 442 445 Paper size A3/LD A4/LT A4/LT A4/LT A3/LD Acceptable value 0 to 40 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 Paper fed from the lower drawer Remarks

(1) (2) (3)

(4) (5)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode) Press [1] ([3] for duplexing) [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out.) Measure the distance D from the leading edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern. * Normally, the 1st line of the grid pattern is not printed. * At the duplexing, measure it on the top side of the grid pattern. Check if the distance D is within 520.5 mm. If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance D again. <Procedure> (Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code shown above with digital keys) [START] (Key in an acceptable value shown above with digital keys) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) "100% A" is displayed Press [1] ([3] for duplexing) [FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance D becomes. (approx. 0.4 mm/step)

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-8 05/05

[E] Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing Note: Make sure the first line of the grid pattern is printed out since the line is occasionally vanished. [E-1] (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Adjustment for long-sized paper While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode) Press [3] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower drawer.) Check the grid pattern on the test print and measure the distance E from the left edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern. Check if the distance E is within 520.5 mm. If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance E again. <Procedure> (Adjustment Mode) (Key in code [498]) [START] [0] [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) "100% A" is displayed. Press [3] [FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance E becomes. (approx. 0.05 mm/ step) Adjustment for short-sized paper While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode) Press [3] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A4/LT from the upper drawer.) Check the grid pattern on the test print and measure the distance E from the left edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern. Check if the distance E is within 520.5 mm

[E-2] (1) (2) (3) (4)

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3-9

(5)

If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance E again. <Procedure> (Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [498]) [START] [1] [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255) ) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory). "100% A" is displayed Press [3] [FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance E becomes. (approx. 0.05 mm/ step)

1 B, E 6

21

Feeding direction

10

30

[Grid pattern]
Fig. 3-2 Grid pattern

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 10 04/09

<Adjustment order> [0] [5] [Power ON] [1] ([3](05-445, 498) for duplexing) [FAX] A: 05-401 (Lower drawer, A3/LD) 2000.5 mm (0.125 mm/step) B: 05-411 (Lower drawer, A3/LD) 520.5 mm (0.05 mm/step) Key in the same value for 05-410. C: 05-421 (Lower drawer, A3/LD) 2000.5 mm (0.125 mm/step) D: 05-441 (Lower drawer, A3/LD), 440 (Upper drawer, A4/LT), 444 (PFP, A4/LT), 443 (LCF, A4/LT), 442 (Bypass feed, A4/LT), 445 (Duplexing, A3/LD) 520.5 mm (0.4 mm/step) E: 05-498-0 (Lower drawer, A3/LD), 498-1 (Upper drawer, A4/LT) 520.5 mm (0.05 mm/step) Remark: When the adjustment (05-421) is performed, the same adjustment for FAX (05-422) is automatically and consecutively performed.

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 11 04/09

3.2.4

Scanner related adjustment

[A] Image distortion


A Feeding direction B

Step 1

Feeding direction

Step 2

Fig. 3-3

<Procedure> (1) (2) (3) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. Press [FAX] to make a copy of any image on a sheet of A3/LD paper. Key in [308] and press the [START] button to move the carriage to the adjustment position.

Adjustment screw for the mirror-3 (Rear)

Carriage-2

Fig. 3-4

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 12 04/09

(4)

(5)

Make an adjustment in the order of step 1 and 2. Step 1 - In case of A Tighten the mirror-3 adjustment screw (CW). - In case of B Loosen the mirror-3 adjustment screw (CCW). Step 2 - In case of C Tighten the mirror-1 adjustment screw (CW). - In case of D Loosen the mirror-1 adjustment screw (CCW). Apply the screw locking agents to the adjustment screws. (2 areas) Recommended screw lock agent Manufacturer: Three Bond Product name: 1401E

Adjustment screw for the mirror-1 (Rear)

Carriage-1

3
Fig. 3-5

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 13 04/09

[B] Reproduction ratio adjustment of the primary scanning direction (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON (Adjustment Mode) Place a ruler on the original glass (along the direction from the rear to the front of the equipment). Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3 (LD), 100% and lower drawer. Measure the distance A from 10 mm to 270 mm of the copied image of the ruler. Check if the distance A is within the range of 2600.5 mm. If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3. to 5. above. <Procedure> (Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [405] with the digital keys) [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory). (100% A is displayed.) * The larger the adjustment value, the higher the reproduction ratio and the longer the distance A become (approx. 0.125 mm/step).

Copied image of the ruler

150

200

250

Feeding direction
Fig. 3-6

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 14 04/05

50

100

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

[C] Image position adjustment of the primary scanning direction (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode) Place a ruler on the original glass with its leading edge pushed against the rear side and its side along the original scale on the left. Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3 (LD), 100% and lower drawer. Measure the distance B from the left edge of the paper to 10 mm of the copied image of the ruler. Check if the distance B is within the range of 100.5 mm. If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3. to 5. above. <Procedure> (Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [306] with the digital keys) [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory). (100% A is displayed.) * The smaller the adjustment value, the more the image is shifted to the left and the distance B becomes narrower (0.085 mm/step).
Copied image of the ruler

50

100

150

200

Feeding direction
Fig. 3-7

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 15 04/05

[D] Reproduction ratio adjustment of the secondary scanning direction (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON (Adjustment Mode) Place a ruler on the original glass with its leading edge pushed against the original scale on the left. Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3 (LD), 100% and lower drawer. Measure the distance C from 210 mm to 410 mm (in case of A3) or from 220 mm to 420 mm (in case of LD) of the copied image of the ruler. Check if the distance C is within the range of 2000.5 mm. If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat steps 3. to 5. above. <Procedure> (Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [340] with the digital keys) [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory). (100% A is displayed.) * The smaller the adjustment value, the lower the reproduction ratio becomes. (0.045 mm/step)
Copied image of the ruler

C (LD)

200

250

300

350

400

200

250

300

350

400

C (A3)

Feeding direction
Fig. 3-8

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 16 04/05

[E] Image position adjustment of the secondary scanning direction (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON (Adjustment Mode) Place a ruler on the original glass with its leading edge pushed against the original scale on the left. Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3 (LD), 400% and lower drawer. Measure the distance D from the leading edge of the paper to 10 mm of the copied image of the ruler. Check if the distance D is within the range of 340.5 mm. If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3. to 5. above. <Procedure> (Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [305] with the digital keys) [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory). (100% A is displayed.) * The larger the adjustment value, the more the image is shifted to the trailing edge (0.68 mm/ step).
Copied image of the ruler

10

20

30

40

Feeding direction
Fig. 3-9

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 17 04/05

[F] Top margin (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode) Open the platen cover or RADF. Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Text/Photo and lower drawer. Measure the blank area E at the leading edge of the copied image. Check if the blank area E is within the range of 3 0.5 mm. If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3. to 5. above. <Procedure> (Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [430]) [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory). (100% A is displayed.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area becomes (approx.0.04 mm/step).
Feeding direction

E
Fig. 3-10

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 18 04/05

[G] Right margin (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode) Open platen cover or RADF. Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Text/Photo and lower drawer. Measure the blank area F at the right side of the copied image. Check if the blank area F is within the range of 2+1 mm, 2-0.5 mm. If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3. to 5. above. <Procedure> (Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [432]) ? [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory) (100% A is displayed.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area at the right side becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/step).
Feeding direction

Fig. 3-11

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 19 04/05

[H] Bottom margin (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode) Open platen cover or RADF. Press the [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Text/Photo and lower drawer. Measure the blank area G at the trailing edge of the copied image. Check if the blank area G is within the range of 20.5 mm. If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 2. to 4. above. <Procedure> (Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [433]) [START] (Key in value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory). (100% A is displayed.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area at the trailing edge becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/step).
Feeding direction

G
Fig. 3-12

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 20 04/05

3.3
3.3.1

Image Quality Adjustment (Copying Function)


Density adjustment

The center density and the density variation controlled by density adjustment keys can be adjusted as follows. < Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode Item to be adjusted Text/Photo 503 (931) 505 (934) 508 (937) 514 (940) Photo 501 (933) 506 (936) 509 (939) 512 (942) Text 504 (932) 507 (935) 510 (938) 515 (941) Manual density mode center value Manual density mode light step value Manual density mode dark step value Automatic density mode The larger the value is, the darker the image becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 The larger the value is, the lighter the light side becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 The larger the value is, the darker the dark side becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 The larger the value is, the darker the image becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 Remarks

* The values in ( ) are the adjustment codes of the Custom Mode. Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment using the following procedure. <Procedure> (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. Key in a code and press the [START] button. Key in an adjustment value. (To correct the keyed-in value, press the [CLEAR] button.) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. ? The equipment goes back to the ready state. Let the equipment restarted and perform copying job. If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (5).

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 21

3.3.2

Gamma slope adjustment


< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode Item to be adjusted Remarks One's place: 0: equivalent to the set value 5 1 to 9: Select the gamma slope angle. (The larger the value is, the larger the angle becomes.) Ten's place:0: equivalent to the set value 5 1 to 9: Select the gamma slope angle of the low density area. (The smaller the value is, the darker the background becomes.)

Gamma slope is adjustable with the following codes.

Text/Photo 593 (943)

Photo 594 (945)

Text 595 (944) Gamma slope adjustment

The values in "( )" are the adjustment codes of the Custom Mode.

<Procedure> Procedure is same as that of

P. 3-21 "3.3.1 Density adjustment".

3.3.3

Sharpness adjustment

If you want to make copy images look softer or sharper, perform the following adjustment. < Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode Item to be adjusted Text/Photo 620 (922) Photo 621 (924) Text 622 (923) Sharpness adjustment Key in the following values depending on the original mode. One's place: 1: Text/Photo 2: Photo 5: TextTens place: 0: Use Default value1 to 9:Change intensity (The larger the value is, the sharper the image becomes.) Example of value entry in case the mode is Text/Photo. 21 Fixed value for Text/Photo mode Key in a value 0 to 9 Note: Note: When the value 0 is keyed in at the tens digit, the value is not displayed on LCD screen. Remarks

The values in "( )" are the adjustment codes of the Custom Mode. Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment using the following procedure.

<Procedure> Procedure is same as that of

P. 3-21 "3.3.1 Density adjustment".

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 22 04/05

3.3.4

Setting range correction

The values of the background peak / text peak in the range correction can be switched to varied or fixed in the following codes. If they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak affect the reproduction of the background density and the values of the text peak affect that of the text density. < Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode Item to be adjusted Text/Photo 570 (913) 693 (916) Photo 571 (915) 694 (918) Text 572 (914) 695 (917) Range correction for original manually set on the original glass Range correction for original set on the RADF The following are the default values set for each original mode. Text/Photo: 12, Photo: 12, Text: 22 Each digit stands for: Ones place: Automatic density mode Tens place: Manual density mode The setting conditions possible are as follows: Background peak Text peak 1: fixed fixed 2: varied fixed 3: fixed varied 4: varied varied Remarks

The values in "( )" are the adjustment codes of the Custom Mode. Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment using the following procedure.

<Procedure> Procedure is same as that of

P. 3-21 "3.3.1 Density adjustment".

3.3.5

Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak)

The levels of the background peak for the range correction can be set at the following codes. < Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode Item to be adjusted Text/Photo 532 (919) Photo 533 (921) Text 534 (920) Background peak for range correction When the value increases, the background (low density area) of the image is not output. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: Text/Photo: 40, Photo: 16, Text: 64) Remarks

The values in "( )" are the adjustment codes of the Custom Mode. Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment using the following procedure.

<Procedure> Procedure is same as that of

P. 3-21 "3.3.1 Density adjustment".

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 23

3.3.6

Adjustment of smudged/faint text


< Adjustment Mode (05) >

The smudged/faint text can be set at the following codes.

< e-STUDIO 350/450 >


Original mode Item to be adjusted Text/Photo 653 (928) Adjustment of smudged/faint spotted text When the value increases, the faint text is improved. When the value decreases, the smudged text is improved. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 192) Note: Note: Remember the image specifications and life span of the replacing parts may not meet the standard when the setting value is changed from the default value. Remarks

< e-STUDIO 352/353/452/453 >


Original mode Item to be adjusted Text/Photo 648 (928) Adjustment of smudged/faint spotted text When the value increases, the faint text is improved. When the value decreases, the smudged text is improved. Acceptable values: 0 to 4 (Default: 2) Note: Note: Remember the image specifications and life span of the replacing parts may not meet the standard when the setting value is changed from the default value. Remarks

The values in "( )" are the adjustment codes of the Custom Mode. Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment using the following procedure.

<Procedure> Procedure is same as that of

P. 3-21 "3.3.1 Density adjustment".

3.3.7

Gamma balance adjustment < e-STUDIO 352/353/452/453 >

The gamma balance is adjusted by adjusting the density at the Black Mode. The adjustment is performed by selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high density. < Adjustment Mode (05) >
Language and screen Smooth (PS) 596-0 596-1 596-2 Detail (PS) 597-0 597-1 597-2 Smooth (PCL) 598-0 598-1 598-2 Detail (PCL) 599-0 599-1 599-2 Item to be adjusted Remarks

Low density Medium density High density

The larger the value is, the density of the item to be adjusted becomes darker. Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: 128)

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 24 07/11

3.4
3.4.1

Image Quality Adjustment (Printing Function)


Adjustment of smudged/faint text
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Language PS 654 PCL 655 Remarks When the value increases, the smudged text is improved. When the value decreases, the faint text is improved. Acceptable values: 0 to 9 (Default: 5)

The smudged/faint text can be set at the following codes.

<Procedure> (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. Key in a code and press the [START] button. Key in an adjustment value. (To correct the keyed-in value, press the [CLEAR] button.) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. The equipment goes back to the ready state. Let the equipment restarted and perform printing job. If the desired text density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (5).

3.4.2

Adjustment of image density

The image density level is adjustable both at standard and toner saving modes. < Adjustment Mode (05) >
Toner mode Standard 672-0 to 4 Toner saving 676-0 to 4 Item to be adjusted Adjustment of image density Remarks When the value is decreased, text becomes lighter. Acceptable values: 0 to 10 Notes: 1. Set not to reverse the large and small number of the setting value corresponding to the sub code. Ex.) When the image density level for 672-0, 6721, 672-2, 672-3, and 672-4 is assumed to be "A","B", "C", "D", and "E" respectively, they should have the following correlation: A B C D E 2. Remember that the image specifications and life span of the replacing parts may not meet the standard when the setting value is changed from the default value.

<Procedure> (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. Key in a code and press the [START] button. Key in the sub code (0, 1, 2, 3 or 4), and press the [START] button. Key in an adjustment value. (To correct the keyed-in value, press the [CLEAR] button.) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes back to the ready state. For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (5). Let the equipment restarted and perform printing job. If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (7).
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 25 06/09

3.5
3.5.1

Image Quality Adjustment (Scanning Function)


Density adjustment
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode Item to be adjusted Remarks The larger the value is, the darker the image becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255

Adjusts the center density and the variation of density adjustment button.

Text/Photo 845

Photo 847

Text 846 Manual density mode center value

850

852

851

Manual density The larger the value is, the lighter the light side mode light step value becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 Manual density mode dark step value Automatic density mode The larger the value is, the darker the dark side becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 The larger the value is, the darker the image becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255

855

857

856

860

862

861

<Procedure> (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. Key in a code and press the [START] button. Key in an adjustment value. (To correct the keyed-in value, press the [CLEAR] button.) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. The equipment goes back to the ready state. Let the equipment restarted and perform scanning job. If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (5).

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 26

3.5.2

Sharpness adjustment

If you want to make scan images look softer or sharper, perform the following adjustment. < Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode Item to be adjusted Text/Photo 865-0 865-1 865-2 Photo 867-0 867-1 867-2 Text 866-0 866-1 866-2 Reproduction ratio: 25% to 40% Reproduction ratio: 41% to 80% Reproduction ratio: 81% to 400% Key in the following values depending on the original mode. Ones place: 1: Text/Photo 5: Photo 2: Text Tens place: 0: Use Default value 1 to 9: Change intensity The larger the value is, the sharper the image becomes.) Example of value entry in case the mode is Text/Photo. 21 Fixed value for Text/Photo mode Key in a value 0 to 9 Note: Note: When the value 0 is keyed in at the tens digit, the value is not displayed on LCD screen. Remarks

<Procedure> (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. Key in a code and press the [START] button. Key in the sub code (0,1 or 2), and press the [START] button. Key in an adjustment value. (To correct the keyed-in value, press the [CLEAR] button.) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes back to the ready state. For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (5). Let the equipment restarted and perform scanning job. If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (7).

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 27

3.5.3

Setting range correction

The values of the background peak / text peak in the range correction can be switched to varied or fixed in the following codes. If they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak affect the reproduction of the background density and the values of the text peak affect that of the text density. < Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode Item to be adjusted Text/Photo 825 Photo 827 Text 826 Range correction for original manually set on the original glass The following are the default values set for each original mode. Text/Photo: 12, Photo: 12, Text: 12 Each digit stands for: Ones place: Automatic density mode Tens place: Manual density mode The setting conditions possible are as follows: Background peak Text peak 1: fixed fixed 2: varied fixed 3: fixed varied 4: varied varied Remarks

830

832

831

Range correction for original set on the RADF

<Procedure> Procedure is same as that of

P. 3-26 "3.5.1 Density adjustment".

3.5.4

Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak)

The levels of the background peak for the range correction can be set at the following codes. < Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode Item to be adjusted Text/Photo 835 Photo 837 Text 836 Background peak for range correction When the value increases, the background (low density area) of the image is not output. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: text/photo: 48, photo: 40, text: 48) Remarks

<Procedure> Procedure is same as that of

P. 3-26 "3.5.1 Density adjustment".

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 28

3.6

Adjustment of High-Voltage Transformer

When replacing the high-voltage transformer, checking each output adjustment of main charger, developer bias, transfer charger and separation charger is needed.

3.6.1

Adjustment

[ 1 ] Preparation
Developer Bias Developer unit Cleaner unit Disconnect the connector. Take off the drum and install the cleaner unit in the equipment. Main Charger Transfer Charger Separation Charger

Take off from the equipment. (Not used)

3
Install the unit together with the current measuring jig in the equipment. Note: Note: Connect the green cable of the current measuring jig to ground on the equipment frame. Refer to (a) Installation of current measuring jig. Connect the jig detection connector with the developer unit connector of the equipment. Connect to the main charger case (between the case and terminal). Connect with the red cable of the current measuring jig.

Developer unit connector of the equipment Digital Tester (+) terminal

Not connected Connect in the hole at the front side of the developer unit. Connect to the machine frame (to ground).

() terminal

Connect with the white cable of the current measuring jig (to ground). DC AC 2V

Function switch Full-scale Remarks 1,000 V

Use a digital tester with an input resistance of 10 M. (RMS value) or higher.

How to turn ON the power Attach the door switch jig and press the front cover opening/closing switch while the front cover is opened. Remarks Refer to (b) Connection for developer bias adjustment. Refer to (c) Connection for main charger adjustment. Refer to (d) Connection for transfer/separation charger adjustment.

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 29

[ 1-1 ]

Installation of the current measuring jig

Notes: Clean the toner recovery auger when the toner is sticking to it. Then attach the jig. Do not damage the tip of the separation fingers.

(1)

Open the front cover.


Front cover

Fig. 3-13

(2)

Remove the toner bag.

Toner bag
Fig. 3-14

(3) (4)

Pull up the hinge pin and extract it. Take off the front cover.

Front cover

Hinge pin
Fig. 3-15

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 30

(5) (6)

Release the latches and take off the toner bag full detection sensor-2. Loosen 2 screws and take off the cleaner unit from the equipment.
Cleaner unit

Screw

Toner bag full detection sensor-2

3
Fig. 3-16

(7)

Release the latch and take off the main charger unit.

Main charger unit

Fig. 3-17

(8)

Release the latch and take off the cleaner stay.

Clear stay

Fig. 3-18

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 31

(9)

Rotate the lever of the drum shaft and release the lock. Then pull out the drum shaft.

Drum shaft lever Drum shaft

Fig. 3-19

(10) Take off the drum.

Drum

Fig. 3-20

(11) Press down the drum cleaning blade and fix the blade with the blade releasing jig so that it will not rebound. Note: Do not touch the edge of the drum cleaning blade.
Blade releasing jig Cleaning blade

Fig. 3-21

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 32

(12) Put through the current measuring jig into the drum shaft and fix it to the cleaner unit. (13) Rotate the lever of the drum shaft to fix the drum shaft.

Current measuring jig

Drum shaft lever

Drum shaft

3
Fig. 3-22

(14) Remove the blade releasing jig.

Blade releasing jig

Fig. 3-23

(15) Install the cleaner stay.


Cleaner stay

Fig. 3-24

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 33

(16) Install the main charger unit.


Main charger unit

Fig. 3-25

(17) Install the cleaner unit and fix it with 2 screws. (18) Install the toner bag full detection sensor-2.
Cleaner unit

Screw

Toner bag full detection sensor-2

Fig. 3-26

(19) Fix the green cable of the current measuring jig to the frame of the equipment, and connect the jig detection connector to the connector of the developer unit in the equipment.

Connector of developer unit Screw

Jig detection connector

Green cable

Fig. 3-27

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 34 07/07

(20) Fix the front door switch to be closed with the door switch jig.

Door switch jig

3
Fig. 3-28

(21) After the adjustment, remove the jigs in a reverse procedure to return it to the original state.

[ 1-2 ] (1)

Connection Connection for developer bias adjustment


Front cover opening/closing switch (+) terminal: Connect in the hole at the front side of the developer unit

() terminal: Connected to the machine frame

Fig. 3-29

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 35

(2)

Connection for main charger adjustment


Front cover opening/closing switch Ground to the machine frame (green cable)

() terminal: Connect the white cable of the current measuring jig

(+) terminal: Connect the main charger case


Fig. 3-30

(3)

Connection for transfer/separation charger adjustment


Front cover opening/closing switch

Ground to the machine (green cable)

(+) terminal: Connect the red cable of the current measuring jig

() terminal: Connect the white cable of the current measuring jig

Fig. 3-31

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 36 07/07

[ 2 ] Operation
Note: When adjusting output of high-voltage transformer, make sure to use a current measuring jig (except developer bias). Connect the digital testers as described in (1) Preparation, and follow the procedure on the next page to adjust the output from the main charger, developer bias charger, transfer charger and separation charger.
<Keys to press>

<Display>

100% TEST MODE


[0][5] [POWER] 1 [Digital keys] : Enter the code. [START]

A3
3

100% TEST MODE YYY

XXX

A3

Code No.

Current set value [UP] or [DOWN]: Adjust the value YYY to satisfy the following table. Main Developer Transfer charger charger bias charger Center value Code 210 205 221 Adjustment value -7905V -5215V 41345mV Separation Center value 231 Code Adjustment value RMS value 1267115mV Mean value 1235112mV [SET] : Adjusted value YYY is stored in memory. or [INTERRUPT] 100%

A3

TEST MODE
Return to 1 to enter the other adjustment code. [POWER] : OFF/ON

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 37

3.6.2

Precautions

[A] Developer bias Note for adjustment Adjust the developer bias if fogging occurs over the entire image even though the main charger grid voltage and toner density are appropriate. However, the following may occur if the developer bias is lowered too much: Image contrast becomes low. Image is patchy or blurred. The carrier in the developer material adheres to the photoconductive drum, causing scratches around the cleaner. [B] Transfer Items to check before adjustment Blotched image or poor transfer can be also caused by matters other than defective adjustment of transfer output. Check the following items before adjusting the transfer charger. If there is no problem, adjust the output of the transfer charger. Is the charger wire incorrectly installed or dirty? Is the transfer guide deformed? Is the developer unit properly installed? Is the developer magnetic brush in contact with the drum? Is the developer sleeve rotating during printing? Is the toner density low? Is the copy paper fed straight? Is the copy paper abnormally moist? Is the rotation of the registration roller normal? Is the output of the transfer guide bias normal? Is the separation output different from the set value? Is the developer bias value an appropriate one? Are the transfer/separation charger case and the drum shaft grounded? Is the high-voltage transformer grounded? Is the transfer insulation film (transparent film attached to the transfer guide) damaged or deformed? Note for adjustment When blotched image appear: If blotched image appear in halftone areas, lower the transfer output value. Remember that transfer performance becomes low if the transfer output value is lowered too much. When transfer is poor: Increase the transfer output value under the following conditions. Remember that blotched image appear if the transfer output value is increased too much. Transfer is poor even though the charger wire is not dirty. Thick paper has been frequently used. Note: The Thick Paper Mode is recommendable when thick paper is used. Increase the transfer output value only to prevent a poor transfer without selecting the Thick Paper Mode when thick paper is frequently used.

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 38

[C] Separation Items to check before adjustment Poor paper separation from the drum can be also caused by matters other than defective adjustment of the separation output. Check the following items before making an adjustment. If there is no problem, adjust the output of the separation charger. Is the charger wire incorrectly installed or dirty? Is the developer unit installed properly? Is the developer magnetic brush in contact with the drum? Is the developer sleeve rotating during printing? Is the toner density low? Is the copy paper fed straight? Is the copy paper abnormally moist? Is the rotation of the registration roller normal? Is the output of the main charger normal? Is the transfer output different from the set value? Is the transfer/separation charger case grounded? Is the high-voltage transformer grounded? Is the sub-separation fan rotating? Is the separation finger in contact with the drum surface? Note for adjustment When poor paper separation occurs: Increase the separation output value under the following conditions. Remember that if the separation output value is increased too much, blotched image occurs and separation performance becomes low. Poor separation occurs even though the charger wire is not dirty. Thin paper has been frequently used. When poor transfer occurs: Decrease the separation output value when poor transfer occurs. Remember that the separation performance becomes low if the separation output value is decreased too much.

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 39

3.7
3.7.1

Adjustment of the Scanner Section


Carriages

[A] Installing carriage wires When replacing the carriage wires, refer illustrations below: [Front side]
Carriage wire Bracket for carriage-1 Hook Carriage-2 Idler pulley

Tension spring Wire pulley

Fig. 3-32

[Rear side]
Carriage-2 Carriage wire Idler pulley Bracket for carriage-1 Hook

Wire pulley Tension spring

Fig. 3-33

Adjustment of the carriage wire tension is not necessary since a certain tension is applied to the carriage wires by the tension springs. Note: Make sure the tension applied to the wire is normal.

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 40

[B] Adjusting carriages-1 and -2 positions (1) (2) Move the carriage-2 toward the exit side. Loosen the screws fixing the front side pulley bracket, make the sections A and B of the carriage2 touch with the inside of the exit side frame and screw them up.
Carriage-2 Pulley bracket

[Rear]

[Front]

Exit side frame

B
Fig. 3-34

Enlarged view of carriage

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 41

(3)

Put the carriage-1 on the rail, make the sections C and D of it touch with the inside of the exit side frame and screw up the front/rear sides of the bracket to fix it. Note: Make sure that the sections A and B of the carriage-2 touch with the exit side frame.
Carriage-1

[Rear]

[Front]

Exit side frame

Bracket

Bracket

D
Fig. 3-35

Enlarged view of carriage

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 42

[A] Assembling carriage wires Winding the wire around the wire pulley: (1) Pull the 3 ball terminal located at the center of the wire into a hole on the wire pulley. One end of the wire with a hook attached comes to the outside. (2) Wind the wires around the wire pulleys of the front and rear sides. The number of turns to be wound are as follows: 2 turns toward the opposite side of the boss 4 turns toward the boss side Note: Pay attention to the following when the wires are wound around the pulleys: - Do not twist the wire. - Wind the wires tightly so that they are in complete contact with the surface of the pulleys. - Each turn should be pushed against the previously wound turn so that there is no space between them.
4 turns 2 turns 4 turns 2 turns

Ball terminal Ball terminal

No space between turns Hook Hook

Color: Silver

Color: Black

[Rear]
Fig. 3-36

[Front]

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 43

(3) After winding the wires around the pulleys, attach the wire holder jigs not to loosen the wires. Notes: 1. When the wire holder jig is attached, make sure that the wire is not shifted or loosened. 2. The wire should come out of the slot of the wire holder jig and be passed under the arm of it.

Fig. 3-37

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 44

3.7.2

Lens unit

[A] Replacing the lens unit The lens unit must not be readjusted and some part of its components must not be replaced in the field since the unit is precisely adjusted. If any of the components is defective, replace the whole unit. When replacing the unit, do not loosen or remove the 10 screws indicated with the arrows.

Fig. 3-38

Handle the unit with care. Do not hold the lens and adjusted part (hold the unit as shown below).

Fig. 3-39

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 45

[B] Adjustment of the magnification ratio of the lens Notes: 1. Perform this adjustment only when the lens unit is taken off or replaced. 2. Make sure that the primary scanning reproduction ratio (printer section) is correct before this adjustment. (1) Place a ruler on the original glass (in the primary scanning direction) and make a copy on A4/LTsized paper at 100% reproduction ratio. Compare the copied ruler with the actual ruler.

(2)

Feeding Direction

Copied ruler

Actual ruler

Fig. 3-40

(3)

If each mark on the rulers differs, perform the adjustment with the following procedures.

<Procedure> (1) (2) Take off the original glass and lens cover. Loosen 2 screws fixing the lens unit.

Screw

Lens unit

Fig. 3-41

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 46

(3)

Slide the lens unit to the right or left direction using the marks on the lens base as a guide. (Slide right when the copied ruler is magnified and slide left when the copied ruler is demagnified.) The following table shows how the reproduction ratio difference between the copied ruler and actual ruler corresponds to the movement amount of the lens unit.
Reproduction-ratio error 0.1% 0.2% 0.3% 0.4% 0.5% 0.6% 0.7% 0.8% 0.9% 1.0% Movement amount of unit 0.5 mm 0.9 mm 1.4 mm 1.8 mm 2.3 mm 2.7 mm 3.2 mm 3.6 mm 4.1 mm 4.5 mm

Lens unit

Fig. 3-42

Note: Fine adjustment can be made in the Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (printer) on the copied ruler and actual ruler match. (4) (5) (6) Tighten 2 screws fixing the lens unit. Attach the lens cover and original glass. Make a copy to confirm the reproduction ratio. Repeat the procedure 1 to 5 until the marks on the copied ruler and actual ruler match.

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 47

3.8
3.8.1

Adjustment of the Paper Feeding System


Sheet sideways deviation caused by paper feeding

<Procedure>

The center of the printed image shifts to the front side. Move the guide to the front side (Arrow (A) direction in the lower figure).
[Rear]

The center of the printed image shifts to the rear side. Move the guide to the rear side (Arrow (B) direction in the lower figure).
[Rear]

Feeding direction Center

Feeding direction Center

[Front]
Fig. 3-43

[Front]
Fig. 3-44

Bypass feeding

Drawer feeding

(A)

(B)

(B) (A)

Fig. 3-45

Fig. 3-46

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 48 05/07

3.9
3.9.1

Adjustment of Developer Unit


Doctor-to-sleeve gap

Adjustment tool to use: Doctor-sleeve jig (1) (2) Take out the developer unit from the equipment. Take off the developer material cover and discharge the developer material.

Developer material cover

Fig. 3-47

(3)

Remove 2 screws and take off the developer sleeve cover.

Screw Developer sleeve cover Screw

Fig. 3-48

(4)

Loosen 4 screws fixing the doctor blade.


Doctor blade Developer sleeve Screw

Fig. 3-49

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 49

(5)

Lift up the toner scattering prevention sheet and insert the gauge 0.45 of the doctorsleeve jig into the gap between the developer sleeve and doctor blade. Tighten the screws while pressing the doctor blade to the doctor-sleeve jig lightly. Note: Make sure the mark on the developer sleeve faces the blade when adjusting the gap.

Doctor-sleeve jig

Developer sleeve

Doctor blade

Fig. 3-50

(6)

Insert the gauge 0.40 of the doctor-sleeve jig into the gap between the developer sleeve and doctor blade. Confirm that the jig moves smoothly to the front and rear side, and the gauge 0.50 cannot be inserted into the gap.

Doctor-sleeve jig

Developer sleeve Doctor blade

Fig. 3-51

(7)

Confirm that the both ends of the toner scattering prevention sheet are inserted between Doctor blade support holder the developer sleeve and doctor blade support holder, and the side seals are attached Side seal on the toner scattering prevention sheet.

Toner scattering prevention sheet

Fig. 3-52

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 50

(8)

Attach the developer sleeve cover and tighten 2 screws. Notes: 1. Tighten the screws from the one on the front side. 2. Make sure that the developer sleeve cover is correctly attached otherwise it will be deformed. 3. Make sure that the toner scattering prevention sheet is not caught up in the developer sleeve cover.

Screw

Developer sleeve cover

Screw

3
Fig. 3-53

(9)

Attach the developer material cover.


Developer material cover

Fig. 3-54

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 51

3.10 Adjustment of the RADF (MR-3015)


3.10.1 Adjustment of RADF position

It is mainly performed at the installation. It is also required when the RADF is dislocated for some reason such as moving the equipment. Remove the platen sheet during adjustment. (1) Open the RADF and then attach 2 positioning pins to the equipment. (The positioning pins have been attached at the rear of the right-hand hinge of the RADF.)

Positioning pin

Fig. 3-55

(2)

Close the RADF to check that the positioning pins fit smoothly into the holes on the RADF. If they do not, adjust them according to the following procedure.

Fig. 3-56

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 52

(3)

Loosen the stepped screw 1 turn and 2 screws on the adjustment plate a half turn (status of temporary fixing).
Half turn

1 turn

3
Fig. 3-57

(4)

Remove the stepped screw at the rear of right-hand hinge.

Fig. 3-58

(5)

Open the RADF, and then loosen 2 hand screws 1 turn (status of tentative fixing).

Screw

Fig. 3-59

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 53

(6)

Remove the positioning pin at the front side. Close the RADF to fit the positioning pin into the hole at the rear side of the RADF. While peering inside from the front side, fit the positions of the pin and hole by moving the RADF right and left.

Fig. 3-60

(7)

Tighten the positioning pin at the front side. Close the RADF to fit the positioning pin into the hole at the front side of the RADF. (For the front side, adjust the RADF position all around.)

Fig. 3-61

(8)

While peering inside from the left side, close the RADF. Check the positions of the holes of the RADF and pins and then fit their positions by moving the RADF back and forth. (For the front side, also adjust the RADF position right and left.) Make sure not to dislocate the positions of the pin and hole at the rear side.

Fig. 3-62

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 54

(9)

Open the RADF to tighten 2 hand screws. Close the RADF and then check again that the positioning pins fit smoothly into the holes on the RADF.

3
Fig. 3-63

(10) Fit the hinge hole into the hole of the equipment at the rear right of the RADF to tighten the stepped screw. If they do not fit, adjust the position of the hole by turning the screw of the adjustment plate.

Fig. 3-64

(11) Tighten the stepped screw and 2 screws on the adjustment plate. Open and close the RADF to check again that the positioning pins fit smoothly into the holes on the RADF. Remove the positioning pins after checking it. (Replace the positioning pins at the rear of the right-hand hinge of the RADF.)

Screw

Stepped Screw

Fig. 3-65

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 55

(12) Place the platen sheet on the original glass with the semi round cutout toward you. Align the platen sheet against the left and rear side of the original glass. Close the RADF slowly. Open the RADF to check that the platen sheet is correctly attached.

Fig. 3-66

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 56

3.10.2

Adjustment of RADF height

It is mainly performed at the installation. It is also required when the RADF is dislocated for some reason such as moving the equipment. Perform the following adjustment by using the screw of the left and right hinge. Note: Perform this adjustment after 3.10.1 Adjustment of RADF position. Turn the exposure lamp ON during the gap check. (Test Mode: 03-267) (1) Adjustment standard Adjust the height so that the platen guide front holder touches the ADF original glass. Adjust the height so that the gap between the platen guide rear holder and the ADF original glass becomes 0.5 mm 0.3.

3
Platen guide rear holder
0.5mm0.3

Platen guide front holder

ADF original glass

0mm

Fig. 3-67

(2)

Adjust the height by turning the height adjusting screw on the left hinge. Clockwise: The height of the hinge becomes high. Counterclockwise: The height of the hinge becomes low.

Fig. 3-68

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 57

(3)

Adjust the height by turning the height adjusting screw on the right hinge. Clockwise: The height of the hinge becomes high. Counterclockwise: The height of the hinge becomes low.

Fig. 3-69

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 58

3.10.3

Adjustment of skew

When an image skew occurs, adjust it according to the following steps, Step 1 Step 2 Step 3. Note: Perform this adjustment after confirming that the equipment has been adjusted properly. Prior to this adjustment, of RADF position and height are needed to be adjusted. (1) Step 1 Case A: ................Adjust the aligning adjustment position to the rear side - of the original (Chap. 3.10.5). Case B: ................Adjust the aligning adjustment position to the rear side + of the original (Chap. 3.10.5).

A Paper Original

B
White arrow: feeding direction

Fig. 3-70

(2)

Step 2 Case C: ................Loosen the fixing screw and hand screw of the right side hinge and then turn the adjustment screw counterclockwise. Case D: ................Loosen the fixing screw and hand screw of the right side hinge and then turn the adjustment screw clockwise. Note: When adjusting, refer to the hinge position (scribed line) and be sure not to move it from the hinge position 0.5 mm or further. Otherwise, image failures such as a jitter may occur.

Fixing screw

C Paper Original

D
Adjustment screw Hand screw

RADF

Front side
Fig. 3-71 Fig. 3-72

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 59 04/05

(3)

Step 3 Case E: ................Adjust the reverse aligning adjustment position to the rear side - of the original (Chap. 3.10.6). Case F: ................Adjust the reverse aligning adjustment position to the rear side + of the original (Chap. 3.10.6).

E Paper Original

Fig. 3-73

3.10.4

Automatic adjustment of sensors and initialization of EEPROM

When any of the PC board, original length sensor, read sensor, reverse sensor is replaced with a new one, make sure to perform the initialization of EEPROM and adjustment of sensors in the Adjustment Mode (05). Perform them after removing all originals on the sensor and closing the RADF. Also, make sure to adjust the tray volume when the initialization of EEPROM and automatic sensor adjustment have been performed. Refer to P. 2-46 "2.2.5 Adjustment mode (05) (e-STUDIO350/450)" for the details. Errors such as paper jamming may occur if the EEPROM is not initialized and the sensors are not adjusted after the above mentioned parts were replaced.

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 60

3.10.5

Adjustment of aligning

Adjust the aligning according to Step 1 of 3.10.3.

Rear side "+" of the original +

- Rear side "-" of the original

Skew of paper
Fig. 3-74

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 61

3.10.6

Adjustment of aligning at reversing

Adjust the aligning according to Step 3 of 3.10.3.

- paper of ew Sk

Fig. 3-75

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 62

3.10.7

Adjustment of reverse solenoid

When operating the reverse solenoid, adjust it if the position of the flapper lever is out of the followingdimension. Gap between A of the front frame and the flapper lever C: 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm <Procedure> (1) Remove the screw on the left and take off the plate spring.

Plate spring

Fig. 3-76

(2)

Align B of the front frame with the edge of the reverse solenoid, and temporarily fix the reverse solenoid with the screw on the right.

Fig. 3-77

(3)

While the plunger of the reverse solenoid is put in the position to be turned ON (by pressing it in the direction of an arrow), loosen the screw on the right to adjust the reverse solenoid so that the gap (C) between A of the front frame and the flapper lever is 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm.

Fig. 3-78

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 63

(4)

Fix the plate spring temporarily with the screw on the left. Then press the plate spring slightly in the direction of an arrow and tighten the screw in the position where the gap (D) between the plunger and the flapper lever is eliminated.

Plunger

Flapper lever

Fig. 3-79

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 64

3.10.8

Adjustment of RADF opening/closing switch

Adjust the bracket position so that the switch is turned ON when the height A becomes 40-45 mm (within the empty weight falling limit).

Glass surface

Center

Fig. 3-80

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 65

3.10.9

Adjustment of RADF opening/closing sensor

Adjust the bracket position so that the sensor is turned ON when the height A becomes 30-35 mm (within the empty weight falling limit).

Glass surface

Center

Fig. 3-81

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 66

3.10.10 Adjustment of tray volume


Adjust in the adjustment mode (05). <Procedure> (1) (2) (3) (4) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. Narrow the original guide to the limit. Input the code "367". Press the [START] button.

Fig. 3-82

(5) (6) (7) (8)

Extend the original guide to the limit. Input the code "368". Press the [START] button. Turn the power OFF.

Fig. 3-83

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 67

3.11 Adjustment of the RADF (MR-3018)


3.11.1 Adjustment of RADF Position

Perform this adjustment when the RADF is not installed in the correct position. Note: Check if the image adjustment for the equipment is performed properly before this adjustment of the RADF. [A] Checking (1) Open the RADF and install 2 positioning pins (the positioning pins are installed to the back side of the hinge which is on the left side of the RADF).

Fig. 3-84

(2)

Remove the platen sheet.

Fig. 3-85

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 68 05/11

(3)

Close the RADF and check if the positioning pins fit the holes on the RADF.

3
Fig. 3-86

[B] Adjustment If the pins cannot be fitted into the holes, perform the adjustment according to the following procedure. (1) Remove the right-hand hinge screw at the rear side.

Fig. 3-87

(2)

Loosen the left-hand hinge screw at the rear side.

Fig. 3-88

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 69 05/11

(3)

Loosen the hinge screws at the front side.

Fig. 3-89

(4)

Position the pins with the holes on the RADF by moving it so that the pins fit into the holes when the RADF is closed.

Fig. 3-90

(5)

Tighten the left-hand hinge screw at the rear side.

Fig. 3-91

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 70 05/11

(6)

Loosen the hole position adjustment screws on the right hand side.

3
Fig. 3-92

(7)

Match the screw hole positions.

Fig. 3-93

(8)

Install the right-hand hinge screw at the rear side.

Fig. 3-94

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 71 05/11

(9)

Loosen the hinge screws at the front side.

Fig. 3-95

(10) Place the platen sheet on the original glass and align it to the top left corner. Close the RADF gently and open it to check if the platen sheet is attached properly.

Fig. 3-96

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 72 05/11

3.11.2

Adjustment of RADF Height

Note: Check if the image adjustment for the equipment is performed properly before this adjustment of the RADF. [A] Checking (1) (2) Close the RADF. Light the exposure lamp. Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [3] simultaneously. Key in [267] and then press the [START] button. The exposure lamp is turned ON for a given length of time. Visually check the gap between platen guide holder "A" and upper surface of the original glass "B" from the left hand side of the equipment. If the value is not within the tolerance, perform the adjustment according to the following procedure. [Tolerance of the gap] Rear side: 0 - 0.5 mm Front side: 0 mm

(3)

0.2-0.5 mm

A B

A B

Fig. 3-97

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

0 mm
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 73 05/11

[B] Adjustment (1) (2) Close the RADF. Adjust it by turning the adjustment screws on the hinges. Adjust the height on the rear side by means of the screw on the hinge on the feed side of the RADF. Turn it clockwise ................. Heightened Turn it counterclockwise ...... Lowered

Fig. 3-98

Adjust the gap on the rear side by means of the screw on the hinge on the feed side of the RADF. Turn it clockwis .................... Lowered Turn it counterclockwise ...... Heightened

Fig. 3-99

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 74 05/11

3.11.3

Adjustment of Skew

Note: Check if the image adjustment for the equipment is performed properly before this adjustment of the RADF. Also, the RADF position and height shall be adjusted properly. [A] Checking Check the image using the chart (original) with vertical and horizontal lines in the following procedure.

Fig. 3-100 Chart (Original)

Simplex copying: (1) (2) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF, select [1 Sided -> 1 Sided] and press the [START] button. Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the inclination of the copy image.

Duplex copying: (1) (2) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF, select [2 Sided -> 2 Sided] and press the [START] button. Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the inclination of the copy image.

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 75 05/11

[B] Adjustment Simplex copying: (1) Shift the aligning plate with the scale as the guide shown in the figure below to adjust the skew.

Fig. 3-101

(2)

If the image skew is "C" as shown in the figure below, shift the aligning plate in the direction of "+", and if "D", shift it to "-".

Fig. 3-102

Fig. 3-103

Shift the aligning plate in the direction of "+".

Shift the aligning plate in the direction of "-".

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 76 05/11

Duplex copying: (1) Shift the aligning plate with the scale as the guide shown in the figure below to adjust the skew.

Fig. 3-104

(2)

If the image skew is "C" as shown in the figure below, shift the aligning plate in the direction of "", and if "D", shift it to "+".

Fig. 3-105

Fig. 3-106

Shift the aligning plate in the direction of "-".

Shift the aligning plate in the direction of "+".

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 77 05/11

3.11.4

Adjustment of the Leading Edge Position

Note: Check if the image adjustment for the equipment is performed properly before this adjustment of the RADF. Also, the RADF position and height shall be adjusted properly. [A] Checking Check the image using the chart (original) with vertical and horizontal lines in the following procedure. Simplex copying: (1) (2) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF, select [1 Sided -> 1 Sided] and press the [START] button. Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the leading edge E of the chart and F of the copy.

Duplex copying: (1) (2) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF, select [2 Sided -> 2 Sided] and press the [START] button. Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the leading edge E of the chart and F of the copy.

Fig. 3-107 Chart (Original)

Fig. 3-108 Copy

[B] Adjustment Simplex copying: (1) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, key in [365] and then press the [START] button. (2) Enter the value. If the leading edge (F) margin of the copy image is larger than the (E) margin of the chart, enter a value smaller than the current one. Note: Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.1 mm. If the leading edge (F) margin of the copy image is smaller than the (E) margin of the chart, enter a value larger than the current one.

Note: Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.1 mm. (3) Press the [ENTER] button.

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 78 05/11

Duplex copying: (1) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, key in [366] and then press the [START] button. (2) Enter the value. If the leading edge (F) margin of the copy image is larger than the (E) margin of the chart, enter a value smaller than the current one. Note: Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.1 mm. If the leading edge (F) margin of the copy image is smaller than the (E) margin of the chart, enter a value larger than the current one.

Note: Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.1 mm. (3) Press the [ENTER] button.

3.11.5

Adjustment of Horizontal Position

Note: Check if the image adjustment for the equipment is performed properly before this adjustment of the RADF. Also, the RADF position and height shall be adjusted properly. [A] Checking Check the image using the chart (original) with a center line in the following procedure. (1) (2) (3) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF. Press the [START] button. Fold the copy in half and check if the center line is misaligned.

[B] Adjustment (1) (2) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously. Key in [358] and then press the [START] button. If the center line of the copy image is shifted to the front side of the equipment, enter a value larger than the current one. Note: Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.042 mm.

Fig. 3-109

If the center line of the copy image is shifted to the rear side of the equipment, enter a value smaller than the current one.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 79 05/11

Note: Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.042 mm.

Fig. 3-110

(3)

Press the [ENTER] button.

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 80 05/11

3.11.6

Adjustment of Copy Ratio

Note: Check if the image adjustment for the equipment is performed properly before this adjustment of the RADF. Also, the RADF position and height shall be adjusted properly. [A] Checking Check the image using the chart (original) with vertical and horizontal lines in the following procedure. (1) (2) (3) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF. Press the [START] button. Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the image dimension I.

[B] Adjustment (1) (2) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously. Key in [357] and then press the [START] button. If the copy image dimension I is larger than the chart dimension, enter a value smaller than the current one. If the copy image dimension I is smaller than the chart dimension, enter a value larger than the current one.

I
Fig. 3-111

(3)

Press the [ENTER] button.

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 81 05/11

3.11.7

Adjustment of RADF Opening/Closing Sensor

Adjust the bracket position so that the sensor is turned ON when the height A becomes 100 mm or less (within the empty weight falling limit).

Fig. 3-112

Fig. 3-113

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 82 05/11

3.12 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1022)


Note: Before performing each adjustment, make sure that all covers (incl. those of the finisher and host machine) are closed. Otherwise, the power is not supplied to the finisher and the adjustment may not be performed properly.

3.12.1
(1) (2)

Adjusting the jogging plate width

Remove the right inner cover and the rear cover. Adjust the front jogging plate to the home position. Set SW1 on the finisher controller PC board as shown in Fig. 3-114. Press SW2 twice on the finisher controller PC board. - The front jogging plate moves to the home position.
ON

Fig. 3-114

(3)

Adjust the rear jogging plate to the home position. Set SW1 on the finisher controller PC board as shown in Fig. 3-115. Press SW2 twice on the finisher controller PC board. - The rear jogging plate moves to the home position.
ON

Fig. 3-115

Rear jogging plate home position

Fig. 3-116

(4) (5)

Measure the jogging width (standard at 317 mm). Remove the processing tray.

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 83 06/09

(6)

Loosen the screw on the home position sensor plate at the front.
Screw Home position sensor plate

Fig. 3-117

(7)

Adjust the position of the front jogging plate home position sensor (S6) with reference to the index. EX. 1 If the width is 319 mm in step (4), the difference from the standard is +2 mm, it requires relocation of the sensor [3] in the direction of arrow A by 2 mm. EX. 2If the width is 316 mm in step (4), the difference from the standard is -1 mm; it requires relocation of the sensor [3] in the direction of arrow B by 1 mm.
Sensor

Fig. 3-118

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 84

3.12.2
(1)

Adjusting the angle of the jogging plate

Without removing the processing tray unit, loosen the 2 mounting screws of the rear jogging plate.
Screw Rear jogging plate

Fig. 3-119

(2)

Place several sheets of A4/LT paper on the processing tray, and adjust the rear jogging plate. (At this time, adjust the gap between the paper and the front end of the rear jogging plate so that it is 0 mm to 0.5 mm.)
0 mm to 0.5 mm Paper Screw Butted

Rear jogging plate

(3)

With reference to the rear jogging plate adjusted in step (2), adjust the front jogging plate in the same manner.

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 85

3.12.3

Adjusting the overlap of the sensor flag

If the overlap between the sensor and the flag is wrong for some reason, perform the following adjustment. (1) (2) Remove the processing tray unit. Loosen the mounting screw of the front/rear jogging plate adjusting plate; then, move the adjusting plate to the left and the right.
Jogging plate adjusting plate Screw

Screw Adjusting plate Jogging plate Adjusting plate adjusting plate


Fig. 3-120

(3)

Tighten the screw so that the overlap between the flag of the front/rear jogging rack plate and the sensor is 1.5 mm to 2.0 mm.
Sensor Sensor flag

1.5 mm to 2.0 mm
Fig. 3-121

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 86

3.12.4
(1) (2)

Adjusting the tension of the stack processing motor belt

Remove the right inner cover and the rear cover. Remove the 2 mounting screws, and detach the grip unit.
Screw Grip unit Screw

Fig. 3-122

(3)

Loosen the screw on the tension arm plate. (The tension arm plate will be pulled under tension by the tension spring.)
Screw Tension arm plate

Fig. 3-123

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 87

(4)

Move the returning roller shaft to its lower limit (the slack of a belt is lightly taken); then, tighten the screw on the tension arm plate.
Screw Tension arm plate Returning roller shaft

Fig. 3-124

(5)

Check to make sure that the returning roller shaft moves smoothly.
Returning roller shaft

Fig. 3-125

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 88

3.12.5
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

Releasing the stack tray guide lever fixing plate

Remove the right inner cover and the rear cover. Remove the finisher control PC board, PC board bracket and sensor PC board. Remove the stack tray. Remove the stack tray drive unit. Place the stack tray guide lever fixing plate so that it is in view through the hole in the side plate (front, rear). Then remove the fixing screw. (Perform the same for the front and the rear.)

Screw

Stack tray guide lever fixing plate


Fig. 3-126

Note: When removing the mounting screw, be sure to hold the stack tray guide lever up from below.

Stack tray guide lever


Fig. 3-127

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 89

3.12.6
(1)

Adjustment of the upper tray angle

Remove the front cover.

Fig. 3-128

(2)

Loosen the screw denoted with the arrow.

Fig. 3-129

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 90

(3)

The tension becomes loose. While pushing the bracket down, hold the tray and move it up or down, to adjust the angle so that the tray becomes parallel by a visual check.

Fig. 3-130

(4) After the height adjustment, tighten the fixing screw of the bracket. Note: If the fixing screw of the bracket is not fixed, the belt is loosened which may cause a skipped tooth.

Fig. 3-131

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 91

3.12.7

DIP switch functions

You can simulate various functions by setting the DIP switch (SW1) on the finisher controller PC board appropriately. Initiating Operations 1) Remove any obstacles from the area of operation. 2) Set the DIP switch (SW1) as shown, and turn ON the power (so that LED1 will start to blink). 3) Press the pushing switch (SW2) twice to initiate the operation in question. (LED2 will remain on during operation).
Setting
ON

Item Delivery motor


7 8

Operation The delivery roller rotates in a specific speed.

To stop Press SW2 again. Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4). Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4).

ON

1
ON

Stack processing motor (stack delivery lever) Stack processing motor (returning roller) Front jogging plate motor

The stack delivery lever moves to its home position and stops.

The returning roller moves to the home position and stops. The front jogging plate moves to its home position and stops. When at the The front jogging plate home position moves over a specific position and stops at the home position. When not at the The rear jogging plate home position moves to the home position and stops. When at the The rear jogging plate home position moves over a specific distance and stops. The upper stack tray moves up and stops when the upper stack tray upper limit sensor turns ON. The upper stack tray moves down and stops when the lower stack tray lower limit sensor turns ON. The lower stack tray moves up and stops when the lower stack tray upper limit sensor is turned ON. The lower stack tray moves down and stops when the lower stack tray lower limit sensor is turned ON. The stapler motor stops after the stapling operation. When not at the home position

Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4). Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4). Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4).

ON

ON

Rear jogging plate motor


2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4). Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4). Press SW2 again. Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4). Press SW2 again. Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4). Press SW2 again. Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4). Press SW2 again. Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4). Press the stapler safety switch (S14). Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4). Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4).

ON

Upper stack tray motor (up)


2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 ON

Upper stack tray motor (down)


2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON

Lower stack tray motor (up)


2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON

Lower stack tray motor (down)


2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON

Stapler motor
2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON

Shipping position operation


2 3 4 5 6 7 8

The upper and lower stack trays move to the shipping position and stop.

Note: Perform the shipping position operation when the finisher is packed again.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 92

3.13 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1023/1024)


Note: Before performing each adjustment, make sure that all covers (incl. those of the finisher and host machine) are closed. Otherwise, the power is not supplied to the finisher and the adjustment may not be performed properly.

3.13.1

Adjusting the alignment position (Finisher unit)

Perform this adjustment after replacing the finisher controller PC board or when the alignment position must be changed for some reason. (1) (2) Remove the rear cover of the finisher unit. Check that the power is OFF and set SW104 on the finisher controller PC board as follows according to the paper used for adjustment.
ON ON

A4 paper
Fig. 3-132

LT paper

(3) (4)

(5) (6)

(7) (8) (9)

Turn ON the power. Press SW103 on the finisher controller PC board. When SW103 is pressed, the swing guide opens and the alignment plate moves to prescribed position. Place ten sheets of A4/LT paper between the alignment plates and push them against the stopper. Press SW101 or SW102 on the finisher controller PC board and push the alignment plate against the paper. When SW101 is pressed, alignment plate moves 0.42 mm forward. When SW102 is pressed, alignment plate moves 0.42 mm backward. When adjustment is complete, remove paper and press SW103 on the finisher controller PC board once to store the adjustment in memory. Turn OFF all bits of finisher controller PC board SW104. Turn OFF the power and install the rear cover of the finisher unit.

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 93 06/09

3.13.2

Adjusting the staple position (Finisher unit)

Perform this adjustment after replacing the finisher controller PC board or when the staple position must be changed for some reason. This adjustment adjusts the front/rear stitches with A4/A4-R when the paper used for adjustment is AB type and with LT/LT-R when the paper is INCH type. (1) (2) Remove the rear cover of the finisher unit. Check that the power is OFF and set SW104 on the finisher controller PC board as follows according to paper/stitch position used for adjustment.
ON ON

A4/front stitch
ON ON

A4/rear stitch

A4-R/front stitch
ON ON

A4-R/rear stitch

LT/front stitch
ON ON

LT/rear stitch

LT-R/front stitch
Fig. 3-133

LT-R/rear stitch

(3) (4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

Turn ON the power. Press SW103 on the finisher controller PC board. When SW103 is pressed, the swing guide opens and the alignment plate moves to prescribed position. Place a sheet of paper between the alignment plates. Push it against the stopper and push the rear edge of the paper against the rear alignment plate. If the gap between the front alignment plate and front edge of the paper is 1 mm or greater, stop the staple position adjustment and repeat the staple position adjustment after completing alignment plate adjustment. Press SW103 on the finisher controller PC board once to staple. However, remove the stapled paper manually because the paper is not ejected. Press SW103 on the finisher controller PC board once again. Verify the staple position. If any adjustment is needed, proceed to the step 8). If no adjustment is needed, proceed to the step 9). Press SW101 or SW102 on the finisher controller PC board to adjust the staple position. When SW101 is pressed, the staple position shifts 0.49 mm to the front side. When SW102 is pressed, the staple position shifts 0.49 mm to the rear side. Repeat the steps 5) to 7).
2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

(8)

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 94 04/11

(9)

After confirming that the staple position is adjusted correctly, place a sheet of paper between the alignment plates and push it against the stopper and push the rear edge of the paper against the rear alignment plate. Then press SW103 once. (Stapling is performed and the adjustment value is stored in memory.) The staple position adjustment is completed. (10) Turn OFF all bits of SW104 on the finisher controller PC board. (11) Turn OFF the power and install the rear cover of the finisher unit.

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 95

3.13.3

Adjusting the folding position (Saddle stitcher unit)

The folding position is adjusted by changing setting of bits 6 through 8 of SW504 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board to match the stitching position (adjusting the distance over which the paper positioning plate is moved to the folding position from the stitching position). If you have replaced the saddle stitcher controller PC board, be sure to set the new SW504 so that the settings will be the same as those on the old SW504. Perform this adjustment if, for any reason, you must change the folding position. (1) (2) Check that the power is OFF and separate the finisher from the host machine. If the optional puncher unit is installed, remove it from the finisher. Remove the PC board cover and set bits 1 through 4 of SW504 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board as follows:
ON

Do not change bits 5 through 8.


Fig. 3-134

(3)

Remove the rear cover, open the inlet cover of the saddle stitcher unit and tape the actuator of inlet cover sensor (PI9) and inlet door switch (SW1). Before inserting the paper, mark the top of the paper. You will be using two sheets of A3 or LD paper.

(4)

Mark

A3/LD paper

Insert direction
Fig. 3-135

(5) (6) (7) (8)

Turn ON the power. Press SW1 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board so that the feed motor (M1) starts to rotate. (Press SW1 three seconds or more if LD paper is used.) Open the inlet cover and insert two sheets of paper. Push them in by hand until the front edge of the sheets push against the paper positioning plate. Close the inlet cover.

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 96

Press SW1 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board. The saddle stitcher unit will stitch the sheets, and fold and deliver the stack automatically. (10) Measure the distance (L) between the stitching position and the folding position. Then perform positive width adjustment or negative width adjustment to suit the relationship between the stitching position and the folding position. If the stitching position is below the folding position, perform positive width adjustment. If the stitching position is above the folding position, perform negative width adjustment.
Positive Width Adjustment Negative Width Adjustment

(9)

Mark

Mark

3
Folding position Stitching position Stitching position Folding position L L

Unit: mm Example: If L is 1 mm, provide "+1 mm".

Unit: mm Example: If L is 0.5 mm, provide "-0.5 mm".

(11) Change the settings of bits 6 through 8 on SW504 referring to the following table. If the width adjustment is 0 The stitching position and the folding position match, requiring no change. If for positive width adjustment Set SW504 so that the difference resulting from subtraction of the interval from the appropriate setting in the table below is provided. Example: If SW504 is currently set to +2 and the interval is +1 mm, set SW504 to reflect - 2. If for negative width adjustment Set SW504 so that the sum resulting from addition of the interval from the appropriate setting in the table below is provided. Example: If SW504 is currently set to -1 and the interval is -0.5mm, set SW504 to reflect +1.
DIPSW1 bit settings Bit 7 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON Setting (in units of 0.5 mm) +3 +2 +1 0 -1 -2 -3

Bit 6 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON

Bit 8 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

Do not use the following setting Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 ON OFF OFF

(12) Set SW504 bits 1 to 4 to OFF.


2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 97

3.13.4
Code 468-0 468-1 468-2

Fine adjustment of binding/folding position (Saddle stitcher unit)


Paper size A4-R / LT-R B4 A3 / LD Remarks When the value increases, the binding/folding position shifts toward the right page. (0.25mm/step) Acceptable values: -14 to 14 (Default: 0)

The binding position/folding position can be adjusted in the following (05) codes.

Increase the adjustment value when the sheet of paper which has exited is "A". Decrease the adjustment value when the sheet of paper which has exited is "B". A: When the upper side of the folding is longer than the lower side B: When the upper side of the folding is shorter than the lower side

Paper feeding direction

Paper feeding direction

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 98

3.13.5

Sensor output adjustment (Puncher unit)

Perform this adjustment when replacing the punch controller PC board, transmittance sensor (photosensor PC board/LED PC board), or deflection sensor (scrap full detector PC board unit). (1) (2) Check that the power is OFF and then remove the rear cover of the puncher. Set SW601 on the punch controller PC board as shown below.
ON

Fig. 3-136

3
(3) (4) Turn ON the power. Press SW602 on the punch controller PC board. Sensor output is adjusted automatically when the switch is pressed. Adjustment is complete if LED601 and LED602 on the punch controller PC board blinksalternately. Press SW602 or SW603 on the punch controller PC board to end the adjustment mode and set all bits of SW601 to OFF. Turn OFF the power.

(5) (6)

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 99

3.13.6

Registering the number of punch holes (Puncher unit)

This operation registers which puncher unit is attached to the IC on the punch driver PC board so that the puncher unit can be identified by the finisher. For this reason, this operation must be performed when the punch driver PC board has been replaced. (1) (2) Check that the power is OFF and then remove the rear cover of the puncher. Set SW601 on the punch controller PC board as shown below.
ON

Fig. 3-137

(3) (4)

Turn ON the power. Press SW602 on the punch controller PC board. Sensor output is adjusted automatically when the switch is pressed. Adjustment is complete if LED601 and LED602 on the punch controller PC board blinks alternately.
Number of punch holes 2 hole (E) 2/3 hole (N) 4 hole (F) 4 hole (S) LED601/LED602 Blinks 1 times per cycle Blinks 2 times per cycle Blinks 3 times per cycle Blinks 4 times per cycle

(5)

(6) (7)

Press SW603 on the punch controller PC board. The number of punch holes is registered to the punch controller PC board each time the switch is pressed. Registration is complete if LED601 and LED602 on the punch controller PC board blinks alternately. Press SW602 or SW603 on the punch controller PC board to end the adjustment mode and set all bits of SW601 to OFF. Turn OFF the power.

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 100

3.14 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1101)


Note: Before performing each adjustment, make sure that all covers (incl. those of the finisher and host machine) are closed. Otherwise, the power is not supplied to the finisher and the adjustment may not be performed properly.

3.14.1

Adjusting the Alignment Position

Perform this adjustment after replacing the Finisher control board or when the alignment position must be changed for some reason.

(1) (2) (3)

Turn OFF the power of the equipment. Remove 1 screw and take off the board access cover. Set the SW1 on the Finisher control board as shown in the figures below.
Access cover

SW1

Fig. 3-138

Adjusting for A4 size paper ON

Adjusting for LT size paper ON

4
Fig. 3-139

(4)

Turn ON the power of the equipment while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously. The alignment plate moves to the A4 or LT size position and stops. (It stops at the position of -5 steps from the center value of the adjustment range.)

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 101 06/09

(5)

Press the [Button1] to adjust the alignment position. Every time the [Button1] is pressed, the alignment plate shifts 1 step (0.419 mm/step) toward the + direction. (The gap between the alignment plates becomes narrower.) Adjustment range is from -5 to +5 steps. If the [Button1] is pressed when the alignment position is at the +5 step, the plate will return to the home position and then moves to the position of -5 step.
LED3 LED2 LED1

Button1
Fig. 3-140

Button2

(6)

When the adjustment is completed, press the [Button2] on the finisher control panel to store the adjustment value in memory. When the value is stored normally, the [LED1] on the control panel will blink for a number of times that corresponds to the adjustment value set for the equipment. See the following table for the number of times the [LED1] blinks and its corresponding adjustment value.
Number of Blinking 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Adjustment Value -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5

(7) (8) (9)

Turn OFF the power of the equipment. Turn OFF all bits of the SW1 on the Finisher control board. Install the board access cover.

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 102 06/09

3.14.2

Adjusting the Stapling Position

Perform this adjustment after replacing the Finisher control board or when the stapling position must be changed for some reason. (1) (2) (3) Turn OFF the power of the equipment. Remove 1 screw and take off the board access cover. Set the SW1 on the Finisher control board as shown in the figures below.

SW1

Fig. 3-141

When adjusting the rear side for A4 size paper ON

When adjusting the rear side for LT size paper ON

When adjusting the front side for A4 size paper ON

When adjusting the front side for LT size paper ON

Fig. 3-142

(4)

Turn ON the power of the equipment while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously. The alignment plate moves to the rear or front side stapling position and stops. (It stops at the position of -20 steps from the center value of the adjustment range.)

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 103 06/09

(5)

Press [Button 1] to adjust the stapling position. Every time [Button 1] is pressed, the alignment plate shifts 4 steps (0.45 mm) toward the "+" direction. (It moves toward the rear side.) Adjustment range is from -20 to +20 steps. If [Button 1] is pressed when the alignment position is at the +20 steps, the plate will return to the home position and then moves to the position of 20 steps. Note: Stapling for checking the position can be done by pressing [Button 2] with sheets placed on the finishing tray. (stapled on the rear side)
LED3 LED2 LED1

Button1
Fig. 3-143

Button2

(6)

When the adjustment is completed, press [Button 2] on the finisher control panel to store the adjustment value in memory without sheets on the finishing tray. When the value is stored normally, [LED 1] on the control panel will blink for a number of times that corresponds to the adjustment value set for the equipment. See the following table for the number of times [LED 1] blinks and its corresponding adjustment value.
Number of blinking 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Adjustment value -20 -16 -12 -8 -4 0 +4 +8 +12 +16 +20

(7) (8) (9)

Turn OFF the power of the equipment. Turn OFF all bits of the SW1 on the Finisher control board. Install the board access cover.

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 104 06/09

3.14.3

B4-size recycled paper mode settings

Set this mode if the trailing edge of the paper gets caught by the exit section of the finisher while B4size recycled paper is used. This mode increases the paper exiting speed when the paper exits to the movable tray in the sort mode, or to the stationary tray in the non-sort mode. (1) (2) (3) Turn OFF the power of the equipment. Remove 1 screw and take off the board access cover. Set the SW1 on the Finisher control board as shown in the figures below.
Access cover

SW1

Fig. 3-144

ON

Fig. 3-145

(4)

Turn ON the power of the equipment while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 105 06/09

(5)

Press [Button1] and [Button2] as described in the following table to set the B4-size recycled paper mode. Press [Button1] and [Button2] on the control panel as below to set the B4-size recycled paper mode.

Note: Be sure to press [Button1] and [Button2] the correct number of times. Press [Button1] and [Button2] simultaneously to cancel the operation.
LED3 LED2 LED1

Button1
Fig. 3-146

Button2

B4-size recycled paper mode


Step 1 2 3 4 Buttons Button1 Button2 Button1 Button2 Number of pressing 1 1 8 1 Confirms the input value Confirms the input value Remarks

Note: To change settings from the B4-size recycled paper mode to the normal mode, perform steps (1) through (4), and then press [Button1] and [Button2] on the control panel as shown below to set the normal mode. Normal mode
Step 1 2 3 4 Buttons Button1 Button2 Button1 Button2 Number of pressing 1 1 6 1 Confirms the input value Confirms the input value Remarks

(6)

When the settings are stored normally, [LED1] on the control panel is lit. [LED1] blinks, if an error occurs. In this case, turn the power OFF and make the settings again from step (4). Turn OFF the power of the equipment. Turn OFF all bits of the SW1 on the Finisher control board. Install the board access cover.

(7) (8) (9)

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 106 06/09

3.14.4

Stopping Position Adjustment (MJ-6101:Puncher unit)

This adjustment can change the position where paper transport stops during the punching operation. Perform this adjustment when you adjust the punching position on the paper in the transporting direction. (1) (2) Turn the power of the equipment OFF. Take off the board access cover of the Finisher. Then set SW1 (DIP-SW) on the finisher control PC board as shown below.

SW1

ON

Fig. 3-147

(3)

Turn the power of the equipment ON. The finisher enters into the stopping position adjustment mode. LED1 on the finisher control panel blinks. The number of times it blinks indicates the current adjustment value.

(4)

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 107 06/09

(5)

Press Button1 on the finisher control panel to change the adjustment value. The number of times LED1 blinks changes in ascending order (e.g. 1, 2, 3 11) each time you press Button1 .
Number of LED1s blinking 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Adjustment value* -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 Distance moved 1.10 mm 0.88 mm 0.66 mm 0.44 mm 0.22 mm 0 mm (Reference position) 0.22 mm 0.44 mm 0.66 mm 0.88 mm 1.10 mm

Note: When the adjustment value goes further in minus numbers in the table above, the distance between the paper edge and the holes becomes wider. When it goes further in plus numbers, this distance becomes narrower.

Fig. 3-148

(6)

When the value change is completed, press Button2 on the finisher control panel to determine the adjustment value. (The adjustment value is written into the flash ROM.) Turn the power of the equipment OFF. Turn all the bits of SW1 (DIP-SW) on the finisher control PC board OFF. Install the board access cover of the Finisher.

(7) (8) (9)

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 108 06/01

3.15 Key Copy Counter (MU-8, MU-10)


To make a key copy counter available, the following 2 components must be installed to the equipment.

Key copy counter MU-8

Counter socket MU-10

3
<Installation procedure> (1) (2) Remove the right upper cover. Open the bypass tray, ADU, jam access cover and fuser unit cover. Take off the IH terminal cover. Remove the right rear cover, and cut open the window for the key copy counter.

Right upper cover

(3)

IH terminal cover

Right rear cover

Fig. 3-149

(4)

Pull out the harness connector from the hole of the machine frame, and cut the short harness of the connector. (Treat the cut harness properly to avoid it causing a short circuit with the machine frame.) Then, disconnect the dummy connector.
Dummy connector

Harness connector

Fig. 3-150

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 109 04/09

(5)

(6) (7)

Connect the connector of the counter socket to the harness connector of the equipment side. Install the counter socket to the machine frame with two M3 screws. Counter socket Reattach the cover.

Harness connector

Screw
Fig. 3-151

(8)

Insert the key copy counter with its arrow mark pointing the rear side of the equipment.

Key copy counter

Fig. 3-152

(9)

Enter the value 3 in the setting mode (08-202).

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 110

3.16 Adjustment of Dogleg


Dogleg is the name given to an image which is deformed approx. 44 mm of the trailing edge of the output paper. Since adjustment has usually been performed when the equipment was manufactured, dogleg image should not occur. However, if the following dogleg image A or B does happen to occur, the following adjustment must be performed. An original with a line parallel to the feeding direction is used for the adjustment.
Normal Image

Feeding Direction

Fig. 3-153

Dogleg Image A

Dogleg Image B

Feeding Direction

Feeding Direction

Approx. 44 mm of the trailing edge

Approx. 44 mm of the trailing edge

Fig. 3-154

Fig. 3-155

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 111 04/10

<Preparation> (1) (2) (3) (4) Take off the front cover, right upper cover and the paper exit tray. Remove the upper drawer, and then open the bypass tray and the ADU. Take off the right front cover. Open the jam access cover.

Fig. 3-156

<Adjustment procedure> (1) (2) Check the scale position. (See Fig. 3-157.) Loosen 2 screws so that the fuser unit and its lower stay can move. (3) For dogleg image A Move the lower stay of the fuser unit upward from the position in Step 1 by 0.5 on the scale, and then tighten the screws. For dogleg image B Move the lower stay of the fuser unit downward from the position in Step 1 by 0.5 on the scale, and then tighten the screws. Note: Be sure to match the height of both right and left scales.

Fig. 3-158

For dogleg image A: Move the stay upward by 0.5 on the scale. For dogleg image B: Move the stay downward by 0.5 on the scale. Scale

Fig. 3-157

(4)

Check the copy image and repeat Step 1 to 3 if further adjustment is needed..

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ADJUSTMENT

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 112 04/10

4.
4.1

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)


PM Support Mode
General description

4.1.1

The timing for the parts replacement usually depends on the number of output pages ever printed after they were replaced before. However, the life span of them changes depending on the general use of users and the environment in which the equipment is placed. Therefore, it is necessary to consider not only the number of output pages but also the drive counts when deciding the timing for the parts replacement in order to utilize the parts and materials effectively. This equipment has the PM support mode, which makes it possible to see the general use of each part (the number of output pages, drive counts) and replacement record and to do a counter clearing operation more efficiently when replacing. The replacement record can be printed out in the list printing mode (9S-103).

4.1.2

Operational flow and operational screen

[ 1 ] Operational flow
PM support mode activated [6]+[START]+[POWER]ON [RETURN] pressed [2] [1] [START] Auto-toner automatic adjustment performed ( Chapter 3.1)

Adjustment finished

[START] Main unit chosen [SUB UNIT] pressed

Main screen Main unit list displayed

[RETURN] pressed Main unit chosen [RESET]

[CANCEL] pressed

Sub screen Sub unit list displayed

Clear finished

Clear screen Counter clear confirmation displayed

[CANCEL] pressed Sub unit chosen [RESET] pressed

[INITIALIZE] pressed Clear finished Counter clear performed

Fig. 4-1

The screen goes back to the main screen when the counter clear is executed or the [CANCEL] button is pressed after moving from the main screen, while it goes back to the sub screen after moving from the sub screen.

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

4-1

[ 2 ] Operational screen
1) Main screen
10 9

5
Fig. 4-2

1 2 3

Displaying of the main unit name Back to the PM support mode activation screen Clearing of the chosen unit counters (all the sub unit (parts) counters belonging to that unit) All counters are cleared when the unit is not selected Moving to the sub screen Moving to the next/previous page Displaying of the standard number of output pages counts (x1,000) to replace the unit parts Displaying of the present drive counts (x1,000) * is displayed next to the present number when the number of drive counts has exceeded its PM standard number. Displaying of the standard number of drive counts (x1,000) to replace the unit parts Displaying of the present number of output pages counts (x1,000) When there are differences among the sub units (parts), _ is displayed and CHECK SUBUNIT is displayed at the top * is displayed next to the present number when the number of output pages counts has exceeded its PM standard number. Displaying of the number of output pages counts (Cpy.), driving counts (Cnt.) and previous replacement date (Chg.) for a chosen unit. When the replacement date for the sub unit is different, press the [SUB UNIT] button to move to the sub screen and see each information, otherwise information is not displayed

4 5 6 7

8 9

10

Notes: 1. is always displayed at the drive counts section for the reversing automatic document feeder (RADF) and feed unit. 2. The paper source differs depending on the structure of options, however, 0.0k is displayed in OUTPUT PAGES (k) and its standard number of output pages is displayed in PM OUTPUT PAGES (k) even for the installed paper source.

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4-2

2) Sub screen
8

4
Fig. 4-3

1 2 3 4

Displaying of the sub unit (parts) name Back to the main screen Clearing of the chosen sub unit (parts) counters Displaying of the present number of output pages counts (x1,000) * is displayed next to the present number when the number of output pages counts has exceeded its PM standard number. Displaying of the standard number of output pages counts (x1,000) to replace the sub unit (parts) Displaying of the present drive counts (x1,000) * is displayed next to the present number when the number of drive counts has exceeded its PM standard number. Displaying of the standard number of drive counts (x1,000) to replace the sub unit (parts) Displaying of the number of output pages counts, drive counts and previous replacement date for a chosen sub unit

7 8

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

4-3

3) Clear screen

1
Fig. 4-4

When the [INITIALIZE] button is pressed, Present number of output pages counts and Present driving counts are cleared and Previous replacement date is updated.

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4-4

[ 3 ] Access tree
Note: The name inside [ ] is displayed on the LCD screen.
Main screen Drum/cleaner unit [CLEANER/DRUM] Sub-screen Drum [DRUM] Drum cleaning blade [DRUM CLEANING BLADE] Main charger grid [GRID] Main charger wire [MAIN CHARGER WIRE] Separation finger for drum [SEPARATION FINGER (DRUM)] Developer [DEVELOPER] Transfer charger wire [TRANSFER CHARGER WIRE] Separation charger wire [SEPARATION CHARGER WIRE] Ozone filter [OZONE FILTER] Fuser roller [FUSER ROLLER] Pressure roller [PRESS ROLLER] Cleaning roller [CLEANING ROLLER] Separation finger for fuser roller [SEPARATION FINGER (FUSER)] Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER (1st CST.)] Feed roller [FEED ROLLER (1st CST.)] Separation roller [SEP ROLLER (1st CST.)] Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER (2nd CST.)] Feed roller [FEED ROLLER (2nd CST.)] Separation roller [SEP ROLLER (2nd CST.)] Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER (SFB)] Feed roller [FEED ROLLER (SFB)] Separation roller [SEP ROLLER (SFB)] Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER (RADF)] Feed roller [FEED ROLLER (RADF)] Separation roller [SEP ROLLER (RADF)] Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER (LCF)] Feed roller [FEED ROLLER (LCF)] Separation roller [SEP ROLLER (LCF)] Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER (3rd CST.)] Feed roller [FEED ROLLER (3rd CST.)] Separation roller [SEP ROLLER (3rd CST.)] Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER (4th CST.)] Feed roller [FEED ROLLER (4th CST.)] Separation roller [SEP ROLLER (4th CST.)]

Developer unit [DEVELOPER] Transfer /separation charger unit [TRANS./SEP.CHARGER] Filter [FILTER] Fuser unit [FUSER]

Upper drawer [1st CST.] Lower drawer [2nd CST.] Bypass unit [SFB] RADF [RADF] LCF [LCF] PFP upper drawer [3rd CST.] PFP lower drawer [4th CST.]

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

4-5

4.1.3

Work flow of parts replacement

The timing for the parts replacement usually depends on the number of output pages ever made after they were replaced before. However, its drive counts time is also to be considered when replacing the parts. Even if the number of output pages has reached the level of replacement, for instance, the part may still be usable with its drive counts not reaching the specified drive counts. On the other hand, the part may need replacement even if the number of output pages has not reached the level of replacement with its driving time exceeding the specified drive counts. The life span of some parts such as feed roller is heavily dependent on the number of output pages rather than the drive counts. The following work flow diagram shows how to judge the timing of replacement with the number of output pages and the drive counts. Example 1: When the number of output pages has reached the specified level
The parts in RADF The parts in feeding system The parts in the drum/cleaner unit The parts in the fuser unit The parts in the developer unit The parts in the transfer/separation charger unit

Replace the part.

Check the drive counts at PM support mode. Does it exceed the specified drive counts? No The part is still usable.

Yes

Replace the part.

Replace the part after the drive counts has reached the specified count.
Fig. 4-5

Example 2: When the image failure occurred before the number of output pages has reached the specified level
Check the drive counts of all parts at PM support mode.

Does it exceed the specified drive count? No

Yes

Replace the part.

Check the part and equipment according to the TROUBLESHOOTING.

Fig. 4-6

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4-6

4.2

General Descriptions for PM Procedure (Maintenance Performed Every 120,000 Output Pages (e-STUDIO350/352/ 353) and 150,000 Output Pages (e-STUDIO450/452/453))
Preparation Ask the user about the current conditions of the equipment and note them down. Before starting maintenance, make some sample copies and store them. See the replacement record and check the parts to be replaced in the PM support mode (6S2) or list printing mode (9S-103). 6S-2 : [6]+[START]+[POWER]ON [2] [START] 9S-103 : [9]+[START]+[POWER]ON [103] [START]
PM SUPPORT CODE LIST
11-10-'03 09:30 UNIT OUTPUT PAGES 81813 81813 81813 81813 81813 PM OUTPUT PAGE 150000 150000 150000 150000 150000 DRIVE COUNTS 119758 119758 119758 119758 119758 PM DRIVE COUNTS 220000 220000 220000 220000 220000

(1)

DRUM DRUM BLADE GRID MAIN CHARGER WIRE SEPARATION FINGER (DRUM)

Fig. 4-7

(2)

Turn OFF the power and make sure to unplug the equipment.

Perform a preventive maintenance using the following checklist and illustrations. Refer to the Service Manual if necessary. Plug in the equipment after the maintenance has been finished. Then turn ON the power and make some copies to confirm that the equipment is working properly.

(3)

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

4-7 07/11

4.3

Operational Items in Overhauling

Overhaul each equipment with the following timing. e-STUDIO350/352/353: When the number of output pages has reached 360,000 or 2.5 years have passed from the start of use (Whichever is earlier) e-STUDIO450/452/453: When the number of output pages has reached 450,000 or 2.5 years have passed from the start of use (Whichever is earlier) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Replace all the supplies. Check the components in the drive section (gears, pulleys, timing belts, etc.). Replace them with new ones if they are damaged. Check all the adhesives such as tape and Mylar if they are damaged or have become unstuck. Replace them with new ones if necessary. Check the performance of all the switches and sensors. Replace them with new ones if necessary. Clean inside the equipment thoroughly.

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4-8 07/11

4.4

Cleaning the Units which Have Processed 60,000 Output Pages (e-STUDIO350/352/353) and 75,000 Output Pages (e-STUDIO450/452/453)

Clean inside the machine as needed following the checklist.

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

4-9 07/11

4.5

Preventive Maintenance Checklist


Cleaning Lubrication L: Launa 40 Replacement Operation check O: After cleaning or replacement, confirm there is no problem. Data User Name Sirial No. Inspector's name Remarks

Symbols used in the checklist


A: Clean with alcohol D: Clean with a well squeezed cloth O: Clean with soft pad, cloth or vacuum cleaner The number of sheets conCoating sumed before replacement Silicon oil (Value x 1,000) White grease R: Replace if (Molykote X5-6020) deformed or White grease damaged (Molykote HP-300) White grease (Molykote EM-30L) Alvania No.2 FL Floil (GE-334C) Conductive grease (KS-660)

SI: W1: W2: W3: AV: CG:

[Preventive Maintenance Checklist] Notes: 1. Perform cleaning and lubricating in every 120,000 output pages for the e-STUDIO350/352/ 353, and every 150,000 output pages for the e-STUDIO450/452/453. Lubricate the replacement parts following to the replacement cycle. 2. Values under Replacement indicate the replacement cycle for the e-STUDIO350/eSTUDIO450, e-STUDIO352/e-STUDIO452, or e-STUDIO353/e-STUDIO453. 3. The replacement cycle of the parts in the feeding section equals to the number of sheets fed from each paper source. 4. Be careful not to put oil on the rollers, belts and belt pulleys when lubricating. A. Scanner
Items to check A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 Original glass ADF original glass Mirror-1 Mirror-2 Mirror-3 Reflector Lens Exposure lamp Automatic original detection sensor O O or A R Cleaning O or A O O O O O O R O O Lubrication Replacement (x1,000 sheets) Operation check Parts list <P-I> Remarks *a1 *a1

A10 Slide sheet (front and rear)

B. Laser unit
Items to check B1 Slit glass Cleaning O Lubrication Replacement (x1,000 sheets) Operation check Parts list <P-I> Remarks

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4 - 10 07/11

C. Feed unit
Items to check C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 Pickup roller Feed roller Separation roller Transport roller Paper guide Drive gear (tooth face and shaft) GCB bushing bearing One side of the plastic bushing to which the shaft is inserted Registration roller A A O W1 L W1 *c2 AV, W2 Cleaning Lubrication Replacement (x1,000 sheets) 80/80 80/80 80/80 R Operation check Parts list <P-I> P14-I20 P14-I24 P14-I15 *c1 Remarks

C9

4
D. Automatic duplexing unit
Items to check D1 D2 Transport roller (upper, middle and lower) One side of the GCB bushing to which the shaft is inserted One side of the plastic bushing to which the shaft is inserted Paper guide O Cleaning A L Lubrication Replacement (x1,000 sheets) R Operation check Parts list <P-I> Remarks

D3

W1

D4

E. Bypass feed unit


Items to check E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 Pickup roller Feed roller Separation roller Bypass tray Drive gear (shaft) GCB bushing bearing Transport roller A O W1 L R AV, W2 Cleaning Lubrication Replacement (x1,000 sheets) 80/80 80/80 80/80 Operation check Parts list <P-I> P18-I26 P18-I37 P17-I1 *e1 Remarks

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

4 - 11

F. Main charger
Items to check F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 Main charger case Main charger wire Contact point of terminals Charger wire cleaning pad Main charger grid O R 120/150 R P23-I15 Cleaning D 120/150 R O P23-I10 Lubrication Replacement (x1,000 sheets) Operation check Parts list <P-I> Remarks *f1 *f1

G. Transfer / Separation charger


Items to check G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8 Charger case Transfer charger wire Separation charger wire Pre-transfer guide Post-transfer guide Separation supporter Terminal cover Contact point of terminals O or A O or A O O O R Cleaning D 120/150 R 120/150 R O O P24-I6 P24-I6 Lubrication Replacement (x1,000 sheets) Operation check Parts list <P-I> Remarks *g1 *g1 *g1

H. Drum/Cleaner related section


Items to check H1 Photoconductive drum Cleaning Lubrication CG Replacement (x1,000 sheets) 120/150 Operation check Parts list <P-I> P103-I1 Remarks Refer to Chapter 4.9.2 Refer to Chapter 4.9.2

H2

Drum shaft

CG

P25-I4

H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 H8

Whole cleaner unit Drum cleaning blade Separation finger for drum Recovery blade Discharge LED Ozone filter

O 120/150 120/150 R O O 120/150 P11-I16 R P25-I4 P25-I13 *h1 *h2 *h3

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4 - 12 04/05

I. Toner bag
Items to check I1 Toner bag Cleaning Lubrication Replacement (x1,000 sheets) 19.3/19.3 Operation check Parts list <P-I> P103-I6 Remarks

J. Developer unit
Items to check J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7 J8 J9 Whole developer unit Developer material Front shield Oil seal (5pcs.) Guide roller Toner cartridge drive gear shaft Side shield Developer unit lower stay Inside of the toner cartridge stay O O O O or A W1 O AV Cleaning O 120/150 R 360/450 R P103-I33 *j2 P103-I2 *j1 Lubrication Replacement (x1,000 sheets) Operation check Parts list <P-I> Remarks

K. Fuser unit
Items to check K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 Fuser roller Pressure roller Separation finger for fuser roller Separation finger for pressure roller Cleaning roller One side of the cleaning roller to which the shaft is inserted Thermistor (2pcs.) Fuser unit entrance guide Exit / reverse guide A A A A SI R SI Cleaning Lubrication Replacement (x1,000 sheets) 120/150 120/150 120/150 R 120/150 P103-I2 Operation check Parts list <P-I> P103-I2 P103-I2 P103-I2 *k1 *k1 Remarks

K7 K8 K9

*k2

K10 Exit roller K11 Drive gear

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

4 - 13 04/05

L. RADF (MR-3015)
Items to check L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 Pickup roller Feed roller Separation roller Original length sensor Registration roller 1st small roller 2nd small roller Read sensor Read guide Cleaning O O O O A A A O O A A A O A A O or A Lubrication Replacement (x1,000 sheets) 120 120 120 Operation check Parts list <P-I> P8-I26 P8-I25 P6-I6 Remarks

L10 Read roller L11 3rd small roller L12 4th small roller L13 Reverse sensor L14 Exit roller L15 Reverse roller L16 Platen sheet

M. PFP (KD-1011)
Items to check M1 M2 M3 M4 Pickup roller (upper/lower) Feed roller (upper/lower) Separation roller (upper/lower) Drive gear (tooth face) AV, W2 W1 Cleaning Lubrication Replacement (x1,000 sheets) 80/80 80/80 80/80 Operation check Parts list <P-I> P5-I29 P5-I26 P5-I12 *m1 Remarks

N. LCF (KD-1012)
Items to check N1 N2 N3 N4 Pickup roller Feed roller Separation roller Drive gear Cleaning A A A W1 Lubrication Replacement (x1,000 sheets) 160/160 160/160 160/160 Operation check Parts list <P-I> P4-I30 P4-I28 P5-I12 Remarks

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4 - 14 06/01

O. Job Separator (MJ-5004)


Items to check O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 Idling roller Other rollers Paper guide JSP stack sensor (Lower) JSP stack sensor (Upper) JSP paper jam sensor Cleaning O or A O or A O or A O O O O O O Lubrication W1 Replacement (x1,000 sheets) Operation check Parts list <P-I> Remarks *o1

P. Offset Tray (MJ-5005)


Items to check P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 OCT separator roller Other rollers Paper guide OCT stuck sensor OCT home position sensor OCT feed sensor Cleaning O or A O or A O or A O O O O O O Lubrication W1, FL Replacement (x1,000 sheets) Operation check Parts list <P-I> Remarks *p1

Q. Drive system
Items to check Q1 Main motor drive unit gear Cleaning Lubrication W1 Replacement (x1,000 sheets) Operation check Parts list <P-I> Remarks

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

4 - 15 04/01

R. RADF (MR-3018)
Items to check R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 Pickup roller Separation roller Feed roller Registration roller Intermediate transfer roller Front read roller Platen roller Rear read roller Reverse registration roller Exit/reverse roller Platen sheet Cleaning A A A A A A A A A A or A Lubrication/ Coating Replacement (KS) 120 120 120 Operation check Parts list <P-I> 5-1 4-10 5-1 Remarks

S. Finisher (MJ-1101)
Items to check S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 Stack transport roller-1 Stack transport roller-2 Buffer roller Exit roller Entrance roller Transport roller Paddle Paper holder cam Buffer tray shaf Stapler carrier shaft Rack & pinion gear (Aligning plate) Movable tray drive gear Buffer tray guide Finishing tray shaft W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 Cleaning A A A A A A 1,000 *s1 *s2 *s3 *s4 *s5 *s6 *s7 Lubrication Replacement (x1,000) Operation check Parts list Remarks (P-I)

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4 - 16 06/01

A2

A4

A8 A6

A1

A7

A10

A5

A3

A9 F2,F4 F1 F5 H7 H4

K10 K3 K7 K1

K9

K4

K2 K5,K6 H6 D1 K8 G5 H5 G6 G1 H8 D1 G3 G2 G4 J5 C9 C9 D1 E4

H3

H1

B1

J2 I1

J1

C1

C2 C3 E2 E3

E1

C1

C2

C3

C4

J4
Fig. 4-8 Front side

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

4 - 17 04/05

Q1

Fig. 4-9 Rear side

L5

L4

L2

L3

L1

L6 L8 L7

L9

L10 L11 L12

L13

L14

L15

L16

Fig. 4-10 Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF)

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4 - 18 04/05

M1

M2

M3

M2 M3

M1
Fig. 4-11 Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP)

4
N1 N2

N3

Fig. 4-12 Large Capacity Feeder (LCF)

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

4 - 19 04/05

O2

O5

O6

O3 O1 O2 O4

Fig. 4-13 Job Separator (JSP)

P4

P1 P3

P2

P6 P5
Fig. 4-14 Offset Tray (OCT)

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4 - 20 04/05

R5

R9

R4

R3

R2

R1

R6

R7

R8

R10

R11

Fig. 4-15 Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF: MR-3018)

[Front side]

[Rear side]

4
S3 S14 S12 S2 S5 S8 S9 S4

S6 S11 S13 S1 S10 S7

Fig. 4-16 Finisher (MJ-1101)

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

4 - 21 06/01

Remarks * in the Preventive Maintenance Check List * a1. Original glass / ADF original glass Clean both sides of the original glass and ADF original glass. Note: Make sure that there is no fingerprints or oil staining on part of the original glass on where the original scale is mounted since the shading correction plate is located below the scale to be scanned. * c1, m1. Separation roller (Feed unit, PFP) Apply an even coat of grease (Alvania No.2) to all round the inside of the spring. When replacing the separation roller, apply adequate amount of white grease (Molykote HP-300) on the places of the holder shown in the figure (4 places). Note: Make sure that the grease does not adhere to the roller surface. Wipe it off with alcohol if adhered.

Apply grease on the inner surface


Fig. 4-17

Apply white grease


Fig. 4-18

c2.

Drive gears in the paper feeding section (teeth of gears and shafts) Apply some white grease (Molykote X5-6020) to the teeth of gears and shafts of the drive gears.

Note: Make sure that oil is not running over or scattered around as the gear is rotated coming into the clutch after applying Molykote to the gear which is located near the clutch. The quantity of Molykote should be smaller than that to be applied to the other parts.

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4 - 22 04/05

e1.

Separation roller (SFB) Apply an even coat of grease (Alvania No.2) to all round the inside of the spring. When replacing the separation roller, apply adequate amount of white grease (Molykote HP-300) on the places of the holder shown in the figure (4 places).

Note: Make sure that the grease does not adhere to the roller surface. Wipe it off with alcohol if adhered.

Apply grease on the inner surface


Fig. 4-19

Apply white grease

Fig. 4-20

f1.

Main charger case/Main charger wire Clean the main charger case and wire with a cloth soaked in water and squeezed tightly, and then wipe them with a dry cloth.

Note: Be careful of the following when attaching a new wire (length: 363 mm). - Insert the wire securely into the V-grooves of the front and rear sides. - Do not twist the wire. - Do not touch the wire with your bare hand. * g1. Transfer / separation charger case and transfer / separation wire Clean the transfer / separation charger case and wires with a cloth soaked in water and squeezed tightly, and then wipe them with a dry cloth.

Notes: 1. Do not deform the metal plate of the pre-transfer guide. 2. Be careful of the following when attaching a new wire (length: 353 mm) - Insert the wire securely into the V-grooves of the front and rear sides. - Do not twist the wire. - Do not touch the wire with your bare hand. * h1. Drum cleaning blade Since the edge of the blade is vulnerable and can be easily damaged by factors such as the adherence of paper dust. Replace the cleaning blade with new ones if poor images are printed due to the damaged blade regardless of the number of output pages if which have been made.

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

4 - 23 04/05

h2.

Separation fingers for drum The paper jam may be caused if the tip of the separation finger is damaged or deformed. If there is any problem with it, replace the finger with a new one regardless of the number of output pages which have been made. If any mark which was made by the finger appears on the printed image, clean the tip of the finger.

Notes: 1. Wipe the tip of the finger lightly with a dry cloth trying not to deform it. Do not leave the lint on the tip. 2. Apply patting powder to the tip of the fingers and drum surface after replacing or cleaning them to reduce the load on the drum surface by the finger. * h3. Recovery blade Replace the recovery blade regardless the number of output pages if the edge of the blade get damaged. Developer material After replacing the developer material, be sure to perform the auto-toner adjustment. ( P. 3-1 "3.1 Adjustment of Auto-Toner Sensor") Oil seal (Developer unit) Mixer unit (Shafts of mixers-1 & -2) Developer sleeve (Rear side shaft)

j1.

j2.

4 pcs. 1 pc.

During replacement, coat the oil seal with grease (Alvanian No.2). (1) Push in a new oil seal parallel to the mounting hole section of the developer frame or outside of the nozzle mixer. * Pay attention to the direction in which the oil seal is attached. (See figure on right.) Apply an even coat of grease to the inside of the oil seal. Amount: About two small drops Wipe off any grease the exudes from the inside.
Developer frame (Nozzle mixer)

Outside

(2)

(3)

Inside

Grease

Oil seal

Fig. 4-21

k1.

Separation fingers for fuser roller and pressure roller The paper jam may be caused if the tip of the finger is damaged or deformed. If there is any problem with it, replace the finger with a new one regardless of the number of output pages which have been made. Do not damage the tip of the finger during the cleaning. The finger may be damaged if the toner adhering to the tip of it is scraped off forcibly. Replace the finger if the toner is sticking to it heavily.

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4 - 24 04/05

k2.

Thermistor Clean the thermistor with alcohol if the toner or dirt is sticking to it when the fuser roller is replaced. Do not deform or damage the thermistor during the cleaning. Replace the thermistor with a new one if it is damaged or deformed regardless of degree. Idling roller Apply one-rice-grain-amount of white grease (Molykote X5-6020) to each part A in the figure below.

o1.

Fig. 4-22

p1.

OCT separator roller Apply one-rice-grain-amount of FLOIL (GE-334C) to the part A in the figure below. Also apply three-rice-grain-amount of white grease (Molykote X5-6020) to each part B.

A
Fig. 4-23

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

4 - 25 04/05

*s1.Paper holder cam Apply an adequate amount of white grease (Molykote EM-30L) all around the paper holder cam.

Paper holder cam

Fig. 4-24

*s2.Buffer tray shaft Apply an adequate amount of white grease (Molykote EM-30L) to the entire buffer tray shaft.

Buffer tray shaft

Fig. 4-25

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4 - 26 06/01

*s3.Stapler carrier shaft Apply an adequate amount of white grease (Molykote EM-30L) to the entire stapler carrier shaft.

Stapler carrier shaft

4
Fig. 4-26

*s4.Rack gear, pinion gear (Aligning plate) *s5.Finishing tray shaft 1) Take off the metal shield plate. * If the hole punch unit is installed, take it off beforehand. 2) Apply oil as follows through the opening which shows up when the metal shield plate has been removed. Apply an adequate amount of white grease (Molykote EM-30L) to the gear teeth of the rack and pinion gears which drive the aligning plate, and the entire finishing tray shaft.
Finishing tray shaft

Rack gear

Pinion gear

Fig. 4-27

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

4 - 27 06/01

*s6.Movable tray drive gear Apply an adequate amount of white grease (Molykote EM-30L) to the gear teeth of the gear-A and gear-B.

Gear B

Gear A

Fig. 4-28

*s7.Buffer tray guide Apply an adequate amount of white grease (Molykote EM-30L) to the entire buffer tray guide (inside of the folded section of the plate).

Buffer tray guide

Fig. 4-29

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4 - 28 06/01

4.6

PM KIT
KIT name Component Drum cleaning blade Separation finger for drum Main charger grid Main charger wire Transfer charger wire Separation charger wire Ozone filter Developer material Part name BL-3520D SCRAPER-DRUM GRID-220 WIRE-CH-363 WEX-CH-060*353 WEX-CH-060*353 FILTER-OZ-SPB-700B D-3500 HR-3520-U HR-3520-L SCRAPER-H/R SHAFT-CLAN-P/R HR-3520-U-TWD HR-3520-L SCRAPER-H/R SHAFT-CLAN-P/R SPG-L-GND-TWD ROLLER-PICK-AT K-ROLL-FEED K-ROLL-PST ROLL-PICK-UP ROLL-PAPER-FED-F ROLL-PAPER-FED-S ROLL-PICK-UP ROLL-FEED ROL-SPT-513 Qty. 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 6 1 1 1 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

DEV-KIT-3520

FU-KIT-3520

Fuser roller Pressure roller Separation finger for fuser roller Cleaning roller

FU-KIT-3520T

Fuser roller Pressure roller Separation finger for fuser roller Cleaning roller Leaf spring

ROL-KIT-16CST

Pickup roller Feed roller Separation roller

ROL-KIT-1010

Pickup roller Feed roller Separation roller

DF-KIT-3015

Pickup roller Feed roller Separation roller

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

4 - 29 05/05

4.7

Jig List
Item Parts list Page 101 101 102 101 101 101 102 102 102 102 101 101 101 Item 1 4 1 9 5 2 7 2 3 4 5 3 8

Door switch jig Brush Downloading jig (DLM board) Wire holder jig Current measuring jig Jig detection connector Download JIG-2 (6 Flash ROMs) Download JIG-1 (2 Flash ROMs) ROM writer adapter (For 1881) ROM writer adapter (For 1931) Doctor-sleeve jig Blade releasing jig Developer material nozzle

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4 - 30 04/01

4.8

Grease List
Parts list Grease name Part name ASM-SILICONE-1M OIL-LAUNA40-100 ASM-PG-HP300-S GREASE-HP300-S ASM-PG-ALV2 MOLYKOTE-100 ASM-PG-GE334C-S GRS-KS660 Volume 100cc 100cc 100g 10g 100g 100g 20g 30g Container Page Item 10 11 12A 12B 13 14 15 16 Bottle Oiler Bottle Bottle Tube Tube Bottle Tube 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101

SI Silicon oil L Launa 40 W2 White grease (Molykote HP-300) W2 White grease (Molykote HP-300) AV Alvania No.2 W1 White grease (Molykote X5-6020) FL Floil (GE-334C) CG Conductive grease (KS-660)

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

4 - 31

4.9
4.9.1

Precautions for Storing and Handling Supplies


Precautions for storing TOSHIBA supplies

1) Toner/Developer Toner and developer should be stored in a place where the ambient temperature is between 10C to 35C (no condensation), and should also be protected against direct sunlight during transportation. 2) Photoconductive drum Like the toner and developer, photoconductive drum should be stored in a dark place where the ambient temperature is between 10C to 35C (no condensation). Be sure to avoid places where drums may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes. 3) Drum cleaning blade This item should be stored in a flat place where the ambient temperature is between 10C to 35C, and should also be protected against high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes. 4) Fuser roller Avoid places where the rollers may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes. 5) Cleaning roller Avoid places where the rollers may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes. They should also be stored horizontally on a flat surface. 6) Paper Avoid storing paper in places where it may be subjected to high humidity. After a package is opened, be sure to place and store it in a storage bag.

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4 - 32

4.9.2

Checking and cleaning of photoconductive drum

1) Use of gloves If fingerprints or oil adhere to the drum surface, the property of the photoconductive drum may degrade, affecting the quality of the print image. So, do not touch the drum surface with bare hands. 2) Handling precautions As the photoconductive drum surface is very sensitive, be sure to handle the drum carefully when installing and removing it so as not damage its surface. Be sure to apply patting powder (lubricant) to the entire surface of the drum (including both ends of the drum where OPC is not coated) when replacing the drum. Also, apply conductive grease (KS660) to the circumference of the drum shaft and the entire inner surface of the flange on the drum rear side, referring to the figures below. When the drum has been replaced with a new one, the drum counter (the Setting Mode 08-1150-0,3,6 and 7) must be cleared to 0 (zero). This clearing can be performed in the PM Support Mode.

10mm 7mm

Apply it to the circumference of this area

Apply it to the entire inner surface


Fig. 4-30 Fig. 4-31

Notes: 1. Application of the patting powder is for reducing the friction between the drum and cleaning blade. If the application of patting powder is neglected, the drum and cleaning blade may be damaged. 2. When paper fibers or dint adhere to the cleaning blade edge, they may reduce the cleaning efficiency and, in addition, may damage the blade and the drum. Be sure to remove any fibers found adhering to the blade. 3. When the cleaner unit has been assembled, wipe off the grease adhered on the head of the drum shaft with a piece of cloth. 3) Installation of the equipment and storage of drum Avoid installing the equipment where it may be subjected to high temperature, high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes. Do not place the light drum in a location where it is exposed to direct sunlight or high intensity light such as near a window. Otherwise the drum will fatigue, and will not produce sufficient image density immediately after being installed in the equipment. 4) Cleaning the drum At preventive maintenance calls, wipe the entire surface of the drum clean using the designated cleaning cotton. Use sufficiently thick cleaning cotton (dry soft pad) so as not to scratch the drum surface inadvertently with your fingertips or nails. Also, remove your rings and wristwatch before starting cleaning work to prevent accidental damage to the drum. Do not use alcohol, selenium refresher and other organic solvents or silicon oil as they will have an adverse effect on the drum.

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

4 - 33

5) Scratches on photoconductive drum surface If the surface is scratched in such a way that the aluminum substrate is exposed, no print image will be produced on this area. In addition, the cleaning blade will be damaged so replacement with a new drum will be necessary. 6) Collecting used photoconductive drums Regarding the recovery and disposal of used photoconductive drums, we recommend following the relevant local regulations or rules.

4.9.3

Checking and cleaning of drum cleaning blade

1) Handling precautions Pay attention to the following points as the cleaning blade life is determined by the condition of its edge: - Do not allow hard objects to hit or rub against blade edge. - Do not rub the edge with a cloth or soft pad. - Do not leave oil (or fingerprints, etc.) on the edge. - Do not apply solvents such as paint thinner to the blade. - Do not allow paper fibers or dirt to contact the blade edge. - Do not place the blade near a heat source. 2) Cleaning procedure Clean the blade edge with a cloth moistened with water and squeezed lightly.

4.9.4
(1)

Checking and cleaning of fuser roller and pressure roller

Handling precautions Fuser roller - Do not leave any oil (fingerprints, etc.) on the fuser roller. - Be careful not to allow any hard object to hit or rub against the fuser roller, or it may be damaged, possibly resulting in poor cleaning. Pressure roller - Do not leave any oil (fingerprints, etc.) on the pressure roller. Checking Check for stain and damage on the fuser and pressure rollers, and clean if necessary. Check the separation guide and fingers and check for chipped tips. Check the cleaning effect of the cleaning roller. Check the thermistors for proper contact with the pressure roller. Check the fused and fixed condition of the toner. Check the gap between the entrance guide and pressure roller. Check the fuser roller for proper rotation.

(2)

(3)

Cleaning procedure When fuser roller and pressure roller become dirty, they will cause jamming. If this happens, wipe the surface clean with a piece of suitable cloth. For easier cleaning, clean the roller white they are still warm. Note: Be careful not to rub the fuser roller and pressure roller surface with your nails or hard objects because it can be easily damaged. Do not use silicone oil on the fuser roller and pressure roller.

e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4 - 34

4.9.5
(1)

Checking and replacing the cleaning roller

Handling precautions Never allow solvents such as paint thinner to touch to the cleaning rollers. Poor cleaning and corrective treatment Judgment should be made depending on how much toner has been deposited on the pressure roller surface. When its surface is stained with toner, check the cleaning roller. If toner is heavily adhered on the cleaning roller, it means the clea